
Class 
Book. 







CopyrightN 



10 



COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. 











FIRST SITTING — SECOND SLATE. 
No. 3 — Hon. George Brown. 




FIRST SITTING— THIRD SLATE. 

No. 4— Stephen King, Author's Father. 

No. 5 — Hypatia, Chief Guide. 

No. 6— Wm. T. Stead. 




THE AUTHOR— JOHN S. KING, M. D. 
(At the Age of 70 Years) 



DAWN OF THE 

AWAKENED 

MIND 



BY 

JOHN S. KING, M.D. 

Founder and President of the Canadian Society for Psychical 
Research for the eight years of its existence 



NEW YORK 
THE JAMES A. McCANN COMPANY 

1920 






tf v 



Copyright, 1920, by 
JAMES POOLE 



Mi\ 



v \ a 1^20 



©CU565952 



TO THOSE WHO SEE AND KNOW THE TRUTH, AND SUFFER 
FOR ITS SAKE, THIS BOOK IS DEDICATED BY THE AUTHOR. 



"MY SON, BE THOU OF THOSE WHO SEEK AND FIND THE 
WONDERS OF THE AWAKENED MIND. I, THY GUIDE, 
HYPATIA, OFTEN CALLED MOST WISE OF WOMANKIND, LEAD 
THEE IN WHAT YOU NOW ENDEAVOR TO DO. I LEAD YOU 
AND I FOLLOW YOU; OR I DO ALL I CAN TO BE AN AIDER 
AND A GUIDE; AND EVEN ROYALTY MUST BOW TO THOSE 
WHO SOLVE THIS PROBLEM." 

HYPATIA. 



'FACE THOU A LION, AND IT COWERS BEFORE THE POWER 
OF MIND; SO THY ENEMIES SO COWER, BEFORE THY FACE 
OF HONEST POWER TO PROVE THAT IT IS TRUE, THAT I — 
MAY KING — MAY COME TO YOU." 

MAY. 



"I AM WITH THEE ALWAYS, AND FROM THY BIRTH I FOL- 
LOWED THEE; AND AT THE SEANCE OF MRS. MOSS I SHOWED 
MY FACE TO THEE. MY FORM MATERIALIZED WILL SHOW 
TO THEE AGAIN. MY WHOLE WISH IS TO HAVE THIS BOOK 
SUCCESSFUL IN EVERY DEGREE. IT IS MY SOUL WISH THAT 
IT BLOSSOM FORTH FROM EAST TO WEST, FROM SOUTH TO 
NORTH, UNTIL ALL THINKING MEN SHALL SAY, THIS IS 
THE TRUTH THIS MAN DOES SAY.' " 

EGYPTIA, 



'HORATIO, AT THE BRIDGE ARE YOU. AND NOT ANOTHER 
MAN MAY COME ACROSS THE NARROW SPAN." 

ELECTRA. 



"MEN ARE AS GROWING PLANTS, AND EVERY WIND THAT 
BLOWS MAY BRING TO ONE A BENEFIT THAT LAY ANOTHER 
LOW. THIS BOOK YOU WRITE IS WATER PURE AND GOOD, 
AND MANY HUNGRY MINDS THERE BE THAT GRASP ITS 
TREASURES HUNGRILY; AND OVER ALL LANDS OF LIGHT OR 
ENLIGHTENMENT, THIS BOOK WILL SHINE A TORCH FROM 
GOD, WHERE EACH MAY LIGHT HIS FLARING LAMP ANEW, 
AND SPEND DECLINING YEARS IN BLESSING YOU WHO HAVE 
SHOWN THEM THE TRUTH OF HEAVEN'S DOOR; AND THAT 
THEY HAVE THE POWER TO MEET THEIR FRIENDS ONCE 
MORE." 

ASIA (Of the ancient people lost in the present age). 



- PREFACE 

IT WAS in truth the "Dawn of the Awakened Mind" to me, 
when I first received and realized the truth, made known 
and proved to me through psychic revelations. 

The Testaments, both Old and New, contain much recorded 
evidence of spirit return and communication; and of numerous 
psychical phenomena, not miraculous, but as spirits themselves 
demonstrate and tell us, under the operation of natural laws, not 
yet fully understood. But as natural law may and does repeat 
itself today, why argue against the possibility of psychical 
phenomena? Surely no grander truth could ever be established 
by proofs, than communication between the two worlds. Beliefs 
are mostly hereditary, and may be right, or may sometimes be 
wrong, as I have illustrated in Chapter X. 

So I reasoned, and* determined to investigate; and in this book 
are recorded a few of the results among many hundreds I have 
had in the way of experiences, and evidences obtained in my 
devious, intricate and I may add unpopular pathway of psychical 
research, consuming a period of about twenty-five years. Like 
an explorer in an unknown country, without mortal guide; and 
fully realizing various dangers, and possibilities of attack by 
certain claimants of the territory, I followed no beaten path of 
investigation to reach the truth. Having a mental compass of 
impression or intuition pointing steadily in one direction, I trav- 
elled on my solitary way, ever hoping to reach the destination 
which I strove to attain, examining here and there at long or 
short intervals and minutely, what to me was new, or evidential 
of communication between the two worlds. 

I found — by extensive travelling in quest of psychics, by 
patience, perseverance, and constant thoughtful and careful in- 
vestigation, regardless of opinions, criticism, time or expense — 
that with each psychic my experience varied. I found individual 
psychics different from others in their phases, and differences 
between those of the same phase of mediumship, in distantly sep- 

xvii 



xviii PREFACE 

arated places, at any time I visited them. Some of them were 
as widely different in their modus operandi as is found to be 
the case with man's invented instruments for transmitting 
messages, in the forms of telegrams, marconigrams, phonograms, 
and other devices, through each of which when the message came, 
I could gather thought expressions of certain personalities, of 
the intelligences using the psychic; and found coming through 
these different channels, varied expressions physical, mental and 
psychical in character, voices from visible and invisible intel- 
ligences, automatic writing and talking, yet intellectual and con- 
sistent throughout the conversation in each case, yet collated them 
into definite compilation of thought expressions, which had origin 
of different phase, until the corroborations became so wonderful, 
and so convincing, that my mind seemed to be washed clear of 
all uncertainty; and truths flashed upon my consciousness and 
attached themselves to me as knowledge my own. 

In psychical seances I sometimes employed professional stenog- 
raphers to make exact records for me; and such records were 
sworn to by them as correct, as will hereafter appear ; while scores 
of intelligent sitters have shared with me some of these wonderful 
seances ; and were willing when called upon to swear to the truth 
of the records of what several on each occasion, in different 
seances saw and heard, in conjunction one with another. 

Mortals have various devices for intercommunicating which I 
have referred to, and none will presume to deny their existence, 
for they are employed day by day, all the time, throughout the 
so-called civilized nations of the world, and every section of their 
people. They are employed to encourage acquisition of knowledge, 
record the world's progress, facilitate business, engender fellow- 
ship, and are utilized to promote the interests of each and all. 

On going to the spirit world, our loved ones and friends leave 
behind them all they possessed of the physical, and like the mortal, 
they claim to have yearnings for their earth loves, as have mortals 
for them ; and like mortals they try to discover or design a means 
of communicating. 

This little earth of ours, among the stars of God's great 
universe, contains as compared with it, but few souls; while in 



PREFACE xix 

the realms beyond, or "Over There," are countless myriads of 
spirits, once embodied as are present mortals but now free. Surely 
they have succeeded in finding but a few, among the many millions 
of mortal beings who contain in their make-up, a peculiar psychic 
element, while their body and mind are but the channels through 
which the element operates, as does electricity in the wire, and 
power in the wavelets or vibrations we utilize; and the spirit 
intelligence, through the, to us, unseen power speaks, writes, or 
demonstrates, to convey to us their thoughts ; and who thus can, 
and do commune with us, in our presence, when conditions, not 
yet made plain, are favorable. 

I may here premise for your guidance, that you can no more 
reach a correct conclusion as to what the book proves, by picking 
out sentences, or even chapters isolated here and there, and thus 
prejudge, than a youth at college, who will assuredly fail to solve 
a problem in the third book of Euclid, before having first suc- 
ceeded in solving those in books one and two. 

It will prove more satisfactory, therefore, to peruse each page 
carefully as you find it, in order of its number, and long before 
you have finished, you will realize it embraces a cobweb of corre- 
lated and corroborative evidence. Propositions, predictions or 
promises made through a psychic of one phase, at a given time 
and place, may be answered or fulfilled through another psychic 
of a different phase, at a different date and place absolutely in 
some instances continuing a prior conversation, or making a 
promised demonstration, for no medium can truthfully claim to 
be the only avenue of communication for our spirit friend, or 
friends. Such attitude suggests ignorance of facts, or the alter- 
native, jealousy of other psychics. Spirit friends say they are 
constantly seeking open doors, through which to commune with 
mortals ; and use psychics irrespective of their sex, age, character, 
nationality or sphere in the mortal life, through whom to commune 
with those they desire to reach. This I have found to be very 
frequently true, as the reader will observe in different chapters. 
So also, do not allow your bias of former, or existing belief, to 
influence your investigations. This is the best course to follow 
when in pursuit of truth. I did not assume the attitude of 



xx PREFACE 

"seeking, hoping not to find/' for that very attitude creates a 
barrier by disturbing harmony, obstructs one's pathway of 
progress, and dims the dawning light, which might otherwise 
enlighten the understanding, and enable the investigator to grasp 
the truth, as a golden nugget of absolute knowledge, his own. 

One enigma which frequently presents for solution is to prove 
the spirit's human personality; and this requires the exercise of 
tact to accomplish, to one's own satisfaction, at the same time 
avoiding the presentation of a clue, or suggestion, which the 
spirit, or the medium, might discern, and consciously or uncon- 
sciously utilize in framing a response to our question or wish. 

In many instances of written messages spirits alleging them- 
selves to be ancient, or modern, strangers or former friends, or 
relatives, it would at the time appear difficult to accept their state- 
ments as those from their asserted personalities, yet some of them 
have later returned to me several times at seances held by mediums 
of other phases; and in various ways have established their 
identity as the one who came at the original seance, or first com- 
municated. The reader will readily understand that in any event 
a psychical researcher's detailed records attain to such voluminous 
proportions as to render it practically impossible to publish them 
in their entirety, for general reading. 

It appears to be a fact that some spirits have but a rare oppor- 
tunity to use a psychic; and when such opportunity presents, 
readily embrace it, even when the sitter is unknown to it ; and in 
answer to the question, "Who is speaking now ?" replies, "It 
matters not, you never knew me, I do this as an experiment now 
that I have the opportunity." Or some similar reply. So too spirits 
humorously inclined, seek to promote good feeling, and secure 
harmony, by language inducing laughter ; or by singing something 
familiar, to aid in producing harmonious conditions. 

The limitations of my records as presented in the present 
volume, are to the very few selected physical, mental and automatic 
mediums, though I have interviewed many scores of psychics, and 
have attended many hundreds of seances. The reason for this 
selection is that in each case I have repeatedly and critically 
observed them, and studied their occult demonstrations for years, 



PREFACE xxi 

one at intervals for eighteen years, and the others for at least eight 
years each; and by such course had my assurance on the one 
hand, against fraud or deception; and on the other, a more 
experienced, and therefore a more perfect accuracy of attainment 
of detailed observation; and probably a more skilled detection of 
idiosyncrasies, or that of hypnotic, hysterical, perverted or dis- 
ordered mind conditions, than I could have had if I divided my 
investigations among the many psychics, and the numerous phases. 

My conclusions were that there is more advantage in constant 
and consecutive observation, with changes in mode or degree of 
investigation, than in alternate or disconnected order, and un- 
expected at times, thus disconcerting possible premeditations. 

Psychics or mediums, like other people, greatly differ in their 
capabilities and attainments; and like pupils are instructed or 
trained, but unconsciously (through the subjective self) by differ- 
ent spirit teachers, and controls, whose purposes and modes 
widely vary, as does the character of the attainment of the vehicle 
or instrument (the medium) ; and the mode of attunement 
employed, before the communicating spirit can demonstrate 
through or in the presence of the psychic. Results at times are 
most peculiar. I have conversed with the alleged controls of 
these mediums many times through their own instrument as well 
as through psychics of other phases, such as voicing through 
trumpets, and talking with their own vocal organs when material- 
ized ; and have received explanations, and other valued informa- 
tion, some of which is noted here and there in different chapters. 
One example I may give here in the case of the automatic writing 
and rhyming psychic, who from the first was an unwilling instru- 
ment ; and was made to suffer mental punishment, yet by her spirit 
control is still compelled to translate spirit messages in a rhyming 
manner (as set forth in the chapter devoted to herself), though 
truthfully conveying the thoughts of the spirit communicating. 
This constitutes a veto to absolute independence of the subjective 
mind, and at the same time preserves the objective mind in full 
normality, and thus protects the reasoning faculty. 

In the very few cases selected from among the many for critical 
study, they were representative among the available psychics of 



xxii PREFACE 

their class, in America at least. I feel, therefore, after com- 
pleting my critical study of them, that it is due to not only the 
readers of the results obtained through these psychics, but to 
the psychics themselves, to here give credit due, and say I have 
generally had entire satisfaction with their honesty; and found 
them as instruments void of both conscious and unconscious 
fraud; and do so the more freely as I am under no obligation 
to favor them, not even in slight degree. 

In addition to the records already indicated, chapters are inter- 
spersed containing further features of physical phenomena, in- 
cluding the phase of materialization in the presence of a conscious 
medium, where the spirit visitors produce their own light, illum- 
inating themselves in a previously darkened room. Clairvoyance 
and Clairaudience are briefly dealt with. There is a chapter on 
Hypnotic-psychic-phenomena; and one chiefly devoted to a crit- 
icism of "The Mind Hypothesis." Conditions in relation to 
results are also dealt with; and the conclusion of my argument 
on the evidence submitted. 

Fearless of either public or personal opinion, and with every 
regard for the sacred privilege accorded all, of individual faith 
and belief, I began my work. Nothing will be found throughout 
the volume which to any degree, either by direct statement or by 
innuendo, attacks any man's church, religious belief, creed 
or philosophy, the State's power or authority, or the collective 
community. My resolve, from first to last, has been, irrespective 
of beliefs, and with an open mind, to "seek, prove and declare 
the truth." 

In presenting my acquired experiences, evidences and knowl- 
edge, I do so in a narrative or descriptive style, suited to the 
general reader, hoping that what the book's pages contain, may 
to some extent at least, render the task of investigating easier; 
and thus aid other belated investigators to attain to a positive 
knowledge, infinitely more self-satisfying, and more valuable, 
than any belief not so founded. 

I reached my final conclusions, and first made them public 
verbally, in my "pronunciamento" on April 26, 1913, at Toronto, 
Canada ; and now in 1920, publish them to the world. 



CONTENTS 

Chapter I 1 

Introduction to Psychical Research. The author's earlier atti- 
tude towards it. His estimate of its importance. The legitimacy 
of Psychical Research. 

Chapter II 6 

First experience with the occult. A Washington, D. C, seance. 
The author's introducer — Dr. B. L. W. Theodor Hansmann, a 
nonagenarian at his passing to spirit realms. The medium Mary 
A. Keeler. 

Chapter III ... . 9 

A second experience with the occult. The Erne Moss Series of 
Seances, held at the MacRoberts' home in London, Ontario. Inter- 
viewing the medium; and critically examining the cabinet and 
room. 

Chapter IV 14 

Strange psychical phenomena. First of the Moss Series of 
seances. Materialized human forms appear. Seven recorded 
cases. First evidential matter. Author's mother proves her 
human personality. Dr. King's alleged guardian-spirit Egyptia 
rises out of carpet, a pace from him. 

Chapter V 23 

Varied phenomena presenting. Author's father appears. More 
evidence of personality, by matters physical as well as words — 
Credibility of testimony — Absent critics. Disturbing element 
breaks up seance. 

Chapter VI 27 

Third and concluding seance. New psychical phenomena. 
Synopsis of recorded presentations. More circumstantial evidence. 
The author's mother, as was her will in life, takes his right arm ; 
and thus walks to and talks with every sitter. She is recognized 
by an old-time friend. A spirit teacher — Egyptia, the alleged 
guardian-spirit, again appears. A special occult seance. 

Chapter VII 33 

What hypothesis best accounts for the phenomena? Oppor- 
tunity and conditions: Work of research. Review of evidence. 
Comments of Author on results obtained. 

Chapter VIII 37 

Trans-Atlantic spiritistic communication. First experiment. 
Important evidential matter. Transmitter the author in Toronto, 
the receiver W. T. Stead in London, England. The Herald 
Hypatia. Second experiment — The third experiment between 
Toronto and Toledo a perfect success. 

xxiii 



xxiv CONTENTS 

Chapter IX 47 

Hypnosis and some of its psychical phenomena. Why consid- 
ered in this connection. Extracts from a talk given before the 
members of the Canadian Society for Psychical Research, by 
their President. 

Chapter X 54 

The author's firm attitude on psychical research — Charged 
with obliquity at the start. Integrity of motive. Consistency of 
endeavor. Hypnotic experience an incentive. Investigation 
justified by results. Knowledge versus beliefs. 

Chapter XI 66 

Relationship between conditions and results. Natural Law is 
Universal Spirit's Fiat. Psychic forces require special conditions 
for occult demonstrations. 

Chapter XII 73 

The key that unlocked the mystery. The ante-mortem agree- 
ment between Author and wife. Conditions that favored psychic 
results. A general understanding as to evidential matter. 

Chapter XIII 80 

The November, 1911, Series of Seances. First of series, a 
trumpet seance. Medium Mrs. Etta Wriedt. Author and medium 
first met in a Moss Seance in 1894. May's ante-mortem promise 
fulfilled on the first opportunity. She talked with her husband 
through the trumpet. 

Chapter XIV 87 

The November, 1911, Series of Seances. Second of series, a 
trumpet seance. "May" again holds converse with her husband. 
He tests her with successful results. He solicits information. 
Spirit of MacRoberts calls on him. 

Chapter XV 92 

The November, 1911, Series of Seances. Third of series. First 
materializing seance. Medium J. B. Jonson. Examining the 
cabinet. Wife again fulfills her promise to husband. An infant 
baby brother materializes as a man. Also spirit baby daughter 
comes back as a young woman. A Toronto man comes back. 
Direct evidence multiplies. Predictions made, by more than one, 
on different days, are fulfilled at Jonson's. 

Chapter XVI 102 

The November, 1911, Series of Seances. Fourth of Series. 
Second materializing seance at J. B. Jonson's. The Sunflower 
private class, and Guide Celeste. Author present by invitation. 
An important seance. Promises of Spirit Guide Hypatia, Spirit 
wife "May," and spirit daughter "May Donna," as well as Dr. 
Sharp all fulfilled. The official stenographer's sworn record of 
nineteen manifestations. Direct evidence accumulating. Wonder- 
ful demonstrations and testimony. 



CONTENTS xxv 

Chapter XVII 112 

The November, 1911, Series of Seances. Fifth of Series. 
Third materializing seance, at J. B. Jonson's. The seance a public 
one. The speechless man returns and talks. "May" and "May 
Donna" come again. An alleged ancient guide of author. Auto- 
biography of Jonson, and his photo. 



Chapter XVIII 117 

The November, 1911, Series of Seances. Sixth of Series. 
Third Etta Wriedt Trumpet Seance. A circle of seven. Acknowl- 
edged fulfillment of Dr. Sharp's promise. He materialized for 
author and wife in 1910. Gray Feather, Jonson's Control, calls. 
Two spirits sing for sitters. Asia, an alleged ancient spirit guide, 
speaks. Maggie Gaul's cabinet guide Pansy entertains sitters. 
The telepathic and mind-reading 'hypotheses analyzed. 



Chapter XIX 133 

The November, 1911, Series of Seances. Seventh and last of 
series. Fourth Etta Wriedt trumpet seance. The author is the 
single sitter. Guides and loved ones there. Family and personal 
affairs discussed. Later corroborative evidence reported by 
friends. 



Chapter XX 140 

Continuity of life proclaimed as proven. Communication be- 
tween earth and spirit realms maintained. The problem solved 
by aid of Author's wife. Strong evidence submitted. The 
Author's argument presented. These claims sustained as truth. 



Chapter XXI . . ; t .».-*»#» t , , .... 153 
"The Human-Psychic-Telephone," with automatic action, in- 
cluding movement, writing, speech. Her objective and subjective 
minds have a general independent action. A mental curiosity. 
Sketch of her psychic power. Resemblance to public 'phone. 
The Author's conclusions. 



Chapter XXII 166 

Hypatia, the Neoplatonic Philosopher. Daughter of Theon. 
Alleged Spirit Guide of the Author. Has proved to be a great 
Teacher. This book her own suggestion. She aided in securing 
evidence for it. She brought relatives, friends, strangers, seers, 
philosophers and researchers to commune with the Author. She 
spent hours at a time in answering his questions. Fulfilled her 
promise to aid him to secure her spirit portrait. She wrote 
through "The Human-Psychic-Telephone," and other automatic 
writers. Also spoke through trumpets. Has held converse with 
the Author, and with other people while present in her transient 
body. 



xxvi CONTENTS 

Chapter XXIII 185 

Hypatia establishes her claim to having been the Neoplatonic 
Philosopher; and the Author's spirit teacher, aider and guide. 
She communed with him regarding mind and soul or spirit, and 
their relation to Deity. She likewise outlined her philosophy, 
and the tenets of her creed, and what she had taught the people. 
She dealt also with psychic phenomena in the seance room ; and 
concluded with a brief autobiography, and reference to her 
martyrdom. The answers to questions submitted and some state- 
ments added, were transmitted by speaking them into the tele- 
phone receiver, the subjective mind of the instrument, which 
controlled the automatic hand to reproduce them in writing. The 
instrument named as "The Human-Psychic-Telephone." 

Chapter XXIV 209 

Practical psychology of profound interest. Alleged spirits of 
Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle gave immediate answer to each 
question which the author proposed. They defined composition, 
form and attributes of soul — and the relation of the human 
Ego to Deity. Otelleo, an Ancient Egyptian, at the close of the 
interview complimented the Author on the quality of his work. 

Chapter XXV 224 

The April, 1912, Series of Seances, with J. B. Jonson. The 
first a public one. Jonson sits out in the circle. Many forms 
come to sitters. The Author's Spirit wife and daughter material- 
ize and talk with him. Hypatia, advanced spirit, wise and 
beautiful, walks into the room and greets the sitters. Dr. Sharp, 
the Control of Mrs. Wriedt, the trumpet medium, calls and 
greets the author. 

Chapter XXVI 234 

The April, 1912, Series of Seances, with J. B. Jonson. Second 
seance, seven sitters besides Jonson and his wife. All sitters 
have good results. The Author's Spirit wife and daughter, and 
also father present. Strong evidential matter. 

Chapter XXVII 238 

The April, 1912, Series of Seances, with J. B. Jonson. Third 
seance, twelve sitters present. Eight spirit forms come to the 
Author. He hands his loved ones roses. A boy unrecognized, 
who could not speak, appeared to him. Hill received written 
message and promised answer, if possible. 

Chapter XXVIII 242 

The April, 1912, Series of Seances, with J. B. Jonson. Fourth 
seance the concluding one, and marked by special features. 
Demonstrations most convincing. The Author's daughter fulfills 
a promise. She walks into the circle and most sweetly sings. 
Seance concludes with a grand surprise by Wm. T. Stead, Cor- 
roborative testimony. 



CONTENTS xxvii 

Chapter XXIX 250 

Author's wife the key that unlocked the mystery. She fulfilled 
her ante-mortem promise. Also post-mortem one to write a 
chapter. In doing so proves her human personality. And up- 
holds life's continuity. Proves spirits return and commune with 
mortals. A wonderful production through "The Human-Psychic- 
Telephone," of rhyming tendency. 



Chapter XXX 255 

Does the spirit of Wm. T. Stead commune with the Author: 
By automatic psychic's written messages? By independent writ- 
ing on slates ? By speaking through trumpets ? By talking through 
trance mediums? By dictating? Through clairaudients ? And 
by talking with the vocal organs of his transient body, a duplicate 
of his earthly body expression, all of which claim to be him? 
Look at the picture of him, as he first came and materialized at 
the Jonson seance — and was reproduced, nine days later, on 
canvas, by spirit artist Rembrandt, aided by Hermes, ruler of 
the power of levitation. Stead's claim of, and comment on, the 
picture. Does not all the varied evidence sustain the claim? 
Several spirits confirm it. 



Chapter XXXI . ... 275 

An evidential chapter of strong testimony. 

A long list of volunteer witnesses. 

Evidence for truth of life's continuity, 

Return and communication, in perpetuity. 

Are not my loved ones, who have proved to me, 

And my spirit guides, and others near, 

Including noted ones who no longer fear, 

Bringing to mankind good cheer? 

Are not work and book endorsed by them, 

As coming from the spirit sphere? 

The evidence bids strong for coming change, 

From base desire, and sordid greeds, 

From selfish wants, and warring creeds, 

To waking minds to truth, and human needs. 

From war, distrust, unrighteousness, 

To peace with knowledge, and pure happiness, 

To trust in God's own fatherhood, 

To faith in man's true brotherhood; 

When all humanity will know and realize, 

Immortal life awaits them in the skies. 



Chapter XXXII 343 

Trumpet Seances at Mrs. Etta Wriedt's. Four in December, 
1912, series. Spirit voices, Light and Power. A few of the many 
features. Very strong and confirmatory evidence. What spirit 
power can bring about. Fulfillment of a spirit's prophecy. 



xxviii CONTENTS 

Chapter XXXIII 354 

Two seances for materialization at Jonson's on 23rd and 26th 
December, 1912, of evidential character. An extraordinary 
materializing seance December 24th, with a private lady psychic 
in conscious state. No artificial light used. Spirit callers 
illuminate the room during their presence. They approach and 
depart regardless of walls, floor and ceiling, some quickly, some 
slowly. About a score conversed with the Author. Demonstra- 
tions were both strong and new. A clairaudient doctor writes. 
Evidential matter as he hears the spoken words. 

Chapter XXXIV 368 

Psychical Research Records ending with the year 1912. Inter- 
esting seances with the Human-Psychic-Telephone. Alleged 
communings with Professor James, Frederick Myers, Hon. 
George Brown, Wm. T. Stead, Queen Victoria, King Solomon, 
and others. Clegg Wright, once famous medium, explained the 
difference between unconscious trance state, and conscious 
knowledge of the spirit, when it withdraws from the body. 

Chapter XXXV 385 

Conclusion of evidence. Author's argument. Knowledge 
gained from spirit. Spirit definition of the only God. New 
Era is approaching. Minds of men are awakening. Mind 
functioning in hypnotic state. Astral flights. Hypatia suggested 
this book; also its title, contributed much to it, and wrote its 
concluding sentences. 

Addenda ....... ■ t 423 

Details of the Author's unparalleled experiences. Accom- 
plished by the co-operation of Hypatia. The evidence of inde- 
pendent writing on the slates, reproduced in the book by photo- 
engraving process. The writers claim the writing as their own, 
as well as the signatures. 



ILLUSTRATIONS 

The Author, at the age of 70 Frontispiece 

Symbolical Picture and Pronunciamento .... Opposite Page iv 
Author's Wife, "The Key That Unlocked the 

Mystery" " " 74 

J. B. Jonson, Materializing Medium "114 

Miss M. V. Gates, The "Human-Psychic- 
Telephone" " "156 

Hypatia, The Neoplatonic Philosopher " 166 

Slate Writing No. 1 " " 180 

Slate Writing No. 2 " " 182 . 

William T. Stead " "256 

The Author, at the age of 65 " " 274 

The Author, at the age of 60 " " 274 

Slate Writing — First Sitting — Second Slate " " 434 

Third " " " 434 . 

Fourth " " " 434 

Fifth " " " 434 

First " " " 438 

Second " " " 438 

Third " " " 438 



l( tt it it 

Fourth " 

a a it tt Fifth " " 

Second " First 

" ft " " C 1 tt 

tt tt 

Third " Second " " 444 

Third " " " 444 

tt tt tt a TT^„^4.l, tt tt tt 



Fourth " " " 444 



XXIX 



CHAPTER I 

IN another place I will deal with the attitude of the public 
toward Psychical Research, and the many barriers to sur- 
mount in the very best endeavor to obtain a vantage 
ground. I ask, in all sincerity and in a spirit of humility, the 
reader to approach with an open mind what is offered in this 
book, as being at least worthy of earnest consideration, by the 
ablest and most fairminded thinkers, who can engage them- 
selves to enter upon such consideration without bias, preju- 
dice, or distrust of misrepresentation. I do not hesitate to say 
that almost universally there is strong objection raised by the 
individualized public against being asked to admit that they 
have witnessed occult phenomena; or that they can believe in 
the possibility of its existence; and apparently are in great 
fear of being classified as unorthodox. In the case of most of 
the more important phenomena to which I allude, there are 
many living witnesses to confirm what is recorded herein, as 
having well demonstrated existence. I have yet to add to the 
foregoing, that the earliest record, which with the preceding 
declaration oi my attitude, as herewith follows, was constructed 
and entered as a record, in the year 1894. The record of occur- 
rences and phenomena was made in each instance, immediately 
after each seance, from notes taken during the seance ; and is 
the plain unvarnished narrative of an earnest truth seeker, 
who attended the seances, individual and collective, with art 
open mind, determined at all hazards to make a truthful 
record. 

I am free to state that from the hour of my birth, and 
through the subsequent years of life spent upon this mundane 
sphere, I have been blessed with good mental and physical 
health, with two or three brief exceptions ; and since my early 
boyhood days have lived a life of self-dependence; have had 
a reasonably successful career; have endeavored to make 
the best use of my opportunities; and unaided, financially at 

1 



2 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

least, obtained for myself an education as a professional man ; 
and I believe a fair status as a citizen. 

This much I state, not to any extent in an egotistical spirit, 
but with a view to support the claim that I have at least a 
fair share of common sense, intelligence, and discernment; 
and am not more liable to be deceived than the average intel- 
ligent man. I have never professed, nor laid claim in a re- 
ligious sense, to being very devout or holy; but have always 
entertained a respectful, though not unquestioning attitude 
toward the orthodoxies of the church in which I was reared 
(Presbyterian). I have never recognized any inclination to 
materialism ; but on the contrary have always cherished the 
conviction, almost as an intuition, that the few short years of 
physical existence on this terrestrial sphere, varied with its 
trials, and temptations, joys and sorrows, successes and fail- 
ures, growth and decay, were but an incident, in the continued 
existence of the individual creation called man ; and that an 
All-powerful, All-seeing, everywhere present, All-wise Intelli- 
gence, and Infinite Power and Governor of the universe — of 
which this earth is but an infinitesimal speck, in a boundless 
expanse of worlds, of planetary systems, and of space — had a 
system of development with a purpose, by which mankind was 
to attain to higher intelligence, nobler conditions of being, and 
purer realms of existence. The earnest orthodoxical exposi- 
tions of heaven and hell; and the familiar pulpit references to 
man as a body, soul, and spirit, destined either for eternal 
happiness or eternal misery, with deviations at the starting 
point in earth life not discernible by human judges while in- 
teresting, fell far short of being to me at least, perfectly lucid 
and satisfactory. 

"Constant and persistent assertion naturally has a tendency to 
create conviction; and conviction crystallized becomes belief. 
Belief is not necessarily knowledge, though many assume that 
it is. How can we reconcile the many religious beliefs, though 
we may be prepared to admit the sincerity of the many believers ? 
Not only is there diversity of belief, but equal diversity in the 
intensity of belief; and does not intensity of belief develop 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 3 

bigotry, and bigotry result in illiberality, misrepresentation, and 
even persecution? The man who ventures an opinion at variance 
with popular belief is placed in the category of antagonists of 
truth, though he may be much nearer the truth than those who 
uncharitably judge him. Christ, according to testamentary evi- 
dence, was persecuted by the priesthood and people because he 
taught that which was different from their cherished orthodoxies 
and beliefs."* 

Who is more to be pitied than the reverend minister or priest 
(whose designation means entitled to reverence, which latter 
means fear mingled with respect and affection) who is so 
egotistical in his belief, and at the* same time uncharitable, that 
he presumes to pass condemnation upon his fellow man who 
differs from that belief ; and withal so Pharisaical, as he thanks 
God he is not the dupe his neighbor is? And what must be said 
of those who blindly adopt a belief, the result of circumstantial 
surroundings, or hereditary family belief, or by an assertion oft 
repeated, yet deny others the attainment of a satisfactory knowl- 
edge, from careful and continued study and investigation? 

"Most men by education are misled; 

They so believe because they are so bred. 
The priest continues what the nurse began, 
And so the child imposes on the man." 

Have we not been taught from childhood up that he who 
preaches and teaches from the orthodox pulpit is a minister or 
ambassador from God, or, as some say, "called of God" to teach 
and preach the truth, and we must not question it? Orthodoxy 
asks us to have faith and believe. It demands acceptance of the 
statements by faith and belief, and promises salvation ; or doubt, 
and it promises damnation. 

In business, men exercise what is known as "common sense." 
Why should not man exercise common sense in other matters, 
such as belief? Why shut their eyes to self-evident truth? Will 
it be denied that mankind of today knows, or ought to know more 
of the Infinite Spirit or Universal Spirit God, the fount of creation 

*The above portion included in quotation marks has had previous pub- 
licity but was nevertheless strictly a portion of the original writing, connected 
with my psychic records. 



4 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

and of all spirit power, and of His laws, and their operation, than 
was known in bygone centuries? If they do not, is it not a sad 
reflection, not only upon man's development and intelligence, but 
also upon the teachers and priests who claim to be "chosen of 
God" to enlighten His people? Humanity appears at all times to 
be hungry for information and knowledge ; and naturally selfish 
as to its being advantageous to the individual self. It is because 
of inquiring, examining, and analyzing minds that fresh knowl- 
edge is being gained from century to century, from year to year, 
and from day to day; as appertains to all things mundane in 
character, as well as to the invisible forces, physical and spiritual ; 
and who will deny that mankind is the gainer thereby ? In things 
material and physical, investigation seems to antedate discovery; 
and discovery antedates utilization. This order seems to meet 
with general approbation or commendation. Is not the spiritual 
part of man paramount in interest to the physical ? And if so are 
not all men warranted in seeking further Spiritual Knowledge? 
Did not Job (in Chapter XIV, Verse XIV) ask, "If a man die 
shall he live again?" It is a question which has doubtless sug- 
gested itself to the mind of nearly every individual member of 
the human race. It would appear not inconsistent that to pursue 
the study of life one must not stop with the death of the physical 
part of man, but follow after the spirit. The beginning and the 
ending of physical life, whether animal or vegetable, is but a 
change of elements in arrangement or in composition. The body 
returns to dust or its elements, while the spirit returns to the 
kingdom of spirit, from which it originally came. Eternal natural 
law rules the universe. 

I am in accord with the declaration that we have no right to 
question or deny the existence of anything, or any condition, if 
we cannot disprove it. Actuated by this conviction, and feeling 
deeply interested in some features of psychical investigation, I 
have during the past few years become an investigator of the 
critical kind known as a psychical researcher; and lately found 
myself in contact with some new occult force, as mysterious as it 
was interesting. Of psychic or occult phenomena, though I have 
but recent knowledge, and as that knowledge is so new, so sur- 




fc > »V*^,-^vu^^ti) A*U> ~6ee*l, <X*v«4- At-iM- '/-^'Sa&TcA 
lxlii>v*Au (14* "t *»^ /3^trn-«^«^^*-t4-e*i^o a^O H£Jiam* 
lh&f£lL*Xo J>*jusui*4JL, ^h^^jcUA- <Hv ^a-ev/? . W 

jprd*y A2**4, -^rueA- 0***^- acn^o^M^f-cU *>+?&■ <**uz~i*i 



to ^tW 
(MLa^ #~A> ^fuat AJl£^k««HUa^l ***««.*«• 




Symbolical of 
"DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND' 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 5 

prising, so convincing, and yet so entirely confirmatory of the 
intuitions and convictions of my boyhood life, I ask the reader 
to withhold judgment until I have narrated in detail the precau- 
tions taken, conditions found, and environments existing together 
with a description and analysis of a few of the phenomena; and 
until he or she adopts an hypothesis which can withstand all 
criticism, as accounting satisfactorily for the production of the 
phenomena now most generally classified as psychic or occult in 
character. 



CHAPTER II 

ALL things have their beginnings, even the great city of 
Washington, D. C. As the Capital of the United States 
of America it has long been a centre of interest; and 
that interest has chiefly been owing to its official character. How- 
ever, it fell to my lot to visit that city for the first time in the 
year 1894 and in the early part of the month of September of 
that year. On that occasion I was brought into contact with Dr. 
B. L. W. Theodor Hansmann, who had at one time been not only a 
medical adviser to the late President Abraham Lincoln, but like- 
wise a personal friend ; and was popularly known to the citizens 
of high degree in that great city; and enjoyed not only a reputa- 
tion in his professional capacity, but an individual popularity 
that anyone might well envy. The penalty which attached to an 
avowal of his convictions, and of his belief in the continuity of 
life, spirit return and spirit communion, cost him the loss of these 
social as well as professional standings, nevertheless a happier 
or more contented man I have never met. One whose very 
presence seemed aglow with all the finer qualities of manhood; 
and in his expressions and sentiments of the right cast, he evolved 
many in ordinary conversations. Such for instance as "The 
friends I once did love, I will love them forever;" and again "I 
love my friends and never hated my enemies." This noble-hearted 
man sent me a communication as late as January, 1912 ; and then 
was hale at his advanced age of 91 years. On the occasion of our 
first meeting, he engaged me in conversation regarding matters 
of present and future existence, which to me was the most vital 
question of all questions ; and which I have since appreciated as 
being equally the most important question, for the consideration 
of every man, no matter what his status in life may be, nor where 
his lot be cast, nor howsoever important, or humble his individual 
existence may be in the community. He seemed enthusiastic upon 
the matter, and gave my wife and myself a very cordial invitation 
to be present at a psychical seance, which was to be held at a 

6 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 7 

neighbor's residence the following evening, with the presence of 
the medium Mrs. Mary A. Keeler, — wife of Dr. Wm. M. Keeler, 
— who had for some time been ill, but had recovered; and the 
seance in question would be the first held after the lapse of many 
weeks, and would be well attended. Without hesitation, so favor- 
able an opportunity presenting, I required no persuasion in accept- 
ing the invitation. As I was not as yet a full-fledged psychical 
researcher, I was not prepared for critical investigation, but 
rather made myself an individual of receptive disposition; and 
was quite content to allow myself to be an "initiate neophyte." 
wherein my duties and privileges were limited simply to observa- 
tion of what might present in an occult seance, and ready to comply 
with the proffered conditions which were suggested by the white- 
headed old doctor, who was especially desirous that I should have 
every opportunity to see and realize, outside and inside of the 
Cabinet, everything that could be observable, or realized by the 
ordinary senses. I was introduced to this lady who was designated 
as a materializing medium. I held a short conversation with her, 
found her barely convalescent from severe illness ; and according 
to her own statement not yet in normal condition. I was im- 
pressed with the fairness of the medium in granting me the 
privilege of entering the Cabinet (which was constructed in one 
corner of a small room adjoining a much larger room), not only 
before and after the seance, but during the same ; and as circum- 
stances developed during the seance, an opportunity seemed to 
have been especially provided for me to occupy a position which 
I so very much desired to have, and which I did not even have 
to ask for. Owing to a weakened state physically, the medium 
sat for some considerable time before manifestations were pro- 
duced, when a strong voice, which was claimed to be a spirit 
voice, called out "Reservoir," but with no name mentioned; and 
consequently some time was lost by appealing to one and another 
in the room to know what was meant by "Reservoir," when the 
explanation was vouchsafed by my being pointed out, at the most 
extreme point of the circle formation, as being no less than the 
desirable "Reservoir;" and I was invited to visit the medium 
where she sat that a supply of animal magnetism or psychic power 



8 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

from myself, might be contributed to the now entranced woman, 
which the reader will understand is not my claim, but the claim 
made why my presence near medium was required. I had not 
long to wait, for I stood at her side as she sat with her back to 
the corner, when I distinctly saw the formations rising before 
us and passing toward the curtains which opened immediately in 
front of her. I then resumed my own seat and became witness 
to a variety of forms as they entered the larger room, from the 
smaller one, which was designated "the Cabinet;" and heard the 
voices of what appeared to be men, women and. children, as they 
advanced into the room and up to individual sitters in the circle. 
As the room was rather dimly lighted, and as the circle was a 
large one, and I at the greatest distance from the medium, and 
as I could not distinguish their features plainly, nor identify their 
individuality, from where I viewed them, to me it was not con- 
clusively convincing of anything, but it, however, determined my 
future course should a similar opportunity present itself. 

I had not long to wait, for returning home and learning that 
the late Effie Moss, an alleged celebrated materializing medium, 
was to visit the City of London, Ontario, I sought to secure 
another opportunity of investigating the phenomena of so-called 
materialization, and of endeavoring faithfully to prove the truth 
or falsehood of the claim that there is at this day, as well as in 
Bible history times, possibility of spirit communion by return of 
spirits to earth clothed in spiritual or transient and visible bodies. 






CHAPTER III 

I HAD twice before met Mr. MacRoberts, the Chairman of 
the London School Board (now deceased). Through him 
I obtained the privilege of attending four seances, held 
during a week in December, 1894, three of which were in his 
own home, and the fourth and last one in a room of an entirely 
empty new house. The medium and all the parties met at the 
series of seances were, with the single exception of Mr. Mac- 
Roberts, entire strangers to me. Never to my knowledge had 
I met any of them before the visit in question. One of the four 
seances was designated a typewriting seance, of which but few 
records were made by me. 

Before my interview with the medium, I determined upon a 
course of utter silence, as to all knowledge regarding myself, 
relatives or friends, so as to afford no suggestion or clue for an 
apt medium to work upon. I sought and obtained during my 
first afternoon a lengthy interview with Mrs. Moss, the self- 
designated "materializing medium," or "materialization medium." 
Her physical form was very portly, and abnormally abundant 
was her adipose tissue, and her movements slow, while her 
manner was meek and retiring, and her demeanor modest. I was 
favorably impressed as I scanned her features, noted her action, 
gauged her mentality, gave critical observation to every move- 
ment, mannerism and expression, lent attentive ear to each and 
every utterance that fell from her lips; and had no reason to 
doubt the sincerity of the woman. On the other hand I was in 
quest of knowledge and asked a great many questions, to which 
she unreservedly gave answer. For the courtesy thus extended 
me, and the information given me, I desire to make grateful 
acknowledgment (though she has passed the so-called portals 
of death since this record was made). I further desire to here 
place on record, that contrary to my expectations in my interviews 
with this medium, I was not questioned by her at all. She claimed 
that when the circle formed with positive and negative forces 

9 



10 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

equalized, and harmony prevailed, and the vibrations were right 
as induced by instrumental music, or singing, she would become 
entranced or controlled, and unconscious of what was transpiring 
in either the cabinet or circle; and that usually the trance con- 
dition prevailed throughout the entire seance. She granted me 
a similar privilege to that granted me by medium Keeler in 
Washington, namely, that of entrance into the cabinet during 
the seance. This privilege I utilized on two separate occasions, 
to one of which I make a detailed reference later on ; and on both 
occasions the medium preserved her trance state, and sat unmoved 
on her wooden chair. 

Investigating the Cabinet and Seance Room 
On the evening of the day of the foregoing interview, I attended 
a seance which was held in the back parlor of the MacRoberts 
residence. Owing to misrepresentation made in a portion of the 
public press, and on account of deliberate personal misrepresenta- 
tion of facts, by illiberal, unfair, and prejudiced opponents of 
the spiritual philosophy, I was determined to free myself as much 
as possible from all bias, and approach my work of investigation 
with an open mind. I took the precaution to note details, and 
am therefore able to give herewith a faithful and conscien- 
tious report thereof, as becomes the character of an impartial 
searcher after truth. The front and back parlors were sep- 
arated, partially by sliding partition doors; and partially by 
heavy curtains hanging from a pole. In the front parlor, next 
to the street, lights were burning and rays were cast into 
the back parlor to the south, until they were excluded by the 
drawing together of these curtains. A dozen men and women 
and three little girls were seated around the room in a semicircle 
form or horseshoe-shaped arrangement of chairs, facing towards 
the cabinet formed in the bay window on the east side of the 
south parlor. I asked for and was granted, the favor of having 
the second seat from the cabinet on the south side of the circle. 
From being so close to the opening of the curtains of the cabinet, 
I had during the seance every advantage and saw these mani- 
festations front view, side view and back view, from close quarters 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 11 

— so close that I was able to discern color of the hair, and of 
the eyes, see the texture of the garments worn, or draperies cast 
about the forms. The bay window recess from the eastern wall 
of the south parlor, had an opening 9 feet in length, on a line 
with the wall, and a width or depth of about 30 inches at the 
centre, with the base of the window 15 to 18 inches from the 
floor. The view from the window was open lawn, beyond which 
was a low fence, and beyond the fence a passage-way and an 
adjoining residence. On the inner aspect of the window was 
stretched a thick texture dark in color, to cover the glass some 
distance up and thus exclude light from without. The window 
was securely fastened to the sill. The floor was like the rest of 
the room, covered with carpet tacked down and continuous with 
that covering the room. On the northern side of this cabinet 
recess (or bay window space) was placed an ordinary chair and 
a footstool. To the front of the recess and at the height of 
7 or 8 feet was a pole suspending heavy curtains, which met about 
the middle thereof. A single light was burning on the west side 
of the room opposite the cabinet recess, which light was gently 
dimmed by a Chinese or Japanese parasol, or sunshade of light 
red color, placed before it. This light was during the seance 
fc regulated by a cord passing from it to the cabinet recess, which 
as there alleged, was managed by a Cabinet spirit worker, and 
at times increased or decreased as desired, by or for the different 
manifestations, so it was claimed. When all was in readiness 
these curtains were examined, then drawn over the pole, while 
all present had the opportunity to scrutinize this temporized 
cabinet, which, as the reader will conclude from the foregoing, 
I did in detail, during the time prior to the hour named for the 
seance. 

I have already stated, that the seances were held in the back 
parlor of a private residence; and having described the cabinet 
which the medium occupied on the east side of this room, will 
now describe the arrangement of the sitters for the seance. The 
chairs for the sitters were placed in horseshoe form, so that the 
toe of the shoe would come under the light and a little east of the 
wall on the western side; while the open end of the horseshoe 



12 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

exactly corresponded to the open cabinet on both the north and 
south end of the latter. The cabinet was closed by the two 
curtains hanging from the pole in such a way that they were 
even with the eastern wall of the back parlor or temporized seance 
room, and met at the centre of the pole. While these hanging 
curtains formed the western boundary of the Cabinet, they also 
formed the closure of the open end of the horseshoe circle. The 
chairs of the end sitters were placed so that if the curtains were 
lifted the side of the cabinet would be continuous with the sides 
of the horseshoe circle, with no space to get past the end chairs, 
except between them, where the curtains hung, a space of not 
more than 6 feet. Before the seance was held, as I have already 
intimated, I had made a most careful and minute examination 
of every square foot of surface, not only of the entire carpet 
and walls of the back parlor, including the ceiling, as well as all 
woodwork, but included also the improvised cabinet in the bay 
window space; and saw that strong nails (which I hammered in) 
held down heavy-sashed windows, and that every one of the large 
panes of glass was secured in position by seasoned and hardened 
putty, while I took part in covering the glass with heavy dark 
opaque material, to exclude light from outside them, and create 
a dark background. After being minutely careful in my examina- 
tion, there appeared to me absolutely no 'possible trap door or 
aperture, or other means of access, to the cabinet for a very 
small child, much less an adult or young person, front any point 
east of the hanging curtains forming the west border or front 
of the cabinet neither through window, walls, floor, or ceiling; 
and as I had permission to enter the cabinet when I desired, I 
had opportunity to satisfy myself, during, as well as before and 
after the seance, that no aperture had been created. The only 
evidential access to the cabinet was between the terminal chairs 
of the horseshoe circle and by separating the two curtains. All 
through the seance the lamp continued burning on the western 
wall of the room, so at all times there was light enough for any 
of the sitters to pick out from their seat any man or woman in 
the circle; and if acquainted could distinguish one friend from 
another. With this condition of subdued rays of light, it would 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 13 

seem absolutely impossible, for a man, woman or child accomplice 
to pass from the room to the cabinet, without being seen by all 
in the circle, and distinctly seen by those seated near the cabinet, 
a position which I occupied, and I give it as evidence of my 
senses, and will be prepared to make declaration that to the best 
of my knowledge and belief, after a minute and most careful 
investigation, that neither trap doors nor any other opening existed 
through which entry could be made by accomplices, in fact the 
cabinet could not possibly hold at once one-half of the forms, 
whatever they were, that came out of the cabinet, even if they 
were packed like herrings. Then there were many forms which 
materialized to all appearances in the circle, which neither entered 
nor departed from the cabinet, so far as the sitters were able to 
judge. All the chairs in the horseshoe circle were side by side 
and touching, and occupied by sitters, so that no person could 
ordinarily pass between any two sitters in the circle, and the 
doors leading into the front and back parlors were locked. No 
person was standing and no person was permitted to enter the 
room after the seance opened, and had one entered, sitters in 
the circle would have known it; but if a person had entered the 
door, he or she would still have been on the outside of the horse- 
shoe circle, and I feel I have made it clear that no one could enter 
the cabinet except from the inside of the horseshoe circle of 
sitters ; nor could anyone get on the inside of that circle, by pass- 
ing between sitters, as they sat close side by side; and if they 
could have come over the heads of sitters, or under the chairs 
without their being seen and noticed by sitters, would it not have 
been as phenomenal as the cases I shall narrate? The conductor 
or manager of the seance was rather above the average size of 
man, and was acting very much in the capacity of a church usher, 
with this difference, that he summoned individual sitters to rise 
and meet the forms that expressed a desire to meet them, and 
to make announcements of the names of spirit forms, and names 
of sitters wanted. 



CHAPTER IV 

I NEXT come to the record of some of the more interesting 
phenomena witnessed in the Moss seances, which I was 
privileged to attend, and shall number them consecutively, 
for convenience sake in subsequent examination or analysis of 
them. Someone has said that ''those who deny the existence of 
occult phenomena are simply ignorant, for they have been scien- 
tifically proven repeatedly to have occurred." One has only to 
read the writings of Sir William Crookes of England, as well 
as other scientific men to be convinced of the truth of the fore- 
going statement. The selection and maintenance of an hypothesis 
to account for the phenomena will give rise to a greater difference 
of opinions. 

With those who attended these seances with me as investigators, 
as well as in my own case, no question existed after the first 
seance, as to the presentation of phenomena, however much we 
might be at sea in accounting for them. Though I have passed 
the meridian of my physical life, I am free to confess, that I 
have not yet attained intuitive or any other kind of knowledge, 
warranting my denial of the possibility of occult phenomena. In 
fact I am not prepared to deny the possibility of anything that 
I cannot disprove. 

The reader, while perusing the narration of the facts herein 
recorded, will have his or her own theory or hypothesis to account 
for the phenomena in individual cases. Whatever hypothesis may 
be adopted, it would seem that it must be one which, while im- 
pervious to the shafts of criticism, will account for the existence 
of some natural law, not fully comprehended, though possibly 
conjectured. The phenomena continue to present here and there, 
and intelligent inquiring minds will continue to desire to solve the 
problem, which will account for them, and lay bare the truth. 

After all who wished to do so had examined the window, 
ceiling, floor, walls, and curtains constituting the improvised 
cabinet without contents, except one plain wooden chair for the 

14 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 15 

medium, they assumed a position in the horseshoe circle, as 
already explained in detail. The medium, who was dressed in a 
plain dark dress, without anything superfluous on the outside, 
next raised from a seat in the circle, adjoining the cabinet space, 
where she had been constantly under the close scrutiny of every 
sitter from the first opportunity she gave them, until she stepped 
inside the cabinet which I have described in detail, and took her 
seat on the plain wooden chair, at the north end of the cabinet 
space. All being seated, the conductor pulled down the curtains, 
and took his seat in the circle. Those present then joined in 
singing familiar hymns, and shortly after the manifestations 
began. It is not my purpose to refer to all the manifestations, 
but to such only as made a marked impression on my mind. 
A few apparently human forms appeared, one at a time at the 
opening of the curtains, and were presently recognized by one 
or another of the sitters, as purporting to be that of near relatives 
or friends ; and would engage in conversation in some instances 
in a whisper, in others audible to all present. Some of these 
advanced either alone, or by the hand of some one from the circle, 
out in the room and up to individual sitters, myself among the 
number. 

(1) In one instance what appeared to be a brisk young girl, 
who came out of the cabinet, called one of the little girl sitters 
from the circle, and standing adjacent to where I sat, asked me 
to examine the little girl's hair and face, which I did. The 
former (the girl from the cabinet) then asked me to take her 
own hand, in mine, which I likewise did, after which she placed 
my hand upon her head and asked me to examine the hair, which 
I found to be long, black, coarse in fibre and the quantity 
abundant. This apparition, materialized form, or actual human 
girl, whichever she was, claimed to be the spirit of an Indian 
girl. She next permitted me to feel her feet, which were encased 
in a pair of moccasins ; and while I was observing her stature, 
features, eyes and mouth, she chatted pleasantly; and gave all 
present an evidence of her agility, by running and jumping upon 
the floor, finishing by asking me if I thought the big medium 
could make herself up like a little Indian girl, with small hands 



16 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

and feet like those I felt. I had to admit my disbelief in the 
possibility of the large and heavy medium diminishing her size 
and weight in that manner, or to such a degree. This form 
disappeared by way of the cabinet. 

(2) Another manifestation or apparition was that of a little 
girl dressed in white, at the opening of the curtains, who wanted 
to know if the sitters thought she was the medium, when almost 
immediately the medium appeared at her side, having the same 
appearance she had when first entering the cabinet, and the two 
stood side by side before the curtains, the medium being appar- 
ently in a trance state. This little girl in white retired into the 
cabinet, as did the medium also. We were informed that the 
medium claimed that this was Lily, one of her band of spirits 
that helped to build up the so-called materialized forms. 

This same little cabinet spirit Lily, pretty as a Christmas doll, 
said to me in the presence and hearing of all the sitters in that 
seance: "Dr. King, when Mrs. Moss passes over to spirit side 
of life, then I'll come and join your band." Chapter XXXIII, 
December 24, 1912, contains the record of the fulfillment of the 
promise, after eighteen years' time. 

(3) Another manifestation of peculiar interest was the appear- 
ance of a form which was recognized by sitters as a perfect 
duplication in physique and manner of speech, of a well-known 
citizen, who had passed out of the body after having been for 
some time an editor of a farmers' paper published in the same 
city of London, Ontario. I was invited to approach the cabinet, 
but I did not recognize the form or features, for I had never 
seen or known the said editor in the physical life; and conse- 
quently would not recognize this materialized representation of 
him; but he claimed brotherhood and designated my status in 
the brotherhood. I had not made myself known fraternally to 
any one present, nor had I any insignia or symbols, or anything 
about me to indicate that I was a fraternity man or brother. In 
response to his invitation I entered with him into the cabinet, 
and to my astonishment he did certainly prove himself a brother. 
I may add that while this testing and proving was in process in 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 17 

the cabinet with curtains closed, I could see the medium seated 
on the chair, her eyes closed, and apparently in a deep trance 
state, as was her usual condition during a seance. The form, 
which proved itself to be a brother, was surrounded by a certain 
degree of illumination, which made the cabinet as well as the 
form of the medium, distinctly visible to me. Coming to the 
outside of the cabinet again with me, this form's grip was strong, 
substantial, and real, yet seemed to melt away while still I held 
it, and after first taking three irregular steps from the cabinet, 
gradually dissolved from view as white or grayish smoke or 
vapor, entering the carpet at that point. 

(4) Another manifestation alleged to be that of a minister, 
having a portly and easily recognized form, was claimed by 
several of those who knew him in the physical form, to be a 
preacher who formerly preached in South London Methodist 
church. The form appeared in the black clothing, as was the 
custom of the minister in the physical form, and addressed those 
present in a manner familiar to those who had listened to his 
pulpit utterances; but added that had he known what he now 
knew he would have been enabled to teach and preach with a 
much clearer knowledge of the truth. I was privileged to take 
the ghost's hand and look well into his countenance, and witness 
the movement of his lips and of his eyes, and hear the breath 
movements of his speech. He disappeared by way of the cabinet 
from which he came. 

(5) Another of the many manifestations at this seance was 
that of an alleged actress, suitably clad in garments of a creamy 
white color, who claimed to have passed out of the physical form 
in Brooklyn one hour after completing her part in an act or play 
at the theatre. Her stature was taller than that of the medium 
and much more spare. Her voice was strong and sweet. She 
addressed those present for several minutes, exhorting them to 

' a proper life and good deeds for humanity. After concluding 
her address she favored the company by singing in a magnificent 
manner a song which would have required great natural capability, 
and much culture for so fine a rendition, on the part of a human 



18 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

singer. Had the window been open, the singing could have been 
heard easily a block away. I was also permitted to approach 
this manifestation, and shake hands with it, and saw its features 
most distinctly. This form disappeared into the cabinet from 
which it had made its first appearance. 

(6) During one portion of the seance, when all was quiet, the 
room hitherto dimly lit suddenly became darker. Almost im- 
mediately after, within the circle of the sitters, and about one 
yard from my chair, I noticed a light upon the carpet, phosphor- 
escent in appearance, about the size of a 25-cent piece or English 
shilling., which soon became more extensive, and apparently rose 
as a vapor from which evolved curling flame like white and purple 
light, until suddenly it took on tangible form, and developed what 
all the sitters agreed upon, as being beyond doubt a beautiful 
young woman, clad in draperies of creamy white, bearing sup- 
ported or suspended above her head a purple ball of light, which, 
however, seemed physically separate from any connection with 
the head ; and which illumined the entire room, and simultaneously 
the air was impregnated with odor of a most delicate and agree- 
able perfume, resembling nothing I had ever before inhaled. All 
over the draperies and coverings of this apparition were small 
star-spangles as if they were most brilliant electric star lights. 
This manifestation differed in appearance from the others preced- 
ing, inasmuch as they had a substantial, every-day, solid, life-like 
physical body and raiment, such as we are accustomed to look 
upon in our every-day experience ; while this female materializa- 
tion, perfect in physical form, seemed attired in vestures and 
draperies most unusual, but in themselves beautiful and well- 
adapted in their application, giving an angelic cast to the entire 
figure. She took my hand as if for salutation, held it firmly as 
if for support, for perhaps half a minute, and apparently until 
fully materialized, and explained that she had the power to 
appropriate material from the medium, and from my own and 
other sitters' composition, to form a body to occupy ; and by aid 
of other spirits likewise formed the vestures, and draperies worn, 
of thought creation from particles of matter in textures in the 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 19 

room, and also from the air. The hand appeared natural to the 
sight, and the touch or grip revealed feeling, solidity, and motion. 
Her stay was brief, and her departure was as if she had dissolved 
into mist or white smoke, and was drawn downwards and ab- 
sorbed into the carpet. This particular form, materialization, or 
apparition neither entered nor approached the cabinet. Some of 
the more experienced sitters explained that this form was that 
of an advanced spirit, and one long since passed to spirit life; 
but none there were who claimed to have ever seen her before; 
nor did she give any indication at this sitting as to her human 
personality or her angelic home. (This was Egyptia, my alleged 
guardian spirit, as I subsequently learned from her.) 

I may here remark that I shook hands and conversed with the 
majority of the forms appearing at this seance, listened to the 
messages conveyed to individual friends in the room, or to the 
more general exhortations and advice regarding the real objects 
and purposes of life. All this to me was passing strange, and 
unaccountable on ordinary or natural lines of investigation, as I 
shall attempt to show in discussing the various hypotheses. 

Being acquainted with the existence of the phenomena of 
hypnotism, which I had for several years been able to induce and 
utilize for physiological, therapeutical, and psychical purposes, I 
naturally sought to satisfy myself that this was not sufficient to 
account for all the phenomena heard and witnessed by all alike. 
The more personally interesting manifestations to which I could 
apply critical tests as being more conclusive, and more evidential 
in character to me at least, I will allude to in detail, 

PHENOMENA EVIDENTIAL IN CHARACTER TO ME 

(7) The event in this seance and in a subsequent one, of the 
deepest personal interest to me, as affording not only more 
support, but in my judgment the strongest evidential support 
of the spiritual hypothesis, as contrasted with any other hypo- 
thesis that I have considered or that can be offered, I shall 
now describe. I have said this case engaged my deepest interest ; 
but I may add that the most conclusively convincing tests possible 
were presented to my judgment, as I shall presently show. Among 



20 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

the forms to appear at the parting of the curtains of the im- 
provised cabinet, was that of an apparently old lady, above medium 
height, build and weight, slightly bent forward, whose hair was 
silvery white, whose face was directed towards myself, to whom 
she seemed to beckon, but in no single particular resembling the 
medium. Several remarked to me, "You are wanted, Doctor," 
and I arose and advanced close to the form, my face being within 
a few inches of the face presented, which appeared illuminated 
so clearly and distinctly that I could see individual hairs hanging 
across the temple. I beheld the form and features, the perfect 
physical resemblance, and physiognomy of my own mother, who 
passed out of the physical life, as the result of an accident in my 
own and her own home, some nine years previously. So natural, 
so human and life-like was the apparition that it formed a perfect 
duplicate of my mother — as perfect a view as her mirrored 
reflection in life, while it possessed tangibility, solidity, weight, 
moved the eyes as if looking into mine, grasped my hand as 
really as ever it was grasped, and used the mouth to speak and I 
heard her breathe. I stood a few moments to test myself, as to 
whether I was awake or dreaming, or in a hypnotized state. Up 
to this point, though I had recognized what I have stated, I had 
said nothing. I then spoke aloud in the hearing of all present 
and said "Who is this?" The form then stepped forward from 
the cabinet and in a similar characteristic and affectionate manner 
to that of my mother when in my home said, so that all present 
could hear what she said, "My dear boy, do you recognize me?" 
I replied by asking "Is this the one I am thinking of?" The 
apparition before me said : "Yes, I am still alive,, and am pleased 
to see you here, and I bring you proof of my existence." The 
form patted me on my cheek, kissed me, and said, "Your Pa is 
here with me. He only recently came to me out of the body, 
and was extremely weak." The form then explained that he, the 
father, was not yet able to gather the forces necessary to manifest 
himself, but would do so at another seance if I would remain. 
All this was heard by the others present, as all assented when 
asked if they heard distinctly. I at this point explained to the 
sitters in this seance, that my mother passed out of the physical 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 21 

between eight and nine years previously, while my father had only 
passed out about two months anterior to this occasion; and as 
I was a stranger to them all, as well as to the medium, with the 
single exception of the gentleman in whose house we were meet- 
ing — that of Mr. MacRoberts (and I had only twice before 
met him, many miles from my home) — and therefore all were 
ignorant of the dates of death of my mother and father, and of 
any other data concerning them. The materialized manifestation 
claiming to be that of my mother, also spoke to me in a whisper, 
and the utterances were those peculiarly characteristic of my 
mother, and such as no other human being could imitate or know 
and use them. She took my hand, stepped out into the circle, 
and was seen and heard by all therein, and spoken with by several. 
As one or two among the many evidential tests of personal 
physical identity, or duplication thereof, I give the following. 

My mother had for many years carried the evidence of rheu- 
matic arthritis in the lower two rows of the 4 joints of her fingers 
on both hands, they being, as she used to term them, "hickory-nut 
joints," and her habit was, when not specially using her hands, 
or when she had company or went out, — to wear thin silk gloves 
or mitts over them, a size or two larger than would otherwise be 
necessary, on account of large joints, to prevent their being notice- 
able by others. My mother was also accustomed to wear about 
the shoulders a light comforter or shawl of old-fashioned pattern 
and size, to prevent chills from the draughts, she claimed. On 
this occasion, exact duplications of the old-fashioned silk gloves 
and shawl were worn by this manifestation, apparently as real 
as I had ever seen them, and further, and even yet more con- 
clusively convincing, myself and others looked for the hickory-nut 
jointed fingers, and sure enough the evidence was convincing, 
tested by sight and touch of more than one-half of the sitters 
present. Corroborative inspection likewise demonstrated the 
existence in the eye of a brown spot on the white of the globe of 
the left eye; and a cluster or cord of silvery hair hanging over 
the left temple to the left ear, from the upper part of the forehead 
of the demonstrating apparition, which stood before us and talked 
with us. Both of these latter features were distinctly noticeable, 



22 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

and had in my mother's life-time been examined and commented 
upon, by those who knew her, and to myself they were in this 
instance a perfect duplication or reflection in the animated appari- 
tion which I am now describing. 

Space forbids my speaking in further detail. As the manifesta- 
tion was about to go it gave me a parting kiss, and said "Good- 
bye" in a precisely similar manner to that which my mother 
always adopted, when we parted with each other during her 
physical existence. 



CHAPTER V 

THE next succeeding seance of this series was held a few 
evenings later, in the same room as the first seance ; 
and under an arrangement similar to the former one. 
There were twenty-seven persons of both sexes and varied ages 
present,, including spiritualists, skeptics, and investigators irreg- 
ular and regular, so that the company was not as harmonious, 
or the conditions as favorable as might have been desired, nor 
so conducive to good results, though to me they were not only 
as interesting but quite as instructive. I occupied the same 
advantageous position I previously occupied, with the fullest 
possible advantages for seeing and hearing, which fact I fully 
appreciated, owing to the unsatisfactory situation I had, in the 
remotest portion of the circle, at the seance held under the 
mediumship of Mrs. Keeler in the city of Washington, D. C. (my 
initiatory seance), when I neither saw nor heard anything dis- 
tinctly, nor anything evidentially convincing, to a person skeptical 
of these phenomena, as I confess I was at that time, it being the 
first materializing seance I ever attended. I mention this here, 
on account of the expressions I heard during Mrs. Moss' seance 
on this occasion, on the part of some in the remote portion of 
the circle, owing to their inability to see clearly; while others 
could in the nearer situation see distinctly. The room, as on the 
former occasion, was in different degrees of darkness with differ- 
ent manifestations. The one partially shaded lamp was kept 
burning. The darkness was not sufficient to prevent me from 
counting the people in the circle, and distinguishing the ladies 
from the gentlemen, the men with whiskers or beards irom those 
who had neither, except just prior to the appearance of an appari- 
tion alleged to be an advanced spirit, when the light of the lamp 
was very much diminished. This form of apparition usually made 
its appearance by rising from the carpet or floor, within the area 
of the circle; and at a distance of two or three paces from the 
front of the cabinet, and increased by its own presence the amount 

23 



24 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

of light in the room. At this and the succeeding" seance many 
of the same and other similar apparitions, etherializations or 
materialized manifestations were present that had presented on 
a former occasion, while other new ones announced themselves. 
While not desirous of registering all the phenomena, as there is 
to the casual observer a difference only in forms (with many 
of them), I desire to make truthful record of those, which 
appeared to me as an investigator, to merit my own recognition, 
as evidential in character, and as presenting to me at least, a 
genuineness of existence alike surprising and convincing, 

(8) As will be remembered, I received an intimation at the 
former seance, that my father would probably be able to manifest 
himself to me, and consequently I had remained ; and was prepared 
for this particular event, and cogitated in my own mind as to 
what tests I could apply to prove the personal identity. I had not 
long to wait before I saw this manifestation, in a sitting posture ; 
or as if trying to rise from a low seat on the floor, and beckoning 
me. As I neared the manifestation, its hands were slowly lifted, 
backs upwards, as my father was wont to do, when any one 
sought to assist him to rise, for some time previous to his physical 
death. His hands were plump and fat ; and when the fingers were 
extended there were depressions or dimples opposite the knuckles 
of the fingers, and his hands felt soft to the touch. His weakness 
was primarily due, to the results of a severe injury received 
nearly a year and a half before his death, which combined with 
heart disease at the advanced age of four score years, ended his 
physical existence about two months prior to the date of this 
seance. The apparition presenting at this particular time, after 
its formation assumed, what to my physical senses was a solid 
physical materialized form, as patent to the senses of touch, sight 
and hearing as any human terrestrial man I ever saw and heard 
speak. It extended the two hands, and I clasped them. They 
had the similar appearance and soft touch, with all the tremulous 
movement that I was familiar with in the physical form of my 
father. Not that alone, but the quickened oreathing so character- 
istic of my father's condition, the last few weeks of his sojourn 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 25 

on earth, was present in the case of this apparition, and could be 
distinctly heard. As if by touch of me this form gained strength, 
by magnetism or other unseen force from me (as was claimed 
by some), it gradually rose to a man's natural height; and its 
countenance brightened up as distinctly as I saw the delineation 
of my mother's form and features. The paralleling of forms, 
features and conditions of this material phantom (if I may use 
the expression), and of my father, were to say the least both 
astounding and perplexing. I then in the presence and hearing 
of all the sitters asked "Who is it?" And the response came 
promptly, as well as loud and distinct, "I am your father, Stephen 
King." I turned to those present and said, "Friends, did you 
hear what he said?" and several replied "Yes, he said he was 
your father, Stephen King." This occult development then patted 
me on my cheek, and spoke to me. I took the following note at 
the time, "I still live and am able to bring to you proof of my 
continued existence. I found your mother awaiting me on my 
awakening into spirit life, and there are many of our relatives 
and friends there, who have gone over before us. We have 
learned that God in his goodness has not condemned us to 
destruction, but has afforded us the opportunity of working out 
our own salvation. I want to say to you before I go, that we 
are always near you, and try to use our influence with you." 
This form also gave me vocally and audibly this message, "Tell 
Robbie that Grandpa still lives." (Robbie was my father's favor- 
ite grandson). The talking was concluded by some information 
of a personal nature for myself, and a "Good-bye," and this 
materialized life-like physical form resembling my father in form, 
features and mannerisms, began dissolving from my view into 
the carpet before the eyes of all ; who likewise with myself heard 
the voice, and those who were near the very language spoken, 
as above recorded. I would ask the reader what hypothesis 
best accounts for the facts related in the preceding record? 

Can fraud substitute a duplicate dead or alive, of the reader's 
father, in every feature, whether physical, mental or moral, 
natural or artificial, with endowments, knowledge, habits and 
desires that would command your recognition, and acceptance 



26 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

by your senses, your life's knowledge of him, and the exercise 
of your reason ? I leave you to accept the substitute, or to prefer 
the original. I am forced to adopt the evidence, as proving the 
original. 

At the foregoing seance circumstances occurred which have 
been ventilated in the press and in court, namely, the creation of 
a disturbance to break up the seance, the outcome of the admission 
thereto of a peregrinating actor, seeking some notoriety, by a 
professed exposure, which was in no sense an exposure, but a 
contemptible misbehavior of himself and a companion, and thus 
the seance was broken up, and the majesty of the law was after- 
wards administered by a judge whose eyes were not bound, and 
hence justice could see that the doings at the seance were 
nefarious and the mischief-makers were protected while the so- 
called nefarious manager was sentenced to prison or else pay 
a fine of $100.00 with costs, in order to be free, with advice to 
leave the country. 

This is one example of a person "who could see and know 
the truth and suffer for its sake/ 1 



CHAPTER VI 

THE third and concluding seance of the series, which I 
was privileged to attend, under the mediumship of Mrs. 
Moss, was held in a house taken for the purpose on this 
occasion, by the London (Ont.) Spiritual Society, or by some of 
its members. The personnel of the Society were well known 
citizens of good repute, several of whom are still living in Lon- 
don, and can verify the facts contained in the records of these 
seances. I believe that with the exception of the medium, Mr. 
Randall Sunderland (her manager) and myself, all present at 
this seance were members of that society ; and hence as the sitters 
were harmonious, I was assured that the conditions were most 
favorable for satisfactory results. As nearly as my memory 
serves me, for I did not count them, there were about a dozen 
sitters present. The portion of the empty house used consisted 
of two rooms, front and rear, with a division similar to that 
described at the MacRoberts residence, only the house and its 
compartments were smaller. There was absence of everything 
in the way of carpets and furniture, except what chairs were 
actually necessary to accommodate the sitters, and were brought 
there for that special occasion. The back room was by curtains 
separated from the front room and thereby converted into a 
cabinet. 

The seance began immediately after my arrival and was un- 
questionably much better than preceding ones in the matter of 
distinctness of manifestations ; but I was fortunate in having new 
features, and additional evidence of personal identity. I was also 
especially favored, by having an opportunity of seeing a mani- 
festation which was in the form of a woman who was alleged 
to be related to the medium. It showed me how the textures for 
the spirit garments were woven or made, and I also received 
a special visit from what was termed a visitor from the higher 
spheres, or an advanced spirit. Aside from the repetition of some 
forms seen at previous seances and some new ones, the nature 

27 



28 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

of which I have already explained, my interest centered in those 
which I am about to describe. 

(9) The form which appeared phenomenally to be the very 
personality of my mother in the physical form, but with presence 
qf tangibility, voice and motion, again manifested at this seance, 
and with some clinging doubts in my mind, as to the possibility 
or probability of her return to earth in physical form, I determined 
to be more bold in my requests, and said, "if you are my mother, 
will you prove yourself to me and those present by coming from 
the cabinet (which was simply the back room empty) and speak 
with each of _ the friends present. The phantom, materialization, 
apparition, angel, or spirit, or whatever it was, acceded to my 
request, and I offered my left arm for support, but it immediately 
took my right arm (the arm my mother preferred in life to take 
for the reason that it left her right arm free), and she walked 
with me around the entire circle of sitters, shaking hands or 
speaking with each and every one of those present in the circle. 
One old gentleman, the first and only person in the circle outside 
of myself, to recognize the features, did so, as those of an old 
friend who used to worship at the same church as himself, in 
Toronto nine or ten years previously, remarking while conversing 
with her, "Why, Mrs. King, I used to know you at Bond Street 
Congregational Church, Toronto, where we worshipped together 
under the Rev. Dr. Joseph Wyld." "Yes," she replied, "that was 
years ago." He commented upon the recognition, and added that 
he did not know before now that she was the Doctor's mother. 
After giving me some information Of a personally interesting 
character, and convincing as a test, she said "good-bye, ,, kissed 
me, and hurried back to the cabinet. 

Where am I at, or am I dreaming? Am I realizing that truth 
is truly stranger than fiction? The room was well lighted, so 
well that we could read a newspaper, or tell the time by our watch. 
Well, these phenomena are so strange, so new, so natural, what 
hypothesis do you, my reader friend, adopt to account for them, 
and the accuracy of description, the truth of statement, the 
naturalness of voice, the perfection of duplication, of tangibility, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 29 

form, features and mannerisms? I can narrate and describe in 
detail the phenomena, but I ask you to simply account for them. 
Are they spiritual phenomena, such as are recorded in history, 
and in the Bible and Testament; and if not what are they, and 
what hypothesis will fit better than the spiritual hypothesis? 

(10) Another manifestation unknown to me, or unfamiliar, but 
whose name was given, approached me, and informed me that I 
was being prepared for special work, and that she, this female 
angelic form (resembling at least to some extent, the pictures 
of angels) would avail herself of this opportunity to give in- 
formation, and to show me something I had not hitherto been 
privileged to see. She held up her hands and arms for me to 
examine them, and they looked and felt like the arms and hands 
of women, such as we meet in our daily experiences, in fact she 
claimed to be — or some one in the circle stated that she was — 
in earth life the sister of the medium. She, the apparition, said 
to me, "You notice that my arms are bared, and my draperies 
are only such as are required to cover my body." She then 
explained that by the knowledge of chemical combination not 
known on the earth plane, selection was made of particles of 
matter, with which were built up not only the bodies, but the 
apparel worn upon the bodies ; and the spirit material to do this 
was not confined alone to what could be seen and recognized 
by mortals; but was also drawn from the air and from the sur- 
roundings. She then, with my white linen handkerchief as a 
starting point, began her work. I placed it on her extended 
hands in the well-lighted room and in the presence of all the 
sitters and at arm's length, she rolled it and fingered it, when 
it suddenly seemed to break up into fibres and gradually changed 
from white to a creamy tint, and from close texture to open net 
work; and increased in bulk and volume, until it began to hang 
down nearly to the floor, when she requested a lady present to 
hold two corners with outstretched arms, and slowly walk back- 
wards until she reached the limit of the room, while the manifesta- 
tion held the other end in a similar manner. The fabric then 
would be, I should judge, about 5 feet wide and 10 or 12 feet 



30 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

long. All in the room examined it and pronounced it a fine slight 
fabric, and compared it with that worn by the producer of it. 
It was dematerialized subsequently. 

This surely is evidential, that the apparition was more than 
an appearance, and had a tangible existence, with form, power 
and voice. She also gave me information as to what I should 
yet be permitted to learn and to witness ; and among other things 
said that in the years to come, that spirits would materialize upon 
the public platform in day light, with some speakers. She like 
the others dematerialized from solid form into vapor before our 
eyes, and thus disappeared. 

Of all I had seen and heard at the various seances, the most 
startling and wonderful manifestation to me was that of the 
female form which appeared, and is described as number six, 
(Egyptia). This same form reappeared a second time, in the 
last of this series of seances, again coming in the midst of a 
splendid evolution of sparkling lights, colors, and odors. The 
form and appearance was like that of an Egyptian lady of rank, 
and her name was spoken by herself as Egyptia. Her features 
were pleasing and intellectual, and she was about my own height, 
but medium build, and was clad in the peculiarly created draperies. 
She was again covered with bright stars glittering like large 
diamonds or small electric lights. She placed her hands upon 
my head, and said she had been with me as my guardian spirit 
from the moment of my birth, and would again appear to and 
commune with me in the future. As this was her second appear- 
ance at the Moss series I had favorable opportunity, and saw her 
form and features distinctly, and conversed with her. I may add 
that when she dematerialized at this the final seance, she dis- 
appeared into the curtains separating the two rooms, as would 
white smoke or steam. 

There were other features which to the other sitters, as well 
as to myself, were very interesting, but space will not permit 
my referring to them at this time. All I saw, felt and heard at 
this and the other seances appeared real; and as far as my ob- 
jective senses were concerned, had palpable existence. 

Conversations were conducted in the room, between the sitters, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 31 

one with another, the same as in any drawing room with a like 
number, and also between the sitters and their transient visitors ; 
and during the time of this select Levee, there was no discernible 
evidence of the presence or existence of hypnotic influence, 
somnambulism, insanity or fraud, 



A Special Occult Seance 

In addition to the foregoing series of materializing seances, 
I was also present at a special one for a select number, which 
proved to be one of occult wonders not a few, which I will briefly 
indicate. • 

A black texture of close fibre, about three feet high, when 
stretched as a partition, reached across the centre of a well lighted 
room. On one side of it were eight or ten ladies and gentlemen. 
On the other side was placed a typewriting instrument of well- 
known design, with nothing else visible. Presently we all saw 
hands and wrists reaching through the texture towards those 
who were present, as if to shake with them ; and when taken hold 
of seemed like as human hands ; and when withdrawn no opening 
in the fibre was found. Then articles of small size, such as 
gloves and kerchiefs, were tossed by sitters over the top, and 
immediately returned through the texture, to the side from which 
thrown. It seemed as if it mattered not whether soft or hard, for 
a purse, knife or ring came quite as freely, as a lady's small 
handkerchief, or kid glove. 

Presently the typewriter, which stood in full view, began to 
operate by unseen power, using those hands and wrists before 
mentioned. All received typewritten messages, as fast as com- 
pleted, and dropped over the top of the texture to each of the 
several sitters. The following message was printed on the type- 
writing instrument, in my presence, in a well lighted room, by 
two hands unattached to visible arms or body, in a fraction of 
the time it could be done by an ordinary operator, and nothing 
nearer to it, than two paces away. 



32 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

The Message for the Writer 
"My Dear John:" 

"Is it not delightful to be enabled to once again visit each 
"other in the material life, and bring you such glorious proof 
"of the life beyond, that life that you have always had so 
"strong a conviction must exist, and yet could not quite 
"explain? O how can I find words to explain the joy that 
"filled my soul, when on my awakening in spirit life, I found 
"your dear mother, my own dear companion, waiting to give 
"me welcome home; and gradually in her own loving way 
"make me realize that though dead, I was yet living; and 
"that the Infinite had indeed planned all things well, and 
"that instead of being condemned for our misdeeds, He, in 
"His great love, had provided a way whereby we might work 
"out our own redemption. As you know there are none 
"perfect, no, not one, all of us, no matter how much we try, 
"are sure to make mistakes, for 'man is prone to evil/ has 
"ever been found a true saying. 

"My son, as I come into a clearer conception of the truth, 
"I can more fully realize how great a need there is that we 
"should pass through all conditions thai the earth plane can 
"furnish; and have even learned to bless the hearts and 
"hands that at times made me suffer in the mortal, both 
"mental and spiritual agony, as I find it is really for our 
"good. May God and his ministering angels bless you and 
"yours." 

"Father." 

(My father officiated as a Presbyterian Minister at Pelham, 
Lincoln County; and at Barton, Wentworth County, in Ontario, 
when I was a child, and left earth life aged 80 years. — J. S. K.) 



CHAPTER VII 

THERE are those, who having never seen or experienced 
psychic phenomena, briefly dispose of them, by asserting 
that such phenomena do not present themselves ; or if 
they admit their appearance, account for them by designating 
them as an hallucination of the mind; or vision under hypnotic 
influence, or while in somnambulistic state ; or possibly the opera- 
tion of the sub-conscious self, or perhaps a trick of conjuring, 
or fraud. And some there are who assert, "It is the work of 
the Devil." While I am prepared to admit, that hallucinations in 
some instances are due to a disordered mind, it were nevertheless 
presumptious to claim, that a given number of people constituting 
a circle, must of necessity be all of disordered mind, because they 
all agree in their recognition of precisely the same phenomena; 
and this claim is reduced to an absurdity, to account for hundreds 
of thousands of people in all parts of the world, singly and in 
groups of five, ten, twenty, thirty or more, in each instance simul- 
taneously seeing, hearing, feeling in unison, and corroborating 
each the other's account of what has presented to their recognition. 

As an hypothesis, can hypnosis without audible suggestion, 
silently and simultaneously affect each and every person in the 
seance room exactly alike, so that all hear the suggested sentences 
rolling from the lips of the hypnotically materialized forms, which 
the sitters in their own hypnotized condition are looking at ? Will 
such hypothesis sustain itself, long enough for a person to give it 
second or serious thought ? 

As an hypothesis, can the sub-conscious or subjective self, the 
ego, or within the Astral, as designated by some, externalize itself 
and then exercise a constructive faculty, or power sufficiently 
perfect to operate through its creation, and make results visible 
to the sight, and audible to the hearing of all alike ; and exercise 
volition or reason, and interchange of knowledge ? As well might 
one argue that black is white, as to expect a convert to that belief. 

We have now come to another hypothesis of the skeptic's list, 

33 



34 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

viz., fraud and trickery or conjuring. Here we begin with a 
very large handicap, for we must admit it has in the past, as well 
as at the present time played, and gives promise in the future of 
playing a most important part, in deceiving the so-designated 
"gullibles." But, is it a reasonable thing, and can it be depended 
upon as a fact, that it is always and invariably, an imposition of 
trickery or conjuring? Will the reader deny, and can the skeptic 
honestly deny, as Barnum or Lincoln said, that "You can deceive 
some of the people all of the time ; and all of the people some of 
the time ; but you cannot deceive all of the people all of the time," 
everywhere, nor anywhere? 

The hypothesis of Spirit power giving rise to the phenomena, 
is not on the skeptic's list ; but it most certainly must be examined, 
repeatedly tested, and well considered if it be found, that after 
the fullest, keenest, most exacting investigation by clear-headed 
investigators, approaching the work of investigation with an open 
mind, and proceeding according to scientific methods, that the 
other hypothesis cannot account for the phenomena. 

I am compelled to admit the existence of the phenomena of 
materialization; and many other apparently psychic manifesta- 
tions. I cannot deny their existence, if I am to depend upon my 
ordinary physical senses, and I have no proof that any one of my 
senses is unreliable. To me, therefore, the phenomena I have 
recorded and investigated are unaccountable, on the ordinary 
plea of deception of the physical senses, by fraud or conjuring of 
the skeptic's hypothesis. Those present with me in the many 
seances confirmed my senses and experiences. They admitted to 
me that they saw what I saw, heard what I heard, felt what I 
felt, inhaled some of the strange perfume that I inhaled and 
described. How then shall these occurrences be accounted for? 
And if not accounted for in ordinary or evident ways, why should 
a person who had not seen or experienced them, assert that they 
did not occur ? I have great sympathy for unbelievers in spiritual 
phenomena ; for such unbelievers, whether avowed Christians, or 
outside of the church membership, place themselves in antagonism 
to the continued and repeated narratives of spirit return, and 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 35 

spirit communion, recorded as truth in the book best known as 
the Holy Bible. 

As an investigator among strangers, I had and have no reason 
to either court favors or fear frowns of any one who was present ; 
and after recording facts, leave my readers to construct their own 
hypothesis to account for these phenomena, and form their own 
conclusions. 

The foregoing is submitted as my testimony, as to the psychical 
conditions and environment of the medium, before, during and 
after the first and other seances. I feel that I can fairly presume, 
that if I gave evidence in a criminal court, before judge and jury 
in a murder trial, or in any other court, with any other case, my 
credibility as witness of the facts, would go unchallenged, nor 
would doubt be cast upon me, as to the reliability of my physical 
senses employed in compiling the facts as evidence. If so, the 
same credibility and reliability should hold good here, in the fore- 
going evidence presented to the reader. 

Along with me were others watching, who were suspicious 
sitters. And now I ask the reader here to note a fact or two. All 
the seances but one, were held in the private home, of one of the 
members of the local society, where strangers or accomplices 
could not be, except by invitation. 

As a true investigator I put my trust in none, but spent an 
hour in most critical examination of the seance room, and con- 
sidered well, not only all conditions, but devised in several ways 
precautions, for example, against accomplices, trap doors and 
secret entrances, movable windows, and unlocked doors. So we 
locked the various doors, and we nailed the windows down, and 
felt ourselves secure from imposition there. And further, this 
feature or phase of mediumship was to some of us quite new, 
and therefore we were inclined to be quite skeptical, and but few 
if any of us could be called credulous. 

Now there are many men, who exist here and there, and every- 
where, and some of these I've met, who are ready, and can stay 
at home and tell you all about a seance, and who never yet have 
made investigation for evidence, nor had a personal experience, 
and yet presume to pronounce it all deception, and fraudulent, 



36 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

and take delight in saying it. To such I say, "you are a 'barrack' 
soldier, and out of sight, and know not the duties of a sentinel 
or scout ; and If now ask you, for once be good enough to now 
account for the phenomena I have described, and tell me truly 
just how it could be done, notwithstanding the existence of the 
various conditions I have narrated in detail; and also explain 
how fifteen to thirty different accomplices could get into the 
cabinet in the first place; or how they could individually get 
there later, if human, and out and away after doing their stunt, 
as in a play, without leaving a trace of their belongings behind 
them; and without a single sitter, of the ten to twenty at the 
different seances (who were up to average intelligent citizenship, 
of as many well informed citizens anywhere) being able to discern 
how they entered or departed from the cabinet ; or not be able to 
distinguish either of the men, women or children with incarnate 
spirits, if such they believe they were, even if they could not quite 
understand the difference between such, and those which are dis- 
carnate? But it must be remembered, that all the figures, male 
and female, talked and walked among us, and were well seen by 
us. They took their departure, apparently one portion by way of 
the cabinet disappearing and nothing left behind at the close ; the 
other portion did so by slowly dissolving into vapor, before our 
very eyes, while descending towards the carpet, and became 
invisible by dissolution into their elements, which would be 
impossible for accomplices. 



These are my quotations from early records ending with 
December, 1894; and this their first publication. 
End of Early Records 



CHAPTER VIII 

A TRANS-ATLANTIC communication from myself, John 
S. King, M.D., as President of the Canadian Society 
for Psychical Research, to W. T. Stead, Editor "Review 
of Reviews/' Bank Buildings, Kingsway, London, W. C, Eng- 
land ; per favor of an intelligence claiming to be Hypatia, known 
in history of the fifth century, as the daughter of Theon; and 
who made for herself a great and lasting reputation, as a Neo- 
platonic philosopher, and as the wisest woman of her time; and 
came to her death by being murdered at Alexandria, A. D. 415. 

She also claims to be the Author's spirit guide, who can and 
will assist him in demonstrating to the world the truth of the 
continuity of life, and that of spirit return, and communication 
between discarnate spirits and humanity, on the earth plane. 

On Wednesday, May 3, 1911, I received a letter written by 
Mrs. Etta Wriedt, "Trumpet Medium," on Monday, May 1, 1911, 
at her home in Detroit, Michigan. 

In the letter she (Mrs. Wriedt) said she was going to sail for 
England, to fill an engagement with W. T. Stead at Julia's 
Bureau, London. 

On Saturday, May 6, 1911, in the afternoon, I had a sitting 
with Mrs. Ripley, a trance medium in Toronto, who was entranced 
by Hypatia, the alleged spirit intelligence. 

To her (Hypatia) I addressed myself and asked if she herself 
would be able and willing to help me with a test which would 
be evidential of spirit communion between discarnate spirits and 
humanity? The intelligence replying through Mrs. Ripley's vocal 
organs said, "I will try to do so, and hope to succeed/' 

I then made the following proposition, viz. : I want to send a 
letter and message to W. T. Stead through you, speaking through 
Mrs. Wriedt's trumpet, before Mr. Stead opens my sealed en- 
velope, containing the written message signed by myself as Presi- 
dent of The Canadian Society for Psychical Research. If this 
can be carried out it will be valuable as evidential matter. 

37 



38 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Hypatia then said, "1 will be with you as you write the message." 

The following under its own date is a copy of the original 

letter containing the specified message, which I mailed to England. 

(Copy) 

"Toronto, 7th May, 1911.' 

"W. T. Stead, 

Dear Sir: — Mrs. Etta Wriedt, trumpet medium, of Detroit, 
Michigan, wrote me from that address, May 1, 1911, that she 
was going to sail for England, to take part as a psychic in Julia's 
Bureau. I received her letter the 3rd May, 1911. I have neither 
seen her since, nor heard from her directly or indirectly, and 
presume therefore she is now on the Atlantic Ocean. 

I have known her many years as a psychic, and have on various 
occasions had sittings with her, with facilities for detecting fraud- 
ulent acts; and am free to say that up to the present moment, I 
have never been able to detect any fraudulent act on her part, nor 
have I learned of any member of our Society who has, but on the 
contrary, up to date, they consider her to be an honest psychic. 

The fact that she will now be a factor, or instrument in Julia's 
Bureau, will afford me the opportunity of attempting to prove, 
under test conditions, the reality of spiritual intercourse, provid- 
ing you are willing to assist me, as herein indicated. 

I am alone in my office at this time while writing; and not a 
living human being is even cognizant of my intention; and I 
have had no suggestion given, out to Mrs. Wriedt of my intention ; 
and I presume she sailed some days ago. 

In this letter you will find a sealed envelope. It contains a 
test message to you written by myself this afternoon. It is not 
to be opened until after the spirit intelligence claiming to be that 
of Hypatia, has spoken through Mrs. Wriedt 's trumpet. You are 
then requested to open it, and compare the language of the 
message with the recorded language as expressed through the 
trumpet by Hypatia. If you will allow me, I will suggest that 
you form a circle of three or four harmonious friends including 
yourself, and I feel certain you will be greatly pleased with results. 

I shall be glad to be informed of the outcome of the test, which, 
if carried out as I have here suggested, I fully expect will develop 
in a more or less satisfactory way." 

(The test message is enclosed in sealed envelope.) 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 39 

"Toronto, 7th May, 1911. 
W. T. Stead. 
'Waatdoaga'. 

John S. King, M.D., 
Presdt. C. S. P. R." 

Can Hypatia deliver the message ? 

[Note.: — W. T. Stead did not adopt my suggestion of a circle 
of three or four harmonious friends, and Hypatia did not find 
conditions therefore, in the public seance, as favorable as desired 
or necessary. J. S. K.] 

The test of exact message is promised later, hence not given out 
at this time. 

I had a sitting with medium Ripley on Sunday, 4th June, 1911, 
between 10 and 11 a. m. The medium was again entranced and 
I held converse with the same intelligence Hypatia, who asked 
me to note this fact. 

"Mrs. Wriedt will hold a trumpet seance on Wednesday night, 
"7th inst. It will not be at Julia's Bureau, nor yet a public seance, 
"but in a private home of an interested party, and W. T. Stead 
"will be there, and so will a goodly number." Hypatia assured 
me that she will be there, and that if permitted to do so, will try 
to deliver my message through the trumpet. 

I had a sitting with medium Ripley on Sunday, 11th June, 1911, 
from 10.40 a. m. to 11.30 a. m. While the medium was again en- 
tranced, the intelligence Hypatia told me she was present at the 
seance ^n Wednesday evening last, 7th inst. as previously indi- 
cated, and saw W. T. Stead there, but the vibrations of the seance 
or circle, were not such as would enable her to complete her task. 
There were about twenty present. 

My next sitting with medium Ripley was on Sunday, June 18, 
1911, from 10 to 11 a. m. 

After a very brief preliminary talk, Hypatia said, "You are 
anxiously waiting to hear, if I have been able to deliver your 
message as yet, or whether I have made my presence realized. 
/ have met with partial success only. I have not yet delivered 
the test message though I have met and spoken with Mr. Stead, 



40 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

and told him who I was, and that I came to him at your request. 
Yes, he was told you were President of the Psychical Research 
Society. / hope to give the message as you wrote it very shortly. 
Conditions are improving; and when just right, I will have very 
little difficulty in giving it correctly/ 3 

All the foregoing evidential matter has been on this side of the 
Atlantic, or this end of the new line. Now remembering evidence 
and dates already presenting, let us note what comes to us through 
the post from the other end of the line. 



"THE REVIEW OF REVIEWS, 

Edited by W. T. Stead, 

Bank Buildings, Kingsway, 

London W. C, England, June 17, 1911. 
"Dear Doctor King: 

You will be interested to know the result of the test which you 
kindly proposed. I forgot all about your message. They (the 
Bureau) have been very crowded, since Mrs. Wriedt arrived, 
and it was not until we had had nearly three weeks' sittings, that 
on Wednesday night (14th inst.) to my surprise, I was hailed 
through the trumpet by Hypatia, who said she had a message 
from you to give me, mentioning your name. / had at that time 
not opened your sealed envelope, and I was therefore not aware 
what the message was which she had been given. I enclose you 
a copy of a shorthand note of what actually was said in this 
connection at this seance. (He had not complied with my sug- 
gestion as to three or four friends present including himself, 
which was by me intended to be a special circle while this was 
not such an one, J. S. K.). At the time when Hypatia came, I 
had completely forgotten her name, and connection with you, but 
on looking up the correspondence from you afterzvards, I found 
everything exactly as it was said. This is very good, although it 
has not been quite the success that you had hoped for. Will you 
write again and tell Hypatia to give another message, and send 
it to me in a sealed envelope ? I will say nothing to Mrs. Wriedt 
about it. 

Thanking you for your kindness, I am, 

Yours sincerely, 

W. T. Stead. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 41 

Enclosure, 

Extract from minutes of 

Julia's Circle, 14th June, 1911." 

"Extract from Shorthand Reported Minutes 
of Julia's Circle of 14th June, 1911." 

W. T. Stead. "Hypatia, this is the first time you have ever 
come to us. Thank you very much indeed. Do you wish to speak 
to me privately — I mean personally ?" 

Hypatia. "I come to you this evening, and I have a message 
for you. I come to you from my medium who so kindly wanted 
you to hear from me — Dr. King of Toronto — (to Mrs. Wriedt) 
and he wrote to Mr. Stead." 

Mrs. Wriedt. "He is President of the Psychical Research 
Society of Canada." 

Hypatia. Addressing W. T. Stead. "And you tell him I am 
doing all I can to help his wife, and also to help him." 

W. T. Stead. "Did he request you to come ?" 

Hypatia. "He did. Tell him I am so happy to see dear old 
Julia again in her tabernacle of spirit communion. I am very glad 
to be hem tonight, and wish your Mr. King success." (To Mr. K.) 
"You are a namesake of my medium in Toronto. I am most happy 
to congratulate you upon being a member of this Bureau, also 
the good gentleman (Mr. Peters) who will travel far and near. 
I wish you all successi and God bless you." (To W. T. Stead.) 
"The interview you had this morning will not be a useless one. 
It will be a very interesting one in the future." 

W. T. Stead. "Which interview do you refer to ?" 

Hypatia. "Sir Wilfred Laurier! Something good will develop." 

W. T. Stead. "It was a very pleasant talk." 

Voice. "God bless you — Good night." 

W. T. Stead was handed roses. 

Voice. "Conditions are very nice." 

W. T. Stead. "I will look up the letter from Dr. King of 
Toronto. He wrote to me some time ago." 

Note taken from a letter to Dr. King from W. T. Stead. 

"The conversation about Sir Wilfrid Laurier was very interest- 
ing. I had breakfasted with him that morning and had had a 
very interesting conversation with him, and I think that Hypatia 
is quite right in expecting that something good will develop." 

In compliance with the request of W. T. Stead, I have inaugur- 
ated a second test experiment of Transatlantic Spiritualistic Com- 



42 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

munication, the outcome of which will be made known when 
completed. 

Second Experiment 
[Note: — The second communication in this series from John 
S. King, M.D., President of the C. S. for P. R. to W. T. Stead, 
is a reply to Stead's letter.] 

"The Elliott House, 

Toronto, 28th June, 1911. 
My Dear Mr. Stead: 

Your letter and enclosure of 17th June reached me on Monday, 
26th June, 8 a. m., postal delivery. Though everything promised 
or attempted had not up to date been delivered, nevertheless there 
was encouraging evidential matter. By a reference to my first 
letter, you will perceive I made a suggestion regarding a special 
circle to receive my test message. Hypatia states that she was 
present before, on more than one occasion ; and told me you were 
present at one large circle where there were mostly men (a 
majority being men). She could not get conditions to suit her, 
nor proper opportunity on that occasion. She told me about the 
matter on Sunday, 18th June, and I think I sent you a copy of 
that record some time ago. 

Hypatia's reference to your interview with Laurier is, under 
existing circumstances, quite evidential in quality. Later on I 
may be able to confirm from my records in the past, other in- 
formation, and will be glad in the interest of truth, to do so on 
request by you. I shall await with deep interest the developments. 

Yours sincerely, 

John S. King." 

[Note: — The sealed letter and message, were enclosed with 
foregoing letter; and were not to be opened, until after Hypatia 
had communicated with W. T. Stead through a trumpet or other- 
wise. They immediately follow this note. J. S. K.] 

"The Canadian Society for Psychical Research, 
John S. King, M.D., Presdt., 

Elliott House, Toronto. 
Office Phone M. 235. Toronto, 5. 15 p. m., 

28th June, 1911. 
To Those Whom It May Concern, Greeting: 
To establish the validity of the claim that discarnate spirits 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 43 

can and do return to converse with mortals, (intercommunion of 
spirits carnate and discarnate) I am making- a strong and earnest 
request of Hypatia — (who claims she was the daughter of Theon 
of Alexandria, and therefore the veritable Neoplatonic philos- 
opher, who was cruelly murdered by a mob at Alexandria; and 
she also claims that she was and is to me a Spirit Guide), — to 
be good and kind enough to help to prove beyond all cavil, not 
only the continuity of life, but also the intercommunion between 
spirit and earth spheres ; and demonstrate her ability to not only 
commune with me, but likewise, conditions being favorable, to 
give audibly to W. T. Stead, Editor of "The Review of Reviews" 
London, England, through a trumpet or otherwise, a synopsis of 
the contents of this pronouncement, together with the test sentence 
in full, which I have written in red ink, before he (Mr. Stead) 
opens the envelope containing them; and if possible before he 
receives my letter containing the sealed envelope and test message. 

This entire statement is written by myself while absolutely 
alone in my office ; and without the knowledge of any living human 
being. On a previous occasion Hypatia consented and did make 
an effort, which I learn was partially successful, and which en- 
couraged the promise of success in the end. Hence this second 
trial. It does seem obvious that aside from the postal route of 
the message from my pen to W. T. Stead's hand, there are only 
two other modes by which the message can be carried to Mr. 
Stead in London. One is by the discarnate spirit Hypatia, the 
other by the incarnate spirit of myself. (The sub-conscious or 
subjective mind of my own incarnate spirit.) 

The completed message together with, this statement, will bear 
the date, hour and minute, Toronto time, of sealing up of both 
the envelopes, and their deposit in the post box. Being therefore 
in care of the postal authorities, it doubtless would not be opened 
before reaching Mr. W. T. Stead's hand, and therefore no chance 
would exist for the perpetration of fraud. If the test proves suc- 
cessful, I think the spiritual hypothesis will be the only hypothesis 
that will correctly account for the success of the test. 

My first message was *W a a t d o a 

[Note: — The above message is not made out for the test is 
not completed. It was in full in sealed envelope. J. S. K.] 

"The second message will fit into the first one, and is attached 
herewith. 
This test is made in all sincerity in the interests of truth. 

John S. King." 



44 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Second Spirit Test Message 

"Toronto, 5.15 p. m., 28th June, 1911. 
W. T. Stead, 

London, England. 
'A g r a p t d.' 

John S. King." 

[Note: — The above message is not made out for the test is 
not completed. It was in full in the sealed envelope, J, S. K.] 

This second message will fit into the first or preceding one. 

The Two Test Messages Combined, Form One Complete 

"W aatdoagaaerr 
a p t d." 

I had a sitting with medium Ripley on the 2nd July, 1911, 
10.15 to 11.15 a. m., at which the intelligence Hypatia spoke 
through the vocal organs of the entranced medium, and she 
claimed to have been with me when I was alone writing to Stead, 
and knew all I wrote in the letter, and influenced me to make 
certain statements, more particularly in deciding on the second 
test message in the make-up of the double test message; and will 
do her best to deliver it by the trumpet or in some other way as 
soon as she can. 

Subsequent to above date, I learned Mrs. Wriedt left England 
— that she went to Scotland and Wales — that she left for Amer- 
ica and therefore presumably Hypatia will have to use some other 
medium to get her message to W. T. Stead. 

I await in confidence the realization of her success in what she 
has undertaken to accomplish. 

This now completes the efforts made at this end of the line. 

[The Titanic disaster put an end to further effort. J. S. K.] 

Third Experiment, This Side of the Atlantic 

(A) 

Copy of a letter sent to Col. J. L. H. N of Province of 

Quebec (Canada), while in Toledo, Ohio. 

u Dear Col. N : 

I am sending you herewith an enclosed and sealed envelope, a 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 45 

copy of a letter, or special request addressed to my Guide; and 
left open on my table during the night, for her to peruse before 
I sealed and mailed it in my letter to you, thus to remain sealed 
until after Hypatia has spoken with or to you, with the purpose of 
creating evidence to prove the continuity of life, and the inter- 
communion between discarnate spirits and the human. 

I hope the conditions will prove satisfactory, and nothing hinder 
the existence of favorable intercommunion. 

Yours sincerely, 

John S. King. 
Toronto, Monday night, 
4th September, 191 1." 

(B) 

This is a copy from a draft of my request to my alleged Guide 
Hypatia, as written in my home in Toronto, Monday night, 4th 
September, 1911; and left on my office table during the night. 

"Hypatia, 

Dear One: — Kindly convey to Colonel N , my Quebec 

friend who called on me last evening (Sunday, September 3rd), 
my best wishes for a successful season with his Guide, at Brother 
Jonson's, while you assume your materialized form, letting him 
know you do so at my request, as a test. 

Sincerely, 

John S. King." 

(C) 

Following is a copy of a letter written by Colonel N. to me 
on the 8th September, 1911, and which reached me the follow- 
ing day. 

"Toledo, 8th September, 1911. 
Dear Dr. King: 

Just a line to say that last night at a public seance at Jonson's, 
I was favored by a visit of Hypatia as you predicted. What a 
magnificent and impressive presence ! I was so overcome that I 
cannot well recall her exact words : — I think a promise made to 
you, a desire to apprise you of her visit to me. A loving message 
to you, and the assurance of her continued assistance. 

She was beautifully gowned, on her head a species of diadem. 
She walked toward me from the cabinet as a queen. As 1 I per- 
ceived she was coming to me, I rose to meet her. She raised 



46 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

her hands signifying she could not be touched. She then spoke 

the measured sentences, which I imperfectly send you. 
* * * * * * * *"* * 

Yours sincerely and fraternally, 

J. L. H. N- 



[Note: — He was a frequent contributor to "Light," over an 
assumed name before this event; and was known by the Editor. 
J.S.K.] 



CHAPTER IX 

THE reader may question the context of hypnosis and 
psychical research phenomena proper; but be assured 
it is appropriate, as knowledge of hypnosis greatly 
simplifies the understanding of both mental and psychical 
phenomena, and in some instances makes clear the distinguishing 
feature between a psychologized person, and one controlled in 
trance state by discarnate spirit from the realms, and doubtless 
all psychical researchers sometimes come into contact with pseudo 
mediums, and psychologized persons, as well as genuine psychics. 
Want of space will not permit of my dealing in detail with hyp- 
nosis, though I will again refer briefly to it in a later chapter; 
but for the present will illustrate with a special feature case, 
differing from those usually met with, in that there is a similarity 
in some respects only, in the speaking phenomena, to that of a 
psychic controlled by a spirit, which may aid readers in their dif- 
ferential diagnosis between the two conditions of trance with 
spirit control, and unusual mental operation as a result of hypnotic 
suggestion. 

Mind functioning is by an objective portion of the mind, to- 
gether with a subjective portion, acting in unison, yet each with 
its own purpose to accomplish; and mind as a whole being an 
attribute of the spirit ego which is encompassed by an astral body 
of the same dimensions as the physical, and continues to serve the 
ego after it withdraws, which in some cases it may do temporarily ; 
but finally, or at the death of the physical body must do 
permanently. 

In the state of hypnotized subject, when the activities of the 
objective portion of the mind are made subjective, or cease func- 
tioning, the possibility develops for man's communion with the 
incarnate spirit of his subject through the subjective portion of 
the mind, and in that way, and by suggestion it — the spirit ego — 
may travel far or near in quest of certain definite knowledge 
asked for. This proven so, then may it not be true that centered 

47 



48 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

thought or strong desire, or prayer, may be sent forth from 
human, and reach by harmonious vibration or attunement, a 
desired discarnate ego, no matter howsoever far or near, for the 
soul or ego has the ability to acquire from external sources of 
available knowledge, entirely outside of present knowledge, at 
a distance near or far, as may be related to the physical body 
of that particular spirit ego. 

The evidence in support of this I present here. 

I introduce Case 3 of my record of hypnotic psychical phenom- 
ena, extracted from a talk given, as president, to the members of 
the Canadian Society for Psychical Research. I cite it as a case 
of incarnate spirit communion of my patient, with me, and by 
such spirit, power obtained, as the body sat on the same chair, 
with both eyes closed all the time, from my entrance till I secured 
exact and truthful information from her home in Massachusetts, 
hundreds of miles distant, and subsequently verified in detail in 
writing by her aunt in the home. The spirit being the incarnate 

spirit or ego of the living young woman E. B then serving 

time in a public institution. 

Following is the text of the recorded history of the case. 
Case 3. Hypnotic Psychical Phenomena. 

"A woman in a Toronto institution, about 26 years of age, under 

suggestion while in hypnosis, told me what her Aunt H was 

doing on that very day and at the very hour, and for a period 
of nearly fifteen minutes, in her own home in a town in a far 
off state of the American Union, talking rapidly and assigning 
reasons for preferring a different arrangement of the pictures, 

which her Aunt H was having cleaned and rearranged. She 

spoke as if addressing her Aunt and said, "Do be careful, or 
you will fall off that stepladder." She spoke of Annie, a little 
girl who came into the room where Aunt H was. She men- 
tioned a variety of changes that had been made or were being 
made in the arrangement of pictures on the wall, and of furniture 
in the rooms, while she was talking. A letter was immediately 
sent to her aunt, requesting a description in detail of what she 
was doing during the time specified, while her niece was in hypnotic 
state, who was there beside herself, and a variety of details of 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 49 

family or private nature. The letter received in reply confirmed 
what the niece had told us. I may say the woman in this case 
was constantly under supervision in the institution, and that the 

official lady who wrote to Aunt H and received her reply 

was the party who was present and made record of the facts as 
they occurred, or as the words fell from the lips of the subject. 
All correspondence from or to the residents of the institution, had 
to pass through this lady and she affirms that none passed at that 

time except her own, and the girl's Aunt H 's reply. In the 

reply letter received from the Aunt by this lady, the confirmation 
of what was recorded and the happenings as given in the Aunt's 
own words, were confirmed, the concluding portion of which is 
as follows: "I want to tell you that I was at the very time she 
told you, hanging pictures, and using a stepladder. I hung a lot 
of them and among them one of her, and I sat down and looked 
at it, and thought of her ; and little Annie was out and in, while 
I was at work." 

It would require several hours for me to give every detail of 
interest in this case, and to clearly illustrate the various features 
which present, suffice it to say that the two conditions, which for 
the present I will designate hypnotic clairvoyance and clair- 
audience, were distinctly established. I am not convinced that 
these terms best convey the true idea. It may be that while the 
natural, or rather physical senses, are in bondage as a result of 
the operation of hypnosis, the spiritual senses (or operations of 
the subjective mind) are liberated or unrestricted, or operate as 
a result of ego- power, or the incarnate spirit ; or possibly by the 
use of an ordinary latent sense, which may become active as the 
others become passive ; or fully exercised by the ego, when becom- 
ing discarnate, either alone or in connection with other new found 
faculties ; or lastly, and quite probably the information was secured 
by the flight of the spirit or ego to the home, aided by spirit 
guides, which has been proved to have been accomplished in some 
cases. 

Fuller particulars and some other features of this peculiarly 
interesting case I will now give as a conclusion to my talk on 
hypnosis. In preserving the facts for record, I must protect the 



50 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

identity of the individual personality, and she the subject shall 
therefore receive, or be known by, the fictitious initials of E — B — . 

E B was of fine figure, intellectual countenance, well 

educated, peculiar temperament, self-willed, strong-minded, some- 
what reckless, and had wandered from the path of propriety, and 
had met with kindred companionship in Canada; and ended that 
particular career by entering an educational and industrial institu- 
tion. It was while there I treated her for insomnia and other 
nervous conditions. This was done by placing her in hypnotic 
trance. It was by her own solicitation, endorsed by the strong 
request made to me, by her brother — a professional man — and 

her Aunt H and with the cognizance and approval of her 

mother, and with the presence and consent of the official lady 
who had her in charge in the institution, that I undertook to 
bring about a reformation of character. Her condition at times 
suggested a double personality. The chief point sought, aside 
from treating her by suggestive therapeutics, for insomnia and 
nervousness, was to eradicate the vicious tendency of her normal 
character ; and to establish a fixedness or stability of character on 
a higher plane of morality by psychical treatment. 

On the 8th of May, 1907, having with no loss of time placed 
E. B. in the somnambulistic stage of hypnosis, I addressed her as 
she sat before me in a chair near the official lady, who made 
record of her statements. 

I said, "You are shortly to leave us for your distant home. 
This change can be made an important epoch in your life ; anterior 
to this time and this event, there is much that is regretable ; and 
much that you fain would forget if you could. Before you is 
a life of credit and honor, or otherwise, as you choose to make it. 
The decision rests with yourself, and I shall be pleased if you 
will commit to writing your own resolution with reference thereto 
before we separate." 

No other suggestion was given on that occasion and no further 
word spoken at that time. Paper and pencil were on the desk at 
hand, and without any hesitancy, and without even opening her 
eyes even momentarily, she reached for the pencil and began 
writing at once the following, which was copied from the original 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 51 

which was given to her when leaving the institution with her 
aunt who came to meet her, and escort her home. 

"I do faithfully promise through or by the help of the 
Unseen yet Guiding Force that we call God, to hereafter 
refrain from doing or saying anything debasing, or grievous 
to any of my family or friends ; that the kind advice given 

me by Dr. King and Mrs. I will remember and adhere 

to, and be a help and comfort to my family and friends, and 
earn by so doing the respect and confidence of family, friends, 
and humanity." 

Signed E B . 

The foregoing "decision" was written rapidly and in a very 
fine style, the eyes meanwhile remaining closed. 

On the 9th May, 1907, we sat again and when in a similar 
hypnotic state she spoke as if inspired. Her remarks were as if 
delivered to people everywhere, that is in general, and her quota- 
tions from various writers and authors, and distinguished literary 
men, such as one would expect only from a scholar or literary 
character, and that they were accompanied by emotion was 
apparent as her face reddened, and the tears rolled down her 
cheeks. 

The official lady having E. B. in charge wrote to the aunt 
after my third treatment and in the course of her letter said: 
"You would have been greatly edified by everything E. said in 
her trance state. Her thoughts were beautiful and beautifully 
expressed. Among other things she then spoke of the great debt 
she owes all of you, speaking thus, 'Up to now, or quite recently, 
you could write across my life "failure." While I have failed 
with empty pockets, I have been benefited in experience. I feel 
like calling my creditors together and trying to pay back. I owe 
you, Mother, more than I can ever repay. You are the heaviest 
Creditor. I shall liquidate that debt. Don't press, Mother, don't 
foreclose. I'll be such a comfort, Mother, I'll pay your debt. 

M 's, I'll be companionable, I will make home so happy for 

him; when he has a home of his own, he can look back on the 
happy home here. Aunt H , our debt is too great to tackle I 



52 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

fear at all; but I will devote my life to you and Mother/" 
Our next sitting was on the 12th June, 1907, I had said to her 
that today's sitting might be the last we would have together. 
It was a short sitting; and while E. B. was in a deep stage of 
hypnosis, both eyes being closed, I asked her if there was any- 
thing she would like to say or write, when she reached for the 
paper and pencil and wrote what follows — "The cross-roads 
are before me, and I stand to choose my path. Strange to say I 
do not hesitate, for I can clearly discern the best road to walk 
upon. May be it's the narrowest, thereby not permitting any 
useless luggage of the past to accompany me. From this time 
forward I am going to walk that road, cost what it will, and 
when I return to those nearest and dearest to me, it well be with 
that resolution almost a reality, which will I trust in time become 
part of myself. I cannot do this in myself, yet I feel after seeing 
Dr. King that I could move mountains almost, and I feel sure 

that the good helpful influence he and Mrs have had over 

me will tell for good." 

Signed E, B , 

It was only on the day of departure from the Institution that 
E. B. was made aware of the resolutions she had made and signed, 
they being handed to her as she left 

Five years later, or in January, 1912, those in blood relationship 
with E. B. are inclined to the belief, that there is a permanent 
change in her character and habits, in accordance with the high 
ideals she herself had enunciated and signed on the foregoing 
occasions. 

Now I submit that had that woman been heard speaking as 
she did on the rostrum of a spiritual meeting in one of the halls 
or meeting places in this city, or any other place, she would have 
been designated by a large proportion of her auditors, sympa- 
thetically in accord with the spiritual philosophy, as a medium 
speaking under the inspiration of a discarnate spirit. It was 
simply her oivn inspiration, acting on a well-timed gentle sugges- 
tion, made to or through her subjective mind, and set in motion 
by her own incarnate spirit. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 53 

In this connection I may say I have the strong conviction that 
both clairvoyance or discernment of things in most persons, in- 
visible to the human eye, and clairaudience or hearing what is 
in most persons, inaudible to the human ear, are Jpirit senses still 
belonging to the ego, when it becomes discarnate; and that they 
must be recognized, as subconscious in the human. Though all 
possess these senses subjectively in human life, they are not 
usually recognized by the physical objectively ; but really are a 
part of the outfit of the incarnate spirit self, and ready for utility 
when it becomes discarnate. Its development in man is but a 
springing up from spirit in the subconscious self. This is evident 
but relatively rarely in normal life, and sometimes also happens 
as evidence in a deathbed declaration, just before the separation 
of spirit body from the earthly one. 



CHAPTER X 

I MAY premise for general information, that when I began 
my investigations of hypnotism, and hypnotic phenomena, 
some thirty years ago, I met with difficulties and discourage- 
ments which no longer exist. Fear of heterodoxical classification, 
by members of the medical profession, held back several of my 
confreres, who with myself desired to investigate, with a view 
to demonstrate its therapeutical advantages. For a few years 
there were none of my professional brethren with whom I could 
exchange experiences. At that time many persons asserted that 
hypnotism was either an hysterical condition, or more probably 
humbug; and that a medical man was in bad form, having any- 
thing to do with it; and that I was credulous enough to be 
deceived. I held a quiet tongue, and continued my investigations, 
and soon realized that I was well repaid for all the time spent in 
this unpopular line of research work, by the knowledge I was 
acquiring. But witness the wonderful change in individual and 
wide-spread knowledge ; and the strides made by science ; and the 
great advancement of public opinion, that has taken place during 
these years. Many members of my own profession, as well as 
the public, have come to the recognition of the truth or verity 
of hypnosis, and the momentous force and power of suggestion; 
and, realize from becoming more or less familiar with either its 
physiological, therapeutical, or psychical phenomena, that it has 
important uses and that they are able to give answer to the 
question "What good is it?" By study and experience they have 
demonstrated some of its practical utilities, as well as marked out 
new features for investigation. 

At the time above referred to, I rested under an obliquity, 
because I did believe, and desired to satisfy myself of the truth 
of my belief, by investigating the phenomena of hypnotism and 
power of suggestion. The psychical features of hypnosis a few 
years later, led me to other newer and more important investiga- 
tions into the psychical phenomena of spiritistic power ; and study 

54 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 55 

of the spiritual philosophy ; and consequently following close upon 
the obliquity which by my previous venture, I had brought upon 
myself, I found that not only strangers, but acquaintances, friends, 
and relations were alike in their attitude towards me; and each 
and all, including my professional brethren, continued heaping 
further and greater manifestations of disapproval upon me. Sug- 
gestions were not infrequent that I was showing some indications 
of a disordered mind, due to my proclivities for "ghost hunting." 
Others who had ventured to make investigations as to both of 
these classes of phenomena, feared for their reputations, and 
discontinued them ; while some of the self-wise ones, or members 
of the clan, would sneeringly allude to me, and were guilty of 
pseudology. So I soon found myself comparatively alone; but 
became more determined than ever to demonstrate the truth or 
falsity of those varied hypnotic and spiritistic phenomena which 
were claimed by the few to be verities, which my intuitions en- 
dorsed, while the masses who embraced orthodox views without 
proof, demonstration or even enquiry, as true, passed judgment 
and affirmed that such phenomena were not real, and were im- 
possible, or else creatures of imagination, or the production of 
fraud. From first to last I endeavored to be consistent, acting 
from self-satisfying integrity of motive. I felt competent to) 
thwart the shafts of obliquity aimed from all sides at me. I was" 
honest with myself, in the undertaking I had engaged in, to this 
extent at least, that while not discarding the faith and belief of 
my parents and ancestry, which I still possessed, nevertheless 
with hope and confidence, I sought for a confirmation of the 
evidences, which presented in the past, and are recorded among 
the other evidences found in the authoritatively accepted records 
of the old and new Testaments. 

The discovery of 'my ability to commune with the incarnate 
spirit of my fellow human being, an instance of which is found 
in the chapter on hypnotic psychic phenomena {see preceding 
chapter) ; and the establishment in my mind of the reasonable 
conjecture or intuition, that the same spirit continued in existence 
after dissolution of the body unimpaired, became one of my 
strongest incentives to prosecute my investigations after the spirit. 



56 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Ignoring all discouragements, and mostly singly and alone (save 
the last brief years when my wife joined me), and without either 
donation, endowment, or co-operation, I continued my investiga- 
tions until rewarded by the spirit guides, that led me to discover 
the brilliant and most valued "gem of truth," that so long had 
been hid from my view. 

I feel that this is the right place to recognize all those who have 
in the past so charitably bestowed their sympathy and pity upon 
their brother, (myself) who unlike themselves, was not content 
to profit solely by the results produced by the physical and mental 
activity of others; and who having accomplished something by 
his investigations, feels amply recompensed, for the time and 
energy bestowed, and money expended ; and thanks them for the 
stimulus which their attitude towards him supplied; and in 
acknowledgement of its influence reciprocates, by first demon- 
strating what he has accomplished ; and secondly thanking them 
for the undesigned aid, their attitude gave him, in strengthening 
his resolution and purpose. 

Upon reflection I believe it will be found, that most people who 
are in search of new or primary knowledge, have a lonely journey, 
and often a long one ; but above all an unsympathetic and unaided 
one. Some there are ready to belittle the project; others will dis- 
credit the projector; while the many exhibit indifference, or ques- 
tion the wisdom of it. "What good is it?" or "What good will 
it be?" are the questions one frequently hears. Each individual 
questioner considering it from his own point of view, as to 
whether or not of advantage to himself personally. 

The uninformed, if sincere in their inquiry, are entitled to know 
something of the purpose of psychical research, and whether or 
not it be like the finger post on the highway to indicate the direc- 
tion to be taken. When traveling we naturally want to know 
something of the terminus from the finger board ; the direction 
and nature of the road may be indicated, still we look for some 
one who is familiar with the locality, and can inform us as to 
details, or give us information that we feel is necessary to guide 
us. So when the question of "What good is it all?" was pro- 
pounded to the earliest astronomer, who through his instruments 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 57 

and various devices to be used, was peering into the great and 
boundless ethereal immensity overhead ; and who found in that as 
yet unknown distant location bright orbs, planets and myriads of 
stars, he could only say he was investigating; and after lapse of 
time he was doubtless asked by his halting fellow men ''Now 
that you have discovered these, what good is it?" He probably 
looked upon his interrogator, and answered with humility, "I 
cannot yet inform you. I am only started in my investigations ; 
but my intuitions and hopes are meeting with encouragement, 
that lead to a belief that I will yet reveal the answer to your 
question." We have lived to learn in our school day acquirement 
of knowledge, that the relationship of those orbs or suns, even 
the distant planetary systems, have not only their local uses, but 
are parts of one stupendous whole, and may contribute in some 
measure at least, to the conditions of existence upon our little 
grain of earth, designated world, which is a mere speck among 
the myriads that exist. 

Again Christopher Columbus, the great explorer, who in response 
to his intuitions and convictions, sought to demonstrate their 
reality, at first met with great opposition, and doubtless the ques- 
tion oft' repeated "What good is it?" or "You don't know where 
you're going, or where you'll land" was offered to discourage 
his proposed undertaking to sail out upon the unknown waters, 
in search of unknown land, hoping to meet unknown people. 
Nevertheless, in his isolation, with a select few helpers and follow- 
ers, he started with intrepid mien upon a sea whose extent he 
did not know, but craved to know, until his reward came, after 
earnest investigation, in the discovery of a mighty continent, 
peopled with another class of incarnate spirits; and doubtless 
with a soul-felt satisfaction to himself, on his return proclaimed 
his discoveries for the benefit of his fellow men, and the "good of 
it" has since developed. 

In more recent times it may be noted that Franklin, the kite- 
flying investigator of the air, discovered within the limits of his 
kite line, the existence of electricity. Those who were his ques- 
tioners then, as some would be today with their self-limited wis- 
dom, inquired "Now that you have found out by your kite flying 



58 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

that there is electricity in the air, what good is it ? — God created 
it for some purpose of His own, and you should not try to find 
out God's secrets." The epoch of time — limited on the one hand 
by Franklin and his experimental investigations, and on the other 
by the electrical wizard Edison, and Marconi the incarnate spirit, 
who not only sends invisible messages from continent to con- 
tinent, from a distributor to a receiver, but sends them through 
an invisible medium, capable of various degrees of vibrating 
motion, the possibility of which was questioned only a very few 
years ago by men of science, — is but brief. Co-existent with these 
are other almost equally notable electrical wizards, who are still 
engaged in the work of investigation; and who have developed 
the vast treasures of utility, not only in the air, but everywhere 
in creation, a power which is universally recognized and 
appreciated. 

Whatsoever the position and place assigned to individualized 
humanity on the earth plane, to each and all the question of the 
soul's future state, as being applicable to all, is the greatest ques- 
tion, and of the first and most momentous importance to the 
individual, of any question hitherto presented to the human mind, 
for the reason that its individual creation is the result of the 
Infinite's design, and for a purpose. 

The question of salvation, irrespective of plan or source of 
exposition, is one which mortal man is naturally directly interested 
in, has belief in, and has faith that provision exists for his in- 
clusion. Then what more natural to man than a desire to be 
absolutely sure without any misgivings, that his belief and faith 
are well founded? What more natural and what more justifiable 
than to think of the hereafter, and to question within one's own 
conscious self whether his faith and belief fully coincide with the 
occasional intuitions which appear to have contact with his reason, 
and from time to time impress it. And further, what more natural 
when placing the lifeless remains of parents, brothers, sisters, 
husband, wife, children, one by one, in their tenement of cold 
clay, than to raise the thoughts from the perishable, now deposited, 
to the imperishable ego, the individual personality or soul con- 
taining life, which has taken departure from the physical to — 



• DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 59 

where? And to question self whether that is the final parting 
from our loved ones, or whether we shall again meet them in the 
"sweet bye-and-bye ?" Or whether it be true that they are the angels 
hovering 'round; or whether there be continuity of family life, 
and association in spirit realms? 

The limitation year of the allotted span of three score years 
and ten, together with added years by reason of strength, covering 
infancy, childhood, youth and manhood, should be a period of 
life offering vantage ground, physically, mentally, and spiritually, 
to one in the fullest enjoyment of physical and mental health and 
strength, for investigation, weighing of evidence, reflection, and 
self-preparation for that approaching time, be the years few or 
many, when we shall know our destiny. It should at least prevent 
a thoughtless indifferent attitude, on any question pertaining to 
each individual unit in the universe, and more especially on the 
most important question to which any human being can give con- 
templation, the question of final destination, and the purpose or 
object of his individual existence. 

If scientists and learned men are justified in their inquiry into 
the origin, growth and development of human life, and who can 
deny their right, then am I and others not also as fully justified 
in our enquiry into life's continuity, and true destination? 

In other words it is recognized as legitimate to study conditions 
past, present and future, of earth, air and sea; and so I claim 
it is quite as legitimate to learn what we can of man in both time 
and eternity. It would seem unreasonable, useless, and folly that 
I should have ever had an individual existence if death of the 
body ends all. 

If there be no other answer to the question of "What is the 
good of psychic investigation?" or more properly speaking "What 
is the good or benefit of finding out that you can commune with 
spirits?" I affirm that if for no other reason, this is not only 
my answer, but my justification. . . . After I had proved by 
my investigations, that my loved ones, who are discarnate spirits, 
can come to me on thought waves, or by soul power, and by the 
aid of mediums, and have come, as sworn testimony declares in 
following pages of the book, not once but repeatedly by aid of 



60 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

guides and different mediums or instruments, not in a single 
instance, but through one phase and instrument (or medium), viz. : 
a trumpet phase and medium in one place ; a materializing phase 
and medium in another; and through a human-psychic-telephone 
and automatic medium in a third ; and proved and doubly proved 
their identity, and established their personality in each case by 
tests agreed upon during life, thus proving the truth; it must 
needs be to me and to others a solace and a comfort, and enhance 
my personal happiness during my remaining years, to know I 
can reunite with those loved ones who have passed out of the 
physical body, and into higher, purer, nobler realms where they 
claim they have found themselves in a more perfect condition of 
being, with environment and occupation best suited to their sev- 
eral existences ; where harmony and progression are stated to be 
of Heaven's eternal laws, and can and do, with favorable condi- 
tions existing, commune with me; and we will be enabled, each 
one of us, eventually to fulfil the future mission of our continued 
existence as a unit ego, in the great illimitable universe. 

It is my desire to have it well understood that I am not taking 
issue with, nor trying to controvert the attitude assumed by, nor 
discriminate against those who are wholly satisfied with faith and 
belief alone, however much they fail to agree in details ; but that 
I clearly and definitely state that my investigations have been 
pursued for fully twenty-five years, with a view to demonstrating 
my intuitions and belief to be true. I have presented circum- 
stantial evidence in the foregoing chapters; and am presenting 
direct evidence as addressed to the senses and conscious under- 
standing, in the chapters to follow, which I claim established their 
personality in each case by tests agreed upon in life, thus proving 
beyond all cavil in the special individual cases at least, not only 
continuity of life, but spirit return and spirit communion; and 
these special cases establish the probability of a general applica- 
tion of the claim. In this connection I may say the combination 
of the old and new Testament, commonly known as the Bible, 
apparently abounds in records of all phases of psychical phenom- 
ena. These evidences are either true or false. Old orthodoxy in 
its several organizations affirms and proclaims them all to have 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 61 

been true at the time. If biblical psychic manifestations are 
accepted now by faith and belief as facts, why should not psychic 
manifestations at the present time be so accepted? And if not, 
what reason exists for objecting to psychical research or investiga- 
tion to ascertain the truth? If these manifestations were facts in 
bible times (and I do not take issue with orthodoxy on that con- 
tention) how can orthodoxy deny the possibility in our day and 
generation of similar natural psychic occurrences as those of by- 
gone times ? Natural law does not cease to exist at the dictum of 
Ecclesiastical or any other earthly authority, and hence still exists, 
and is quite as real now as it could have been then. It would 
almost seem as if some persons were fearful lest some alleged 
facts should be proven by research methods to be true; or on the 
other hand that other alleged facts should be disproven. 

On entering upon my investigation I determined that I could, 
as any careful discerning person could, detect and expose fraud 
if it existed. The more minutely careful I became in the Moss 
series of investigations, the more I was baffled. I always had a 
belief or conviction, that spirits might still return, but spirit com- 
munion with earth folk appeared to be more or less improbable. 
My belief in the last respect was wrong, as has many a time been 
proved, not only in my case, but in the case of very many others. 

Knowledge More Valuable Than Belief 

Where is the man or woman who having attained maturity has 
not often noted the death and burial of a belief long cherished? 
Let any one look back over their life's record. They will find 
in it many, very many changes of opinion or belief ; and in some 
instances direct reversals of former beliefs. What has brought 
it about ? Knowledge gained. Let me give illustrations applicable 
to a generation or two ago. What would our grandparents have 
said if they had been told that by the aid of electricity messages 
would be sent from Washington to Paris, France; or from 
Toronto to London, England, after breakfast; and an answer 
received back before dinner ; when it had taken these same grand- 
parents six to eight weeks to make their trip across the Atlantic in 



62 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

a sailing vessel? If we had heard their reply, would it not most 
likely have been, "ridiculous, because it is impossible." 

In my own mundane experiences, like others whom I have 
known, early beliefs or disbeliefs have later been proven wrong 
by knowledge gained. The cable and telegraph enable us at the 
present time to communicate with others successfully; yet time 
and demonstration were required by their discoverers and pro- 
moters, before they were able to overcome disbelief in their possi- 
bilities, with absolute knowledge. 

So also in the case of Stephenson the Engineer, who first 
harnessed steam. Disbelief and ridicule were expressed freely by 
his countrymen, when he claimed he had invented an engine and 
discovered how he could propel it by steam. But he proved his 
assertions to be true. The present day universality of its applica- 
tion as a world-wide utility, in a great variety of ways, truly 
demonstrates it, for steam as a wonderful power, on a small scale, 
as well as in the stupendous engines, and mighty machinery 
operating in all civilized lands, or in the floating fortresses, or 
superdreadnoughts on all seas, thus proves the original, or former 
existing belief unreliable, when knowledge, from demonstration 
and observation, was in the same countrymen's possession. 

Many a person a few years ago, hearing it said that they could 
stand at one end of a wire, fifty, a hundred, or five hundred miles 
in length, and speak into an instrument attached to the wire, called 
a telephone, ask for and directly hold converse with an acquaintance 
or friend at the other end of the wire, and clearly distinguish, 
not only the language, but the very characteristics of the voice and 
peculiarity of expression beyond any doubt, would have shaken 
his wise head, indicating his ripe unbelief of the assertion, and 
had a clear conviction or belief that such a result was certainly 
impossible for many reasons, which were readily offered. Time 
brought with it practical experience. Investigation established 
the truth, hence that belief has had, along with many othp.r beliefs, 
its death and burial. What caused its death? Knowledge. 

In more recent years marconigrams were pronounced by scien- 
tists as impracticable or impossible, for they considered it quite 
impossible to send messages across the ocean without a wire ; but 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 63 

that belief has also been disposed of by the succeeding" universal 
knowledge that wireless messages are passing to and fro in all 
directions, over both land and sea. 

Well and truly has Edison been designated "wizard," because 
of the various electrical accomplishments he brought into existence. 
How could anyone previously thereto conceive it possible to per- 
fectly reproduce a "record" for preservation and future rendition 
of the human voice, in the speech of a great statesman, or the 
song of a vocal artist, when no person as yet had been able with 
the best endeavor to perfectly repeat or duplicate either, with like 
voice, tone and rendition, for even a brief few minutes, in the 
presence and judgment of a competent critic; and would not 
such disbelief seem well founded until knowledge of Edison's 
demonstration disproved that attitude? 

Likewise in the case of wireless telephone, moving pictures 
and many other discoveries, how easily knowledge dethrones 
previous belief, or disbelief. 

If we examine 'ourselves we find that our thoughts and beliefs 
have undergone wonderful change, from our childhood beliefs 
to our adult knowledge, in very many instances, as for example 
the toy balloon, held captive by a string in our youth, if allowed 
to escape, was carried higher in the air, and blown far away by 
the wind ; but then we believed its only use was for amusement, 
and could never be of practical utility, for air-ships could never 
carry passengers and navigate the air as ships upon the water do ; 
and yet only a little while ago a score or more people in a single 
airship are reported as riding through the air. Knowledge brought 
that airship to a perfection which enabled it to go hundreds of 
miles at a velocity doubling the speed of a railway train. When 
the youth reached manhood his thoughts and beliefs became 
altogether changed, for from the toy has been developed airships 
propelled by machinery, while some of them have changed to 
dreadnoughts and other warships comprising fleets, which engage 
in warfare with other fleets in the air, or on the sea as well as 
with earth's armies below them. So also knowledge, the outcome 
of investigation, has enabled men to construct boats for warfare 
of such utility that their destructive power can be employed by 



64 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

trained men within them, while in action on the surface of the 
ocean, or to escape destruction by the enemy, by diving beneath 
the surface for a definite time and escape pursuit, or even pursue 
the small boat, or that laden with human freight, and even attack 
the greatest dreadnought of war, and from its own submarine 
nearness deal that monster a wound sufficient to sink it. 

These foregoing phenomenal demonstrations of fact have been 
given during the world's greatest war. Belief in their possibility 
would have been discredited or considered chimerical, not many 
years ago, but at present day everybody knows it is so. Here 
again present knowledge supersedes in value previous belief enter- 
tained in the same human lifetime. 

In this volume is presented some of the many evidences which 
I have discovered and which I present as absolutely true, after 
many exacting and repeated tests and confirmations through dif- 
ferent mediums of varied phases ; and I am able therefore to claim 
with full confidence, that notwithstading any or many disbeliefs 
or declarations that what I offer the reader as truth is fiction, 
imagination, deception, fraudulent or impossible of realization, I 
am quite as sure of the results attained alone, and also in the 
presence of credible witnesses, from knowledge secured that 
continuity of the life of the human spirit ego, return of the same 
to earth, and communication with those in attunement with them 
is all true, as I am of my own existence. From past personal 
experience I now can state that it is easy for self-wise men, yet 
ignorant of psychic facts, to refer to those who know the truth 
and credit them with suspected gullibility in entertaining as 
feasible communication between spirits and humans. Doubting 
Thomases still continue numerous, even though scientists and 
psychical investigators in all lands are establishing psychic facts 
as truly as any other natural law. Psychical phenomena were com- 
mon in ancient times, and were recorded in the sacred book ; and 
accepted as true; though modern creedists exclude them from 
their present teachings without endorsing or condemning them 
or even admitting their modern existence. 

I am one, however, who dares to proclaim the "Dawn of the 
Awakened Mind" ; and am convinced we are at the beginning of 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 65 

a New Era, when spiritual knowledge will prevail, and spiritual 
power and influence will reign supreme; then error and false 
belief will give place to knowledge. 



CHAPTER XI 

CRITICS of every kind and grade, find it almost impossible 
to approach the question of psychic demonstration with- 
out bias ; and hence their mental sight is impaired, and 
their judgment perverted, when they encounter truth which they 
do not want to find. Psychics by inference as well as by affirma- 
tion are classified by unbelievers as fraudulent or hysterical, and 
darkness aids their deception. Critics ask, "Why are conditions 
made to favor the fraudulent?" "Why are they not such, and so?" 
I am prepared to admit that fraud or deceit seeks to pass as 
genuine sometimes in a seance room ; and sometimes in nearly 
every other group of persons; but even so, it gives value to the 
genuine. 

One must of necessity, when proceeding with an analysis of 
any particular phenomenon, and more especially when attempting 
to account for its existence by some definite hypothesis, well 
consider certain features in each case, which attain to a position 
demanding at least the best thought of the unbiased and impartial 
investigator. This holds good in the highest degree, especially 
in considering the spiritual hypothesis, as we cannot readily cite 
acceptable examples outside of those recorded in the Bible and 
Testament writings, which by general consent as well as by 
authority, are designated inspired writings. 

Is it not somewhat presumptuous for a man, whose capabilities 
are very limited, and whose powers at best are small, to formulate 
conditions for spirit communication, and expect spirit forces to 
act in harmony in producing the best results, while thus prevented 
through the ignorance of the human, from demonstrating in the 
best, or perhaps the only way ? As well might one expect to hear 
the choicest music from an instrument, capable in the highest 
degree of producing perfect harmony of sounds, for the cultured 
ear, after a mechanic had changed the keys, wires or tubes, with 
a desire to test the player, and hear whether he could now so 
play, as to prove himself a music artist. 

66 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 67 

The difficulty in dealing with the spiritualistic hypothesis is due 
to our lack of knowledge of the conditions necessary to the pro- 
duction of what is designated spiritual phenomena. When con- 
ditions necessary are present, the phenomena are successfully 
presented. If the necessary conditions are not present, there will 
be no spiritistic phenomena. The conditions essential must in the 
natural order of things be harmonious. In a seance a skeptic, or 
strong opponent of spiritualism, or one who asserts that the in- 
habitants of the spirit realms cannot by spirit form or in any other 
way, present themselves to a single individual, in the seance, 
composed of few or many, by such attitude supplies the ingredient 
called discord, which destroys harmony, and likewise destroys all 
chance of contributing conditions so essential to the production 
of successful phenomena. To illustrate my meaning, take the 
perfect or phenomenal production of Verdi's Requiem by the two 
hundred and thirty members of the Toronto Mendelssohn Choir 
in New York City, which a representative musician considered 
so successful, that no chorus in that city at that time could hope 
to rival its achievement; and allow that only two per cent, of 
discordant voices were heard in that same choir, still it would 
have destroyed all possibility of such a result as was demonstrated 
according to the witness who spoke his authoritative judgment. 

But no matter what hypothesis we may select to account for the 
production of the phenomena, we must in all fairness admit that 
certain conditions must exist in order to obtain certain results. 
The importance of giving further consideration to this question 
will doubtless be recognized. The relations existing between 
conditions and results is that of a permanent equation. No matter 
what the equation represents, it will be found that its parts bear 
harmonious and perfect relationship the one to the other. Let 
us both reflect and investigate, that we may intelligently establish 
the verity or falsity of this claim. 

Will it not be admitted that the success or failure of everything 
in our everyday human experience of results, is conceded to be 
dependent upon conditions? Everything in nature and in art, 
presents different results," or different aspects, under different con- 
ditions. An abundant harvest of grain is conditional upon richness 



68 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

of soil, suitable cultivation, good healthy matured seed, sown or 
planted at a favorable time in advantageous location, with soil 
suitably drained, sufficient heat and moisture, sunshine and dark- 
ness. If .the conditions are not favorable, poor crops or no crops 
is the result. A grain of corn or wheat may have remained a 
century or longer in an hermetically sealed jar, — and it would 
neither grow nor decay. Take such a grain out, and plant it in 
the soil, so that it may have the advantages of the already named 
conditions, and in the course of a very short time, "In the silence" 
and "in the dark," its spirit energy promotes its physical unfold- 
ment, and it begins the attainment of certain results, which were 
unattainable without the favorable conditions. It reaches for 
sustenance, and growth is attained, and reproduction follows. 
In the air-tight jar there were no conditions favorable to growth, 
and hence no results of growth. The conditions have everything 
to do with results, in the quality or perfection sought, by the 
careful selection and mate-ing in the inbreeding for perfec- 
tion of animals. Favorable conditions, under natural laws, are 
essential in every chemical action. In such action when certain 
results are desired, certain conditions must exist. If the strings 
or wires of a musical instrument are not properly attuned, discord 
of sounds rather than music results. All the conditions must be 
favorable to insure success. In the case of anticipated conversa- 
tion with a friend far or near, by means of a telephone, the 
slightest impairment of the essential conditions, prevents the result 
naturally desired. Specific knowledge, therefore, is necessary to 
provide the essential conditions, to secure the favorable, or in 
this instance, the desired results. In many cases, given the con- 
ditions fully, our experience will enable us to predict results; 
and vice versa, the results being known to us, we may from our 
habits of investigation, premise what the conditions were. 
While this is true to a limited extent, and with reference to 
matters pertaining to the limitations of practical experience, it is 
because man has learned the operation of many natural laws; 
and works along the line of his knowledge of, and experience 
with such natural law. When man runs counter to such laws 
or seeks to create results by attempting to make conditions which 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 69 

are out of harmony with natural law, he fails to create or produce 
the results. 

We may fairly assume that although physical life has a beginning 
and an ending on the physical plane, that individualized spiritual life 
begins cotemporaneously with the physical, as an evolvement from 
the Infinite Spirit energy, and varies in degree of unfoldment of 
abilities in not only races of men, but in the individuals of any 
race, which unfoldment is progressive and ever continuous; and 
hence the individual accumulates knowledge from experience in 
the physical body ; and subsequently from spiritual sources when 
disembodied. 

Now with reference to spiritual phenomena, or results of cer- 
tain first causes and favorable conditions, man who is still in 
bondage to ecclesiasticism, naturally denies their origin and insists 
upon making his own conditions; and with an absence of the 
results, proves to his own satisfaction, that he has definitely 
established the existence of fraud or deceit ; or on the other hand, 
shown what was claimed as fact, to be impossible. As well might 
we expect rapturous, soul-stirring music from a large choir, which 
included a few voices ignorant of the music, and wholly out of 
harmony with the others, as to expect successful spiritual phenom- 
ena to present to a circle of friends, in whose midst there were 
several who objected to the existing conditions, who charged the 
medium with trying to practice fraud, and who put themselves in 
an antagonistic frame of mind, thus contributing discord, which 
would break up harmonious vibrations. 

The skeptics' questions have been so long utilized that they 
are universally familar, viz. : Why do these phenomena occur in 
the dark? Why don't they occur in a well lighted room, or in 
daylight, anywhere, at any time, whether there is a medium or 
not? The inference sought to be established is that darkness is 
preferred to enable deception to be practised. Well and profitably 
might the skeptical questioners^ take time to reflect, to ascertain 
whether it may not be, and probably is a fact, that darkness con- 
tributes most advantageously to conditions favoring the operation 
of natural laws; and that this is almost, if not quite universally 
true in nature ; and that investigation will lead to the discovery, 



70 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

that it is a law of nature that conception, occurs in the stillness 
or quietude and in darkness; and the young of the human race 
and of animals, have their beginning, formation, development and 
spirit influx, in the stillness and darkness of the womb till ripe 
for birth. The same conditions and stillness are included among 
the necessary conditions for the grain and seed to result in growth 
and reproduction of their kind, as I have already pointed out. 
The conditions of life, whether animal or vegetable, would fail 
to be perpetuated, were it not a law of Infinite Wisdom, which is 
another name for Law of Nature, to permit rest in order to 
recuperate energy. Continuous condition of sunshine, or con- 
tinuous condition of darkness, without interruption, would pro- 
duce disastrous results ; as much so as would continuous heat, or 
continuous cold ; continuous drouth, or continuous rain. With a 
multiplicity of human experiences in the darkness and in the light, 
with every known precaution against fraud, by the clear-headed, 
cautious, intelligent investigators, as well as scientists of the 
highest standing, to prevent fraud, to discover truth, the most 
wonderful phenomena continue to be recorded from time to time ; 
and still the skeptic enquires, "Why can't these phenomena be 
produced without the presence of a medium?" Our answer is, 
for the same reason that electricity cannot be utilized without 
suitable conditions and a medium ; or the heat and light from the 
sun cannot be received and appropriated by our earth except there 
be essential conditions, and a medium of communication ; or the 
daily events of the civilized world cannot be collated and spread 
before our eyes in the daily newspaper, without a variety of 
essential conditions, and a medium, — the printing press. Neither 
can you use your 'phone successfully without a centraB office, to 
connect you with the 'phone you want. 

While human beings may seem ordinarily able to control the 
conditions, in order to bring about certain results, it must not be 
forgotten, that all conditions must have for their existence, and 
all results for their attainment, some governing influence; and 
that everything that is, even life itself, and its continuance, must 
be in accord with the intention and will of the Infinite Spirit or 
first cause, which is an All-seeing, All-wise, Everywhere present, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 71 

All-powerful energy, and utilizes its own conditions for producing 
spiritual phenomena. And is it not a reasonable conclusion that 
the Infinite form and existence is Universal Spirit, permeating 
all things, developing its innumerable conditions, and manifesta- 
tions of the animal and vegetable kingdoms, and more or less 
latent, so far as we can judge in the mineral kingdom ; in fact, 
in all matter of whatsoever kind and form? How else can it be 
that regularity is everywhere constant in the various processes of 
nature, even in the molecular arrangement of so-termed inanimate 
matter? Latent energy has a source. Does not the molecular 
action in chemical changes prove the presence of a hitherto latent 
energy, or force dependent on something more than mere chance 
for its manifestation? It is a calculable condition, with an effect 
or result, of something regular in its purpose, and so regular as 
to be termed a natural law? And if it be a law, there must be a 
law-maker ; and the power of the law-maker must be in contact 
with every ultimate molecular portion of that which is effected 
by it. Does it not occur to the mind that it is probably the correct 
conclusion, that in the molecular disposition of power, primitive 
power, we have the Universal Spirit or Infinite Intelligent Energy ? 
Where else shall we look for the power? And is not our spirit 
entity, a partaker in some measure of the attributes of the Infinite 
and Universal Spirit? Is not the spirit portion of our individual 
existence working upon every molecular portion of our physical 
personality an understandable condition ? How else shall we com- 
prehend the physical functions of the body, such as digestion, 
assimilation, secretion, circulation, development or growth and 
decay, none of which are under the control of the organism, nor 
amenable to the objective or physical senses? If the brain organ- 
ism or machine operates, it does so as the result of some power, 
in the same way that the engine propels the machinery of a large 
factory, but only when the power, whether electricity or steam, 
(in man the incarnate spirit acting through the objective or sub- 
jective mind) , is applied to its working. And is it not a reasonable 
conclusion to arrive at, that the spiritual part of our existence 
is from the Infinite ? And a portion of his Universal Spirit , and 
should have, to some extent at least, the attribute of ability to 



72 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

utilize the physical part of our existence for its present purposes, 
though not able by the physical senses to comprehend, or at least 
to control, such as I have mentioned ? Most phenomena ultimately 
come to be viewed as the result of the operation of natural laws, 
and it appears reasonably probable, and at least undeniable, that 
all operations in nature, animate and inanimate, as ordinarily 
classified, are in accord with natural laws ; if we had the knowl- 
edge and wisdom to understand them. If our spirit entity has 
the power to control, through the subjective mind, outside of 
our ordinary consciousness, the various functions and processes 
above alluded to in the body in which it governs, why should it 
be difficult for that same spirit, when freed from the confines of 
the physical body, to control molecules of matter and accumulate 
energy, and form a likeness to that body; and to utilize for the 
time being the body so formed? Or again, what is to prevent 
that disembodied spirit exerting influence on the embodied spirit 
of another? In those suggested conditions, we have what 
spiritualists term materialization. and spirit control. 

The human mind can comprehend that evolution of man as a 
duality (body and spirit) is for somd wise purpose; and that the 
embodiment of the spirit, for a term of earthly experience, the 
better fits the spirit for its subsequent development and participa- 
tion in some of the attributes of the universal and All- wise Spirit 
power. Where there is life there is evolution, and in the case of 
the human life there is continuity of life for the real ego; and 
the Infinite utilizes the spirit egos as angels. He gives them 
charge concerning men. He employs ministering angels. He 
sends angel visitants to man. All of which, in His infinite wisdom, 
and by His all-wise power, may be done now as in the past, for 
the instruction and guidance of members of the human race. His 
ways and means of convincing men by signs and wonders, and 
physical, mental and spiritual phenomena are not necessarily new, 
but in keeping with scriptural records; though ecclesiastical in- 
fluence will seek to establish a human made gateway of entrance 
to Heaven, the Orthodox Church. 



CHAPTER XII 

[Note : — The Author feels that each reader, to appreciate their 
full import, should most carefully read chapters twelve and 
twenty-nine consecutively. Chapter twelve must of necessity be 
read for proper understanding of all succeeding chapters in which 
"May" expresses her thoughts ; but may, with advantage, be read 
a second time, before beginning to read chapter twenty-nine. The 
former is written by the Author; and the latter — the reply, is 
by his spirit wife. The rhyming, grammar, words and sentences 
of the reply are shaped, by the instrument (the medium), but not 
by her normal self. The reason for this is stated elsewhere. It 
matters not what personality makes use of her, it rhymes in places 
when read, and is euphonious.] 

THESE chapters are essential to the book, and will be 
found to be a guide in the consideration of the evidential 
matter, not only in the November 1911 series of seances, 
including both trumpet and materialization, but also, and most 
generally since, and with the addition of the new instrument, Miss 
Maud Venice Gates, "the Human-Psychic-Telephone," as well as 
in the April series of 1912, at J. B. Jonson's, and on other occa- 
sions, for reasons that will be obvious to the reader. I feel sure, 
that owing to the* exceptional nature of their contents, they will 
be accepted as a justification for their presentation; and at the 
same time, will be considered as a memorial acknowledgment of 
proof offered by my spirit wife ; and that she kept a momentous 
promise, and thus has aided me in proving true, the hope of 
human life, its continuity, and the further fact established, of 
terrestrial and celestial communion, by strong evidence presented 
in many chapters of the book. 

May E. King, my beloved wife, my ever kind and affectionate 
life partner, my daily and almost hourly companion, for a quarter 
of a century, my true love and pal, in whom I could and did 
confide, passed from the physical to spirit realms on the 29th of 
September, 1911, in her 47th year. Hereafter in the chapters to 
follow this one, I shall use her daily name "May," (by her 

73 



74 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

approval), as I was wont to do when she was with me in physical 
life ; and as her f intimates and relatives were accustomed to call 
her. Her home private pet name during her last illness was 
"Babe," — which I fondly bestowed upon her while she was in 
a dependent condition during her frequent illnesses, at intervals 
which extended over a period of nearly four years, — while 
officiating in my triple capacity of physician, nurse and husband, 
until the closing days of her suffering and sickness. 

When I returned from my London, Ontario, spiritistic inves- 
tigations in 1894, I found my wife nearly distracted, from the 
number and variety of the questions received by her over the 
'phone, by personal calls, and by letters from her own and my 
acquaintances, as well as by representatives of the press; and 
some, among all of them, of course were most desirous of know- 
ing, if I were really "going insane," extended their sympathy to 
her, and hoped that I could be prevailed upon to have nothing 
more to do with such unnatural things, as no good could come 
out of it. The press reporters also wanted all they could get for 
news, or for sensational reading, from one who was so well known 
as a professional man, and as a former newspaper man. Nights 
without sleep, and days without food, and the threatened loss of 
my prestige and our means of livelihood, well-nigh wrecked her 
physical and mental health at that time; and seemingly created 
a chronic uneasiness, and want of confidence for a time; but an 
extended recess in the research work resulted in the bringing 
about of a period of calm and contentment. 

In the year 1905, some eleven years later, sufficient change had 
been wrought in her mind, that she could admit to me that there 
had been much change in personal and public sentiment ; and raised 
no objection to my visiting the famous resort of the spiritualists, 
Lily Dale, which I did in August of that year. Two years later 
she designed a trip to that same place with me, and though I had 
carefully refrained from inviting her, I expressed my pleasure 
when she intimated her desire of going with me. Opportunity 
was presented to attend several seances with a party of a dozen 
of our relatives and friends. She saw and talked (at two separate 
seances, and two different mediums) with the materialized form 




THE AUTHOR'S WIFE, MAY E. KING, 

(At the Age of 47.) 

"THE KEY THAT UNLOCKED THE MYSTERY.' 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 75 

of Egyptia, who alleged to me in London thirteen years previously, 
that she was my guardian spirit ; and she also on many different 
occasions there and at other places saw and conversed with that 
beautiful embodied guiding spirit Hypatia, who succeeded in 
winning her to a thorough conviction of new realities; and satis- 
fied her, that there, were more verities than fictions or illusions, 
in these seances. 

When the Canadian Society for Psychical Research was 
organized, under a charter obtained from the Government in 
March, 1908, my wife willingly consented to my acceptance of 
the office and responsibilities of President, while she identified 
herself with full membership by undergoing the ballot, and being 
regularly and legally accepted ; and from that time on, so far as 
her health would permit, took an active interest in its meetings, 
which as the membership could testify, she much appreciated as 
long as its activities lasted, which was until her own passing to 
spirit realm. 

With the knowledge of the truth gained by us both, through 
spiritual teachings by the angelic messengers, our guides and 
aiders, who came to us in reality of form and voice; and which 
we had repeated experiences of, and profited by, as psychical 
researchers, with our motto ever in mind "Search, prove, and 
declare the truth," and therefore we knew that wherever and 
whenever the door (or way) is opened by earth friends, and 
welcome extended the spirit loved ones, they- will enter. We like- 
wise knew that in earth life of whatsoever grade, class or attain- 
ment; whether the personnel of governments and parliaments, 
churches and assemblies, societies and groups of individuals and 
alleged friends, we are liable sooner or later to be deceived by 
them. No mentally well balanced person will extend full confidence 
to anyone, and fully accept and welcome such as a friend, until 
he or she has had time to 'try the man'. So too the advice long 
since given is good, "try the spirit," it is the proper thing to do. 

There existed a strong bond of affection between my wife and 
myself, and the lasting impression made upon her by the minister- 
ing spirit Hypatia, gave her full confidence that once in spirit 



76 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

sphere it is possible to return to earth, when an interest is centered 
on loved ones still remaining there. 

My wife and I frequently discussed, among- the very many 
interesting matters of psychic character, how best we could estab- 
lish for each other's personal advantage and satisfaction, the 
proof of our individual human personality, which would be un- 
assailable and convincing. Some weeks before her very" last 
illness, we again seriously considered and decided, what her in- 
dividual test, and my individual test, would be. 

"May," my wife, had acquired the habit of always calling me 
(whether in company or in privacy), "Doctor." A few short 
years ago she adopted a variety of nicknames, which she invariably 
humorously interpreted and applied in good-natured way, which 
were adapted to certain conditions ; or bearing relations tO' some 
of my habits, that for instance of smoking. She would exclaim, 
"Oh Johnnie Smoker! you make the curtains black; and you 
perfume the house with your tobacco." And so with other names 
for other habits, but always spoken good-naturedly. Some years 
ago or at the end of the year 1907, I ceased to use tobacco, and 
had not smoked even once after (until left without a companion). 
Her practice when alone, of calling me 'J onn m e Smoker' when 
she wanted me had become so strongly a habit, that thoughtlessly 
she would call me 'J onnme Smoker,' even after my cessation 
of the indulgence. Having told her that was not my name 
any more, as I did not smoke now, she dropped the word 
"Smoker" and called me "Johnnie," only however when we were 
alone. 

On the other hand I simultaneously and humorously responded 
to her initiative, and adopted various names or appellations for 
her, suggested by some habit, peculiarity, faculty, condition or. 
association. I also had pet names for her, as she had for me, 
which we only used when with each other alone. She was out 
of health as I have said, more or less for the last four years of 
her earth life ; and had passed through two serious illnesses before 
the last one, which resulted in the final dissolution. During her 
last illness, I officiated more fully as nurse than I did as doctor, 
scarcely leaving her ; and in lifting or changing her, or administer- 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 77 

ing to her suffering or wants, would call her by endearing designa- 
tions, such as "Dear," "Darling" or "Babe." What then more 
natural, because it would be more specific and convincing, in 
selecting some discarnate test, than to adopt some such private 
or personal expression peculiarly our own, in home life only, 
and unknown to others ? So it was easily decided what our test 
names were to be after separation by dissolution of the body, of 
either of us; if it should be we continued to live on in spirit 
realms, and were permitted and found ourselves able to return. 

If I passed away first and returned, I was to partially prove 
my human personality, by speaking her test name "Babe"; and 
partially by private or personal matters, unknown to those outside 
of ourselves. 

If she passed away first and returned, she was to partially 
prove her human personality by speaking my test name "Johnnie," 
and partially by private or personal matters, unknown to those 
outside of ourselves. 

These appellations or designations were unknown to other 
parties. It was likewise understood, that the personal or private 
matter, was to be taken in connection with some event of a per- 
sonal or individual character; or an act or interest, that was 
known to us both, but not known to others, and would in such 
way strengthen the evidence in favor of the personality of the 
one returning, its value depending upon its truthfulness, or its 
existence as a fact, and a matter of exclusive knowledge to our- 
selves alone. At the same time the selection thereof must not 
in either case be agreed upon in earth) life ; and must be chosen 
from facts or circumstances, which may have occurred before the 
incarnate spirit became discarnate; or something that had 
occurred since, and which the returning discarnate spirit could 
not possibly have known as an incarnate spirit on that account; 
and which was known only to the survivor of the two, the sole 
idea being, that to prove the identity in the return of the in- 
dividual spirit, something should be stated that could not be 
stated, by any other person, from that other person's knowledge, 
nor in accord with the habit or manner of expression; and con- 
sistent with the general line of action and character, of the partner 



78 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

first becoming discarnate. These shades of differences in modes 
of tests have their values in evidence secured. 

In the case of an etherealization or materialization, then acts 
as well as words would be considered evidential, on the one hand 
to establish the verity and personality of the individual existence ; 
while on the other hand each act, look, and word would form 
evidence for or against the claimant for recognition, to which in 
each instance would be added, if in materialized form, that exact- 
ness of appearance, voice, and language, which could no more be 
doubted, than it could in human life, in the home association; 
and where lives the husband or the wife, who could be accused 
of making a mistake in the personality of their life partner, while 
looking at and talking with the form presenting as that life 
partner, if it was not that partner? 

I venture to say that psychical researchers would never as 
readily accept as evidence of returning spirit, or of a particular 
human form or personality in a communicating intelligence seen 
or unseen, as would be accepted by an ordinary police magistrate, 
or presiding judge. In a Court of Justice, — or rather a court of 
law — a witness swears that such or so, as he asserts, is the case, 
and his statement is presumably evidential; while researchers 
demand proof to convince that it cannot possibly by mistake or 
otherwise, be anything else, or any other person, or any other 
case or fact than as stated ; and let it not be forgotten the public 
will accept on statement or publication generally, when the source 
or origin is respectable, — yes and are satisfied to accept by faith 
and belief alone, yet will deny that privilege to psychical 
researchers, when psychic presentations or demonstrations of 
great or small extent are considered, and even deny the truth 
of their evidence, if it does not harmonize with, or become parallel 
to their own existing beliefs. 

This is not to be wondered at when we reflect upon the fact, 
that almost universally young children have implicit faith and 
belief in everything their parents say or do, as being so ; and their 
unbounded faith in their parents' ability to do almost anything. 
Do they not retire on Christmas Eve, in the full belief, that Santa 
Claus, a non-resident of their home, who comes from where they 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 79 

do not know, will call and leave them a present during their 
slumbers, if they have "tried to ba good," because their parents 
told them so ? And as they became older children, did not they grow 
up Protestants, because their parents were Protestants ; or became 
Catholics, because their parents were, and most generally followed 
in the political footsteps of their father, and in the exercise of 
their franchise ? The exceptions to this only prove the rule. 

After a number of discussions along the foregoing lines, we 
each jointly and individually adopted our proof tests, as specially 
indicated in this same chapter, to enable us to establish our human 
personality, little thinking that only a few short weeks would 
elapse, ere one of us would have our opportunity present for 
identification, by establishing our own personality, and making 
the proofs of our continued existence so strong, as to defy any 
effort to destroy them. 

After twenty years of my own and four years of my wife's 
earnest, patient, critical research work, our reward has come at 
last, though it was not consummated until she who had been my 
most devoted and zealous co-worker, had passed to that sphere 
where spiritual discernment gave her the opportunity which had 
long been previously discussed, to comprehend and bring about, 
she in the spirit, and I in the earth sphere, the conclusive proofs 
such as are presented in the following chapters, which we stood 
in need of, and which but seldom are arranged for in detail, as 
in our case, before it is too late, by which to establish without a 
single lingering doubt, 1st, Continuity of life; 2nd, Spirit return; 
and 3rd, Spirit communion. 



CHAPTER XIII 

AS AN introduction to the medium Mrs. Etta Wriedt, I 
may say that I first met her at a Moss seance, in London, 
Ontario, in 1894, and since then, have had very many 
sittings with her for investigation ; as well as communicating with 
guides, relatives and friends. I had hoped to print the medium's 
picture in my book, and along with it, a short sketch of her life ; 
but she informed me, in reply to my request, that "I never had 
a photo taken; since I was a little girl; and as to my life being 
printed, I don't really care for it. Let people remember me as 
they knew me. My life is of no interest to investigators. My 
work speaks for itself. I was born in New York State, but lived 
most of my life in Ohio, and am now here." (In Detroit, Mich.) 
To revert to the object of my visit, I will here state that a few 
weeks after the passing over of my wife, my guide Hypatia — 
speaking through the entranced medium Mrs. Ripley, utilized 
previously (see Chapter VIII), told me to go to Mrs. Wriedt in 
Detroit, Michigan, on November 11, 1911; and (prediction) she 
would bring to me,- May my spirit wife, who would be able to 
speak with me through the trumpet; and to also go to Jonson's 
in Toledo, Ohio, where she hoped by then, to have May show 
herself there in a materialized body, and converse with me. I 
acted accordingly, and have made record of it. I was fortunate 
in having in this series no less than seven seances, in two different 
states, and of two different phases, which were closely connected 
in the features of time, and of their joint production, of strong 
evidential matter; as also the advantage of alternation, and ex- 
clusion of opportunity, for co-operation between the instruments. 
I may here say, by way of explanation, that of the seven seances, 
comprising the November series, the first and second held on the 
twelfth and thirteenth, as well as the sixth and seventh held on 
the eighteenth and nineteenth of the month, were trumpet seances ; 
and were held in Mrs. Etta Wriedt's seance room, in the city of 
Detroit, and State of Michigan. Three of the series, viz.: the 

80 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 81 

third, fourth and fifth, were materializing seances with conversa- 
tions, and were held in Mr. J. B. Jonson's seance room, in Toledo, 
State of Ohio, on the thirteenth, fifteenth and sixteenth of Novem- 
ber. In this manner, and by this plan, results are more convincing ; 
and as a consequence, there was a remarkable connection of direct 
evidence, first developed in the two sittings with Mrs. Wriedt in 
Detroit, followed by a continuance of that evidence, and some 
entirely new, at the three succeeding seances, at Jonson's in 
Toledo, and then concluded at the remaining two at Mrs. Wriedt's. 

I had my first sitting, of about forty-five minutes, on Sunday, 
12th November, 1911, begining at 2.45 p.m., and with, to me, 
direct and most convincing evidence, that May's ante-mortem 
promises were being, on this her first opportunity, most faithfully 
fulfilled, and in a manner wholly satisfactory 44 days after death 
of her body; and consider it to be, both the strongest and most 
conclusive I could get — which would endorse our agreement — 
from May, my lately departed wife, who passed to spirit realms 
on the 29th September, 1911, after an unconscious state lasting 
nine days. She talked with me for fully fifteen minutes in this 
sitting. 

The first intelligence to address me in the seance was the alleged 
Guide of Mrs. Wriedt, viz. : Dr. Sharp who referred to my loss, 
and my wife's gain. He pointed out that I could not do much 
for the departed spirit, but that it could do much for me; that 
my worrying and fretting, or sorrowing, would only tend to 
hinder or delay her progress or advancement. He also advised 
me to take care of myself, told me that Hypatia, my spirit guide, 
was here with her, and would speak with me. (Prediction.) 

The next voice claimed to be that of Dr. McC , who passed 

out of the flesh at Toronto some years ago. I said I remembered 

that there was a Dr. McC , but that I was not personally 

acquainted with him. He replied "I was about your age, and 
about your time. You are Dr. J. S. King of Church Street, 
ain't you?" My reply was "Yes." 

The third intelligence that spoke said ""Well, Uncle John, how 
are you?" 

Instead of answering him directly I enquired: 



82 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND^ 

"Who are you?" 

The Voice: "I am your nephew." 

J. S. K.: "Which nephew?" 

The Voice: "Jesse." 

Mrs. Wriedt : "Dr., is that your brother's son?" 

J. S. K. : "My brother had a son Jesse." 

Mrs. Wriedt : "Jesse, how does the Hamilton Spiritual Society 
progress ?" 

Jesse: "Not very well, there is too much wrangling among 
the membership." 

Jesse : "Say Uncle John, your worry makes Auntie May worry. 

I want to tell you that the party you know who I 

mean, don't you?" 

J. S. K. : "Yes, Jesse." 

Jesse: "Well, he expected that you would die before Auntie 
would, and then there might have been a chance to try and get 

but he was disappointed and wonders what you are 

going to do. Auntie wants me to tell you not to give 

your money, nor the other party your or money, but 

take care of them and of yourself. Strangers think more of you, 
and will do more for you, than some of your relatives who want 

what you've got. Now Uncle John, don't tell anything 

you know, or anything I tell you " 

[Note: — For reasons which will be readily apparent the very 
convincing evidential matter, which directly connects with per- 
sonal, private, and family events, I am unable to make public by 
recording all the conversation. — The Author.] 

Jesse went on talking, the synopsis of it being that his Auntie 
May wished me not to give her rings and trinkets away, till she 
told me what to do with them, and the other things that I kept. 
He said she would try and talk with me if she could, but as her 
tongue and throat were paralyzed before she passed out (a fact), 
she might find it a little difficult to speak as yet, clearly enough 
for me to hear her distinctly ; and she had asked him, to tell me 
those things in case she could not make me understand. 

The fourth intelligence announced herself as Hypatia, the one 
who at my request visited and conversed with Wm. T. Stead, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 83 

in London (see Chap. VIII), and to those who read the succeed- 
ing chapters the name will become familiar. She has for years 
alleged that she is my spirit guide. She announced that she had 
brought May with her, and that May would herself speak with 
me. Hypatia, as usual, gave me advice and instruction; and 
informed me that May and she would also meet me at Jonson's 
seance in Toledo ; and that she, Hypatia, would return to me 
at Jonson's seance, the rose I gave her nearly two years ago 
(prediction), to be kept by her for a good period of time, and 
returned to me ; and said I would also receive while at Mr. Jon- 
son's home a great surprise. (Prediction.) 

The fifth and last voice communicating at this seance, was 
alleged to be, and I need no longer say alleged, for I believe it 
was my wife, for I now know; for a truth, it was the one who 
has been the nearest and dearest to me, the one who had promised 
that if ever she could, and if permitted, would according to our 
mutual agreement of a few weeks ago, help to prove her person- 
ality, and thereby the continuity of life, spirit return, and com- 
munion between her spirit discarnate, and myself. It proved to 
be my own May, whom I had not expected to do much in the 
way of talking after what Jesse had said, but as she proceeded 
her voice assumed a human naturalness, increased in volume 
and in strength, and soon was adjusted in pitch or tone, until it 
sounded as familiar, and life-like to me, as I had been accustomed 
to hear it when she spoke with me, in life, in our home, or over 
the 'phone. (A fulfillment.) 

True to her ante-mortem promise, her momentous test of her 
human personality, came with force, power, and evident satisfac- 
tion, her first utterances being "Johnnie!" "Oh Johnnie!" "My 
dear Johnnie!" "It's I!" "It's May!" "It's your 'Babe'!" "I am 
not dead, I am alive." "I told you I would come if I could, and 
I am here." (Fulfillment.) 

From what Jesse had said I expected to hear a weak voice. 
My joy and satisfaction therefore at her success, and my ex- 
pression of appreciation of her effort, seemed to give her strength 
and encouragement, and throughout the fifteen or more minutes, 
occupied with our conversation, she frequently repeated the name 



84 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

"Johnnie" both with and without the qualifying adjective, inter- 
mingled with various endearing, and pet names, that she was 
accustomed to use in her every-day life; still "Johnnie" was 
evidently so often repeated to impress me deeply, with the fact 
that it was the test name previously selected, by which to identify 
herself. (A fulfillment) She told me that she could not alone have 
succeeded in coming, and talking with me, but Hypatia had helped 
her very much, and sq had Jesse helped her. She was glad that 
by the help of others, she could speak with me, and said among 
other expressions, "Oh my dear, I miss you so much ; you were so 
kind to me always, and I loved you so much. I cannot help my 
feelings, I miss you so much. Yes, I know now that it was all 
for the best for me to go first. I am happy ; I am free from pain 
and suffering now, and I can be near you still. It was better than 
for me to be left. I want you to stay on independently where 
you are. I don't want you to be beholding to anybody, but attend 
to your engagements as usual; and spend your money in caring 
for yourself. / am satisfied with the way you disposed of my 
things. (Evidential.) Dont part with my watch, diamonds, rings, 
jewelry, and things that you put in the safety deposit vault at the 
bank." (Strong evidence.) (I had only placed them there on 
Friday, as I left the city on Saturday morning, and held this 
conversation on Sunday afternoon.) "Don't give my diamond 

earrings to E (a relative) as she is careless and would lose 

them (good evidence). I will tell you from time to time how to 
dispose of those things. When you go home I want you to get 
my single diamond ring out of the vault. You can take the stone 
out, and have it set in a safety scarf pin, so you can wear it 
without losing it, and get the good of it. Be careful to take the 
diamond to an honest jeweler, for it would be easy to slip a less 
valuable stone in its place, and you could hardly tell the dif- 
ference." (Strong evidence connecting with more about the pin 
in Chapter XXVI. J. S. K.) She then became more earnest and 
said, "Don't make a will. Give away whatever you wish to give 
away of what you possess, and to the persons whom you wish to 
have it, and the same with your money during your life ; and do 
not let anybody have a claim on anything, except what you gave 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 85 

them in your life time as a clear gift; and put away or leave 
enough of your money to provide for yourself in your old age, 
and set aside enough to give you burial. I cannot keep house 
for you any more, my darling, but I can be, and I will be, with 
you to help you all the time." (All good evidence.) 

She asked me to send word to her mother, that she was able 
to come back and talk. I asked her if she would like her mother 
to come and speak with her some time, and she replied "Yes," 
which was followed twice by the sound of kissing. 

She also asked me to give her thanks to M for the part 

she took in preparing her body for the casket (true). She talked 
as naturally about these things as she ever conversed with me 
in her home life, and she was always known as a shrewd business 
woman. When I said that her efforts had exceeded my fondest, 
and most sanguine expectations, she said encouragingly, "I will 
materialize for you at Toledo, and I will speak with you there, 
while in my materialized body. (Prediction.) Good-bye!" 

I give to readers the foregoing details, as being a sample of 
the evidence I got, and all she said appealed to me as true. I 1 do 
not hesitate, but say this is the kind of evidence, "the home-life 
kind," which brings conviction home to man, and makes him 
know it's true ; and that no criticism can upset it, nor hypothesis 
account for it, except the one. Readers may watch for future 
evidence, and for fulfillment of predictions, for there is much 
more to come. 

I felt sure that May's earthly promise would be fulfilled, and 
further that when accomplished, the proof of the truth in that 
single instance, would establish the probability of its general 
application to the human race, and if so, the wholesale and retail 
dealers in every variety of hypotheses, save and except the 
Spiritual hypothesis, would have to sacrifice their entire stock in 
trade, and re-invest in what must needs be the source and supply 
for all nations, tongues, and peoples, which will satisfy the soul's 
hunger, development, and perfection, and change humanity's in- 
harmonious vibrations, into one grand and universal harmonious 
vibration of peace and good will among mankind, and all shall 



86 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

then recognize the fatherhood of God, and the true brotherhood 
of man, and live the life thatj they profess. 

Before the seance was over Hypatia again spoke, and said, 
"I will give you back the rose at Toledo (prediction) ; but we 
will have a surprise in store for you besides." (Prediction.) 

Dr. Sharp, Mrs. Wriedt's Guide, in reply to my invitation, 
that he call and see me on the occasion to which Hypatia and 
May alluded, said, "I will materialize in the cabinet, step out, 
and put my hand on your head to let you know that it is me." 
(Prediction.) 

This seance lasted for three-quarters of an hour, and I can no 
longer doubt, for I am confident without a remaining shade of 
doubt, that I have established by strong evidence the truth of 
the continuity of life, spirit return, and spirit communication. 

This report and chapter were completed as soon as seance was 
ended, from notes taken during the seance. 

My comment and my argument upon the evidence in this, and 
in each of the seven seances embraced in the November, 1911, 
series are here deferred, and will appear after the seventh seance 
in a chapter wholly devoted to 1 that purpose. 

[Before leaving this chapter, I will ask the reader to carefully 
examine the evidence of May, so far as it is recorded, and also 
from time to time, and see if it be not truly in accord with the 
plan mutually agreed upon, (and as embraced in Chapter XII, 
which I claim to be the psychic key, that enabled us together, to 
unlock the mystery.] 



CHAPTER XIV 

MY SECOND sitting of this series, with Mrs. Wriedt in 
Detroit, was held on Monday, 13th November 1911, 
between 9 and 10 a. m. in the same seance room as on 
the previous occasion. As I sat expecting to hear the voice of 
Dr. Sharp, Mrs. Wriedt's guide, who usually opens and closes 
the seance, I had the unexpected view of an old grey-haired lady 
wearing a. black cap. She looked at me but did not speak. She 
bore some resemblance in features to my own mother ; but I could 
not declare it a true likeness ; but it was almost as clear to vision 
as in an ordinarily lighted room. The creation showed the head 
and face and very little more, the black darkness of the room 
made it stand out very distinctly. The same face appeared later 
in the evening. Mrs. Wriedt considered it an; etherialized face, 
though she said she could not see it, the first time it appeared, 
nor when Jesse appeared ; and claimed it might be a clairvoyant 
vision, as I saw it, and she could not, when I spoke of seeing it 
so distinctly. The view was! not held for more than a full half 
minute I should judge, and presented on my front and right, the 
opposite side to the medium. 

The second personality to present showed the face of a young 
man, a few feet to the front of me, while he (Jesse) spoke 
through the trumpet, and said, "Good Morning, Uncle John, it's 
Jesse." He referred to a statement of five pages I had written, 
after making my record of the first seance; and which I had 
designated by the headings or jottings after the seance, in which 
I addressed it to May, selecting what I considered proofs of 
May's human personality. It was written with lead pencil, and 
left exposed on the table, separated so that each written page was 
uncovered, and in fulU view in the parlor below. Jesse told me 
that Auntie May had seen and read it, and didn't want family 
or private matters made public. I assured him that I would 
respect her wish; and no names would be mentioned, and that 
there would be nothing said that would prove injudicious, or 

87 



88 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

worry anybody. He said he was helping Auntie all he could, and 
so was Hypatia. 

Dr. Sharp came next and complimented me upon my speech 
last evening, when there was a gathering of fourteen persons 
present ; and conditions were not favorable for the production of 
phenomena (true). 

May came again and said for the second time, "I am going to 
be with you, and go with you to Toledo; and am going to 
materialize there, and speak to you also, while in my materialized 
body. (Prediction.) She gave her kisses for me in smacks 
through the trumpet. One instance here of evidential matter I 
must give, as follows : 

J. S. K. : "May, can you tell Mrs. Wriedt what present you 
gave me last Christmas Day?" 

May: "I had a grip made for the Doctor's instruments, and 
had, his initials, J. *S\ K., printed in gold letters on the outside; 
and a Christmas card with printed greetings and written on by 
myself, which card I placed on the inside) of the grip. He found 
it on his chair at breakfast time." (Absolutely correct.) 

[Note : — At this very time I had that card in my pocket diary, 
though I could not give from memory what was written on the 
card. The following is what was upon it, viz. : "With best wishes 
for a Merry Christmas" (in red and black print) and "May life, 
health and happiness grip you for years to come, so long as a 
shred of this grip lasts." (The writing was by her own hand.) 
J.S.K.] 

It strikes me very forcibly and convincingly that this is about 
as strong circumstantial evidence, as one is likely to find, if it is 
not direct evidence, in support/ of the personality of May., Another 
query in my mind was — had May read the memoranda of proofs 
on the table downstairs, as referred to by Jesse — when she 
gleefully informed me "I not only have some of my ordinary 
senses which have been quickened or become more acute, but 
I can now read or know your thoughts," and she told me in 
response to the question in my mind, and not yet expressed, that 
she had read what I had written, and that it was all right, but 
that she did not want private or family matters made public. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 89 

She next made a repetition of the promise or prediction, that she 
would be able to materialize, and talk also, at Jonson's ; and would 
be with me all the time, and humorously remarked that she could 
go as a little parcel in my grip to Toledo, and laughed. This 
promise or prediction is made the second time. 

May also told me that she communicates ^with me while! I am 
in bed sleeping. This I interpret as follows: 

[May is a discarnate spirit; I am an incarnate spirit. During 
sleep the objective portion of my mind ceases activity, and hence 
the subjective portion of my mind, which never ceases function- 
ing, in addition to its own regular activities assumes those of the 
objective portion, utilizing the spirit senses instead of those 
usually called physical, and by so doing can register the conversa- 
tion in my life record.] 

May also makes a promise or prediction that she will again 
commune with me, during my wake state, and impress me, while 
present by spirit sense functioning. And granted that she fulfills 
her promise complete, then which of all the listed hypotheses 
adopted, in any or all lands, will account for it, outside of the 
spiritual hypothesis? Here I avow my knowledge, and say that 
I not only believe and have faith that she will" do as she has 
promised, but my intuitions endorse my faith and belief; and I 
await in confidence the result, because I know, that it is the spirit 
of May that speaks. 

It is but right that I should at this time, premise, for the in- 
formation of all concerned, that May was better informed along 
psychical lines than most women. She had knowledge acquired 
from the many papers and discussions by fellow members of the 
Canadian Society for Psychical Research, practical experience 
from her association with my work in that line, from her 
attendance at trumpet seances — the very first of which was 
under the same medium, Mrs. Wriedt, and Dr. Sharp, her guide, 
probably ten years previous to this seance — as well as other 
similar experiences ; at seances with materialization and mediums, 
Effre Moss, Nichols, and J. B. Jonson, at Lily Dale in 1907, and 
several times with J. B. Jonson, since. This experience had quali- 
fied her to comprehend her postmortem condition, and the oppor- 



90 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

tunities afforded her; and being met at this stage, by the very 
spirit Hypatia, who first brought conviction to her conscious 
understanding in 1907; and met her as she claims on her entry 
into spirit realms, and became for the immediate time her guardian 
spirit and teacher. Thus securing her aid, she made close con- 
nection with me, through the very spirit who claims to be my 
chief spirit guide, on the first opportunity presenting. This in- 
formation, and other as well, is the assurance I have received 
from May herself, elsewhere recorded; and coming as it does 
confirms knowledge similar in character, which I received through 
a trance medium, controlled by Hypatia, it seems that with that 
knowledge possessed by her, and the knowledge also that she 
passed away in the belief that she would be able to find ways 
and means of returning to the one from whom there was enforced 
severance, but made the desire all the stronger to return. 

Returning now to the seance, the very next to greet me was 
the intelligence Hypatia, who has in preceding chapters established 
her capabilities, her intelligence, her loyalty to truth and to 
promise. On this occasion as on many others she bid me "Good 
Morning" and next repeated two beautiful poems of her own 
composition, one addressed to the Lilies of the Valley upon the 
table at my side, and the other as a toast. In addition to this 
treat she again intimated that I would get a great surprise at 
Toledo. 

I next received a pleasant surprise, in hearing the voice of my 
alleged old-time friend MacRoberts, at whose residence in Lon- 
don, in 1894, I had my first series of materializing phenomena, 
associated with the mediumship of, the late Mrs. Efne Moss, where 
an intelligence claiming to be Egyptia presented herself to me 
as an Egyptian Princess, who also claimed then to be my guardian 
spirit, and who figured very prominently in connection with my 
investigations at the MacRoberts home, as detailed in early 
chapters of this book, and continuously ever since, embracing the 
present time. On the previous Saturday evening an assemblage 
of fourteen had gathered in the seance room ; but owing to the 
absence of favorable conditions, or due to causes unknown to me, 
there were no communications or phenomena. I was requested 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 91 

by Mrs. Wriedt to address those present, which I did. The 
intelligence MacRoberts chanced to be present while I was speak- 
ing, so he subsequently made this call, and told me he was pleased 
with what I said. 

Dr. Sharp, a wonderful personality, and the guide for many 
years of Mrs. Wriedt, intervened to close the seance, and repeated 
his promise to be at Jonson's, and would, materialize. 



CHAPTER XV 

I LEFT Detroit Monday afternoon, 13th November, 1911, by 
trolley, arriving on the same day in Toledo. I called at the 
Jonson residence soon after seven o'clock in the evening, 
and chatted pleasantly with Mrs. and Mr. Jonson, until the arrival 

of Mrs. H , her two daughters, and a gentleman friend, which 

four were to have a private seance with Mr. Jonson. I was invited 
to join them, and I promptly accepted the invitation. 

Investigation of the Cabinet and the Medium 

On this occasion as on every other previous one that I have 
visited Jonson, and participated in these materializing seances, all 
present were invited to investigate or examine the so-called 
cabinet, and approaches to or adjoining it, which I had done 
before; and on two occasions did so in connection with another 
member of the Canadian Society for Psychical Research, these 
latter seances the special two, being conducted under test condi- 
tions, in a house other than his home. On one! occasion an officer 
of our society reported that he sat in the cabinet with Jonson, 
part of the time during the seance, and that Jonson was in a 
trance state, of lethargy or deep sleep. On the present occasion 
the cabinet consisted of one corner of the upstair room, square 
in shape, the height being from floor to ceiling, two of the walls 
the natural walls of the room, and the other two, temporized 
partitions, completing the cabinet or room, with two separating 
curtains for doorway of entrance to, or exit from the room or 
cabinet ; and no other discernible opening or place for one, could 
be discovered in the walls, ceiling or floor. On the inside was 
an ordinary arm chair, a small stand for flowers, papered walls, 
bare floor, unbroken ceiling, no window except one in the wall 
off to our left, to which the front wall or partition of the cabinet 
extended, dividing the window from top to bottom, so that a 
section of -it a few inches wide, would be on the inside of the 

92 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 93 

cabinet, and a section outside of the cabinet visible to the sitters, 
leaving a space too narrow to permit a person to crowd their 
body through, and all visible above the floor, so that no one could 
enter through the window without the sitters being aware of the 
fact; and to reach the window from the outside a person would 
require a ladder long enough to reach the second storey. Nor 
was there a door to the cabinet, except that improvised one, 
formed by curtains on the side next the sitters. 

As noticed at the different seances, Jonson spends a part of the 
sittings seated with the sitters in the semi-circle or curved row 
of seats ; a part of the time walking along in front of the sitters ; 
and a part of the time inside the cabinet. Mrs. Jonson sat off 
to my right, when she did sit, but she was on the move most 
of the time, either winding the movement of the music box, or 
tending the stove, answering questions of sitters, or meeting the 
forms after they came out of the cabinet ; or those which formed 
outside of the cabinet and moved about the room. 

I had on more than one occasion seen the most wonderful 
results, after to me satisfactory test conditions had been imposed, 
and Jonson's body found to< be covered only by a dark woolen 
shirt, and a dark pair of pants. 

I cannot claim to be a neophyte, nor should I be so classed, 
for I have been a researcher in hypnotism and spiritualism, for 
many years; and can fairly claim to have discovered but one or 
two bold attempts at fraudulent work in either of the lines I was 
engaged in. " 

I had nevertheless had more frequent occasion to regret the 
premature appearance in public, of eager psychic aspirants for 
approbation, long before a mature development of their psychic 
qualities. It will not, I trust, be considered egotistical to claim 
that I feel myself to be, from, long and varied experience, quite 
competent to distinguish between the fraudulent and the genuine ; 
or to discern the status or grade of the individual psychic instru- 
ment, for my sympathy is always with the striving student, rather 
than with the acknowledged graduate. 

Reverting once more to the cabinet, the medium, and the devel- 
opments at this seance, I with the others examined the room, 



94 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

utilized as a cabinet; and had a look at the medium Jonson in 
ordinary clothing, as he sat with the rest o! the people in the 
circle. 

Mrs. H., her daughters, and friend, and myself, together with 
Mrs. J. B. Jonson, constituted a circle of six people. After! they 
each had a visitor from the cabinet, the predicted event of May 
materializing and conversing with me, — as having been definitely 
made, as late as this very morning in Detroit, through the trumpet 
in Mrs. Wriedt's seance, — actually took place (fulfillment), and 
was not only intensely interesting and convincing to me, but even 
more so than anything which had previously transpired in this 
series. May stepped out of the cabinet with a degree of confidence, 
and greeted me in the stipulated manner (fulfillment), adding 
"It's I," "I'm May," "I told you I would be here," and with that 
joyful "welcome home" look on her countenance, that had oft- 
times greeted me in her home and mine, in days gone by, slapped 
me on my left shoulder with her right hand, put her right arm 
around my neck, pressed her left cheek against mine, and said, 
"You will come here oftener than you used to, now, won't you? 
Oh I am so glad I can talk with you; andl I want you to come 
here oftener, so I can materialize and talk with you. I am so 
happy now to find myself alive, and able to talk with you still. 
Hypatia and others help me so much, and I get stronger each 
time I come. I can't stay any longer now." (Fulfillment of 
promise complete.) 

As I stood looking at her she got shorter and shorter in stature, 
and while still looking me in the face, she went down and down, 
in sight of all the sitters, till she disappeared in the floor. Her 
voice in this, her first materialization, was not as strong as when 
speaking through the trumpet at Mrs. Wriedt's. 

I here desire to say that May's physical form as materialized, 
was not as large as her physical form in life, in other words 
while perfectly natural in appearance in other respects, still it 
was not of full natural stature. This fault or deficiency may be 
rectified in her future appearances, the first of which will be 
according to promise at Wednesday night's seance, 15th Novem- 
ber. In her natural size in life, she stood about two inches shorter 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 95 

than myself, and her weight averaged about one hundred and 
sixty-five pounds before she took to bed. 

A third materialization came from the cabinet to me, and 
claimed to be David Williams King, my brother, who passed to 
spirit life while a baby, not more than eighteen months old. He 
was born three years after my birth, and three years before my 
living brother's birth, and in size appeared to be an average 
between my living brother and myself. He said he was with 
very many relatives and friends who were present when May 
entered the spirit realms. He soon passed away from want of 
power to hold his form together, but presently returned to tell 
me he knew that my spirit guide, Hypatia, would be at Wednes- 
day night's seance. 

Another manifestation came from the cabinet in the form of 
a young, beautiful, and angelic female, which proved to be im- 
portant, inasmuch asi it was the form of a young woman about 
twenty years of age, and corresponding size, who alleged she was 
my daughter by my spirit wife May and bore resemblance to us 
both ; and had passed to spirit realms at her physical birth ; and 
promised (prediction) she would be able to speak more clearly 
and distinctly through the trumpet when opportunity presented, 
at which time, unless she had some other privilege sooner, she 
would tell me (prediction) the name given her in the spirit 
world. The fact is that some twenty years ago a female child 
of ours died at birth. 

This occult demonstration in the seance presents to the reader's 
mind the problem of attained spiritual growth, where an infant 
soul has passed on to the other life, and returns as an adult 
demonstration. The question has been submitted verbally to me 
more than once, "Do you really mean to say that infants and 
small children attain to adult existence in spirit life?" In answer 
I may say that I have been so informed by communicating in- 
telligences from the spirit} spheres. But I also think, and I am 
guided by that reason that Deity has implanted in me, and so 
realize the meaning of the words that Christ used when he said, 
"Suffer little children to come unto me, for of such is the King- 
dom of heaven." I do not take the meaning as literal, as to size 



96 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

or stature, for it would surely be unthinkable, if after all the 
teaching and preaching during the past centuries, it were found 
to be true that no souls of adults had gone to heaven; or that 
there were no adult souls to save ; but rather it would seem, as it is 
conveyed to my mind, that all are as little children in their knowl- 
edge of their future state, and have to be taught by those who 
have gained by long experience "over there." Even adults, and 
those bereft of reason, when entering on the future state, begin 
to acquire knowledge, or start, so to speak, at No. 1, helpless as 
babes bereft of mother; and are cared for, and are taught, for 
progression is a law in spirit spheres. If it were not so there 
would be stagnation in development, and souls would cease to 
aspire. Every human being changes in both soul and body from 
the cradle to the grave. All are wholly dependent at the start 
on a mother, real or foster; and all have a limitation of physical 
development in earth life for an allotted time; and in accord 
with the soul's requirement. Each infant child, and every man, 
has a soul which utilizes a body, which changes continually as 
the soul develops till the end of mortal life; and when the body 
is no longer of service, whether young or old, it is discarded, 
and the soul is set free ; and like its former body, has a limitation 
to attain, and hence develops to its perfection by slow degrees. 
As in a juvenile or ordinary school, all the while there are little 
children there, but the same little children are not there all the 
while ; for as mental development takes place, they each pass on 
through other grades of mental and physical development till they 
reach man's estate on earth; while in the future life each soul 
attains its own perfected growth, and when it adopts the human 
form, that form would simply be of the dimensions it would 
have been, had it developed as did the soul, during those selfsame 
years, or lived during those added years. 

From the storehouse of acquired evidence we take that which 
sustains the claim that human life as spirit is a continuity, and 
therefore an infant spirit which enters the spirit sphere must con- 
tinue to develop until it completes its spirit growth, and becomes 
a perfected soul. This it will accomplish more rapidly than when 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 97 

fettered or confined in the environment of physical matter, its 
first and cruder abode. 

Reverting again to the seance and to the phenomena: Up to 
this point I felt I had had a great share of what presented, but 
I was destined to have more, for a man with auburn hair, a 
small moustache and short beard of the same color, a dark coat, 
white turn-down collar, black tie, advanced to me and bowed; 
and put his finger to his throat and mouth to indicate that he 
could not speak, for the person he represented himself to be could 
not speak before death, on account of tuberculosis in the throat 
and lungs. He impressed me as being Mr. H — - — , who a few 
years ago was the storekeeper at an Institution in Toronto, at 
which I was, and am at this writing, the medical officer. I identi- 
fied him as the party mentioned above. 

I would estimate the number of materializations at this seance 
as about twenty. 

Unbelievable Phenomena, Become Believable by 
Investigation and Experience 
How natural for people of inexperience to judge or criticize 
the experience of others, and point out its failures. How easy 
it is for one ignorant of the knowledge, to assume that the 
knowledge is deficient of genuine existence. Supreme pity is 
deserved by the ignorant mortal, who cannot accept as true some- 
thing that he does not happen to have knowledge of and how 
prone individual humanity is to affirm the impossibility of such 
phenomena, as mentioned by those who have knowledge of them. 
How common a remark it is that we hear, "I would not believe it 
unless I saw it, and then I would want to be sure it was not a 
fraud." What a minute array of humanity there would be, if it 
were to be composed of people who would not believe something, 
unless they could see it, and as a matter of fact it is substantially 
true, that the great bulk of our knowledge comes from what 
other people tell us, what we read in books, and the public press ; 
and what a minimum of knowledge we have acquired from in- 
vestigation, and individual observation. I remember reading 
somewhere of a person who would not believe what another had 



98 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

stated to be a fact, unless he could appreciate it with all his senses, 
and having presented to him the opportunity of being tested in 
that way regarding pain, was asked if he could see it, hear it, 
taste it, smell it. No, but he could feel it. In brief he could 
only appreciate it by one-fifth of his normal senses, and he would 
certainly come far short in proving it to be a truth by his five 
senses, and yet he accepted that pain as true by sense of feeling 
only. I am prepared to admit that many phenomena are so 
strange, and incomprehensible, that they seem unbelievable until 
they have been appreciated or experienced by physical senses. 
I mention some such phenomena that have occurred at seances, 
and will limit the examples to the three Jonson seances on the 
13th, 15th, and 16th of November, 1911, which were appreciated, 
and can be testified to, on those occasions by from six to fifteen 
people at each seance. 

As examples of these classes of phenomena to which I have 
alluded, I was witness to a form of a full grown tall old man 
walking about the room, while Jonson sat with the other sitters 
outside of the cabinet in view of every one present; and that 
form talked with those who> claimed to be relatives and with 
myself, and at the request of one of them he picked up his 
little granddaughter of seven years of age, held her up in his 
arms, kissed her, then put her down on the floor, in full view of 
everybody, then melted, so to speak, down into the floor, and 
disappeared from view, several feet from the cabinet entrance. 
Now had there been a bold rush to catch the body and it had 
succeeded, it would not have been, as we are so often assured, 
the medium in disguise, for Mr. Jonson sat in an armchair on 
my left, and was neither near the opening of the cabinet, nor 
near the form. But even mosquito netting, which has been so 
often suggested, by some who never have investigated, as very 
necessary or useful to catch the fraudulent persons who pretended 
to be spirits, could not have caught or held this spirit, for it went 
down into the floor as vapor and disappeared. 

Another form, with long hair, like an Indian girl, reaching to 
the knee, and holding Crysanthemums in her hand, went down 
at another spot, feet first, arm extended above the head, holding 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 99 

the flowers, down and down, till nothing remained but hand and 
flowers, and lastly they also disappeared in the floor, which pre- 
sented no evidence of an artificial opening. Still Jonson sat on my 
left, and Mrs. Jonson away to my right, when almost immediately 
the flowers again appeared at the spot on the floor where they had 
disappeared a minute before and began to rise, followed by the 
materializing hand and arm and head, neck, body, limbs and feet ; 
and all this in view of the sitters outside the cabinet, and no one 
in close proximity to the form ; and the Jonsons at either end of 
the circle of sitters. Where does the fraud appear with these 
phenomena ? And the form talks after it reappears. The existence 
of these and similar phenomena can no longer be denied, nor can 
they be credited to fraud. Their cause may be legitimately dis- 
cussed, however. 

The majority of the forms I saw in the three seances in Novem- 
ber materialized inside the cabinet, and returning towards the 
cabinet, disappeared as they got to the opening of the curtains, 
but without entering the cabinet. A few materialized outside of 
the cabinet, and several were materialized inside the cabinet, while 
Jonson sat at one end of the semi-circle of people part of the 
time, and another part of the time hef walked along in front of 
the line of sitters, drawing magnetism from them to build the 
forms inside the cabinet, so Grey Feather, his Indian spirit guide, 
explained through Jonson's vocal organs ; and lastly a part of the 
time was spent on the inside of the cabinet. 

The presence of music, instrumental or vocal, or both, facilitated 
the appearance of the forms. Absence of music seems to lessen 
the number and efficiency of the forms. The higher developed 
intelligences appear to have the power of producing much more 
light, or else require less darkness to exhibit themselves in 
materialized form and perfect detail. I have had opportunities 
for years past to investigate Jonson. I have yet to discover the 
first act of fraud on his part, and have no hesitation in saying 
that after full and satisfactory investigations, I express my belief 
and well established knowledge that the phenomena are genuine, 
and the most clever conjurers, professional fraud exposers, leading 
United States detective, nor any of our modern Solomons, have 



100 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

so far been able to locate and establish as such, one single act 
of fraud on thd part of J. B. Jonson, sol far as I have learned. 

Predictions of an Important Seance for Me 
After finishing my record of the Monday night seance, November 
13, 1911, I compiled the following for comparison with Wednes- 
day night's record of November 15, 1911. My alleged spirit guide 
Hypatia has notified me herself on different occasions, and 
through a trumpet recently at Detroit, that she will be at a 
seance at Jonson's Wednesday night, 15th November, 1911; that 
she will not only bring my spirit wife, "May," with her, but will 
also have a surprise in store for me; whereas my alleged spirit 
wife, May, has notified me through my alleged guide, Hypatia, 
and through my alleged nephew, Jesse, in spirit life, speaking 
through a trumpet ; and by her own statement through a trumpet 
in Mrs. Wriedt's seance room, — and also while in her material- 
ized form this Monday night, 13th November, 1911, that she will 
come to the Wednesday night, 15th November, 1911, seance, and 
will be materialized, and will talk with me (prediction), so I shall 
have the opportunity of testing her, and of asking her to further 
prove — if she don't do it voluntarily — her human personality ; 
and as my alleged spirit daughter (prediction) has promised to 
be at that same seance ; and that while there she will tell me the 
name which was given to her in spirit realms (prediction) ; and 
lastly, Dr. Sharp, the alleged spirit guide and control of Mrs. 
Wriedt, told me in Detroit, he also would be present at the seance 
above designated; and would step out of the cabinet, and place 
his hand upon my head (prediction). I have therefore decided to 
secure, if possible, a stenographic report of the seance, and have 
said report, when complete, sworn to as a correct report ; so that 
instead of an epitomized report, by myself, of the personally 
interesting parts, I shall have a report of everything from the 
beginning to the end of the seance, without personally having 
anything to do with that report. 

All those foregoing predictions were made to and received by 
me personally, from the various intelligences, at different times, 
and in a different place, and through a different channel of com- 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 101 

munication in their entirety, without my being able to discover 
error, or the existence of fraud, as regards the main facts ; and 
I leave fair-minded people and honest critics, to say whether on 
the hypothesis of fraud, or that of any other hypothesis than the 
natural one, "the spirit hypothesis," such facts, explanations, 
conversations regarding family matters; and individual mutual 
talks, regarding articles that have been put in a place of safety ; 
and something directed to be done, with a special article, which 
was not even entertained as a thought for a single moment; or 
advice given contrary to a conclusion reached in my own mind, 
touching some particular matter and whether what I now note 
and declare as herein preceding, is within the bounds of possibil- 
ity, to carry out, by fraudulent means. Such samples are to be 
found in my earlier trumpet communications of this series of 
seven seances. 



CHAPTER XVI 

THE fourth seance of the series of seven, and the second 
J. B. Jonson seance, is the only one of the entire 
November series, which embraces a record of all the 
materializations presenting during the seance; and is likewise 
exceptional, in that it is the only one of any series up to date, 
in which the full record is reproduced in the publication ; and the 
entire stenographic report of what each and every one presenting 
said ; also the stenographer's description of their appearance and 
acts, as well as each event of sufficient interest to be described. 
I had several reasons for having not only a full report of every- 
thing of interest, but for making sure of its being an accurate 
report in every particular. I had been assured by Hypatia in 
Detroit, that a grand surprise would await me at this seance 
(November 15, 1911) ; and it occurred to me that if I made the 
record, it would not be a stenographic one, nor would I be able 
to concentrate my attention upon the presenting surprise ; and the 
individual incidents connected with each and every one of the 
psychical phenomena under observation; and at the same time 
take notes or make a full report, and do justice either to myself 
or to the report. Further, I desired the report to be absolutely 
and verbally perfect, as only a stenographer's report could be; 
and my own would not be a stenographer's report. Lastly I 
desired to place myself beyond the possibility of being to any 
extent chargeable with interested motives, on account of what 
was promised, or influenced by selfish reason, or excited by what 
presented- itself to my senses and mind ; or having my personal 
judgment warped, so as to influence the description I might sub- 
sequently give to others as evidential matter; and to make it 
obvious that I could not possibly write up the matter to suit 
myself, or to give color to the possibilities or probabilities, which 
might be presumed to harmonize with my opinions, hopes or 
convictions. In fact my wishes were no less my soul's desire, to 
demonstrate a truth, for I did indeed most heartily and sincerely 

102 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 103 

desire that some one, possibly a member of this select group of 
psychical researchers, or some one employed by the class, would 
make for me a true and full report of the, in this instance, seance 
as a whole, for me to have and to hold as evidence of what 
occurred outside of my own written or spoken description. I had 
not been at the seance many minutes, before I found that the 
secretary of the club or class was making a stenographic report 
for the class. When opportunity presented I bespoke a copy of 
the record, and secured the promise of it, and later obtained 
possession of it, and thus my wishes, my soul's desire, my true 
prayer for a full report — and the said report to bear the declara- 
tion, and sworn statements of the stenographer who made it, as 
to all the matter, including that which pertains to my guide and 
loved ones, as evidential records — was truly answered. Those 
present never saw me before. I had only a few minutes previously 
been introduced to them as the official representative of the 
Canadian Society for Psychical Research, and as such was 
admitted as the first individual not a member, who was permitted 
the privilege of being present at a seance with this class of in- 
vestigators, which favor is hereby acknowledged. I attach the 
record as embracing all the main features, and being absolutely 
independent of even a suggestion on my part. 

The Official Stenographer's Sworn Record 

"The seventh meeting of the Sunflower Class was a notable one, 
being honored by the presence of Dr. John S. King of Toronto, 
Canada, who is President of the Canadian Society for Psychical 
Research, with a charter from the Government. This gentleman's 
long experience in the work, and high development, were a source 
of great benefit to the class, and productive of marvelously 
beautiful materializations most thoroughly appreciated by the 
Circle. We wish to thank Dr. King for his words, attesting to 
personal experiences so convincing as to impress more deeply on 
our hearts and minds the wonderful possibilities of this great 
work, stimulating us to strive together to the attaining of results 
with ever-increasing earnestness and harmonious co-operation. 



104 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

The materializations recorded for this meeting are as follows: 

1 JOHN. 

Mrs. Moore's son, a boy of sixteen, who has been in spirit-land 
for one year. This date being that of his birthday, Mrs. Moore 
had provided beautiful chrysanthemums to be given to each 
materialization in honor of the occasion. John materialized most 
beautifully and strong, building up in sight of all, attired in his 
vesture, having on earth been a member of the Trinity Choir. 
Seeing that his mother held a large* bouquet to give to him, he 
entered the cabinet, dematerialized the book which he held, and 
returned to receive the flowers. Walking beside Mrs. Jonson, 
John went from one end of the circle to the other, carrying the 
flowers, thanking one and all for their words of greeting on this 
his birthday. 

Returning to his mother, he told her to be patient, that it would 
not be long before she would be able to walk. Going to the cabinet 
for more strength, John returned, stopping on his way to take 
a flower from the case and handing it to Sister Martha, the 
beautiful white sister who materialized with him. Standing beside 
his mother, John said: 

"Now don't sigh, mother dear, nor be sad. It would be much 
worse if you could not see me at all, but had to feel that I was 
lying in that cold ground." 

Meanwhile Sister Martha was drawing strength from the 
medium toward John with indescribably graceful movements of 
her hands. 

John continued: "I have to go now. Please don't feel lonely 
any more, will you, because I am with you?" 

Kissing his mother and little cousin goodbye, John retreated 
toward the cabinet, holding in his hand the large bouquet of 
chrysanthemums, and dematerialized both himself and the flowers, 
outside of the cabinet, in full view of the class. 

2 FLORENCE. 

Mrs. Russell's sister. This materialization is a beautiful young 
woman who comes each week to talk to her sister, often giving 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 105 

important advice. At the close of the conversation Florence de- 
materialized with her flower from the birthday bouquet. 

3 VIOLA. 

This is always a beautifully strong materialization, being Mrs. 
Jonson's spirit guide. As is usual with her, Viola had a bright 
word for each member. Answering the general greeting she said 
gaily : "Fse right here." To Mrs. Moore : "Hello Auntie Moore," 
"Told Mr. Robleto that he was too sober tonight." Accepted her 
birthday flower saying: "Sorry Auntie Cleary is not here," a 
facetious remark which she seldom forgets, appearing to ignore 
the member's invariable presence. Going toward Mrs. Cleary, 
Viola held her dress in position to catch the candy which Mrs. 
Cleary had brought for her. Inquired about Mr. Eyster as 
"Secretary No. 2" and instructed the secretary to put a long 
line for him way across the page for being absent. Standing in 
the middle of the floor Viola said : "Now I cannot go until you 
all laugh and talk at once and give me a little brightness. We 
must have conditions, you know." 

Dematerializing outside the cabinet, Viola added as she was 
disappearing : 

"Now don't all get sober the minute I quit talking." 

Grey Feather, who had kept his medium outside of the cabinet 
with the class to show that he could bring the materialization in 
that way, was magnetizing some cards for members, and the 
sparks radiated from same in a remarkable manner. 

4. . INEZ. 

This materialization is a most beautiful young girl of about six- 
teen, and is a guide of Mrs. Geary's. She always brings brightness 
into the circle, and has a merry word for all. Receiving her 
birthday flower and thanking Mrs. Moore prettily for same, she 
went over to Grey Feather and held the flower under his nose, 
much to his disgust. 

5 CELIA. 

Mr. Geary's guide. This is always a beautiful materialization 
of a young woman, and Mr. Cleary has received many convincing 
proofs of her power to assist him. Celia gracefully acknowledged 



106 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

an introduction to Dr. King, and walking toward the flowers, 
evidently admiring them, remarked that flowers gave beautiful 
conditions. After a private conversation with Mr. and Mrs. 
Cleary in the cabinet, Celia dematerialized visibly to the class. 

6 INEZ. 

Inez reappeared and took Grey Feather into the cabinet. 

Returning, Inez let each member smell her flower, remarking: 
"They don't smell very good, but, oh, aren't they beautiful?" 
Coming to Dr. King, Inez let him feel her beautiful hair. 

Dancing merrily toward the cabinet Inez also dematerialized 

visibly. 

7 CLARA. 

A young woman materialization who is a guide for Mrs. Russell. 
She says her name is Clara Navarre, and her home on earth was 
in Philadelphia. Also that she is in the fourth sphere and soon 
to progress to the fifth. That she will tell Mrs. Russell when 
the time of her progression comes. Asked if she wore a white 
veil because of the sphere in which she existed, she replied: 

"No, we garb ourselves in white because it is symbolical of 
purity." 

8 DR. SHARP. 

A wonderful materialization of a spirit guide of Mrs. Etta 
Wriedt of Detroit, and a man whose venerable and striking 
appearance commanded the most profound respect. Responding to 
Dr. King, Dr. Sharp said : 

"Yes, I told you I would come. I told you at Sister Wriedt's 
in Detroit I would be here. Yes, you may tell them who I am." 

Having told Dr. King at Detroit that he would place his hand 
on his, Dr, King's, head, when he visited Toledo, he also fulfilled 
that promise, saying: "I am a friend to all who are friends of 
the Cause." With the words : "Here is your surprise," this im- 
posing spirit dematerialized. (Fulfillment complete.) 

9 HYPATIA. 

Dr. King's high spirit guide, who alleges she is the daughter 
of Theon, next walked out of the cabinet into full vieV of all 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 107 

present. Words are hardly adequate to describe in a fitting 
manner this beautiful materialization. Tall and queenly with 
brilliant jewels scintillating at every movement, Hypatia was 
glorious to behold. She said to Dr. King : 

"This is the rose you gave me nearly two years ago, do you 
remember? and here is another. This is the white ribbon and 
this is the blue. The conditions here tonight are glorious. How 
beautiful that this was all prepared ahead of time for you all. I 
am going now, but I will try to return. Just sit down." 

Requested by Mrs. Jonson to take the birthday flower to Dr. 
Sharp Hypatia graciously accepted her own flower and the one 
for Dr. Sharp. While waiting for Hypatia to return, Dr. King 
spoke most beautifully of the wonderful qualities of his queenly 
guide, saying he had always found her the soul of loyalty and 
truth. That she helps his wife on the other side, making her 
rapid progression possible. Also told the class of Hypatia's 
promise to bring to him on this occasion his wife's first-born 
child, who passed out at birth, and who had now grown to be a 
beautiful young woman. When Dr. King had finished speaking, 
Hypatia reappeared and said: 

"I would do much more tonight but it takes so much power 
from the medium, and there are so many yet to come that it 
would not be right for me to do so, therefore I will bid you! 
good night/' 

Bowing gracefully to all, this radiant spirit dematerialized 
outside the cabinet. 

10 MAY DONNA. 

The promise of Hypatia was fulfilled and Dr. King saw before 
him his spirit daughter, who spoke beautifully as follows: 

"Papa, O Papa, I love you. I came the other evening. Yes, I 
am going to tell you myf name. I want to be near to both you 
and Mamma; so they call me May Donna. The May is for 
Mamma and the Donna is for you." Asked to spell the name, 
May Donna did so distinctly. She continued : 

"You must never feel sad, dear papa, for you never shall be 
alone, so you must not feel so lonesome. You will be, oh, so 



108 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

happy when mamma and I take you with us. Don't forget, papa, 
to tell all the dear ones that I came." 

May Donna accepted a flower from her father, and also took 
the birthday flower from Mrs. Moore, saying: 

"Be sure and tell grandma that I came. Good night, papa, 
dear, dear papa." 

With these loving words this lovely spirit dematerialized in 
view of the class. 

11 MRS. JOHN S. KING 

(Known in the Records as May). 

Beautiful and strong, and so convincingly natural as to over- 
come a strong man's self-control, Dr. King's wife stood material- 
ized before him, speaking the following comforting words: 

"Don't cry, dear Johnnie. My dear, this life is beautiful, all 
brightness and joy. Oh, dear one, I love you so, and the love we 
feel on earth only grows stronger and more beautiful on our side. 

"Do just as I said about; my things. It is not necessary to 
repeat that. About my jewels, I want them left where they are 
in the safety deposit vault in the bank, I don't want them given 
away for a very long time, then I will instruct you about what 
I want done with them. The single diamond, I want you as 
soon as you go home, to have set as a scarf pin. Be careful and 
watch where you take it, do you understand ? and when you wear 
it, it will make it easier for me to come near tq you. 

"Oh, my dear Johnnie, I wish I could stand here and talk to 
you, but I cannot, but as many times as I come it will give me 
more strength. Oh, Johnnie dear, I feel my strength going. You 
know I could not speak when I passed out. I want to materialize 
to you more often, dear Johnnie." 

Being asked what pet names she called Dr. King besides "Dear 
Johnnie," she replied by mentioning all the terms of endearment 
which she had been accustomed to use to her husband. 

Resuming the conversation, Mrs. King said : 

"You were not with me when I passed out, Johnnie dear, but 
I could not have spoken to you if you had been there, but now, 
dear Johnnie, we will make up for lost time. I feel my strength 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 109 

leaving me, and I must say good night, my dear, dear Johnnie, I 
love you so much." 

12. . . . CONSTANCE EYSTER. 

A beautiful materialization of a child who passed out at the 
age of eight years and has been in spirit world a year and a 
month. Asked by her mother how she ever managed to get 
through when there were so many great spirits there, she replied : 

"Well, you see, mamma, they sang a little baby song and I just 
popped right in on it." Being told why her papa was not present, 
she replied, sympathetically: 

"Oh, poor daddy. You tell daddy that I am going to help him 
and Chrystal is going to help him, and we will make him feel 
all right again. And don't feel sad so much, mamma dear, because 
I am, oh, so happy, and I love you and daddy more than you 
know that I can love you. Chrystal is going to talk to you, 
mamma dear, and now I must go. Please say good night to daddy 
for me, and good night, mamma dear. I love you so much." 

13 CHRYSTAL. 

Mr. Eyster's beautiful spirit guide, who always materializes 
with strength and power. Giving a message to be taken to Mr. 
Eyster, she said : 

"Tell the dear one to push ahead in that matter. He must get 
hold of that. If he has to work day and night, he must find a 
way, for in it lies an end to all worry for you both. I see ahead 
to great things for you both/' 

With a few words of further advice this powerful spirit 
dematerialized outside of the cabinet, her silver crown resting on 
the floor for an instant before disappearing. 

14 MR. STACK. 

This is a materialization of Mrs. Geary's father, who is always 
convincingly natural to all who knew him in life, even to speaking 
with a rich brogue. When someone said it was Mr. Stack, he 
replied : 

"Sure it is, but I waited too long to come. Sure I am happy." 



110 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Being offered the birthday flower he took same with the pleased 
remark, "Of course I'll take it." 

Mr. Stack also dematerialized visibly with his flower. 

15 VIOLA. 

A beautiful materialization of a young girl, who is a guide for 
Mrs. Jonson. She seemed delighted with her birthday flower, and 
went from one member of the class to the other showing it, 
dematerializing with it in her hand. 

16. . . MRS. MOORE'S FATHER. " 
This gentleman materialized very distinctly, and accepted his 
flower from his little grandchild, who was present, and kissing her 
good-bye, the little girl afterwards remarking that Grandpa's 
whiskers tickled her mouth. 

17 MARY. 

Mr. Robleto's beautiful guide, who by referring to certain 
happenings gave him positive proof that she is always with him. 
Sent a message of love to his family, and promised to give him 
proof of her presence at a future time by touching him on the 
head. Taking Mr. Robleto by the hands Mary led him with her 
to the cabinet, where, after a short conversation, she dematerialized 
visibly. 

18 ALBERT. 

This materialization is the young son of Mrs. Russell. He is 
always a beautifully strong spirit, and talked for some time with 
his mother, also walking toward Dr. King for an introduction, 
and expressing his pleasure in meeting the gentleman. 

19 MINNIE. 

A beautiful materialization of Mrs. Moore's sister, who stood 
during the materialization of Albert and admired the flowers, 
removing from the vase the one- of her choice. She also told 
Mrs. Moore to be prepared for the passing out of her sister, 
which lies in the near future. Saying good-bye to her little niece, 
Minnie and Albert dematerialized almost simultaneously. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 111 

This closed one of the most beautiful and satisfactory Circles 
ever held by the Sunflower Class. 

Nov. 15, 1911. m (Sgd.) Katherine M. Eyster, SEC. 

State of Ohio, Lucas County, ss : 

Subscribed and sworn to before me, a Notary Public in and for 
Lucas County, Ohio, this 18th day of November, 1911. 

(Sgd.) James W. Harbaugh, 
Notary Public. 
Law Seal. 

ADDENDA. 

Readers will, in the foregoing seance, find fulfillment of pre- 
dictions made in the Detroit trumpet seances, with addition of 
more new evidence. 

Dr. Sharp, guide of Etta Wriedt, was present as promised, 
materialized, placed his hand on my head, and contributed to my 
surprise. 

Hypatia brought May and our daughter to the seance so they 
could both materialize and talk with me; handed to me the two 
roses May and I gave her, when May was in earth life, nearly 
two years before this, thus completing a test of her (Hypatia's) 
capacity, which she had promised. This is referred to at length 
elsewhere. She also fulfilled her promise to bring my angel 
daughter to materialize and talk with me. 

May Donna fulfilled her promise to tell me the name the angels 
gave to her. 

May fulfilled each promise made at Detroit. She also gave 
evidence that she was with me and knew what articles were in 
the safety-deposit vault, which I only placed there on Friday, 
as I left home the next day, and no living person save myself 
knew what I had placed there, or when. She also gave in response 
to a request of a lady present, all the pet names I called her by 
when in our home, and did so correctly. She likewise made a 
request of me which no one else could comply with, the outcome 
of which will appear as completed and complied with, in a future 
chapter. J. S. K. 



CHAPTER XVII 

THIS seance was, held on Thursday night, 16th November, 
1911, following the special seance of the night before. 
The Thursday night seance each week is called the 
public seance, inasmuch as it is open to admission to those not 
belonging to the Sunflower Class, nor to any special circle of 
friends ; and it is the circle to which newcomers, strangers, and 
personal friends of some of those who are more or less familiar 
with seances, are admitted, or acquaintances of the Jonsons. As 
every opportunity for me counted, I availed myself of this one, 
and found myself present at the appointed time, for the opening 
of the seance. I recognized three or four whom I had met on 
previous occasions, but the total number present was less than at 
the previous seance. Of the materializations which presented, in 
all about twenty, several had presented at one or other of the 
two preceding seances. 

The forms which came to me at this seance, and held converse, 
were only four. The first form to come to and speak with me 
was the man whom I have described in a previous chapter, as the 
one whojpointed to his throat and mouth at the Monday night 
seance, but who was on that occasion unable to talk with me ; but 
he now walked right up to me, so that I could see his every 
feature, and every movement of his eyes and lips, and hear the 
words distinctly, as they passed through his lips. He was dressed 
as on the previous occasion, and a perfect reproduction of his 
former self ; a man I had known in life as connected with a public 
institution, and as I had often seen him dressed in his Sunday 
clothing in my city. This time his face was radiant with smiles, 
and joy seemed to gleam in his eyes. He spoke as follows: 
"Doctor, when you return to Toronto I want you to tell Mrs. 

O , — who thinks that I am dead, — that I am not dead, that 

you saw me and talked with me, and that I asked you to tell 
her this. Will you do so?" And I told him that I would. (On 
my return I did as promised. J. S. K.). 

112 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 113 

May Donna, my alleged spirit daughter, for the third time 
materialized, and seemed to have gained in strength each time. 
She said that both she and her mamma were with me most of 
the time, and would accompany me back to Mrs. Wriedt's in 
Detroit ; and then back to my home in Toronto, to keep me from 
becoming sad ; and would, before long, be able to talk with me, 
and to appear to me when alone. 

Before speaking of the next form to appear, I may say that a 
single light on the wall behind the sitters cast its direct rays to 
the point where the cabinet curtains were separated by the forms 
as they came out and where the investigators' faces turned from 
the light toward the face and form which received the light rays, 
while the entire room was dimly lighted, but sufficiently so that 
one could distinguish the sitters, male or female, in the chairs, 
and easily note the difference in size and feature of those 
presenting. 

The next form to appear was that of May, who evinced greater 
strength, and the more natural developed physical appearance, 
than on the first occasion, being normal, in size, voice, and the 
various attributes already mentioned in previous chapters. On 
this occasion, while speaking affectionately, she expressed the 
pleasure that she realized in her capability of materializing, and 
being able to talk in this organized but transient body, though 
she could speak better through the trumpet. She also again 
acknowledged the wonderful care and assistance she had received 
from Hypatia. She wished me to visit the Jonsons again before 
long. She promised to be with me on my return to Mrs. Wriedt's, 
where she would have opportunity of talking with me through the 
trumpet. "We will all be with you," meaning those who had been 
with me when I was there before. 

There came to me in this seance in materialized form a very 
ancient-looking and peculiar-visaged spirit form, who alleged he 
was a spirit guide of mine, the most ancient of all the guides. 
He indeed was the strangest-looking human I had ever seen, 
differing so much in features, and in size and color as well as 
dress, from known races. He spoke, giving a name so long, and 
so peculiar, that I could neither pronounce, write, nor even 



114 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

remember it ; and found out what little I did find out then regard- 
ing him through others ; through my own alleged guides, especially 
Otelleo, and the little cabinet spirit worker, who said that he, 
the guide, would for the present be designated des-Asia. He 
originally came from Thibet or Himalaya mountains, in which 
former place he was one time a priest in a religion differing from 
anything now in existence. The little cabinet spirit who claims 
she helps to build the forms in the cabinet at these seances, speak- 
ing out after the ancient spirit dematerialized, said he was 
thousands of years old, and had said four or six thousand years 
were not much, as there was a city buried in Mexico, which has 
been buried for full forty thousand years, but would soon be 
discovered. I requested Otelleo to find out more concerning this 
materialization, and to let me know, and later requested Hypatia 
to let me know the purport of his visit, and his character, and 
whether he should be recognized. Though there is no evidential 
matter, save what the physical senses produce, still I will maintain 
the record and await future developments. 

My spirit guide, Hypatia, was reported to be present, but did 
not materialize at this seance. 



Autobiography of J. B. Jonson 

[Note : — In response to my request for a brief autobiographical 
sketch of his life for publication in this book, Mr. J. B. Jonson 
complied by sending me the following Under date of February 28, 
1912. The Author.] 

"I was born in 1854 in Akron, Ohio. Father was a native of 
England, and a lineal descendant on the paternal side of the house 
of the immortal Ben Jonson, the British poet and writer. His 
father's mother, my great-grandmother, was a Payne, a descendant 
of Tom Payne, the noted infidel, so called. In my boyhood days 
I remember attending a celebration of Payne's birthday, held in 
Toledo, in the old Lyceum Hall, then used by Spiritualists and 
Free Thinkers, when they spoke with much unction of his relation. 
It seems that his father, who, by the way, was a very wealthy man 
and an intensely religious individual, never spoke of Payne except 
in tones of disparagement and deplored the relationship. His son 




J. B. JONSON, 

Materializing Medium. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 115 

never agreed with him either in his views of religion or Payne. 

Father, being the youngest son, at the decease of his father, was 
cut off with the usual portion accorded in those days to the 
youngest, which he refused to accept, coming to America in 1851, 
entered into business in 1853, meeting the one who was to become 
my mother, and after a short courtship was married. Mother's 
maiden name was Margaret J. Dolson, she was also of English 
ancestry. At the time of my birth, October 16, 1854, my parents 
were boarding with a family in Akron, who were spiritualists. 
The evening previous to my birth they held a seance for physical 
manifestations, so being born amid such surroundings, is it not 
possible that prenatal conditions had something to do with devel- 
opments of later years? My earliest recollections of anything of 
a psychic nature date back to the time that I was seven years 
of age — having a sister, Josephine, five years of age. Romping 
through the house one summer day in childish play, she chasing 
me, I ran out of the house, and into, and through, a large, burly, 
black-whiskered man on the steps of the house. On turning round 
no one was there. My sister saw him, too. We ran to mother 
in fear. While telling her, father came home from the store. 
I remember father saying, "Tut, tut ! It is all imagination," but 
that did not satisfy us, and all through my boyhood days we had 
various manifestations, wherever we lived, unexplained noises, 
rappings, sounds of footfalls at night through rooms where no 
one was visible to our sight, in fact so many manifestations that 
I have not the time or space to mention them. 

My first serious investigation began at the age of 18, as to the 
cause of these manifestations. My sister, who had passed away 
shortly after the first incident mentioned, being the first to mani- 
fest in my first regular seance that I sat in. My progress after 
that was rapid, beginning with trance control in 1876. Having 
moved to Springfield, Ohio, I became acquainted with friends 
interested in Spiritualism, who formed a circle. I got directions 
to build a cabinet, and soon obtained physical manifestations 
under strict test conditions, and some materializations developed. 
There occurred many things of an occult nature during my 
sojourn of four years among the friends I met in Springfield, and 
a decided development of my mediumship. 

Coming back to Toledo, Ohio, in 1880, my employment inter- 
fering with our sittings, I did not devote so much time to the 
subject for several years. In the interval I found that I possessed 
mediumship in the trumpet line, which I have experienced more 
or less from time to time, up to the present. We had various 
manifestations in our home circle of spirit power, until I was 



116 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

forced through circumstances to come to the front as a public 
medium, my first development being as a trumpet medium and for 
physical manifestations, having materializations in the meantime, 
which did not assume the present stabilities until I married my 
present wife in 1901, which I lay to the fact of our being both 
born under the same planet. Our birthdays fall respectively, hers 
on the 9th and mine on the 16th of October, making a strong 
psychic combination, as per Butler's Solar Biology. 

As to the character of our manifestations or rather description 
of them, I leave that to others, as my friend, the author of this 
book, has requested me to be brief in sketch of my life, will leave 
it with the reader, with the statement that if I in my humble way 
have been the instrument through whom their friends, who have 
passed to the higher life, have been able to again come in touch 
with them, with the consoling knowledge that if a man dies he 
does indeed live again, then my work has not been in vain, or my 
life without purpose. 

I am, dear reader, yours sincerely, 

(Sgd.) J, B. Jonson." 



CHAPTER XVIII 

THIS seance was held on Saturday night, 18th November, 
1911, in Mrs. Wriedt's seance room, Detroit. The 
sitters were four women, a man, and a little boy, who 
together with myself made a circle of seven. I did not take 
copious notes as I usually did, but wrote my record after my 
return to the hotel. I do not therefore record all the facts, but 
briefly note interesting features which I deem worthy of record 
as evidential in character. Dr. Sharp, the control of Mrs. Wriedt, 
greeted me, and in doing so, reminded me that he had fulfilled 
the promise he had made me in this same seance room last Sunday, 
the 12th November, to visit the Jonson seance on the night I would 
have my surprise. He had promised that he would materialize in 
the cabinet, walk out, and place his hand on my head, and I would 
know by that act, that it was he (Dr. Sharp). I admitted to 
his medium, Mrs. Wriedt, and before all the sitters, that Dr. 
Sharp had fully and successfully carried out his promise, exhibit- 
ing much strength when he placed his hand on my head. That 
occasion was the second one where Dr. Sharp appeared material- 
ized in my presence. In my records of August 7, 1910, I find 
this entry, which mentions him, viz. : 

"At the private seance this Saturday forenoon, 7th August, 
1910, Mrs. Jonson sat with Mrs. King (then in mortal life) and 
myself, we three being all in room B, while Jonson was lying on 
a couch in room A, the other side of the curtain, which filled the 
space left for a door. After several forms had materialized, a 
form claiming to be that of Dr. Sharp, a heavy set, and well 
bearded intelligent-looking old man, called on me, and said, while 
he stood in the materialized form, "As you are an old friend of 
my medium, Mrs. Etta Wriedt of Detroit, I felt I would like to 
call on you." We (my wife, then living, and myself) bade him 
welcome, and after a short conversation he withdrew." 

The same seance which Dr. Sharp attended in materialized 
form, above recorded, was rendered memorable to me for several 

117 



118 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

reasons which merit recognition, and may hold connection with 
events of prior date, as well as with others of later date in this 
volume, which even now, or probably in the near future, will by 
association with other dates, events, facts, or statements, prove 
to be circumstantial evidence, or corroborative testimony, hence 
will be noted in the foregoing connection. 

"Otelleo, another intelligence, who has held communication with 
me for years, through various mediums, and as varied phases, 
having first materialized and conversed with me, through this 
same medium (J. B. Jonson) in another place in 1907, as he 
was about to retire promised to return, and bring with him a 
distinguished personality that I would be pleased to meet. He 
retired and shortly after returned with an alleged friend and 
brother; and introduced one alleged Hiram Abiff." 

"My guide, Hypatia, who has always alleged that she was the 
daughter of Theon, and consequently as such would be known 
as the Neoplatonic philosopher, visited us and then retired, but 
before doing so promised to return and did in a little while 
re-enter with another beautiful angelic young woman, whom 
she introduced to my wife as Saphrona. This same 7th of August, 
1910, seance was made memorable, by the conditions imposed and 
accepted, at the time of our presentation to Hypatia of white 
roses, tied in my case with a bow of white satin baby ribbon, 
and in the case of my then wife, May, tied in a bow with blue 
satin baby ribbon, and which is more fully referred to in two 
other chapters covering the present series of seances, viz.: at 
Detroit through the trumpet, and on Wednesday night, the 15th 
November, 1911, at Jonson's, on both occasions by Hypatia, who 
retained the roses one year, three months and eight days before 
returning them to me, tied as when she received them, and looking 
as fresh, and my wife as spirit was present when she did so." 

The next intelligence to address me at Mrs. Wriedt's seance 
of 18th November, 1911, was Grey Feather, the alleged Indian 
control of J. B. Jonson, in Toledo, who gave me two reasons 
for coming to this seance, the first being, that he promised me 
he would come, and he now kept that promise ; and the second 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 119 

being a matter of solely personal and private interest, which 
would serve no useful purpose to make record of here. 

May, my spirit wife, followed Grey Feather, and not only 
endorsed what Grey Feather said, but went more into details. 

Hypatia spoke about the same matter as did Grey Feather, and 
May, but spoke more earnestly and advisedly than was usual 
with her. 

The attitude and earnestness of these three spirit witnesses in 
their several communications to me, touching a matter of personal 
interest, supplied evidential matter of a most convincing kind, but 
unavailable here. 

Another feature of this seance was the singing by two different 
voices separately of Scotch melodies, and a few stanzas of well- 
known hymns. 

One of the sitters received very much advice from some alleged 
spirit speaking through the trumpet, regarding an intricate busi- 
ness matter, which became very interesting to her, though of 
no evidential value to me. 

My alleged spirit daughter's name (May Donna), as I received 
it at the Jonson seance, was announced, with the addition "Only 
to let you know that I am here, Papa." 

At this seance the very ancient guide — with a very long name, 
which I could not write down nor pronounce, nor remember after 
he had materialized at the fifth seance of the series at Jonson's, 
but who was by me to be designated, and known for the present, 
as des-Asia, — came. As he spoke without announcing his name, 
the question asked was, "Who is this ?" After a brief pause there 
came in thundering tones the word or name "Asia." He had 
some years ago made himself known as an ancient spirit guide 
of mine. He spoke slowly in the English language, and informed 
me that he had now come to begin the work that he had on the 
first and only occasion, about six years previously, indicated 
through another medium, and that he would talk with me again 
when I sat alone. 

The alleged spirit of a little Indian girl who said her name 
was "Pansy," and that she came to see Big Chief, enlivened 
matters for fully fifteen minutes, creating much laughter, which 



120 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

became more or less contagious from her own. She also created 
some amusement at my expense, and set me guessing. She said 
she was in my home, Toronto, and "your squaw (meaning my 
wife's photograph) was on your office table. 5 ' I was at first 
puzzled to know what she meant. She apparently enjoyed my 
stupidity for the moment, and laughed heartily and said, "Your 
squaw stands by you now." Then I realized that part, when it 
dawned on me that I had left my late wife's picture on my table 
with that of a friend. So I said, "Now tell me if she is anywhere 
else, ,, and she told me where three of her pictures hung on walls 
and a photograph picture on the dresser. She described the 
location of each as I found them on my return home. They, with 
all the hangings, had been changed during my absence, and I had 
not absolutely definite fixture of these in my mind; and though 
I knew the position of some of them, before the change, I could 
not give their relative positions with adjacent pictures, after the 
change, which she had done 

I think under the circumstances, the hypothesis of thought 
transmission or mind reading in this case would be far-fetched. 
After my return home I was able to verify the absolutely correct 
location and situation of the pictures, as she had stated in the 
seance; and am able therefore to include in this connection my 
acknowledgement of the correctness of what was described in 
the hearing of all who participated in the seance. So that the 
testimony given in the seance was confirmed as correct from my 
comparison of the testimony with the existing facts. 

THE TELEPATHIC AND MIND READING HYPOTHESES. 

Here let us analyze the mental hypotheses, and prove if we 
may, that they cannot account for all psychic phenomena, for 
there are some produced by the carnate soul, and others when 
it becomes discarnate. The functioning of the objective portion 
of the mind, it is claimed, has to do with the five senses, with 
reason, and with the acquisition of knowledge ; while that of the 
subjective portion of the mind controls the organic functions 
throughout the body, and is the seat of all emotions, and the 
storehouse of memory. I will even grant this much of what is 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 121 

claimed, and further admit it is harmonious with the incarnate 
spirit, in each individual man; but while it may be impressed to 
do service for a discarnate spirit, is not itself creative of physical 
form, voice, or other psychic phenomena outside of its own 
physical environment or human body ? 

I am not a mental expert, nor eminent psychologist, but have 
a healthy functioning of mind, and normal faculty of reasoning 
and therefore claim the right to question the assertionist, who 
says a certain functioning of the subjective self will account for 
the so-called psychic mysteries. I wish to say and make my state- 
ment clear, that I am not myself able, and do not believe that 
any man is able, to correctly define or demonstrate all the varied 
functions of any mind; and I object to the assumption of an 
hypothesis, without facts are presented to sustain it, and therefore 
with definition there must be demonstration, by the defender of 
the mind hypothesis. It is the champion's part to sustain it. I do 
not, in discussing the hypothesis in question, claim to know, but 
simply assume or suppose, for purpose of argument leaving onus 
of proof, with the one who uses the hypothesis. Let us see the 
application of the different mind hypotheses, in the case of the 
testimony, of the alleged little Indian girl. Can it be accounted 
for by any mind hypothesis? Or was the information she con- 
veyed compiled from facts and knowledge stored in my subjective 
mind? Or was the voice a physical phenomena on that occasion 
in the seance due to mind reading or telepathic transmission of 
thought? I claim it was neither. I must have cast eye on each 
one of those pictures before they had changed from their former 
locations, and if so I am prepared to admit their former location 
was fixed in my subjective mind, and there retained for all time 
to come, in earth life at 1 any rate. I have proven, to my own 
satisfaction, scores of times, that the subjective mind is a store- 
house of all our knowledge, howsoever obtained, from childhood 
to old age, though mostly forgotten by the normal or objective 
mind ; and as I had absolutely no objective knowledge, at the time 
the information was telepathically given off from me, of the location 
of the pictures, it must have been supplied, if that hypothesis be 
the correct one, from my sub-conscious or subjective mind, if 



122 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

from me at all, and if that possibility is admitted (and I will 
admit it for argument's sake solely), then the thought impression, 
or association of thoughts, having their existence in or self- 
evolvement from the human transmitter (my subjective mind), 
to the human receiver (Mrs. Etta Wriedt's subjective mind), it was 
thus in her possession. Keeping in view the fact, that the thought 
impression reaching the human receiver, must be absolutely the 
very thought, or perfect duplicate or wavelet as from the stone 
thrown in the pond, of the thought leaving the human transmitter, 
my sub-conscious self, which is not supposed to be active in that 
way ; and is practically well illustrated by the well known acts of 
transmitting both telephonic and telegraphic messages, which 
follow a line, straight or circuitous in route, from the trans- 
mitting clerk or person, or instrument to ear of the receiver, or 
the receiving instrument ; and if it be thus, the origin is human, 
and if the knowledge be not voluntarily sent by the sitter (at 
Mrs. Wriedt's, myself) then the medium, in order to get it, must 
interview with her subjective mind, or peep into my storehouse 
of memory (my subjective mind), and look and find therein, the 
very thing she wants by mind-reading process ; and having found 
it, set to work to dress it up (in words or shape) and palm 
it off as original with her, and by her conscious self transmit it 
back to my objective mind, but not by telepathy, but in a different 
way, by putting it into a trumpet, a physical reality, and giving 
it a voice to speak it, — for all present heard the voice, and what 
it said — so that the thought is dressed in physical, and by waves 
of sound strikes on the drum of ear of me, and through this 
channel physical gains entrance in the normal way, to my con- 
scious mind and understanding; and to be consistent, in any 
such contention of course the information would be first stolen, 
or at least taken from my subjective mind, by the so-called mind- 
reading plan, for it was not transmitted, as I will later show, and 
it was not original with the medium, and thus from first to- last, 
even if it were possible — which it was not, under my super- 
vigilance — it would be nothing but hypocrisy, and now I'll pin 
the critic fast. There is nothing sent back by telepathic route, 
nor yet by the natural way, but what was stolen from my sub- 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 123 

conscious mind, by mind-reading theft, and note this fact, thai 
if it was not there at first, it could not be stolen, utilized, received 
or sent, and hence as I got information through "Pansy" and 
knowledge of some events new to me, that never were in stock 
in store of my subconscious self, but came from other source 
to me on that occasion, upsets entirely, the hypothesis which critic 
had adopted, instead of mine, by which he claimed the medium 
(Mrs. Wriedt) had humbugged me (as sitter). 

Let us look at it another way, as, for example, I as sitter do 
not think it, and therefore don't transmit it, which is quite reason- 
able; and hence it is not my telepathy, nor my transmission of 
thought, but on the other hand the critic claims she (the medium) 
reads my thoughts in mind, and hence "'tis done by mind- 
reading," and action emanates from her; and she knows, by 
copying it from what is in my storehouse, or takes it out of my 
subjective mind by view, or by theft from me, which would be 
mind-reading theft, with intent, and sends it back by route of 
trumpet, on waves of ether or common air to my objective mind, 
through sense of hearing, all of which is physical, and once again 
the copy goes, or else the original, on the shelf of my subjective 
storehouse ; but even that won't do, for 'tis not true, for once on 
shelf of subjective mind, it stolen cannot be, nor lost, but always 
there, and copied or repeated only, so medium gets a photographic 
picture of thought or thoughts of mine, or my reflected thoughts, 
in her subconscious or subjective mind, and there they'll stay, 
and not rise to the upper, or objective mind to be forthwith sent 
back to me, as she might wish to so impress me that it was spirit, 
instead of her, so here again the mind hypothesis won't fit, 
because the knowledge, or facts, are not in mind to be photo- 
graphed, copied, reflected or repeated. 

And still I may in other words express it, and bring out the 
facts by reasoning, and say the receiver of the thoughts (the 
medium's subjective mind) becomes possessed of them, or their 
reflection rather, or from the waves of harmony produced by 
molecular vibrations, or in some other way, which have origin in 
thought creation or evolvement, and rearranges them from what 
they were, and sends them back by aid of the physical to my 



124 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

objective mind, for the express purpose of deceiving 1 me into 
believing it to be what it is represented. But here again resort 
is had to what is physical, that is a trumpet, and a voice, which 
are not created by the mind, and that hypothesis will not account 
for them, for that presupposes prior existence of these thoughts. 

But to carry out her motive the medium assigns or designates 
the duty to its subjective self, of acquiring thoughts from out 
the storehouse of the subjective mind of me, which I may grant 
in argument as possible, if such thoughts are there, and have them 
passed up to the assignee, the objective mind of medium (but 
even this is exceptionally difficult), and then arrange therewith a 
likely story to be sent back to me, from: her objective mind, but 
it would have to be, if at all, by telepathy, for it could not be by 
transmission through a trumpet ; and through the organ of hear- 
ing of myself, to my objective mind, what is supposed, or so 
argued by the defender of the mind hypothesis, to have been 
obtained out of my subjective storehouse, which, if that be true, 
belonged to me, which it did not, under the false pretense of its 
being obtained from an Indian girl, which had in fact, at least 
so argued at this time and place, no real existence. This I would 
designate a very lame excuse, for a very weak mind hypothesis. 
But had the thoughts and the knowledge once been there regard- 
ing Pansy, they might possibly have been telepathically transmitted 
or read, reflected or cognized, so they could be utilized, recon- 
structed, redressed in words, and sent back, in the natural and 
human way, but not by trumpet and language spoken, for the 
purpose of deceiving me. 

To me it seems ridiculous, the argument and reason, that the 
medium gets it all from me, even if the thoughts were on the 
shelf of my sub-conscious mind, and hence I ask who could devise 
the deceitful part of it ? or what motive could prompt it ? What 
advantage or benefit could it be to anyone? The possibility and 
actuality of mind-reading, or telepathy, have never yet been 
accepted as well established for communication, or for practical 
utility. But the thoughts were never mine, and therefore could 
not be obtained from me, and hence no thought or knowledge 
of Pansy, whom I never heard or saw or identified, and never 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 125 

knew had an existence up to then ; and consequently never had in 
mind to be transmitted, read or reflected to the subjective mind 
of medium, and therefore it was mentally non-existent, and no 
attempt could be made either mentally or in natural way, to 
carry out a fraudulent deception by means of mind, and hence no 
mental hypothesis could fit the situation. 

As author I am now addressing an intelligent and' very numerous 
jury of thinking* men and women. Perhaps you think my style 
of expression, or mode of illustration and likewise demonstration 
new and. peculiar, and my language not exactly clear in definition ; 
but I want each and every one to know, and fully understand, 
that I seek to solve and demonstrate as, I would a problem in 
geometry, and so defend the spiritual hypothesis and make pass- 
able, to honest critics, and true investigators, the pons asinorum 
of the calumniator of this philosophy, and argue on the premise, 
that the true hypothesis which will and does account for the 
phenomena I have recorded and the philosophy I4 have adopted, 
is not a mental one, but is the spiritual one. 

If you bulk large in confidence, that I am wrong, and critic 
right in his selection of the telepathic transmission of thought 
hypothesis, or on the other hand the mind-reading one, then you 
must defend and prove it, if you can, by demonstration, that it 
can withstand all criticism, but more than this, you must needs 
also demonstrate how such hypothesis works out. This I have 
done with the spiritual one, by demonstrating in different ways 
and times and places, as all must admit who heard my former 
lecture. I have yet to see and fully comprehend, how the mental 
operating hypotheses do operate. As yet I have not had the 
opportunity to see,' or the privilege so far to learn the operation 
and wish to be shown by critic the solution. 

I will call the champion of mind hypotheses and examine him. 
My previous criticisms in this same chapter do not affect your 
claim, you state, as it is not the proper operation I have indicated, 
nor have I guessed your plan. Well then again you may jingle 
your sweet-sounding symbols, or arguments, of mind hypotheses, 
for I'll make a fresh attack. I ask your close attention to my 
arguments. The thoughts of the subjective mind of sitter 



126 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

(myself) need not, voluntarily nor otherwise, move from their 
location in the subjective storehouse of mind, but reflect from 
where they are, upon the mind of medium, as face of sitter reflects 
perfectly on the mirror in dressing room, and this indeed seems 
true, as I have proved (see case 3 of hypnotic-psychic-phenomena 
in Chapter IX). As May and my spirit guides have told me, 
and as I have proved by thought attunement with them, and with 
others in spirit realms, and found by actual experiment oft 
repeated, my thought sent out by me as souls desire to ego or 1 
spirit of a loved one, or friend, or desired one, impinges shortly 
on their mind, and my desire brings back from them through 
a writing psychic, or other instrument, though absent from me, 
a message, which is an answer to my true desire. But mind you, 
my thoughts are recognized, that is they are seen by spirit sight, 
or their reflection is made manifest, or through vibrations create 
waves in harmony, as a certain note in tuning fork vibration 
begets the same in wire string of piano at other end of room ; and 
also by a sense of prescience or spirit sense of intuition. The 
latter two are active with the discarnate spirit ego, while passive 
with the incarnate one, and therefore not patent to the incarnate 
ego, or at least to his objective mind, especially an ordinary one. 

But to admit that these senses exist in the subjective mind for 
discarnate life purposes, does not in any way account for what 
does not exist in thought or thoughts of my subjective mind, as 
sitter, in the trumpet seance, nor has it been, nor can it be shown, 
that spirit sight, nor intuition, nor any power of mind, has 
creative power to make or find, what was not there in my sub- 
jective mind; and if not there in mind of me, it could not show 
reflection, on the medium's mind, nor as apparition to her, nor 
could the mind of either, or these two faculties of ego create 
sound, or voice, or language in the air, nor show the thing as 
physical, beyond the normal self of medium ; and hence we find 
ourselves again at the blind end of the lane, and this hypothesis 
along with several others counts as naught. 

"Pansy," the little Indian girl, was therefore not created from 
a thought of mine, as listening sitter, along with other six, nor 
from a reflection of such asserted thought, nor was she a creation 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 127 

by the thought of medium, nor was she a reflection of a form 
or vision, nor a simple apparition in the medium's mind. 'Tansy" 
was a spirit, and what I heard was simply vibratory sound waves 
of harmony impinging on my drum of ear, and that of the other 
sitters, produced by spirit vocal organs, operated by a living 
intelligent entity, which then and there asserted she was "Pansy," 
once an Indian girl. I had no thought in my mental storehouse, 
at any time in all my life, of such a personality as "Pansy ;" and 
hence it could not be in my sub-conscious storehouse of knowl- 
edge, at the time in question. And here is an insurmountable 
obstacle to the adoption in this case at any rate, of the hypothesis 
of mind-reading, to account for the sayings of an intelligence of 
some kind, either by the medium, or the Indian girl, no matter 
which. I subsequently learned that she or some other intelligence, 
representing itself as "Pansy," was a guide in the seances of the 
late Maggie Gaul, medium. I have pointed out elsewhere in 
connection with the expressed wish of. May — where my decision 
as to the proposed gift of a certain article to a certain relative < — 
if transmitted to the medium, was not in accord with May's wish ; 
and that was recognized and spoken of by her ; and she adduced 
her reasons for a different disposition of the article, at Mrs. 
Wriedt's trumpet seance, in Detroit. Again it was not my thought 
to her or to the medium, to withhold certain articles which I had 
decided to place with a certain firm for sale (for the same reason 
as in previous instance) but accepted and decided to act upon 
the expressed advice received a day or two later from her at the 
sitting at the materializing; seance at Jonson's in Toledo, where 
she appeared in her transient body and spoke through its vocal 
organs. This is another insurmountable obstacle for the claimant 
that the mind-reading hypothesis will account for it all, or for 
such part of it at least. 

The numerous readers, constituting my jury of thinking men 
and women will please excuse me if I say, that if the telepathic 
hypothesis, or the mind-reading one, or any other mental 
hypothesis is adduced by an opponent of the spiritual hypothesis, 
as the true cause of the "Pansy" phenomena for instance, I must 
have evidence, for as it stands, it is but an assertion, and it seems 



128 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

as such ridiculous to me, to say the least, and very intricate in 
theory; and I maintain cannot be substantiated, nor sustained 
by proof, that my own thought should be conveyed by any sucn 
plan to some other, to enable her, that other one (the medium), 
to practice deceit on me, for it could not be obtained, as my 
thought, if it were not my thought, and if it were not there, and 
therefore the one who uses the argument, is too presumptive, to 
try to use it as a weapon against the other argument, that it is 
a psychic truth. 

There is another point which may be considered here. The 
facts as conveyed to me in the language of the ostensible Indian 
girl I could not verify, until I returned home, and then by com- 
parison with my notes after sitting, I satisfied myself of the 
absolutely correct statements of the alleged spirit of the Indian 
girl. There is another feature that will merit the best thought 
of those who so readily discredit the spiritual hypothesis, and 
quite as readily assert their belief in the telepathic transmission 
of thought, which has never been accepted as well established, 
and the other one, mind-reading, as well. That feature is, that 
to be consistent all the way through, there should on the part 
of the advocates of these hypotheses, be given us some descrip- 
tion or indication of how an invisible, inaudible, intangible 
thought is carried from the "transmitter" of one human person- 
ality to the "receiver" of another human personality, over long 
or short distances, and some reason should be assigned for the 
necessity of a medium using the foregoing, or some other mind 
hypothesis, to account for her getting it, and then adopting a 
different one to account for her using it, such as for the necessity 
of harnessing the thought in words, and creating sound for their 
expression when conveying them back to the original source from 
which they came. But for the present, and for argument's sake 
solely, it is admitted that the language used is the outcome of 
transmitted thought; then how could that account, on the one 
hand for varieties of sound emanating from the so claimed 
intelligent entities; or on the other for psychical manifestations 
called etherializations and materializations? But is it realized 
where we land, if we adopt a mental hypothesis, viz., the mind 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 129 

creates physical sounds, and can therefore create physical forms. 
Is it realized that the incarnate spirit acts through the sub- 
conscious or subjective mind, this being an indestructible occupant, 
of the ego or soul, or more correctly, an attribute of soul. 

Now a step further, and the incarnate spirit having a mind, 
and living in its soul or astral body, within the ordinary body 
physical, has been thus associated during infancy, childhood, 
youth and manhood or womanhood, till advanced age, disease 
or accident makes this physical habitation no longer tenable, and 
a natural law lets the incarnate spirit out, and into the spirit 
sphere, and by this transition it becomes discarnate, and there- 
after a spiritual being in contradistinction to the physical man. 
Does it occur to you that as discarnate, the personality is no 
longer encumbered with a physical body, which held it while 
incarnate in check ; and does it not also follow that the phenomena 
which at best would be only clumsily and imperfectly performed 
with a physical environment or shell, can now, if at all, be 
produced with greater facility and effectiveness, by the unfettered 
spirit, which has perfected more or less in spiritual knowledge; 
and do not the evidences in favor of the latter greatly outweigh 
those of the former? Though believing in the probability of 
telepathic communication between incarnate spirits through their 
sub-conscious minds, still of weightier importance are the testi- 
monies of many discarnate spirits who communicate with me, 
through the incarnate spirit aid, as given in the latter chapters 
of the book. 

From personal tests and observations in the normal, trance 
and hypnotic states, I have yet to discover clear, unmistakable, 
and perfect reproduction of the thought of one person being 
received by the mind of another, by telepathy or mind-reading, 
to an extent to be fairly considered as practicable among scores 
of trials I have made, during the long period of my psychical, 
hypnotic and other investigations. I may have been much less 
successful in my telepathic tests, than most investigators, never- 
theless I have found as a rule, where there were any evidential 
results at all, they may be described as "a general impression," 
"an approximation," "an approach to the real," or impression that 



130 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

it was "a coincidence," rather than an absolutely perfect duplica- 
tion in the "receiver" of the thought that emanated from the 
"transmitter." 

I have for example written on a slip of paper, folded the same, 
handed it to a lady sitting passively, giving her the suggestion 
to sit for a minute or two, with her mind not concentrated on 
anything, until a clear thought came to her mind, and then act 
on that thought. I had written this note, "You will arise, walk 
over to me and pull my nose, as a joke." She did it, laughing 
from the time she arose from her chair, until she returned to it. 
I then asked her to read the note in the hearing of others present. 
She said the thought came to her distinctly but not with every 
detail of words. I next handed the lady's brother a slip on which 
I wrote, "You will rub the top of your head with your hand, 
while sitting, because you don't know what else to do." He sat 
on his chair, and laughingly started rubbing the top of his head, 
and remarked, "I don't know what you want me to do." That 
lady was my wife, who with the brother is now in spirit life. 

My office boy, a lad of sixteen years, with whom I conducted 
many hypnotic experiments, could while hypnotized stand at a 
distance from me, at the opposite side of the room, and tell me, 
what figure or letter of the alphabet I was then looking at. He 
could not do it invariably, but has consecutively sometimes, with 
occasional mistakes, but he did it while in hypnotic state. With 
my own experience, of which the foregoing are examples, and 
with such knowledge as I acquired from the experience of other 
men, I cannot avow my conviction or belief in the adequacy of 
the telepathic hypothesis, nor the mind-reading one, in the normal 
state, and when it's found in trance condition, or hypnotic state, 
it's apt to have its origin in suggestion, which may then be word, 
or act, or concentrated thought. 

I would not expect the mind to account for the production, for 
example of answers to mental questions in the nature of a 
quizzing, or a cross-examination, or otherwise I would not expect 
answers to mental questions, which would necessitate a thorough 
and exact knowledge as to each detail, nor could I transmit a 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 131 

thought that would be to me a solution of a problem, or a some- 
thing outside of the latitude and longitude of the receiver's 
sphere of knowledge, as I do not think such mind capable in 
natural way, to appropriate what was tendered. 

In the trumpet seances with Mrs. Wriedt I would not expect 
the opportunity to gather evidences of the sub-conscious variety, 
for the reason that she is not entranced in her sittings. 

Obviously there could be no attempt made at using the telepathic 
hypothesis to account for the various phases of psychical phenom- 
ena of the physical kind, such as materialization of a transient 
body, which uses its own vocal organs to communicate with; 
or the externalization of psychic power, when heavy bodies are 
moved without visible contact with any person, power or object. 

I have carefully and patiently watched for evidence, which 
might appear to sustain one or other of the mind hypotheses, 
but up to the present time, have_ watched in vain ; and to my 
mind those hypotheses utterly fail to account for the phenomena 
described in the foregoing pages, and among other records. 

One may theorize, invent and plan, as to how the thought 
originates, and what it is, and what is mind in which it is. 
Perhaps it is a thing or body physical, for we are told that 
thoughts are things. Some one may claim that it is power, as 
manifest in molecular aggregation which may cause waves of 
motion, and then at other times a dormant state, but still if it be 
power, quiet or in motion, then to that extent at least, it has 
existence, and must be physical, and patent to spirit sight, and 
also capable of reflection. But under each and every circumstance, 
the thought or thoughts must by this hypothesis have existence 
in the mind of sitter, before seen, reflected, read, realized or felt. 

As thought or knowledge of an intelligence called "Pansy" had 
never habitation in my mind (the sitter) , it clearly follows a 
mind hypothesis will not apply. 

In this connection I feel free to say, that there be none who 
can truly describe the mind or rightly designate its various 
powers, capabilities and functionings. The more I grope and 
think, reflect and meditate, the more convinced am I that mind 



132 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

is as deep a mystery as all else, which pertains to the wonderful 
universe of each individual man, which in turn is but a molecule 
of spirit personality, in the larger Universe. In its functioning 
it would appear to be an attribute of the soul. 



CHAPTER XIX. 

THE seventh and last seance of the November, 1911, series 
was held during the forenoon of November 19th at the 
home of Mrs. Etta Wriedt, and was absolutely private, 
save and except for the presence of this very exceptional psychic. 
This seance proved to be, to me, one of the most important, if 
not absolutely the most relatively important, of all the seances 
I have ever attended in my life up to the 1 present time; and at 
the same time most deeply interesting, and evidentially con- 
vincing; leaving not even a lingering doubt in my mind, as to 
May having kept her promise and redeemed her bond. Taking 
into consideration the many evidential matters presenting, from 
the intercommunion between various members of the family con- 
nections of mine, and myself; and the various attitudes of 
individual relatives one toward another, to all intents and pur- 
poses, the private family talk, with the attitude assumed by one 
and another, regarding this or that circumstance, all so realistic 
and true to the knowledge I possessed, even to minutiae ; and the 
apparently harmonious condition, and happy relationship experi- 
enced by each and everyone; as well as the confirmations of 
previous evidential matter, facts and messages ; together with 
the presentation of new evidential matter, and the clearing away 
of any fragments of ignorance, and my enlightenment as to many 
matters, while so satisfactory and convincing to me, cannot in the 
very nature of things be reproduced in this publication in detail, 
but only alluded to in the briefest outline. One reason for not 
reproducing family affairs in this publication is the fact that to 
most people, as well as to myself, it would appear as needless 
exposure of confidential knowledge; and another reason, as has 
been mentioned elsewhere, that May, my spirit wife, whose 
human personality she has established to my entire satisfaction, — 
and as I have already said redeemed her bond, — expressed her 
desire that I should not use family matters when I had enough 

133 



134 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

other material for my book. This request I shall show my respect 
for, by a faithful compliance therewith in matters of detail, or 
where it would prove inadvisable to repeat a message from one 
to another, or to use language which might be construed as 
personal. 

My alleged spirit daughter, who not only materialized as a 
young woman of about twenty years, but also spoke with me on 
the special occasion at Toledo, when I learned for the first time 
her name, as known in spirit life, and which occasion is elsewhere 
recorded as being the 15th November, 1911, seance at Jonson's, 
and who promised then, and at the last of the Jonson seances, 
to come with her mamma and myself to Detroit; and without 
a doubt she has fulfilled that promise; and was one of the first 
of the numerous intelligences, to speak to me through the trumpet 
at Mrs. Wriedt's. She gave me messages to be delivered to her 
brother and her sister (half-brother and half-sister) ; also told 
me that their mother Martha was present at the seance with her 
mamma, May. 

The next to converse with me was Martha E. King, my first 
wife, who passed to spirit realms about 37 years ago now, and 
who, on this occasion, talked with me, about our children, and 
also other matters. 

Then May joined in the conversation with Martha and me, 
and both of them were agreed and harmonious; and with one 
accord and single purpose, advised me as to my future course. 

Hypatia, my ever-present guide, joined in now, before the loved 
ones withdrew, and her first words were, "You wrote it correctly, 
*tia' is right." To make clear the relation of this interjected 
sentence, I may say that the stenographer who made the report 
of the second seance at Jonson's for me, had in the report spelled 
my guide's name "Hypacia," which I corrected with my pen by 
changing the fifth letter to "t," thus making the word "Hypatia." 
A few minutes before going upstairs to the seance room, and 
while waiting to be called, I wrote the following on a page of 
my memo-book, and kept it exposed to her view until I started 
upstairs, when I put it in my pocket. "Hypatia, the stenographer 






DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 135 

spelt your name with last syllable 'cia/ while I write it 'tia/ 
Which is correct?" The first exclamation was Hypatia's answer 
to my question, and was the first expression which she vocally 
gave in my hearing. This was followed by advice, and instruction 
in regard to certain business matters. A short discussion of a 
particular situation was had by Hypatia, May and Dr. Sharp, 
the psychic's own control, and conclusion reached, that all would 
come out right by my maintaining the attitude I had assumed. 
The balance of the seance turned out to be a gathering of spirit 
guides, and many of them gave their instructions to me. There 
was also some prediction, and caution meted out to me, as well 
as information for me, and instruction what to do. My life 
was to be a new one, and still active I would be ; for special 
work, in spirit spheres, was planning for me. From records 
which I now possess, I must select and gather more, and print 
a book. Then other books to follow this there'll be; and other 
work for me to do, of which I must be close, and much would 
be done for me. I cannot more than outline give, as I have done 
above. This chapter now will conclude a series; but still more 
evidence I will collect, and more truth I will proclaim. 

CORROBORATIVE TESTIMONY. 

"Reports by Herbert G. Paull, Secretary; and by Rev'd Canon 
William Walsh, member of the Canadian Society for Psychical 
Research. A deceased member, 'Mrs. May E. King, zmfe of 
the President, visits a trumpet circle, in Toronto, held- by 
Mrs. Etta Wriedt, trumpet medium, and speaks to those two 
members. 
Dr. John S. King, President C. S. P. R., 
Dear Sir: 

I herewith hand you a partial report of a trumpet seance held 

at the house of Mr. and Mrs. W , Toronto, on the evening 

of Monday, November 27, 1911. 

The seance was held in an attic room, with twenty-five sitters, 
and the medium, Mrs. Etta Wriedt. Among those present were 
the following members of the Canadian Society for Psychical 
Research, namely: Dr. John S. King, President; Rev'd Canon 
Wm. Walsh, Professor E. B. Shuttleworth, Mrs. Coleman, and 
the Secretary, Herbert G. Paull (the writer of this report). 



136 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

The circle was opened with a repetition of the Lord's Prayer 
in unison, followed by singing "Nearer My God to Thee," aug- 
mented by a powerful spirit voice through the trumpet. After 
a cordial introduction by the guide, Dr. Sharp, who evidently 
was able to give the names and idiosyncrasies of every sitter 
present, occasional whispering voices were heard and recognized 
by friends present. Presently a strong and clear voice spoke out 
near Canon Walsh. 

Voice: Canon Walsh. 

Canon Walsh : Yes, who is it ? 

Voice: It is May. 

Canon Walsh : What is your name ? 

Voice : May E. King. I want to thank you for the kind and 
beautiful words you spoke over my body as it lay in the casket. 

The voice purporting to be that of Mrs. King, then continued 
in a lengthy, and touching strain, voicing her thanks and apprecia- 
tion of Rev. Canon William Walsh's tribute to her memory, she 
having been a member of the Research Society, of which Rev. 
Canon Walsh is also a member. Again the same voice changed 
location to where I was sitting, and addressed me. 

May E. King : And you, Mr. Paull, I'm so pleased to see you 
here. 

Mr. Paull : I am delighted to hear you indeed. 

May E. King: I am pleased to be here tonight. All is beautiful 
and bright over here. There is no death. 

The writer cannot recall the exact words of what followed, 
but Mrs. King continued to speak cheerily of the spirit life, and 
spoke once at least of Dr. King as "Johnnie." Several other 
individual voices continued to speak through the trumpet, and 
then a whispering! voice said, while the trumpet was directed to 
Dr. King. 

Voice: Papa. 

Dr. King: Who is it for? 

Voice: For you, papa. 

Dr. King: Is it you, my darling? 

Mr. Paull: Tell us your name. 

Voice: May Donna. 

May Donna: Papa, Hypatia is here. 

Dr. King: Will she sing for us tonight? 

Mr. Paull: I do not recollect the exact reply. 

May Donna: Good-bye, papa. 

Dr. King: Good-bye, darling, speak to us again. 

The writer cannot set down with exactness what further was 
spoken, but subscribes to the above as a faithful account as he 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 137 

recalls it after the seance, and the conversations and communica- 
tions between the voices purporting (and evidently being) the 
voices of Mrs. May E. King and her daughter, May Donna, both 
in spirit life. 

(Signed) Herbert G. Paull, 
Secretary C. S. P. R." 

Dr. John S. King, President C. S. P. R., 

Dear Sir: I send you my report of Mrs. Etta Wriedt's seance, 
held on the 27th of November, 1911, as follows" (corroborative 
testimony) : 

[The Author's Note: — Following is another individual 
member's report of the same section of the trumpet seance as 
reported by the Secretary, Mr. Herbert G. Paull, and although 
the report as a whole was given much more extendedly, the quota- 
tion therefrom has a slightly different construction, though it is 
valuable in that there is harmony of facts in the reports of both, 
though neither is a stenographer.] 

The Canon in his report says: 

"I had a small writing pad and by feeling was guiding myself 
in writing, as it was absolutely black darkness in the room, and 
straining my eyes and ears ; almost unconsciously I was stooping 
forward, trying to catch some faint sight or revealing sound, 
when this to me new, unexpected, and surprising episode took 
place. Now I was quietly startled by just a perceptible touch of 
the trumpet on my left eyebrow. At the instant there was sug- 
gested to my mind that it was done caressingly. From the trumpet, 
seemingly, : n the centre of the circle, and pointing towards me, 
came a strong whisper repeating my name. Then I said : "Who 
is it?" 

Voice: May. 

Then a voice, full, cultured, and clear, and which at once 
recalled to me the voice of Mrs. King, said: 

"Canon, I want to thank you for your kindness in coming and 
offering up a prayer before the casket was closed that day." 

'Then the trumpet seemed to move over in the direction of 
Dr. King and Mr. Paull, who were seated comparatively near 
together, and addressed them in similar tones, as they by their 
responses seemed to recognize. The words addressed to them 
I cannot recall, as I was so interested, excited, and thrilled by 
the recognition of Mrs. Dr. King's familiar and kindly voice, that 
I could not concentrate my attention upon them and their 
respective conversations with her. To me it was all the more 



138 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

startlingly striking in view of the fact that not long before I left 
the residence of Dr. John S. King (the President of our Society) 
accompanied by him, he wrote in his office on a slip of paper and 
showed it to me, as a request of his addressed to Mrs. King, 
using her Christian name, and when the trumpet voice spoke to 
me it was a direct response to, and compliance with, the written 
request at that moment remaining spread out on the table in the 
room we had just left to come to the seance, and some of the 
words and phrases of the trumpet voice were identical with those 
contained in the request. 

Surely the line of least resistance is to follow the exercise of 
our reasoning powers, and accept of the claimed fact, that the 
spirit of Mrs. Dr. King spoke through the trumpet consciously 
and intelligently, touching that very important episode — the 
removal from time to the spirit world, and the bearing away of 
the sacred body to be laid in the last resting-place. 

(Signed) William Walsh." 

More Corroborative Evidence. Mr. and Mrs. John G. Bain, 
Toronto, converse with Mrs„. May E. King, while in her 
transient body, at a Jonson seance in Toledo. 

Toronto, January 27, 1912. 
u Dear Dr. King: 

About the middle of December last, we left Toronto on Sunday 
morning, and on Christmas night I called up Mrs. Jonson and 
made an appointment for the next morning, ten o'clock. On meet- 
ing Mr. Jonson, he informed me that Tuesday evenings belonged 
to the Sun Flower Club, but he would arrange matters so that 
myself and wife might attend. 

We were on hand at eight o'clock, December 26th, and met 
members of the above club, which on that night consisted of 
seventeen. The room where the sitting was held was a large room 
upstairs; the cabinet a small room leading from the large one. 
As strangers we were taken into the small room to inspect it. 
There was no outlet from this room called cabinet, except to the 
large room. Plenty of light was left in the room so that we could 
plainly see anything that might come from the cabinet. The 
minutes of the meeting showed that there were twenty-one 
materialized forms which came from the cabinet. I shook hands 
with two or three of them, one an Indian girl, who came out 
and gave us a lively dance within two feet of where I was sitting, 
and without the slightest sound or vibration. One came who 
had hair about four feet long. I also shook hands with her, and 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 139 

by request of Mrs. Jonson I examined her hair, and let about two 
feet of it draw across my hand, when she turned to cross to the 
other side of the circle. 

Another form, that of a lady strong and most beautiful in 
appearance, came to the cabinet door. At first it could not be 
ascertained who was wanted, but at last the form spoke, saying: 
"I wish to speak to Mr. and Mrs. Bain." We went to the cabinet 
door, and to our surprise and delight there stood Mrs. John S. 
King, your wife, whom we had both known well in life; and 
who had passed out about three months before. She told us 
she had been attracted there by Mrs. Bain's singing, which she 
had heard before while at home in Toronto. She then gave us 
this message to give to you, viz.: 

"Tell Johnnie that you saw and talked with me. Hypatia is 
here ; and my Baby also." 

She was a woman a little above the average size, and she 
dematerialized at our feet, which seemed quite as interesting and 
wonderful, as did her appearing. 

After a few more had appeared, a gentleman came to the door. 
He seemed somewhat weak, and it was perhaps nearly a minute 
before Mrs. Jonson could get any information from him that 
would identify him. At last he said, "I wish to speak to John." 
Mrs. Jonson turned round and said, "Who is John ?" I said that 
perhaps it was me. I went to the door of the cabinet, and to my 
surprise, there stood my brother, who had passed out about four 
years ago. He seemed rather weak and became partly dematerial- 
ized two or three times ; and after a few words of welcome he 
said, "I wish to speak to Katie." (No one in the room knew my 
wife's name.) I called her and he spoke to her. I never saw 
him more plainly in my life ; and his voice was if possible more 
convincing than his features. The last few years of his life he 
wore a beard ; but while in the hospital this was shaven off. He 
came with this beard on, and the last suit of clothes that he had 
worn before his illness. 

******* 

I have given a true account of features of this seance at Mr. 
Jonson's, in my simple way as it occurred. 

Yours very truly, 

(Signed) John G. Bain, 

(for self and wife)." 



CHAPTER XX. 

THIS chapter is devoted to the various trumpet and 
materializing seances, ending with the November series 
of 1911, where communication was had with the per- 
sonality alleged to be my wife ; and in that connection I present 
my argument upon the evidences which brought me to my final 
and firm conviction, that I have attained to a positive knowledge, 
of the truth of spirit return and communion. The form that 
presented for me, was certainly neither a probable nor possible 
fraudulent creation to deceive. 

I would say to each reader, ask yourself the question, how do 
I identify and know my loved ones, friends and acquaintances, 
of the present time, when I meet them anywhere? Would not 
your mental answer be a quick response, "By seeing, hearing and 
conversing with them, as we all do constantly in our daily lives, 
when we meet?" If you have lost your sight, you utilize your 
sense of hearing, and thus judge and recognize them by the sound 
of their voice, tone of speech, manner of expression ; and by the 
nature of the conversation which evolves the evidential knowl- 
edge. The reader can best test these matters in his own home, 
or among his friends or relatives ; for there are no two human 
beings exactly alike, not even so-called twins. No two voices 
sound precisely the same, though in the same key, for nature 
loves variety and produces some peculiarity, which differentiates 
the one from all the others. There is in the make-up of every 
individual a combination of variations which we term human 
personality, which is the distinguishing feature of each, and of 
every individual. 

Unless a man is bereft of reason, he can identify a relative 
or friend, or anyone whom he previously knew, by the aid of 
one or other of his senses, and usually by two of them, such as 
sight and observation, by hearing the voice, and the conversation, 
noting its intonation, and mode of inflection ; and by knowing his 

140 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 141 

previous habits, and any peculiarity ; or from a knowledge of his 
personal history, or by enquiry, in brief, though changing phys- 
ically as the years roll by, he never loses his personal identity, 
and his personality, either here or hereafter, and constantly by 
the securing of evidence from personal, family, business or other 
topics of conversation. The same faculties, and similar procedure 
as in the case of mortals, will enable you to identify the forms, 
voices and individualities which present themselves to you for 
your recognition, when conditions favorable for occult demonstra- 
tions exist. Personally I can neither claim to be easily deceived, 
nor can I be charged with ignorance regarding psychic matters, 
for I have devoted many years to investigating hypnotic and 
psychic phenomena ; and have discovered much hypnotized condi- 
tion, and self-deception, as well as fraudulent design and practice. 
Furthermore, as will be seen in Chapter XII of this book, the 
one who has been "my other self/' my true love, my life partner, 
my pal, my constant companion for more than twenty-five years, 
had agreed with me, and I with her in life, how each should prove 
to the other his or her human personality, no matter which should 
first pass out of the body, and be permitted to return from spirit 
realms, to greet the other in earth realm ; and I am able to present 
instances of fulfillment of the bond. To prove it was none other 
than my own "May," who now presented, frequently in the series 
of occult seances, she wore that smile upon the face which signi- 
fied the externalized joy she felt at her ability to redeem in full 
the bond; and the impress appeared to me as distinct in detail, 
as the pictured face in looking-glass or on photographic plate. 
To me she came as tangible, as true to life, as ever she had been ; 
her slap of hand upon my shoulder, the arm about my neck, the 
cheek to mine, were all in view to those who viewed with me, 
and they too thought it grand and true, and due to her joyful 
thought, that she could come back to me. 

"And did she speak with you?" you ask, "and did the voice 
sound natural ?" She spoke, conversed, appeared and natural was 
in all respects. Her voice was quite as natural as it sounded, 
when she spoke formerly to me in the home, or through the 



142 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

telephone ; and you have had the experience of hearing the voice 
of your acquaintance, friend or relative, who conversed over the 
'phone with you the other day. My "doubting Thomas" friends 
continue to ask me in all earnestness, "Could you be quite sure 
that it was she?" Quite as sure as you could be, either) in your 
home, or in your own 'phone conversation with a loved one. "Do 
you not think the gathering where these manifestations occurred 
was the outcome of evil influence or evil spirits ?" No ! To me 
it was corroborated in a very marked degree, by the scriptural 
evidence — a physical seance, held in a closed room, where were 
gathered Christ's own disciples, at which their late Lord and 
Master, in materialized form, showed Himself to them, and 
proved His personality to them, in order to convince them, 
exhibiting to a doubting disciple the wounds in His side. One 
the other does confirm, whatsoe'er it be, for there is exact 
similarity. 

And still you ask, "Why do you need a medium?" To this 
my answer is, for the same reason that you need a central office, 
as well as your home 'phone. 

May, who at another place, through the aid of another medium, 
at a previous time (at Mrs. Wriedt's, the trumpet medium, 12th, 
13th November, 1911, see Chapters XIII and XIV), had promised 
me to be at Jonson's seances, to do the very thing which she has 
done, and which I have recorded (see Chapters XV, XVI and 
XVII) ; and the reader is now considering; and who, acting on 
the suggestion I had given her at a previous seance (see Chapter 
XV), that she was not as large as in life, came to me since then 
in her fully formed natural development, true to life in form, 
features, voice, mannerisms, action and tangibility; with power, 
zeal, and other characteristics, and normal expression, and step- 
ping out and up to see me, with the agreed upon name greeting 
of "Johnnie" patted me on the cheek and head with her hand, 
put her cheek to mine, slapped me several times on my left 
shoulder; and continuing said, "Yes, my dear, dear Johnnie" 
(which was to be her proof test name for me after she passed 
out), "I am May. I am your 'Babe'" — what I had agreed to 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 143 

call her, as a test of my human personality, if I passed to spirit 
realms and returned, and "Johnnie" was to be her proof test 
name, after she had passed out and had come back to me. So that 
in either case, no matter which passed out first, my name was to 
be "Johnnie," and so designated by her, as a test, if she could 
return; and hers was to be "Babe" if I could return. So here 
came the proof urging itself on me, viz. : "Oh ! my dear 'Johnnie/ 
I do miss you so much, but I am able to be near you, and each 
time I materialize I can be stronger; and I enjoy materializing 
so you can. see me, and the oftener I do so, the easier it will be 
for me to do it." She said also, " It is easier for. me to speak to 
you through the trumpet, than this way, and I can speak louder 
too," which I found to be correct. Her style of speaking, 
language used, mode of expression, features, size, build, her very 
compound self, with her every mannerism most assuredly estab- 
lished in my mind, her individuality and personality at each of 
the seances, but particularly so at the last of the November seances 
held with Jonson. 

Aside altogether from the foregoing, there is in addition 
absolutely strong and irrefutable evidence, relating to family 
matters, personal possessions left behind her, and her directions 
as to their disposal; and family and personal business affairs, in 
which her directions, in several instances, were in direct conflict 
with the decision I had reached in my mind, thus entirely destroy- 
ing the hypothesis of thought transference or telepathy in her 
case; and her expressed desire to have her gold watch, jewelry, 
diamonds and other valuables retained in the safety deposit vault 
of a bank, that no person other than the bank official and myself 
knew; and said official did not see or know a single one of the 
several articles ; and there to remain until she would give me at 
some future time instructions as to her desires regarding their 
disposal ; and in this respect proving that there was not, nor could 
there be, any mental telepathy from others to the medium, while 
if telepathic communication from me to the medium, whether 
Mrs. Wriedt, trumpet medium of Detroit, or J. B. Jonson, 
materializing medium of Toledo, Ohio; it must certainly, to be 



144 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

genuine, be my mental thought or decision, and not the very 
contrary. So that the only hypothesis that has any show of 
probability, or even possibility, outside of the spiritualistic hypo- 
thesis, viz. : mental telepathy or thought transference, has already 
been shown to be in other chapters as well as now an absurdity 
as well as untenable, insufficient and useless, as an hypothesis 
to account for the production. - I may here add that much of 
the communications relative to family connections, domestic 
affairs, personal possessions, and business matters, for obvious 
reasons cannot be given publicity; and hence some^of the very 
best evidences, to myself personally, cannot be utilized in the 
record herein contained, which is intended for publicity. 

In earth life, May E. King used certain pertinent, and as I 
thought sensible expressions; on occasions when they might 
benefit those who heard them, though not intended for that pur- 
pose. Her many friends will recognize them when they read them. 
"I don't believe in telling family or business affairs to anybody." 
"I never gossip about others." "I have enough to do minding my 
own business," etc. 

While she spoke with me alone through the trumpet at Mrs. 
Wriedt's, and gave advice about certain possessions, and the views 
which she had been able to hear of certain interested parties, she 
said in her characteristic language, "I don't want you to make 
public family or business matters." This is certainly characteristic 
of the personality, if it be not of the character that will admit 
it as circumstantial evidence in favor of the personality. 

Again at the Jonson seance, where others were present with 
myself, she, in materialized form, not only confirmed her predic- 
tion at Detroit, that she would materialize at Jonson's seance, 
and speak with me there, but she likewise confirmed, and con- 
tinued that conversation, and most guardedly avoided naming the 
Bank, which she had done when I was with her) alone, on the 
first occasion; and also studiously avoided naming any of the 
articles to be destributed, or the persons who were considered 
in that connection ; or the name of any business firm which had 
on the previous occasion been mentioned. Nor did she allude to 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 145 

my removal of her jewels from the home to the bank on Friday, 
10th November, 1911, as I left for Detroit next morning. 
(Saturday morning, 11th November.) In addition to the fore- 
going, the same intelligence spoke ; and the records contain addi- 
tional evidence, establishing the human personality of May E. 
King. (See No. 11 materialization, in Chapter XVI, at Jonson 
seance on 15th November, 1911.) 

I submit that the evidence is presented, which proves the intel- 
ligence to be exceedingly cautious, a characteristic of the alleged 
personality. The evidence also proves that the intelligence talking 
through the trumpet on the 12th November, and the one talking 
in materialized form on the 15th November, another time and 
place were one and the same intelligence, and personality. The 
evidence also proves that as the intelligence disapproved of some 
things that I had decided to do, it could not be accounted for by 
telepathic communication; and could not possibly be accounted 
for by a coincidence ; nor by fraud ; nor as a matter of fact, by 
any other known hypothesis ; it must therefore of necessity be, 
as it represented itself to be, the stated personality., Then there 
is the circumstantial evidence of both Hypatia and Dr. Sharp, 
promising me at Mrs. Wriedt's that they also would visit the 
Wednesday night seance at Jonson's ; and both keeping that 
promise ; and not only keeping it, but materialization of their 
bodies was promised; and this promise was also kept. Not only 
does their appearance at Jonson's in materialized form establish 
the fulfillment of their prediction, that they would ; but becomes 
corroborative evidence, that the materialization of both wife and 
daughter took place as predicted at Detroit; and established as 
a fact or truth by the introduction by Hypatia of wife and 
daughter, which is evidence of each of these personalities, that 
the prediction made at Detroit, by May was, as well as the 
promises by Hypatia and Dr. Sharp, fulfilled at Jonson's in 
Toledo, in the sight and hearing of all the" members of the Sun- 
flower class, present at the seance on 15th November, 1911. (See 
Chapter XVI.) 

I am quite certain, in fact quite as certain as I am of anything 



146 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

I presume to know, such as my friends, relatives, acquaintances, 
occupation and responsibilities, that the best professional delineator 
or actor the world could produce would ignominiously fail to 
present himself or herself, or produce anyone to; so present, for 
example at a Jonson seance, as a perfect duplicate form' of my 
life partner, and constant daily associate for the last quarter of 
a century; and with similar natural development, form, feature, 
voice and mannerisms, together with similar action, tangibility, 
power, zeal and other normal indications, and thought expressions, 
so as to deceive me, regarding each and all of the foregoing 
characteristics. And again, even in one of Mrs. Wriedt's trumpet 
seances conducted in the dark, for voice communication, how 
could it be possible for the medium, or an accomplice, to conduct 
a conversation, or reply to my numerous interrogations, or make 
request of me not to dispose of each of several of her personal 
effects as I had designed in my mind to do ; and give her reasons 
therefor, regarding their disposal ; make use on the one hand of 
the personal name, and in these cases likewise give her reasons. 
And further, two days later in another State in a Jonson seance 
with the materialized body (and to be consistent it would have 
to be the same personality, even if an accomplice) comes, as I 
will show, into the view and hearing of all the sitters; and the 
conversation began in Detroit is continued in Toledo, and not 
only that but it confirms what was said and done at the former 
place, as witness the quotation from the stenographer's report, 
which was sworn to : "Do just as I said about my things."' "It 
is not necessary to repeat that. About my jewels, I want them 
left where they are, in the safety deposit vault in the bank. I 
don't want them given away* for a very long time. Then I will 
instruct you about what I want done with them. My single 
diamond, I want you as soon as you go home, to have it set as 
a scarf pin. Be careful and watch where you take it, do you 
understand ? And when you wear it, it will make it easier for me 
to come near to you." 

I ask the reader to note the facts ; that I placed watch, diamonds 
and jewelry above referred to in the bank on Friday noon, left 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 147 

my home on Saturday morning, and had my first communication 
from my wife on Sunday through the trumpet at Mrs. Wriedt's, 
slightly more than forty-eight hours after the deposit had been 
made. 

In speaking to me at the very first of the November, 1911, 
series, in Mrs. Wriedt's seance room May or "Babe" employed 
the test name "Johnnie," it being the first opportunity she had 
for so doing ; and alluded to my having placed her things in the 
safety deposit vault at the bank. I immediately asked her what 
bank, and she replied giving the name. I have already twice 
mentioned our agreement in- the summer of 1911 ; but I wish to 
impress its importance on the mind of the reader, and to enable 
each to recognize the early constant efforts made by May, for 
not only proving by test names her personality, but by tests of 
her own design, to prove her personality in many ways, some 
of these have already been presented, and she has assured me 
she, if debarred at one door, will try another; and if one plan 
fails will devise another. 

It had been mutually agreed between us in the summer of 
1911, that after separation by death of the body, if should be 
we continued to be alive and were permitted to return, if I passed 
out of body first and returned, I was to partially prove my 
personality by speaking] her test name, "Babe," and partially by 
private or personal matters unknown by those outside of our- 
selves. If she passed out of body first and returned, she was to 
partially prove her personality by speaking my test name "Johnnie," 
and partially by private or personal matters unknown by those 
outside of ourselves. These names were not known as ours by 
other persons. As she passed from her physical body on Septem- 
ber 29, 1911, it was the forty- fourth day thereafter, that she began 
to prove her personality, as outlined in the chapter dealing with 
the first seance on November 12, 1911. 

I now quote further from the sworn statement of record as 
follows: "You were not with me when I passed out (a fact), but 
I couldn't have spoken to you if you had been there, but now, 
dear 'Johnnie/ we will make up for lost time." 



148 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

In order to rightly and understanding^ appreciate my con- 
clusions, the reader has only to assume a similar relative position 
to mine. 

If you are a man do you really mean to say it is possible to 
deceive you in either night or day, by the presentation of a 
woman form to represent your wife, with whom you've lived most 
happily for many years of life, and whose habits and conversa- 
tions, acts and mannerisms, as well as knowledge of personal 
affairs, induce you to accept the presentation as your wife, if it 
were some other woman? And I ask you further, either man 
or wife, if you really did believe and accepted it as a fact, how 
long 1 would your acceptance last? Now I will also ask you, if 
you are not aware that variety in all creation is so very great, 
that man cannot find two apples in an orchard, or two blades 
of grass, two human beings, not even twins, nor two units of 
any natural thing which are in each and all respects a perfect 
duplicate, the one of the other. 

I feel justified in saying that, having during many years made 
scores of individual private investigations, conducted with patience, 
perseverance and care, results have in a large number of them 
proved unprofitable and disappointing ; and therefore the assump- 
tion by any person that I could be so imposed upon, by either -a 
medium or their accomplice, or in any other manner, with the 
experience I have gained, would awaken my sympathy for them 
in their self-delusion. 

I submit the foregoing group of associated evidence, which I 
claim no single hypothesis or combination of hypotheses will 
account for, other than the spiritual hypothesis, which, even if 
unsupported by any other evidence, clearly establishes the truths 
contended for. 

I will ask the man without prejudice, and with an open mind 
to consider the possibility of a fraudulent interjection upon the 
scene, at each of the three materialization seances at Jonson's, 
of some one, and the same one human being on each occasion, 
claiming to be my spirit wife; where the said form would be 
visible not only to me, but to all present ; and whose conversation 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 149 

would have to be consistently maintained throughout the three 
occasions at Jonson's, as well as on the first two occasions before 
I went to Jonson's, together with two which were subsequent 
thereto, or total of four trumpet ones at Mrs. Wriedt's and a 
grand total of seven. Three of the four sittings had were with 
her alone, and door was locked, and voice was strong, and more 
clear than that at Jonson's, and easier too with trumpet there, 
than with the mouth at Jonson's, so the form claimed. The reader 
will further realize that these various talks on subjects personal 
or private,, or in the home, as held throughout the November 
series of seven seances, first two in Detroit, then three in Toledo, 
and lastly and again two in Detroit, must all absolutely harmonize 
with the verities discussed, or realized, or which were known to 
have existence; and close connection with family, general and 
business matters. , I ask you now, could I be deceived into believ- 
ing, or could any one, by any system of fraud, however cleverly 
devised or invented, succeed by both trumpet, and form presenting 
— in either or in both cases to the area of my mental conception, 
so as to be cognized by my physical senses, and accepted by con- 
viction as being my wife ; which likewise was confirmed by others, 
as note the stenographic report sworn to as correct, and supplied 
to me, if it were not her? And here note further that the said 
form encompassed a detail of knowledge, sufficient to converse 
intelligently upon personal, private, family and business affairs, 
and at the same time if fraudulent appeared in the duplicate 
physical form of the genuine, for the presumably express purpose 
of deceiving me, and with me all the others at the seance. More- 
over, is any reader of the foregoing, or could there be any one in 
their normal senses anywhere, ready to admit the probability, 
much less the possibility of my being hoaxed into accepting the 
fraudulent substitute for the genuine? Such presumption cannot 
stand. Is it not self-evident that there could never be a fraudulent 
substitute, that would be the exact duplicate of the genuine 
physical form and personality; and equally self-evident, that no 
attempted fraudulent effort could have been made, that would 
harmonize fraudulent and genuine, in natural voice, facial expres- 



150 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

sion, manner of speech, language used, and personal character- 
istics, to say nothing of the intimate personal knowledge possessed 
of family events, personal possessions, casual knowledge, local 
in character, or acquired information. Where would land, or 
what would be the fate of a fraudulent person seeking to duplicate 
the genuine, under my quizzing cross-examination, and difference 
of view or opinion, as held by the genuine and myself before; 
and between another and myself since the genuine passed to spirit 
life ? Ever and always, remembering that events on this occasion, 
as well as on the first, the fulfillment at Detroit of a promise or 
agreement made in earth life, by the genuine and myself; and 
secondly the consummation of predictions made to me in Detroit, 
by my alleged life partner, or a fraudulent existence, that she 
or it would materialize and talk with me at Toledo, a continua- 
tion there, of what was talked of in Detroit. No other plan or 
way, it seems to me, would serve as well, to intercept a fraud 
presenting. The detailed instructions or requests for me not to 
do, what I proposed to do, with certain things among my wife's 
possessions, of which no person, other than myself and she, had 
any knowledge, together with instructions as to what she (this 
form, my wife "May," or "Babe"), desired me to do instead, 
with the self-same articles; disposes not alone of the question 
of fraud in this instance at least; but likewise, most effectually, 
disposes of the mind-reading, or thought-transference and every 
other faulty mind hypothesis; and they need not, therefore, be 
further entertained for even brief consideration. 

Throughout these chapters, the careful investigator will find 
from beginning to the end, a cobweb connection of circumstantial, 
corroborative and direct evidential matter, in support of the claim 
that the human personality has been established, as that of the 
individualized materialization, claiming to be my spirit wife May. 
So conclusively convincing is the evidence to me, that I am 
sure, that the intelligence which formed up in my presence, on 
the three occasions at Jonson's, talked and walked with me, as 
she had done for nearly quarter of a century in life, asked me 
to do certain things when I returned home and bid me "Good- 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 151 

bye," then slowly dissolved or melted away as snow, passing down 
into the floor, as I leaned over towards her, my face and my 
eyes meeting hers as the smile and all else melted into thin vapor, 
disappearing at my very feet, was none other intelligence or 
personality save what it professed to be, viz.: my spirit wife, 
with manifest and tangible body, May E. King. What she and 
I had earnestly, sincerely, and I might say almost sacredly agreed 
in life to do, if our existence continued in spirit realms, and it 
were possible for either of us, and we were permitted to carry 
out our agreement, that either one would contribute their best 
efforts in offering the proofs of the truth as we found it. 

Unless the minds of readers are firmly set as biased, so that 
they will not accept any evidence to be adduced to prove a truth, 
but stubbornly object to acknowledge it, then such must stand 
convicted as unreasonable. I therefore maintain that the case as 
herewith submitted, along with the evidence, is sustained. 

Permit me, honest critic with unbiased mind, now to ask you, 
was all the foregoing as described, and further much more of it, 
in great variety to come, simply a coincidence, or a strange yet 
singular combination of hypotheses to work together as a com- 
plicated plan; and if not, then what was it, if it be not spirit life 
made manifest to man? If answer you cannot give to me, and 
have an awakened mind, I will appeal to reason, and I answer 
for you. My physical senses, my mental impressions, my soul 
recognition manifesting in my spiritual sense of intuition, which 
long has slumbered, but now awakens to find resulting proof, 
from tests mutually agreed upon, while yet she lived with me 
on earth; and which are further endorsed or supported by 
numerous evidences throughout the book, together now confirm 
the truth, that our spirit life or carnate spirit continues on after 
the shell or body dies, and can and does, when it becomes dis- 
carnate, communicate with mortals. 

I frankly state that I no longer doubt, nor hold a mental 
reservation; but claim that May and I have together solved the 
problem, upon which I have spent the riper years of my life; 
and she as a co-investigator spent several later years (four) ; 



152 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

and concluded with carefully studied plans, and strong desire, 
and with determined truthful operative demonstration, are satis- 
fied that we are by the aid of mediums and spirit guides and 
helpers, able to conjointly present in the chapters and records 
of this book facts, circumstances, and evidences, which can be 
substantiated in most cases on oath by responsible and reputable 
witnesses and auditors of such evidence. We believe that the 
evidences presented can withstand the storms of any or all adverse 
criticism — no matter where nor what the point of origin ; nor 
the measure of the force or influence employed; and this and 
similar evidence, which accumulates as the work of compilation 
goes on, does and will establish the existence of 

(1) The continuity of life; (2) Spirit return, and (3) Spirit 
communion with mortals of earth. 



CHAPTER XXI 

I HAVE already afforded the reader the opportunity of con- 
sidering two distinct phases of psychic mediumship, viz. : 
That for the trumpet-voices; and that for the physical 
production of materialized but transient physical bodies. I will 
now introduce a third distinct phase commonly designated auto- 
matic writing — but as an exceptional case of that phase, differing 
from all others of the phase I have met, in that it is complicated 
with other features of a psychic character. The intelligences 
who have written through her hand have utilized one or the other, 
or both of the other two phases, to prove themselves to be the 
identical personalities they alleged themselves to be. 

Miss Maud Venice Gates, "The Human-Psychic-Telephone," 
is a native of New York State, and was educated, trained and 
graduated as a nurse; and has also been teacher, manager, 
genealogist and writer. She is mentally bright and intelligent; 
statuesque, robust in build, and a maiden lady. The photo for 
the plate, the last one possessed, was taken a few years ago, 
when as a graduate nurs"e she registered at Albany, New York 
State. Her object in view earlier in life was to become a physician, 
but family changes and illness prevented its attainment. 

In answer to my question "How did you find out about your 
automatic writing gift, and when?" she replied: "In 1892, while 
experimenting with a ouija board (a kind of planchette), I soon 
learned that I could not only write with the board, but could write 
if I placed a pencil in my fingers and sat passively. I asked my 
hand questions when I wished to know things about the future, 
and about other things, with as much interest as girls ordinarily 
have in telling their fortunes by cards. The capacity to write 
automatically has remained with me ever since, but not as per- 
fected as it now is." 

"The automatic speaking is in obedience to my will or voluntary 
commands. This only came to me in 1905, when I was playing 

153 



154 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

different records on a graphophone. My vocal organs talked an 
eloquent speech, that I had never heard. Without to me apparent 
cause this speech stopped in the middle of a sentence, and refused 
to continue in response to my mentally expressed wish." 

"In August, 1892, I became ill, abandoned a case I was nursing 
and went home. I had what I believed to be a slight delusion, 
which I naturally ascribed to the effects of mercurial poison I 
had inhaled, while I had sublimated it in course of duty. Soon 
voices began talking to me and told, me I was to be a medium. 
To this in any form I was strongly opposed. However, on August 
21, 1892, a constant ring of rhyme began to go through my head; 
and different intelligences talked to me on one subject or another." 

The melody of rhyming sentences in what the psychic writes 
is not more strange and exceptional, than are the spoken exclama- 
tions of trance mediums speaking to their audiences. The 
language used in either case, is not the exact language of the 
intelligence in every case that communicates, or if so be, it is 
moulded by the instrument through which it comes, no matter 
from what source the thought emanates; the thought itself is 
really conveyed. Rhyming in this case is an unconventional mode 
of expression, some of which may sound as frivolous, or meaning- 
less play with words, but nevertheless conveys, both hidden and 
plain, certain thoughts and absolute facts, quite unknown to the 
psychic writer's objective mind, which had existence in some 
instances before she was born ; and in sources which she never 
could have reached, and which thoughts could not to her be con- 
veyed in any ordinary way. 

This woman, who had studied for three years and graduated 
as a nurse, and had studied to become a physician, for at least 
a full year, had some knowledge of the human anatomy, for 
she said to me, "At one time my conscious self seemed to be 
crowded down into my medulla oblongata region ; and the involun- 
tary talking power seemed to occupy my whole upper brain 
region. Music seemed to ring through my bones and muscles, 
as well as my head. This independent passive portion of my 
ego, seemed to go through many experiences too numerous to 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 155 

mention now. This strange power was attached to me. 1 could 
not escape it, and therefore must abide by its possession. To be, 
as you have asked me to be, perfectly candid, I viewed it about 
as you would view a useful, perfect third arm. I resolved to 
never wed, lest a husband would be my guardian, according to 
our laws; and in the case as I have mentioned to you, in every 
detail, he might consider, and succeed in proving me insane, and 
place me in an asylum. So I decided to treat this gift as a third 
arm, and keep it out of sight." 

She has been looked upon as being an unsolved mental curiosity. 
As a psychic instrument, I have secured through her most 
wonderful results. i She has given me her full consent to give 
my definition, of the name and functions of the instrument, which 
I now do this month of April, 1912. 

Miss Maud Venice Gates, of New York State, defined to be 
"The Human-Psychic-Telephone" with automatic action, includ- 
ing movement, writing and speech; whose conscious and sub- 
conscious miri"ds, act independent of each other, without clashing 
or confusion ; and with both carnate and discarnate psychic force 
and action. (Though this definition was made subsequent to many 
of my records, I did anticipate, and placed it here.) 

The rhyming, grammar, words and sentences, are shaped by 
the psychic instrument, but not the normal self, "more like the 
mouldboard of the plow that shapes each furrow, no matter who 
the plowman be. As even-ness of furrows is harmonious to the 
eye, so rhythm by the instrument makes words sound euphonious 
to the ear. Through this peculiar automatic instrument there 
come expressions colored, shaded, tinted or modified by her own 
personality, but mysterious as a whole, on account of its harmony 
of sound, and its rhyming character when read aloud; likewise 
directly confirmatory, or circumstantial and evidential in character ; 
and is certainly a problem worthy of the consideration of the 
most experienced psychologist. My experience with, and study 
of her extended, at long and short intervals, over a period of 
some seven or eight years. 

I give more or less disconnectedly a series of my own jottings 



156 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

of the operations of her mind, together with her replies to a 
portion of my interrogations herewith. She apparently is an open- 
minded person, not wedded to anything, and realizes she is dif- 
ferent, mentally and psychically, from all others she has met; 
admits she has never been anything but an involuntary psychic 
student, and has not deeply studied any but her own case. It is 
as easy she says for her to write letters as it is to talk, and she 
can do both at one and the same time, which is evident to me. 
Her consciousness remained with her through all of the peculiar, 
and often disagreeable and alarming processes of her develop- 
ment, or attunement of the conditions necessary to the power to 
be a sort of telephone instrument, as she alleges, between the 
living and their departed friends. But as her entire story would 
be too long to include here, I give it in brief, as gathered more 
or less consecutively, and combine it with my own observations. 

As she remembered, its early beginning was a strange sensation 
to her, when she found that if she let herself settle into a certain 
passive state, her lips would talk themselves, her hands would 
move, accompanying the words ; and many other easily noticeable 
peculiarities would present ; and to her own apprehension curious 
and interesting things happened to her. She experimented and 
learned that her body and speech would act independently of 
her volition. All she had to do was to request it to perform,, and 
it would speak, or gesture, or sing, or dance for her own enter- 
tainment, for hours if she desired it to do so ; and she would not 
feel tired as a consequence. Instead of being tired she was more 
likely to feel rested or revitalized, when she was ready to command 
it to stop. 

She claims that her father in spirit does not stay with her, 
but comes to her soon after she begins to write, with the idea 
that she wishes for his presence, and dictation. The automatic 
speaking came as an added form of the automatic action. She 
told me she never liked the name medium, as in her mind it was 
associated with control or dictation, which was not exactly true 
in her case. She had been called an "automatic message bearer," 
but even that might indicate that the power to do was not under 




MISS MAUD VENICE GATES, 
"The Human-Psychic-Telephone." 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 157 

her own volition, which would be untrue. She thought that 
perhaps the name I gave her, "Human-Psychic-Telephone," with 
automatic action would be the best, and after due consideration 
accepted it, as a comprehensive designation. She really never 
gave it a serious thought before, but will henceforth acknowledge 
it, as her exclusive right; and she will hereafter, therefore, be 
better known, and designated. She alleges she can hear clair- 
audiently, as if the message is written on a fine thread, and so 
comes down through her brain. This power is interchangeable 
with the automatic writing, but she never has them both at the 
same time. If she is writing, or is in a hurry, she will sometimes 
hear the rest or balance of the message. If she hears the message 
her hand does not write it, and if she then wishes it on the paper 
she must write it voluntarily. If she is making an automatic 
speech, and is disturbed, so that she herself talks about ordinary 
subjects, the speech waits, where she left it, like water in a tube; 
and she can hitch on her power, to let it rule her speech ; and it 
will continue from where it left off, without any break or evident 
annoyance. The speeches she so makes, are far above her normal 
power of composition or expression ; and as a rule have a tendency 
to rhyme. Sometimes her hand writes poems, and she can talk 
while the hand is doing the writing, and not interfere in the 
slightest with its action. It will continue, easily, steadily, like a 
graphophone playing a tune, after it is set in motion, and will 
so continue to do until it is through. The first conscious knowl- 
edge she has, of what it has written, is when it stops and she 
reads it through. 

She has good health and to exert this power does not tire her. 
She alleges that she sometimes has the power to heal in this same 
automatic fashion. She can talk in several, to her unknown, 
languages. She tells me that these tongues seem to be ancient, 
and not modern languages. She cannot understand what she 
says unless she automatically translates it, which she appears to 
have the power to do. This she says in her own words, "These 
languages are not meaningless jargon, for I have experimented, 
and found that this power would, at my suggestion, converse 



158 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

through my powers of speech, with intelligences speaking peculiar 
languages, either through entranced mediums, or through trumpets 
in seances." All her different phases are to her now so habitual, 
that to have them seems to her to be normal, and she would be 
as astonished if she should attempt to talk automatically, and no 
talk came, as she might be if she attempted to move her arm 
and found it refused to act. 

She writes, she claims, for her father every morning and 
evening. She asserts with very candidly expressed words and 
sentiments that "the proceeding takes the place of former, or is 
now, our modernized family worship." Regarding the question 
of conditions as applicable to her phenomena, she explained that 
she habitually and easily, as one would move their hands, con- 
centrates her conscious attention to about the condition of a 
slight reverie; but is at the time perfectly conscious, and can stop 
writing, or begin at any time ; and if she stops in the middle of 
a message, when she returns to it (the message), it will con- 
tinue perfectly from where she left off before. All the automatic 
messages are written in her own handwriting, and do not appear 
to be impressed on her consciousness, until she reads them. If 
she hears any part of the message clair-audiently, her hand does 
not write it ; and she must then write what she heard voluntarily. 
Her mind in the proper condition for the automatic writing is 
sufficiently preoccupied, so that when alone she spells the words 
written voluntarily aloud, so as to attract her conscious approval. 
She frequently writes whole pages purely automatically, receiving 
no mental impression, except from reading the words after they 
are written. The messages come in a continuous way without 
capitalization, and it is necessary for her to add those and also 
"notice when the individuals change." 

I think I have already mentioned, that the messages, as a rule, 
are either spoken or written rhyme. I may add that though they 
rhyme, those I have seen are rarely, if at all, in regular meter, 
as is usual in standard poetry. The rhyming sentences however 
sound euphonious. One point mentioned by her, that I find I 
have missed recording is, that when she was alone, she used to 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 159 

experiment in many ways, and among other things learned that 
she could stand passively and her "feet would walk themselves/' 

While writing sometimes, the messages run into each other, 
and two come at once, one semi-clairaudiently, using part of the 
sentence, or rather the sentence being written by her hand as 
a part of the thought they are expressing. Sometimes they 
double on a phrase. So then she normally copies them to make 
them clear. 

Suffice it to say that most of the automatic written messages 
to me were written by the hand of Miss Gates while holding my 
own fountain pen — designated by Stead and some others of the 
writers as my psychic pen — and on pages of blank books, which 
I invariably took there for the purpose, and brought back with 
me when the writing was completed each time. Such writings 
as I selected for publication were reproduced for printer's copy 
in the exact wording as received by me. To have eliminated the 
rhythm by substitution of words of mine — as has been suggested 
by a distinguished earth friend, as well as by a valued spirit teacher 
and aider — would surely have been, in my judgment, a tampering 
with the evidence. Hypatia, who has vouched for the genuineness 
of each writer who made use of my pen in the automatic writing 
seances, endorses my decision in this matter. 

The Author's Conclusions, Concerning this Psychic 
Instrument^ 

I would ask the reader before proceeding further, to dispossess 
himself of the error of supposing that the written message as 
it comes to view, is a facsimile of what the intelligence discarnate 
used to write, while incarnate as a mortal, for such is not the 
case; but takes the form which the instrument's normal hand 
writes, so the intelligence uses what is already there, and suited 
to its purposes. The reader will then probably enquire in thought, 
"How then can I be assured that the thought which suggests the 
words so penned in a kind of medley, and of rhyming character, 
has not its origin in the mind of the instrument?" As a general 
rule, it is not even difficult to find corroborative, or even direct 
evidence in some cases, which not only disproves it, but which 



162 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

These examples from among- many I submit, are to myself most 
convincing proofs that the writing psychic is not personating, and 
not guilty of fraud, for some of the mediums through whom I 
made these tests were hundreds of miles apart from her. 

The evidence above quoted is largely circumstantial and cor- 
roborative, and yet establishes the genuineness of the automatic 
psychic; but there is yet to consider the strongest and most con- 
vincing kind of evidence to be found, viz. : direct evidence which 
is voluntarily presented in many of the communications; while 
by cross-examination as question and answer direct, the intelli- 
gence establishes its identity, and often proves its human person- 
ality. I would here ask each scholastic reader, or even the off-hand 
and self-wise critic — who scorns to consider the matter seriously 
enough to investigate, and does not hesitate to pronounce it all 
as absurd, ridiculous and incredible, or simply to pronounce it 
fraud — to stop and think whether a student could open the third 
or fourth book of Euclid, and demonstrate any problem there 
correctly, without first being possessed of all the knowledge con- 
tained in the pages preceding it; and if not, will it not be quite 
as unreasonable for a critic to open up this book at a later page, 
and begin to criticize without knowledge of the contents of all 
previous pages, lest he build his opposition structure on a false 
premise ? 

Another thought I include for the reader's consideration on 
this feature is, that no human being is so wise that they may 
perchance know everything, or possess at least all the knowledge, 
names, dates and circumstances that are contained in each and 
all of the written messages from first to last, of the many hundreds 
received through this psychic's hand, as well as the personalities 
of all the writers of those messages, for the hypothesis of fraud 
presupposes that the medium must possess all the knowledge 
which she imparts through the various messages she writes ; and 
this an unbiased reader will not admit, nor even believe, for such 
varied and prolific knowledge could never be encompassed by 
any one mind, from such diversified sources, and limited by years 
exceeding the span of the instrument's mortal life. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 163 

In conclusion I give it as my unbiased opinion that "The 
Human-Psychic-Telephone" is the most complicated psychical 
instrument I have ever met. She has been subjected by me to 
very many and exacting tests of her mental, as well as psychical 
capacity, and supplied, without a moment's hesitation, automatic 
answers in writing, which I believe prove from their nature, 
and from the knowledge conveyed, that they could only have had 
their source in the intelligences which were credited with writing 
them, many of which appear in different chapters. These intelli- 
gences who write have many of them appeared to me, at one 
or more seances held by each of four different materializing 
mediums; six trumpet mediums, either before or after their 
written messages, or their own part of the conversations held 
with me; and in this manner I have secured ample evidence of 
corroborative character, to establish their identity beyond a single 
doubt. This fact alone must establish the genuineness of her 
automatic faculty, as well as to account for the wonderful 
diversity of thought and knowledge imparted to me. The reader 
will find in the chapters to follow, much of what I promised, viz. : 
cobweb or connecting evidence, and of sufficient interest to compel 
the most careful investigation. 

In the writing of messages, which feature I am dealing with, 
Eberling, the guide or controlling spirit of "The Human-Psychic- 
Telephone," is assisted by elemental spirits, with the result that 
rhyming is introduced for a purpose which I will not attempt to 
explain, though it may possibly be simple, and if rightly under- 
stood might be quite acceptable. A wise and prudent person will 
never deny the possibility of anything, unless prepared to dis- 
prove it. 

It may prove of interest to readers to learn the view of some 
of the intelligences who have made use of this rhyming psychic. 
From each communication I make extracts, for they write at 
greater length elsewhere. (See Chapter XXXI.) 

Hypatia : "It is not difficult to make this subject write, that is 
"if she is active in the automatic key ; but as she of her conscious 
"self does neither hear nor see, unless she thinks of writing, the 



164 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

"door is closed to me | and as her rnind subconscious is our instal- 
lment alone, her mind aids our suggestion. If she reads the 
"words your own it causes her to listen, and give proper time to 
"me, and then I write to answer as 'tis written thee." 

Dr. Richard Hodgson, in detail (in Chapter XXXI) at greater 
length than others explains how very difficult he finds it to fully 
and properly convey in language appropriate the exact expression 
of his thoughts through this psychic to me. He writes clearly: 
"I wish I could come near to you, and talk without this rhyme." 
He further states that his guardian is with him ; and that Eberling, 
her guide, is with the psychic. They aid with changes seeming 
slight, but so it does not sound as if I do it. In another sentence 
he says : "Faults of complete control give to us silence here and 
"there, so our best efforts are but fair, and not to be compared 
"to the! efforts we made when here in life." 

Frederick Myers in one of his written messages to me says : 
"I communicate this message. It is a peculiar thing to do. I 
"do not govern this hand. I speak to it and the hand writes my 
"words. It is governed by my words, as was Mrs. Piper's hand 
"in long ago. You've heard — or else you may not know — that 
"we spoke to the discarnate spirits, by holding her hand to our 
"lips. Now in this case I stand by and talk what I wish to say, 
"the mortal senses me not, though she is in consciousness I am 
"told. She only sees as I see what the hand writes. I see it is 
"not my handwriting but her own." From another message from 
Myers I quote what follows: "There are other mentalities who 
"assist us like to servants in a well regulated home. In fact the 
"tendency to rhyme is fault in some degree of one of these who 
"near her (the psychic) stand, and aid us in our least command. 
"Like to a megaphone they be to my completed thought to thee. 
"They confine and direct it to its best service, but suggest not." 

Prof. Thompson J. Hudson says: "I like you have studied 

"this instrument from this side of life She has double 

"mental action ; or the action of the other portion of her mentality 
"is similar to the normal mental action This one case is 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 165 

"most peculiar of all, because the two minds are interchangable, 
"and neither disturbs the other." 

May (the author's wife). In one of her communications 
through this psychic she says: 'She is not impressed by my 
"thoughts, but her hand is governed by a mind that is intelligent 
"enough to transcribe what I dictate by words. It seems to me, 
"of to my conscious mind, very much as if you could step to a 
"telephone and talk to a friend ; and as you spoke the message, 
"see a hand writing it as if ruled by the spoken words."* 

On another occasion I asked May this question, viz. : Why do 
you rhyme like so many others, who write through Miss Gates? 
Her reply was: "I rhyme because* it is easier so tq do. If I let 
"it rhyme it sort of runs itself like to a pianola or piano-player ; 
"but in the case of Mr. Wright, John Shaw and Rushton 
"(Wright's guides) served instead of her, rhyming guides." 

Clegg Wright. From this former well known medium I 
received a most interesting communication which will be found 
in Chapter XXXIV. I quote what he wrote through the rhyming 
psychic, so much as refers to his being an^ exceptional case, and 
the reason why. He says: "I am just as real, and just as much 
'in life, as when I was a visitor at Lily Dale before. I see you 
'too. I also see why I was shifted. I am nearer and beyond the 
'rhyming necessity. Eberling, the instrument's guide, in accord- 
ance with the expressed wish of my guides, permitted me to be 
'shifted beyond the rhyming zone." 

With the foregoing information in mind regarding this unique 
psychic instrument, the reader will be prepared to further com- 
prehend her exceptional capacity for repeated and prolonged 
psychical activity, by critically noting the results secured through 
her while perusing Chapters XXII, XXIII, XXIV, XXIX, 
XXX, XXXI, XXXIV and XXXV. 



CHAPTER XXII 

HYPATIA, the Neoplatonic Philosopher — Daughter 
of Theon — Alleged Spirit Guide of the Author — 
Has proved to be a great teacher — This book her 
own suggestion — She aided in securing evidence for it — 
She brought relatives, friends, strangers, seers, philoso- 
phers and reseachers to commune with the writer — She 
spent hours at a time in answering his questions — Ful- 
filled HER PROMISE TO AID HIM TO SECURE HER SPIRIT PORTRAIT 

— She wrote through "The Human-Psychic-Telephone" 
and other automatic writers — also spoke through trum- 
PETS — Has held converse with the author and with other 

PEOPLE WHILE PRESENT IN HER TRANSIENT BODY. 

[Hypatia's spirit portrait, in natural colors, about three-quarters 
life size, made by spirit artists' in the presence of the Bangs Sisters 
in the city of Chicago, on April 27, 1912, while under the author's 
inspection, on a basis selected by him ; and was completed in ten 
minutes, immediately after that of William T. Stead. It was sub- 
sequently photographed by a local photographer in Toronto, from 
which a photo-engraving plate was produced, which in turn was 
used by the printer to produce her picture here, costumed as she 
appeared at the Jonson seance the same night as William T. 
Stead in his first materialization, viz.: 10 P.M., April 18, 1912.] 

Hypatia has been designated the "most wise of womankind" 
in the age in which she lived. In the prime of earthly life she 
was universally admired for her great learning, talents, eloquence, 
beauty and modesty. She exercised marvelous influence over all 
who heard her public utterances. Her life was a distinguished 
one, yet had a tragic ending as a martyr. Of her Professor 
Draper writes: "Each day, before her academy, stood a long 
train of chariots ; her lecture room was crowded with the wealth 
and fashion of Alexandria. They came to listen to her discourses 
on those great questions which man in all ages has asked, but 

166 




HYPATIA, THE NE^PLATONIC PHILOSOPHER 

(Born 370 A. D.; Murdered 415 A. D.) 

From Painting Made by Spirit Artists f:>r the Author 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 167 

which have never yet been answered : What am I ? Where am I ? 
What can I do? One day as she repaired to her academy she 
was assaulted by Cyril's mob — a mob of blood-thirsty monks. 
Stripped naked in the street, she was dragged into a church and 
there killed with a club. The corpse was cut in pieces, the flesh 
was scraped from the bones with shells, and the remnants cast 
into a fire. For this frightful crime Cyril (an Archbishop) was 
never Called to account. It seemed to be admitted that the end 
sanctified the means/' 

A record of psychical phenomena from which has been elim- 
inated an important contributing element must prove valueless, 
if it is to form the basis or foundation upon which to formulate 
a permanent hypothesis ; or to construct a declaration of an 
important truth; or to define a new, or not well understood 
natural law. 

In all the important research work with which I have the past 
few years been closely associated, I may say always, under every 
circumstance, in every location, and with every true psychic, 
there has been present a dominant or controlling intelligence 
and influence which impressed my mentality, invariably having 
its distinct individuality, making known by assertion its former 
human identity, establishing the verity of the same by accurate 
knowledge given when under examination as to life's history 
and contemporaneous events, together with names, locations and 
dates and other confirmatory information. 

The various channels through which this intelligence has com- 
municated have been somewhat unlimited, that is, not confined 
to any one system or phase or psychic. It has manifested for 
years past by voice through trumpets in various places, in the 
presence of different psychics; also by independent voice in the 
air whether trumpet was present or not ; through the vocal organs 
of entranced mediums ; appeared to view in a semi-transparent 
or etherialized formation ; and while materialized and gowned as 
a lady held refined converse with me, or sang songs of her own 
creation, by using the vocal organs of such transient; body ; and 
many times by utilizing the hand and pen of an entranced psychic 



168 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

communicated information and instruction — some of geneial 
character, some of a specific personal and confidential nature ; and 
lastly by utilizing the new instrument I have in the preceding 
chapter described as the "Human-Psychic-Telephone," with auto- 
matic action, and of rhyming tendency. The language used by 
her, the mannerisms adopted, and alleged name announced or 
signed; as well as predictions or confirmations at one place and 
time harmonizing with those at another place and time, and with 
other appearances on sundry occasions, thus confirming the indi- 
viduality of the intelligence under separate, different or even 
opposite conditions; she has so fully and satisfactorily demon- 
strated her individuality, that she has secured my confidence, 
approval and support, on account of her many capabilities, 
promises, prophesies and fulfillment of them, and demonstrated 
to be of a quality and character which cannot but command my 
regard and that of those who also know them; and which not 
only have been but continue to be displayed; and added to this 
is her definite and complete demonstration of not only wonderful 
mind and correct judgment, but the wonderful power she com- 
mands ; and to me so absolutely consistent in promise and fulfill- 
ment as to win my entire confidence and trust, and establish her 
in truthfulness and reliability. This intelligence alleges herself 
to be Hypatia, the neoplatonic philosopher, the daughter of Theon. 
(See her own statements near the end of Chapter XXIII.) 

Numbers of living intelligent citizens of Canada and of the 
United States have met Hypatia in her transient physical body 
at a Jonson seance when I was present; while a much smaller 
number have met and conversed with her there, in response to 
my request made to her, to materialize, meet and speak with 
certain specified friends, though I was absent. This request was 
several times complied with, while on three different occasions, 
in the case of three close personal friends of mine — unacquainted 
with each other- — and visiting the seance alone, or at least not 
with each other, she dictated a message, intended for me, and 
requested on each occasion its deliverance to me in person. In 
each instance I received the message. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 169 

With one instrument entranced, and with the automatic writers, 
as well as other types and phases of mediumship, by her aid I 
am enabled to show a connection of needed links forming a chain 
of strong evidence too convincing to be disconcerted or entangled 
by any hypothesis of either fraud, conjuring, mind- reading, 
telepathy, hallucination or hypnotic state, which may be con- 
structed and applied by any critic, who seeks for evidence which 
he does not want to find. Of this intelligence, alleged by herself 
to be Hypatia, I shall give as concisely as possible within the 
limits of this chapter, a few incidents chosen from the very many, 
of her association with me and my research efforts since 1905, 
inasmuch as she enacts a most important part in the various 
phenomena which seem to recur with frequency, increasing inter- 
est, and importance. It will only be necessary hereafter for the 
observant reader to note events connected with her; and the 
frequency of confirmatory or direct evidence, in almost every 
chapter. 

Hypatia, the angelic visitor, was the means, by materializing 
her transient body and using speech of convincing my late wife 
that she, Hypatia, is my spirit guide ; and her persuasive manner 
and capabilities made a convert of her, and thereby. a coworker 
instead of an opponent of my attitude on psychic matters. With 
reference to this circumstance I will here include part of a memo 
made at that time, viz.: "In the month of June, 1907, Hypatia, 
"speaking through an entranced medium, Mrs. Ripley, said that 
"'May' (my wife), who had never shown an inclination to the 
"belief in spirit return and communion — would be influenced by 
"her to desire to go with me to Lily Dale, and see and hear and 
"judge if it were true or no. Suffice it to say, I decided to not 
"ask her to go, nor even suggest that she accompany me on the 
"trip; but waited patiently for a time to see if she would be 
"influenced by the spirit power of suggestion. She soon began to 
"plan, which ended in the decision to go with me, which met my 
"wish and I expressed myself as pleased. We reached there on 
"Saturday, the fourth of August, 1907, and that very night 
"attended a Jonson materializing seance ; and to her own astonish- 



170 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

"ment, Hypatia, in a beautiful angelic embodiment, came and 
"made of 'May' a friend during our sojourn there." 

These seances were conducted under test conditions which were 
intended to absolutely preclude aid to the medium from any 
quarter. Of the sixteen adults present, eight were members of 
our Research Society while the remaining eight were our selected 
friends (which included my wife). There were three seances in 
all, and ten to fifteen presentations at each. At one of these 
Otelleo, another alleged guide of mine — of Egyptian nativity, 
B. C. 8,000 years, and associated with Hypatia in a band of seven 
advanced spirits, assigned to act in unison — made a brief call, 
yet intimated who it was that he called especially to see, for 
the first time. At each seance Hypatia presented herself, and 
centered her interest chiefly on May. On the first occasion she 
entered in creamy white vesture, her head, neck, chest and arms 
bearing apparently diamond bedecked jewels and ornaments, a 
golden bracelet on her wrist, while on her feet were sandals; 
and she moved gracefully across the room to where my wife and 
I sat in the circle, and placing her hand on my shoulder spoke 
to me — she kept her promise that she would come ; I arose and 
she led me to the centre of the room, where May was invited to 
join us ; and while May was engaged by Hypatia in conversation, 
she at first was acutely critical in matter of detail, such as feeling 
of muscles and gauging her solidity, and that of her jewels and 
ornaments, and noting closely the color of her hair and eyes and 
the movements of the mouth while speaking, as well as appreciat- 
ing the reality of the hands and fingers as they were placed one 
on each cheek, and listened to the persuasive words she spoke: 
"I am glad you are here, dear May ; I am your husband's guide, 
and I will act as guide to you." But May could not comprehend 
how Hypatia's vestures had changed in texture and design while 
conversing, nor quite realize the gradual disappearance from near 
us by a dissolution of all we had been in contact with. Her 
curiosity became a compelling power, and May attended the 
second and third seances, at one of which Hypatia appeared, 
talked to May and again disappeared slowly by dissolution into 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 171 

the floor. But in the end May began to comprehend and finally 
acknowledge that she had seen and been talking with an angel 
visitor. 

During the remaining four years of May's earth life following 
her convincing experience with Hypatia at the Lily Dale seances, 
she freely joined me in psychical investigations, and became 
acquainted with Hypatia. - She also willingly became a joint 
partner with me in the agreement which appears in Chapter XII, 
which since her transition has been put to the test (see Chapter 
XIII, and others following), and strongly sustains the truth of 
both continuity and communion between those in the two states 
of existence; or between those now in the spirit world, and those 
on earth. 

I will at this stage designate a few out of many tests of 
Hypatia's capability, each of which she acquiesced in and success- 
fully accomplished. Two of these may be found in Chapter VIII, 
and each has been verified since — one as a trumpet speaking 
test, in the home of the late Wm. T. Stead; and the other by 
materializing her body and holding an interview in a specified 
seance at Jonson's from or in compliance with the written request, 
as in the preceding case, which lay on my desk over night, and 

was read by Hypatia, to meet Col. N , a Canadian friend 

of mine, who was then in Toledo, for the purpose of attending 
a materializing seance, and tell him why she introduced herself 
to him. 

A third and unusual test, with a special condition attached 
to it, I will designate "the rose test." This was inaugurated by 
Hypatia giving her assent to it, as soon as I proposed it to her 
in a materializing seance had in the home of the Jonsons, by my 
wife and myself, with Mrs. Jonson, the medium's wife, also 
present. The date was August 10, 1910. As other evidential 
matters had some association with this seance, I will briefly make 
mention of it as it will come under observation again. This test 
was successfully completed November 15, 1911. (See Chapter 
XVI, presentations 8, 9, 10 and 11.) Following is only a portion 



172 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

of the record of this seance as made at the time of inauguration 
of "the rose test." 

"Three years, almost to the very day, had elapsed since 
"May's first convincing evidence had made a convert of her to 
"this new truth; and she had since improved her opportunities, 
"in gathering further experiences and becoming better acquainted 
"with Hypatia. So when we were seated we felt satisfied that 
"the harmonious conditions would probably bring satisfactory 
"results ; and as will be seen we were not in the least disappointed. 
"Our callers were limited in numbers, and the first was Hypatia, 
"who looked as natural in her thought-created vestures as any 
"lady in a well lighted room, on 'calling day/ her whole presence 
"bright and clear in detail of natural observation, so that we 
"could readily distinguish the features, and color of the hair, 
"and eyes, and observe every ornamentation. She gracefully and 
"in a dignified manner approached us and gave us loving wel- 
"come, which filled our souls with joy, and afforded us the com- 
forting assurances of the after-liTe, and the pleasures we would 
"realize when we would be met and welcomed by those who 
"preceded us. Turning to me she answered a mental question 
"I had in mind ; and next turning to my wife said, T am glad to 
"meet you again, dear May, and though I'm going now I will 
"return presently with a lovable spirit who will be an aider to 
"you/ After a brief absence Hypatia returned, bringing with her 
"another spirit somewhat resembling herself in general figure, 
"features and garb. This spirit walked over to a vase containing 
"flowers and plucked one, and returned to the side of Hypatia, 
"who then spoke and said, 'May, I bring to you one who will be 
"a guide and helper to you — this is Saphrona/ Saphrona greeted 
"May, and handed her the flower she had plucked from out the 
"vase, and then spoke with my wife. After we were given an 
"opportunity for a close scrutiny of the vestures, forms and 
"adornments of these two spirits who were with us at one and 
"the same time, they were each presented with a fine white rose, 
"on one long, leafy stem. To Hypatia I presented mine. I said, 
" 'While presenting this rose as a token of my appreciation of 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 173 

"you, I desire it to be at the same time a test ; and will ask you 
"if you will protect it, and somewhere, and at some time in the 
"future return it to me, as you now receive it ?' Hypatia replied : 
" 'I will take care of it, and return it to you as you wish, as a 
"proof of my ability to fulfil my promise.' The stem and rose 
"would be about twelve inches long, and the stem was covered 
"with leaves and thorns, and tied with a double bow of white 
"satin baby ribbon. I thanked Hypatia, who then placed it against 
"the centre point of the chest, withdrew her hand from it and 
"there it remained as if pinned fast; but there was no evidence 
"of fastening, for it was placed, and in a second the hand with- 
drew. My wife also presented her guest, Saphrona, with a 
"like present; but in her case the stem was tied with blue satin 
"baby ribbon. Both of these angels dematerialized from before 
"our presence, at the entrance to the little room — which served 
"as a cabinet — bodies, roses and all. 

"Among the various callers at this most interesting seance 
"were two fraternal friends, who claimed to have lived in the 
"very long ago in the East, and who came, remained, and 
"departed together, after exchanging greetings with us. One 
"of these, Otelleo, will be remembered as associated with Hypatia 
"in a band of exalted spirits. The other spirit was introduced 
"to me in a significant way by Otelleo as Hiram AbifT. 

"One of the remaining callers was Dr. Sharp, who has fre- 
quently called on me before, and will be recognized by quite a 
"few interested people as the trumpet control and guide of Mrs. 
"Etta Wriedt, trumpet medium. This gray-haired and long- 
"bearded old spirit guide entertained both of us with some of 
"his reminiscences, for we both had knowledge of him before. 
"One fact especially, which he wished to impress upon our minds, 
"was that he claimed to have been the first to introduce physical 
"phenomena in Ontario." 

May passed from earth life to spirit realms on September 29, 
1911, and after she had gone from me, my thoughts constantly 
reverted to our ante-mortem agreement found in Chapter XII ; 
and though hoping and believing it would be successfully carried 



174 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

out, yet these questions would continue to arise in my mind: 
When? where? and how? Oh that it may soon be really proved 
to be an accomplished fact, was my constant soul desire. I had 
not long to wait, for Hypatia so impressed me that I went to 
the same psychic lady (Mrs. Ripley) visited early in the month 
of May, in the case of my first test, when Hypatia agreed to 
convey my wish to Wm. T. Stead. If so be you will give your 
consent to allow the guides to utilize you, I told her, I feel satis- 
fied that some spirit prompts this request, and I shall await some 
new development. The psychic gave immediate and harmonious 
consent, and evidence was apparent that some spirit was taking 
control of her. It proved to be the same spirit — Mary Black- 
burn --who took control of her when I sat with her before. 
The controlling spirit greeted me, though her words were few — 
"I now give place to your guide, who wishes to talk with you," 
was all she said. The psychic immediately began to lapse into 
a deeper trance condition, and after perhaps two minutes' wait- 
ing, Hypatia began to use her vocal organs, and told me she 
wished me to go on November 11th to Etta Wriedt, the trumpet 
medium, at Detroit, and that she, Hypatia, would during my 
presence there bring May to converse with me. This direction 
I complied with, and sure enough the prediction was fulfilled 
in a most gratifying manner. (See Chapter XIII.) The reader 
doubtless will in some measure realize that my interest irTview 
of all the facts mentioned, was now profoundly increased, and 
my confidence in Hypatia becoming most firmly established. 

The reader will please note that "the rose test" began August 
10, 1910. May being then in earth life, Hypatia and Saphrona 
both being present with her; and it was concluded November, 
1911, May being then in spirit realms, but returned with Hypatia, 
and was present in the seance at the successful conclusion of 
the test. (See Chapter XVI, presentations 8, 9, 10 and 11.) Dr. 
Sharp was present on all these occasions. 

In this same November, as the foregoing incident, while in a 
trumpet seance held in Toronto, with over a score of its intelligent 
citizens present, Dr. Sharp availed himself of the opportunity, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 175 

and my presence, to say through the trumpet, "Dr. King, I wish 
to thank you for having recognized me when I appeared in my 
materialized body at the Jonson seance in August last year." 
(The seance alluded to, when the rose test had its origin.) 
Shortly after those words had been spoken, a voice addressed 
Rev. Canon William Walsh, who was present. It was soon 
recognized by him and others, as that of May, who had only 

passed over to the other life last 29th of September, and was 
met and cared for by Hypatia and Saphrona ; and now was return- 
ing as spirit. She came on this occasion, especially to thank her 
personal friend Canon Walsh for his kind reference to her in 
the words he so recently gave utterance to while addressing those 
who were present before her earthly remains — then in view in the 
casket — were conveyed to their last resting-place. (See cor- 
roborative testimony at conclusion of Chapter XIX.) 

Hypatia's exalted character and work are being now made 
manifest in bringing aid and evidence to establish the truth of 
continuity of life, and direct communion, beyond all doubt, 
between those still of earth, and other loved ones and friends in 
spirit realms. She brought about communing between myself 
and wife, also with our daughter, my brother, parents, and other 
relatives, as well as friends, strangers, seers, philosophers and 
former psychical researchers ; and most of these through psychics 
of different phases, some through three or four phases. The 
evidence is presented in chapters of this book, which the writer 
believes will successfully sustain the claim against attack by any 
skeptic, scientist, priest or man. 

"The dawn has come for a grand awakening. Hypatia." 
The foregoing was Hypatia's first recognized written communica- 
tion to me, as made in red letter on a slate, and signed by her 
at 5 P. M., August 10, 1905. 

She wrote her second message in red letter the following 
day on another slate. The precautions taken, and results obtained, 
including their reproduction in this book, are to be found at the 
end of this chapter, and will give the reader a clearer under- 
standing of this psychic demonstration. 



176 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

It would be impossible for me to prove in ordinary way her 
human, earthly personality ; though I feel that I have that of 
her spirit identity, for this has been possible, as she has been 
my constant teacher, guide and helper since the above date. To 
spirit Hypatia I am indebted for much I have learned of spirit 
life; and also to loved ones, and former friends of earth, as 
well as some noted men of experience now in spirit spheres, whose 
minds are active still, and with added knowledge aid in furnish- 
ing from the spirit world much evidence to prove their continuity, 
and ability to return to the earth plane and commune with 
mortals. 

And now to show that Hypatia's close association is not alone 
with me, but also continues with my spirit wife, "May," I quote 
a few extracts from the records I have secured while in pursuit 
of further psychic knowledge. Before doing so, however, I will 
endeavor to make clear to the reader that which he does not 
comprehend, or questions in his mind, the fact of a spirit writing 
through a human psychic hand. I will here explain briefly, as 
I do so more fully elsewhere, how this is done. 

To illustrate: — A hypnotizer selects a likely stranger subject, 
and diverts his objective mind from concentration, or attracts 
it by anticipation, and at the psychological moment suggests to 
the subjective mind of the one he seeks to control that he (the 
subject) is going to write a letter to a friend, sing a song, deliver 
a short address, or as a nurse girl will take care of a crying baby ; 
and in either case the subject complies with the general suggestion 
made to his subjective mind, which has become active without 
detailed direction, and the objective part of the mind immediately 
becomes passive or dormant. In the case of the writing psychic 
the spirit Hypatia or May or whosoever controls, by consent of 
the objective mind (and non-consent means locking the door) 
speaks into the telephone receiving ear of her subjective mind 
the dictated very words and sentences to be written, and at once 
her subjective self writes them, with her own physical hand, just 
as naturally as when the objective mind controls the hand. Walk- 
ing or talking in sleep are ordinary examples resulting from 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 177 

suggestions, — without detailed direction, and without exercise 
of reason, — to the subjective mind by noises, voices, motion, 
physical contact, indigestion, and other causes. Such undirected 
suggestion to the subjective mind of the individual in question 
thereby causes action, mental or physical, or both, such as on the 
one hand dreams of impossibilities, or on the other, physical 
activities of no definite purpose, because of the absence of detailed 
direction in the suggestion which acts upon the subjective mind. 

I am instructed from spirit source, that when any spirit intel- 
ligence wishes to speak the words of a message to be written, 
such spirit obtains consent to speak them to the subjective mind 
of the psychic; and then Eberling, her guide, takes control of 
her, and is assisted by elemental spirits; and that he considers 
rhyming, in her case, a constant necessity for a definite purpose. 

With this explanation I will now follow here in this relation 
by quotations from May's own spirit communication of March 13, 
1912, as by the hand of the human-psychic-telephone recorded; 
as also in the case of Hypatia, viz. : 

May: "Saphrona is like to Hypatia; she is so capable that 
she takes very loving care of me." 

I had asked her if Saphrona — whom Hypatia had brought to 
her as helper and protector when at Toledo in 1910 — was seen 
or met by her in spirit life, and the quotation was her answer, 
as through the psychic instrument. 

J. S. K. : "When and where and how did you awaken to con- 
scious spirit existence ?" 

May: "I fell into a restless sleep, and floated out of life. 
"I realized it not until I was with the one who so cares for thee. 
"Hypatia was the first to say your spirit is set free dear May, 
"do not feel sad for it is fate of all mankind to die ; and we are 
"all and all to you, and to your loving Johnnie too ; and we will 
"blend you into one now that your living here is done. I also 

"weep and wish I could be here to stay; but laws 

"of mind we do not know have brought me here and willed it so. 
"Ill do each little thing I may till I have learned the very way 
"to come to you Heaven is a state and not a place, 



178 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

"or I might say more exact it is an attunement. If light of the 
"sun is confined it will let a man see even in a cave. So with 
"our heavenly necessity it may be confined or held near to us, 
"so that we are at ease even here on earth. If I were not in 
"artificial protection, I could not remain as I do with you often 
"by night and by day. My spirit body is of higher development 
"because of Hypatia and your band who are advanced, so I 
"receive vitality like to a shower of power; but in the lower 
"mental states the human minds disembodied of earth-bound 
"degree wish to return and hear and see and eat and drink 
"because they have not learned to think." 

"J. S. K. : 'Tell me, May, if you can, where you were." 

May: "I did seem to be in my bed. I thought now I have 
"slept so long I will arise quite well. I felt a slight shock like 
"to a parting thread ; and then I seemed to float away ; and I 
"thought I've heard Johnnie say he did so (in astral flights) and 
"I wonder where I shall go ; and later I came back to see it was 
"all done, and I was truly free, and so I wept as you did too. 
"I am now at ease and love to study also, and later I will often 
"be with you. Many were with me, dear, but as I said I was 
"not prepared for the truth. I was attended by Hypatia who was 
"the principal one. I saw my babe, at first she came like a vision 
"and I thought it was a vision or a dream; and then I thought 
"how real they seem, and how faint my earthly vision. It all 
"comes gradually to me, and seems most wisely done that way." 

J. S. K. : "I thank you, 'babe,' for all you've said ; and Hypatia, 
dear one, who so cares for May, I desire to know how you com- 
municate with her, and with others in spirit life." 

Hypatia (replying through the same instrument) : "We com- 
municate according to our development and capacity to use 
advanced advantages. With May, thy darling of earthly life, I 
talk in language earth-like. It is the English speech I use. Her 
sense is exactly like to clairaudient power in humans — and a 
power to hear without an ear. With Electra, or des-Asia or 
Otelleo and others like to me I talk with a directed focussed 
thought as if I would by earth photography convey the picture, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 179 

and the thought complete, without the need of words' as used by 
men. Intuition in humans is this power in rudimentary way, I it 
know, is all you can say." 

On other occasions — both previous and subsequent to the 
foregoing questions to both May and the guide — I questioned, 
and still continue to question Hypatia from time to time to gain 
knowledge, and I receive it in generous measure. At most I give 
but a few examples in this chapter, while in the one that follows, 
the whole of it is devoted to Hypatia's answers to my questions 
relating to mind and soul or spirit, and other matters of interest 
to me. 

J. S. K. : "Can you sense my wants or wishes; and do you 
read my thoughts?" 

Hypatia : "I first receive a call from thee like to a bell to you ; 
and to my conscious self it would convey the thought to me — he 
calls or wishes me. Then I give to it attention, as you would 
open a window by a voluntary act, and if I do so, I then see you, 
and also see the thing that would result from what your thoughts 
express to me, that is if you should ask 'is this wise?' I would 
not only hear thy direct question, but I would see like pictures, 
as we say, from land of 'sure to be,' the way that it will be, and 
what is good or bad for thee, for I am finite too, in a comparison 
of increased degree; and I am taught and led and used, not as 
are the needs of men, but as I need, a growing child of Deity." 

J. S. K. : "When I write on paper, and leave what I have 
written, on the desk for you, as in the case of my communications 
to Wm. T. Stead of London, and my Quebec friend (see Chapter 
VIII), do you read it from the writing, or from my -mind?" 

Hypatia : "If you write it I read it from the writing, and by a 
wireless repetition so convey it. If it is typewritten, it confuses 
me, and I but read thy thoughts then, and convey it in thought 
only, and not in exact English speech." 

J. S. K. : "Do you think you can deliver to Mr. Stead, the 
single, or better still the compound message, as contained in my 
second communication to him before my book appears? If not 
the test after would not be so convincing." 



180 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Hypatia : "My intention is to do it. I have many aides with 
me, among them many masters, such as des-Asia, known to thee ; 
and we hold a line together, and we thus the thoughts convey, 
and will try to do it better if we can, or the same way. Stead 
is himself a psychic, therefore we to him can say do it thus, or 
do it this way, and he will our wish obey. (The departure of 
Mrs. Wriedt, and the subsequent passing of Mr. Stead prevented 
its accomplishment). You are gifted with the heavenly gift my 
own beloved here; and you are growing steadily more than to 
you appear; and a little later, dear one, we will cleave the outer 
air, and you will see us face to face, and sense us everywhere." 

Hypatia it was who first suggested the compilation of this 
book, and likewise wrote its closing sentences. She volunteered 
to help me, and became chief collaborator in securing the many 
new revelations regarding the next stage of existence; and 
gathered and introduced to me the many witnesses from spirit 
spheres to confirm the accumulating evidences. 

The records of various chapters will show her presence, intel- 
ligence, judgment, skill and labor, which will command apprecia- 
tion of her. 

She likewise expressed her desire that I should secure what 
Wm. T. Stead promised me in writing through the Human- 
Psychic-Telephone, viz. : his spirit picture for this book ; and when 
I wrote the Bangs Sisters of Chicago to secure a sitting with 
them for a spirit picture, their immediate reply came back to me 
that my guide, naming Hypatia, had been there and secured it 
for me; and she herself corroborated it while materialized at 
Jonson's in Toledo, and also named the day I was to go there for 
it; and when I did so, though no spirit's name was mentioned in 
connection with the sitting by or to the sisters, when I sat I got 
Stead's picture; and unexpectedly I got Hypatia's picture also; 
and they each appeared as they were dressed when they both 
presented, the same evening (18th April) in the Jonson seance. 

I may here again affirm what is stated elsewhere, that when 
May speaks to me through any trumpet, I instantly recognize 



. ', 



%c \„ a*±y*Ai4V*f<\°*'-*~f.'~. *^^c+«JtfLr*+ 




HYPATIA'S FIRST WRITTEN MESSAGE TO THE AUTHOR, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 181 

the voice as May's, for it sounds in my ear quite as familiar 
as it did in earth life, whether she spoke in my immediate presence, 
or in an adjoining room, or from a distance, through a telephone. 

The same holds true in the case of Hypatia, to the extent of 
her psychical opportunities, and the comparison of her speaking 
efforts, for her familiar voice is at once recognizable, beyond 
any suggestion of doubt, as it comes from the trumpet ; or 
through the vocal organs of her transient body, no matter where 
or when I hear it. 

Again when either of the two is materialized, or in the transient 
body and talking or moving about, such one appears quite as 
life-like, and real to me, and to my friends, as any person at the 
seance, and each voice is quite as familiar and natural as that 
of other friends of mine who may be present with me. 

I may also mention that May's and Hypatia's communications 
have quite as often been by spoken language as by the psychic 
writing. The manner of speaking is characteristic, though the 
delivery and tone are modified in some degree in the cases when 
using the vocal organs of different entranced psychics. 

At times I have utilized stenographers to make record of exact 
spoken language; but in the case of writing psychics such aid 
is not requisite as accuracy is found in such records, not only in 
the case of the two here mentioned, but also with others from 
the spheres, and hence no necessity exists for repeating. 

The rhyming tendency has already been accounted for. Not- 
withstanding rhyme and tone spirit writers claim their thoughts 
are conveyed unchanged. 

I have spent hours at a time, on more than one occasion, in 
questioning Hypatia to gain knowledge, and her responses thereto 
were immediately given through the automatic writer. A few 
selections from the many are embodied in Chapter XXIII, next 
following, which I claim demonstrate her wonderful knowledge, 
and her great capacity for imparting it. But I need specify no 
more, for everywhere throughout this book — which she herself 
named — she has shown unlimited capacity in aiding me to secure 
strong evidence designed for the benefit of humanity. Through- 



182 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

out all her association with me, she invariably courteously 
proffered wise suggestions; and avoided the semblance of effort 
to dethrone the majesty of individual will or choice. She has 
not only to me, but to others alleged that she is my spirit guide. 
("The Voices'' by Admiral Moore.) I will conclude this descrip- 
tion with my estimation in regard to her, viz. : 

Her power appears to be almost unlimited; her wisdom 
acknowledged also; and she will measure up to any mind which 
questions her ability. 1 accept her in full confidence as teacher, 
helper and guide to me; and have no doubt that she is the one 
she claims to be, the one who died a martyr to principle, at 
Alexandria, A. D. 415. 

Hypatia's first written messages to me came as a surprise. 
Precautions were taken to guard against fraud or conjuring. 
They were reproduced for introduction with this chapter, by aid 
of isochromatic photography; and hence appear as ordinary 
grayish-white, like other slate writing. 

I first met a stranger psychic in New York State, and had my 
first experience with slate-writing intelligences. As a precaution 
I procured new slates, void of blemish. After I washed and 
dried them, I placed two of them of equal dimensions in apposi- 
tion, and securely bound them together. The psychic's hand 
first touched them, and I next covered them with a dark velvet 
texture, as they lay directly in front of me on the table. Almost 
immediately I heard the sound of writing, which concluded with 
a tap, signifying finished. On removal of the cloth with which 
I had covered them, I next untied and separated the two slates, 
and found that the surface of each which was hidden from view 
when they were bound together, was now covered with writing, 
which differed one portion from another. 

The first message on Slate No. 1 (see engraving No. 1) 
appeared in deep-red color, and was the first message signed by 
"Hypatia," and previously referred to elsewhere. 

The second message appeared in soft-yellow color, and was 
signed "Judge Rose." The judge, up to a recent date, had been 
an acquaintance and fellow-citizen of mine. 



Xo 2. • GuA%L+sa\ U U* . 3" b-y^ - 3,£^ 







HYPATIA'S SECOND WRITTEN MESSAGE TO THE AUTHOR. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 183 

The third message, in color white, was signed by "Electra," 
another alleged guide, and a member of the band of seven. This 
writing began at the lower lefthand corner of the slate, as well 
as covered in successive slightly curved lines all the balance of 
the surface of the slate, and, as will be seen, is in the inverted 
position in relation to the writing which precedes it. 

Next examining the other slate, I found a single message, in 
the ordinary grayish-white color of usual slate-writing, and signed 
"John King," a name-sake, who has been seen and heard by other 
writers and investigators, and been particularized as the appari- 
tion with a heavy black beard. 

At the same hour on the following day, during my second 
sitting, Hypatia wrote another message in red color and signed 
it (see No. 2 photo-engraving). The writing begins at the upper 
right-hand corner, and continues to extend in very slightly curved 
lines in a diagonal direction in relation to the edges of the slate, 
and covering about three-fifths of the surface. The other writer, 
an alleged college-mate, utilized the remainder of the surface, 
beginning at the lower right-hand corner. I may here briefly 
state that when I last called on him, during his earth life, he 
was well and lived on York Street, Hamilton, Ontario. I did not 
know until I received the message on this occasion that he had 
moved from where I last spoke with him, to where the message 
says he was living, nor did I know until that moment that he 
had passed to the spirit world. On subsequent enquiry from a 
reliable source, I received corroboration of the truth embodied 
in these simple statements conveyed in the written message. 

The second slate bore on ' its inner surface but one message 
which was likewise the writer's first one on a slate, and was 
signed "Egyptia," who has always claimed to have been my 
guardian angel from the moment of my birth; and has very 
often materialized and conversed with me through the vocal 
organs of her transient body, at seances of at least three different 
materializing mediums during the period beginning with the year 
1894 (refer to Chapter IV, presentation No. 6, and also latter 
part of Chapter VI). 



184 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Egyptia, Hypatia and other guides of spirit band of seven 
have walked and talked with me, while in their transient bodies ; 
and also sang songs of their own creation, as well as utilized 
trumpets when occasion presented for communicating with me; 
and these evidences have continued until the present. 

All the foregoing slate messages were written very rapidly, 
consuming but a fraction of the time it takes to read them. 

The writing subsequently became blurred in the natural way, 
by careless handling of the slates, during a period of years prior 
to the process of transferring them from slates to engravings. 



CHAPTER XXIII 

THE present chapter will be wholly devoted to Hypatia's 
views regarding mind, thought and soul or spirit, and 
their relation to Deity, together with an outline of her 
philosophy, and tenets of her creed. She briefly gives her auto- 
biography, and simply refers to her martyrdom at Alexandria. 

My questions were prepared at my home in Toronto, and placed 
in my pocket; and no human eye saw them save my own, nor 
did a single mortal, other than myself, know their contents: 
and yet she gave her answers, and expositions in response to 
my desires, as contained in them, for further knowledge, as one 
who proved herself to have been unexcelled as a teacher, in the 
age in which she lived. This sitting with the psychic at Lily Dale, 
New York State, was indeed an important and memorable one, 
inasmuch as it was the occasion of a most exacting test of the 
genuineness of both the intelligence communicating, and the 
instrument or medium. 

I may premise for the reader's information, that to Hypatia, 
more than to all else, am I indebted for the aid I have received 
in the compilation of this book, entitled "Dawn of the Awakened 
Mind," which name, I now realize more than ever, best designates 
the true condition of the present day mind development, and 
presents to view a new established truth ; and while I recognize her 
partnership of effort, her wisdom as my guide and teacher, her 
power and influence as a leader in both spirit life and here, I 
wish to have her place on record what must stand as evidence 
plain and clear, of her ability to uphold my claim, that life is a 
continuity; that spirits do come back again to men; and beyond 
each and every doubt, they do commune with them; and lastly, 
that the work in which I have engaged, is endorsed by the angel 
world, and thus is affirmed to humanity as truth. 

As the time for our sitting had arrived, and Hypatia's presence 
was made known, I thus addressed her: "Hypatia, you have 

185 



186 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

well established your identity in very many ways, such as by 
letter, or message writing; speaking with vocal organs of a 
medium in a trance; as well as talking through trumpets; and 
less frequently, your voice has been heard in song; while many 
scores of sitters, at materializing seances, have seen you time 
and again in more than one place, and heard your conversations 
when meeting me there ; and most especially, when a large circle 
of interested researchers saw you bring for the first time my 
spirit wife and daughter to me, in a Jonson seance in Novem- 
ber, 1911." 

"No pedantic critic need attempt to credit me with seeing a 
creature of imagination, nor a fraudulent presentation, for you 
have too often established your identity to me, beyond all question, 
as well as to others who saw you more than once, and who with 
me, could frequently have the opportunity to view and recognize 
your features and your form, your tangibility and motion, your 
mannerisms and your speech, and in many other ways; as any 
man could recognize his mother or his wife, and could swear 
that she was such, without a single doubt or question." 

"Now that Miss Gates, the instrument, is ready and waiting, 
will you please utilize her services and answer these several 
questions for me, so that I may have them recorded, and take 
them home with me." 

Almost instantly the psychic's hand began to write, and 
"Hypatia" was the single word she wrote, as an indication that 
she at least was ready. 

To lead the way I first asked for direction. 

J. S. K. "Shall I read all the questions in the order I have 
them written here ; or submit them one by one, and receive your 
answers ?" 

Answer by Hypatia. "I prefer to receive them the latter way, 
and then proceed to answer them." 

The answer followed each question immediately, and continued 
so to come, until this chapter was concluded. 

Question 1, by J. S. K. When the spirit leaves the body, at 
the so-called time of death, of what does it, the spirit, consist? 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 187 

Answer, by Hypatia. It is the same spirit that occupied the 
body, intangible to human normal sense, but tangible to us as 
spirit. In fact we don't sense anatomy, at all. It is to us as is 
matter, a machine of static order, that generates for the growing 
soul, proper health radiation. After the spirit is free, it is to 
us cognizant, whereas when it is in the body it is inexpressive or 
dumb. Body does not exist and spirit is all. Your body is made 
up of matter or moving particles of inert spirit, and God is spirit 
or that from which all things come. If you want me to describe 
it from your point of view, I will say it consists of mind, the 
thinking part of soul, the living or loving part, and of a body 
produced from habits of thought added to what it was at first, 
a spirit produced by process of birth. The words may be confus- 
ing or interchangeable. Your ideal is correct as to the duality 
of mind, the mind that thinks, and the mind that produces 
harmony for the thinking ego blended together make a whole or 
spirit. If you like the word soul better so use it. Name is limited 
to express what must be unknown quantity to a mortal or 
limited mind. 

Question 2, J. S. K. Is the mind immortal, does it exist for 
all time to come ? 

Answer by Hypatia. The mind is a portion of the Deity, or 
to describe it in a picture, it is a portion of the Deity at birth, but 
like a plate without markings. A human life-time engraves upon 
it certain errors of judgment that give to it an opalescent hue, 
and cause it to be most precious to all who see and serve it. It 
was everlasting at birth, and after a human life-time, it is not 
only everlasting but most precious to those who see its work of 
growth and attainment. What I specially wish to here convey is 
that the mind or ego, is not only preserved, but the personality 
is also retained, and continued. 

Question 3, J. S. K. Before we proceed further, I desire to 
know if I err? Or, am I doing what I should not do, in asking 
these questions, which of necessity are in advance of the normal 
knowledge of humanity? 

Answer by Hypatia. It is not sinful to endeavor to find out 



188 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

what is beyond your comprehension. If you ask of what the 
sun consists, you do no harm. Therefore, from my point of 
view, it is not sinful to ask about that which you do not know, 
regarding intangible things, but to you made real by experiences 
and observation. 

Question 4, J. S. K. Is the whole of mind a unit, and of what 
does it consist? 

Answer by Hypatia. The whole of mind is like to a ball of 
mercury. It is all of one substance but may easily be separated 
into smaller complete balls or portions of the first division, or in 
immature infancy these portions are not engraved and go back 
easily to high degree, but after life of human, they become 
individualized so that their life is put on record, like a book, 
and like a blossom beautiful or dwarfed it stays forever in the 
garden of its God. When it by more perfection of its growth 
becomes completed in its love and loses selfish greed of gain, 
it goes at last into a pool of power, which like to corpuscles 
of living blood, moves ever onward in a harmony of power to 
aid and power to grow, and each one helps the other so there is 
no clashing anywhere, but different power to do as with wise 
men in human life of you. 

Question 5, J. S. K. Is mind compound or has it parts objective 
and subjective? 

Answer by Hypatia. It is compound as you might see but to 
us perfect like a tree, the sub-conscious is the perfected mind of 
animal. Its instinct is perfect. It does not reason, and it does 
not err. The other portion in man developed is like the blossom 
of the fruit. It reasons and it errs, and yet is by us believed to 
be most perfect so, with an unending power to grow. 

Question 6, J. S. K. Has mind at death to be divided, and 
some part no longer used? 

Answer by Hypatia. It is sometimes cut off from memory 
of this past life. It, I mean the mind, as a whole is at times 
deprived of memory, and in that state is placed in circumstances 
like to a second human life, and so it grows in even state, till 
from its vicious tendency set free, then it is after shown, and 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 189 

taught what circumstances caused it to be, for man is ruled by 
circumstance in large degree. Perhaps a fault in growth of brain, 
perhaps an evil moral tendency inherited from certain fault or 
error of his ancestry. 

Question 7, J. S. K. Does some new element of mind manifest 
when body dies? 

Answer by Hypatia. New senses open to the spirit view. It 
is as if you for your life-time through, were of your sight or 
smell bereft. You simply use what you had not the need of while 
your brain an organ frail was being used by you. 

Question 8, J. S. K. By what part of mind is reason exercised 
in spirit life? 

Answer by Hypatia. It is the reasoning portion of the com- 
pleted mind. The mind is dual as a tree above ground and 
beneath would be, but each dependent on the other for perfect 
harmony ; but if either was bereft like in the tree the sub-conscious 
or the root is the most substantial part. The reasoning portion 
is the portion that develops as a whole and glorifies perfected soul. 

Question 9, J. S. K. What difference, if any, is there between 
spirits carnate and discarnate? 

Answer by Hypatia. I referred to that before. I might give 
your mind a picture of it by saying the living human spirit or 
incarnate one, is as a child compared to man. A child might 
have better eyes than the father, but he could not mentally use 
the objects impressed on his sight, so the incarnate spirit, even 
when awakened in spiritual power to sense, is not greatly bene- 
fited thereby, but when set free the need of spirit senses then 
exists, and they are appreciated indeed. 

Question 10, J. S. K. By what authority is discarnate mind 
controlled ? 

Answer by Hypatia. Discarnate mind is controlled on a similar 
principle to the incarnate. It is guided into paths for its best 
good. If it proceeds with good and grace, it is allowed to stay 
and advance rapidly along the way. If it is slow or does not wish 
to go another takes its place, and it is left to be taught privately. 
Like to a school the after life, if all are in a class, and do their 



190 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

best, they keep together in a forward way, just as a normal 
human life wilj grow in similar degree to its perfection or com- 
pletion ; but if it, the discarnate spirit, cannot be like to the aver- 
age ones, 'tis given private tutorage along the way, and will 
attain its growth at later day, like to a backward child at school, 
but all are forced to certain rule. As birth and death to man is 
certainty, so to the spirit certain laws must be. If I ask you what 
makes a comet return to a certain prophesied point, after a lapse 
oi years, you will answer, law, which has been discovered by 
observation. So in spirit, laws of exactness exist, but God or 
Deity is all life, and all love, and all wisdom. As perfection 
cannot err, so it cannot change. It is modified to some degree 
by other spirits, but the good of each individual is the ultimate 
end. 

Question 11, J. S. K. How is mind of infant spirit developed 
to adult state? 

Answer by Hypatia. Inherited tendency, or the impressions 
made upon the minds of its ancestors are impressed upon its 
mind at birth, on principle like to photography after its start, 
its food and body growth, and also its social environment, have 
much to do with developing it toward good or evil tendencies. 
But good is best when it is understood, and wise and loving 
hearts are always good. 

Question 12, J. S. K. Is the ruling power in spirit, or is it 
found in mind? 

Answer by Hypatia. The ruling power is spirit, which is 
perfect, and perfects all things according to the best of perfect 
law. Spirit is more perfect than mind. Spirit is the power to 
produce all things, and maybe complete to the final etherialized 
state, finer than anything material. A mind is an expression of 
this spirit. Mind has limitations, spirit has none. The substance 
mind is a creation of the spirit. It is not easy for a finite being 
to comprehend absolute capacity to do, to think and reason are 
attributes of the mind. The spirit is not in this necessity, it knows 
without effort or need to attain. The Ruling Power of the Uni- 
verse, the Spirit, has made an aBsolutely perfect law. This law 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 191 

or these laws are always for the good of the ones governed. 
These laws are the result of growth, and develop as necessities 
of development call for laws. Laws are a necessity to finite 
minds, but to Infinite Spirit there is no need for limitation or 
law. Law of itself suggests consequence. If you disobey a law, 
you must suffer in some way. So I think I best express it when 
I tell you that spirit is absolute, and pervades all matter and 
mind. Without God or Deity no life would be. So finite beings 
are but individual expressions of this general and all pervading 
spirit, necessary to life in all forms. Death is not possible to 
spirit. Death is a gateway of change only. The ruling power 
is, as far as our ability to comprehend, perfect law modified by 
loving united minds, who teach and aid all lesser ones. You know 
the heated stove will burn you, but if a child or idiot came near, 
you would withhold his hand by force, if 'twas necessity to save 
him. Pain you know would be, and yet the fire is a friend to 
men. So laws of force exist, and laws of consequence, but all 
are for the best growth of all concerned. 

Question 13, J. S. K. I desire fully to comprehend the true 
meaning of mind, and of the terms mind-reading, telepathy and 
thought-transference, and how thought is recognized by me in 
another's mind, or how thought may be propelled, or attracted 
from one mind to another one. Is telepathy possible only between 
two minds in harmonious attunement by a process of vibration 
similar in principle to that necessary in transmitting Marconi- 
grams from one tower or station to another one, or on the other 
hand do you deny its real existence? In this same connection I 
would ask have you knowledge that a thought which originally 
belonged to the mind of one person may impinge upon or connect 
in some way, with the mind of another person in harmonious 
attunement with herself like to the note caused by the bow of 
a violin, drawn across the string, causing response in a wire 
which produces a similar note in the piano at the other end of 
the room? 

Answer by Hypatia. I may first say I believe and know it is 
true, if I had instrument like you, at this end, I could cause her 



192 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

here to sense and know, but she, this one, (the Human-Psychic- 
Telephone) will not do so. She says cut off all of their power, 
and leave me silent free, and like a person in a room, her mental 
door is locked to me ; but if I see her little maid, ( an elemental 
spirit) I say call "Maudie" to our aid, and if it seems to Lala 
Lee (the maid) desirable she mention me, and then this one (the 
instrument) may listen if she wishes to, but she is opposite to 
you in every way, and does not wish to know, or even care if 
it is so. 

It is somewhat difficult to describe to finite beings, things 
intangible to their senses, like Mind, Soul, Spirit, etc. Mind is 
substance real to myself, real to yourself, but your senses are 
associated with the knowledge and belief in gravity, and to human 
senses things not governed by gravity are not real. Mind is not 
governed by gravity of planets, or gravitation's law. Centrifugal 
and centripetal forces affect it not, but it has length, breadth and 
thickness, and has necessity. It may have comfort or discomfort, 
it may be relaxed or in tension. It is of itself without necessary 
form and at birth would be void, or without engravings. The 
mind of each human are at birth alike as far as serious variations 
are concerned. If I would be most exact, I should say that God 
is mind, and each individual of whatsoever order, is a chunk of 
God in greater or less size capacity. I might describe the creation 
of the universal universes, as having been made on the principles 
of the development of rudimentary animal life, on the plan of 
fission or automatic division of a cell, or an independent organism, 
that is to say each globule or filament after elongating divides 
into two segments, each of which increases in its turn, to again 
divide into parts and so on. The Universes are so produced by 
growth from the original oneness of Deity, these large or astro- 
nomical minds are in desire to produce and protect lives, and 
are taught how to proceed to their perfection by ability to com- 
municate directly to Deity. These original minds or individuals 
are governed by exact laws, and matter, which is all that is 
cognizant to humans, is the result of these laws. I from my 
point of view would call all matter mind in different degrees of 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 193 

tension, or potential. Therefore under bonds a mind of advanced 
order for the purpose of enlightening or teaching investigating 
men, may in a small degree materialize or de-materialize objects 
to men familiar, on a similar principle to that used by a human 
scientist when he would cause heat waves to be changed into 
sound waves. I might perhaps make you understand the condi- 
tions of the universe, if I should say you are living in the com- 
pleted universe, or the growing one, but there are myriads of 
complete or ripe universes or individual large minds, like to the 
Coral Islands produced by the living small animals, on each of 
these is exactly recorded every thing of its experience. Or perhaps 
you would understand better if I'd say a spirit after birth com- 
pletes itself according to its best development, and then, becomes 
a perfected "I am" like to Deity in its desire to do good to all, 
and after further development it becomes an "I am not," or a 
positively negative force, from which matter is made. This mind 
then becomes like to mother earth vibrant with life, but does not 
act except in a beneficent way, toward the myriad forms or 
individuals of life, upon its surface. The spirits of men, and the 
spirits of elementals are in truth the only truly irresponsible 
individuals of the mind order. These two orders belong as I 
might describe to you men, to the conscious or inventive portion 
of the God mind, and elementals to the active sub-conscious 
portion of the God mind. An elemental, if not suggested to by 
a man spirit, will never make a mistake or err in execution of 
a command. They are of the recording and imitating order, and 
whatever they do or wherever they go, they follow the suggestion 
of a mind either carnate or discarnate. They do not invent. 
The body of humans in life is a static machine, that generates 
through the life process, the radiation and vibrations necessary 
for a man's best development. 

Question 14, J. S. K. Will you kindly explain to me what 
thought is, where it originates, how it is created, how directed 
and controlled. 

Answer by Hypatia. Thought is more than a vibration, it is 
an invention or mental succession of pictures, which as you ask 



194 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

in previous question, may be conveyed to another mind in attune- 
ment to itself, either by natural or produced state. Telepathy 
has real existence, because it is thought-transference either by 
picture or word method. It may be caught by a disinterested 
mind, if that mind is in line of its conveyance, or is in harmonious 
attunement with itself. Elementals may be used to generate any 
vibration which I might describe to you as colors. Blue and 
yellow will produce green. Suppose a "blue" mind endeavored 
to communicate by telepathy with a "green" mind it could not do 
so till a guide caused the "yellow" to be added to the blue, till 
they were of the same shade. This could be done by additions 
from this side, but its success would depend upon its exactness. 
Rest and fatigue of body have much to do with the condition 
of a living mind, and these conditions are dependent on circum- 
stances, not wholly spiritual. Thought is a power of reason, a 
power to invent, to take things known or observed, and make 
new pictures from combining them in different kaleidoscopic 
ways. I know your happiness or unhappiness by intuition, if I 
come in tune with you. This is a soul power. The power to feel 
or know. This is done by intuition and power to me known, but 
with May she cannot of her own self unaided come into tune 
with you. She is a babe not properly clothed, and I by additions 
clothe her for the occasions, as is best for her and you. 

Question 15, J. S. K. If my thoughts are now known to May 
and you, is it by sense of sight, or feeling or is it by spirit sense 
of intuition or prehension? 

Answer by Hypatia. You are to me a radiant being, and thus 
bodily radiation of you is to me as light. What you think or 
write is recorded, and under proper conditions I can read it as 
you could a book. I cannot always produce or cause to be pro- 
duced these conditions, therefore I cannot always read your 
thoughts or written words. These small necessities to me are 
like to the pen or pencil and paper to this writer if she would 
communicate with you. If you were developed in mediumship 
your body would be like a house equipped with a telephone. I 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 195 

could use it, so could a stranger spirit as well, except a stranger 
would probably be withheld from entering your house. 

Question 16, J. S. K. Have thoughts once formed continuous 
existence? 

Answer by Hypatia. Thoughts once formed have continued 
existence because they are recorded. The Kingdom of life, both 
animal and vegetable, is on or over a "carbon sheet," that exactly 
reproduces it. This is in the Kingdom called at the present time, 
or rather from which the spirits of Levitation and Elementals 
come. I can, by going through proper forms of vibration and 
waiting, knock on any door of record of any type or time and 
find what is therein, kept or treasured. Or I may, which I would 
do in ordinary way, employ an elemental to go to this point, 
receive the impression of what I wish to know, and then come 
to me and repeat it as a graphophone repeats a record. The 
elemental will go in a bee line, and the record will be exact, if 
it is not interfered with in transmission. Thought as a rule goes 
straight forward as in a tube and does not impinge upon a mind 
unless that mind enters its ray by accident or design. The thought 
is complete like to a picture created or painted. It may be retraced 
or copied or obtained again for the hall of record, but it does 
not continue to vibrate on the principle of waves on a lake after 
a stone is dropped therein. If it did so one set of pictures would 
impinge upon another set of pictures, and tend to efface each 
other. A beautiful thought like a beautiful song, may be retained 
in memories near, and repeated in a modified way, either with 
additions or subtractions. 

Question 17, J. S. K. If thoughts are definite in form are 
they not physical? 

Answer by Hypatia. In answer I would say that thoughts 
are physical from spirit point of view, but not from that of 
human. That is they have not weight, and are not governed 
by gravity. They cannot be disturbed or delayed by physical sub- 
stance. Other thoughts cannot modify or change their origin, 
continuance or end. Other thoughts cannot quicken or delay 
their execution. They may impress mind and cause new thoughts 



196 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

to be invented, but each thought remains itself intact or 
unchanged. 

Question 18, J. S. K. Am I correct in assuming that I am in 
attunement with spirit realms, when while I am in a passive state 
I send forth my soul's desire to receive a message from you or 
May or other loved one or friend, or whoever I may, and that 
same one goes to the Human-Psychic-Telephone and communi- 
cates their thoughts through that instrument to me in writing? 

Answer by Hypatia. All men are in attunement with spirit 
realms at all times, but when you send forth a true prayer or 
soul's desire you call to your assistance many exalted spirits, 
who like to the "J aco b' s Ladder" picture make the way between 
you and your wish more smooth. The greatest good to the 
greatest number is always to be considered, and even though 
we wish earnestly, we often fail to win. But who can say we 
are not benefited by the wishing? 

Question 19, J. S. K. Hypatia, will you kindly explain to me, 
why some former acquaintances, some distant- relatives, and 
most of the strangers who have sent the messages through the 
writing instrument, the Human-Psychic-Telephone, to me. have 
done so without my request, and some whom I had no thought 
of, was it a thought wave from me to someone that they sensed, 
(or by telepathy) or why was it so? 

Answer by Hypatia. Myriads of spirits wish to communicate 
with men. Sometimes they serve us in our work for you, and so 
earn the right to have their wish to communicate granted. Many 
observe all mediumistic experiments and are like onlookers at 
the moving of a building, at hand ready to assist, and afterwards 
deserving of reward in the way of having their wishes granted 
in regard to personal communications, etc. 

Question 20, J. S. K. If thought is a creation of the mind, 
and mind as a whole is a unit, though having parts as to qualities 
or functionings, and has for future advantage dormant spiritual 
senses, then am I to understand that what still remains is soul 
or spirit, the source from which emanates love, emotion, and 
other attributes? And does this combination form the completed 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 19/ 

individual whole of each spirit personality, with its origin in, 
and future final destination, the Universal and Infinite Spirit, 
Deity or God? I have thought and I have reasoned that the 
various parts having spirit origin, by their union together con- 
stitute each individual carnate and discarnate personality, an 
immortal spirit. As an earnest, honest student, I want to learn 
along these lines what you can and will teach me. Does the 
spirit through its soul govern the operations of the mind, and if 
so, is not the spirit entity the ruler of all its parts, and a portion 
of the Infinite Spirit or Deity, but with a limitation and adapt- 
ability to the physical body in human life ; but after death without 
an organized body only as one is assumed for some reason, such 
for example as recognition, though both physical and visible from 
spirit point of view? 

Answer by Hypatia. I will give answer to your question as 
well as make response to several others in your mind. The mind 
is a ball that may either centralize or does centralize, until a 
thought is invented, then it focuses and sends that thought forth, 
catapults it as it were. That thought must be in a way a com- 
pleted picture, expressed in words, or symbols. I would say 
thought is a creation of the mind. It, the mind, may be active 
or passive. When passive it is easily impressed by thoughts about 
it, and must come in touch with it, through some sense either 
physical or spiritual. The eye as an organ is an instrument like 
a camera that produces agreeable effects on the mind. There 
are spiritual senses, in the spiritual body, which continue with 
the mind and soul of man, after death. A man's mind is like to 
God's mind, on the same principle that the tree in the seed is 
just as perfect as the grown tree. Scientists contend that even 
the future blossom is in this its primal state. But in the primal 
state, it is perfect. In real tree life, or development, some 
blossoms will be blighted by frost and circumstance, and some 
will bear fruit. The God mind would be like to the mind of 
every individual at birth, but without personalities, which are 
attained by circumstance and growth. The key to each condition 
and sphere is in the body and soul of every man. 



198 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Mind of God is a Kingdom or sphere of wholeness, like to 
white paper not engraved with personality. 

Soul of God is a Kingdom or sphere of wholeness. Love is 
the principle thereof. 

Body of God is the Universe as a whole, both spiritual and 
physical. 

This the "three in one" incomprehensible to many yet evident 
in all men, matter is an expression of this (the body) part 
thereof. Severity of Justice without mercy that does not deviate 
in body or matter, in exactness, of all natural laws, like those 
of fire, electricity and forces not yet known to men, is modified 
by soul, all the way to perfection, both in body and spirit. 

The mind of each individual is with that individual always. 
Its capacity to think and therefore develop and grow in human 
life depends upon its brain health, and development (circum- 
stance.) 

If it is an idiot the brain cells are disturbed and cannot be 
used, the mind remains in inability to think until death relieves 
it to the freedom of its spiritual state. 

In insanity, the brain disease sets the spirit into partial free- 
dom, from the body, so it floats, toy-balloon-like, between its 
body and its spiritual home. Not able to grow, or use its brain, 
it is acted on by discarnate minds, and also incorrect impulses 
or impressions caused by diseased brain. When it is free spirit, 
it is cut off from the memory of this experience, and begins at 
its well, or child state, and grows again complete. 

Soul is a portion of man. It has the power to feel, to love, 
to be attuned to the best in ourselves, and in the Infinite. It is 
the blossom or the fruit of the whole completed life of man. 
Two men may be alike in mental power, but one may be almost 
wholly without moral sense. Morality is an attribute also of 
the soul, as mentality is of the mind, both aided by the body 
instrument become the completed man. Morality is the distinguish- 
ing trait of man. It may reverse and become immorality. These 
attributes are of the soul, which is not in animals. A moral or 
immoral beast would be incomprehensible. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 199 

All spirits are a part of Deity, just as blood corpuscles are a 
part of a human body, red ones I might describe as thinkers, or 
active forces, and white ones as the passive, or elemental part, 
yet all circulate forward to perfected degree. 

Each individual is placed in his proper environment, for best 
growth and development. I have a body, or a combination of soul, 
mind and attributes in complete harmony, to produce a spirit 
which is an individual differing from all others. I am advanced 
according to my capacity to do, and this advancement is a part 
of myself, and radiates from me, just as intelligence radiates 
from a wise man, and shows abroad to distinguish him from a 
fool; just as kindness shows abroad in a man to distinguish him 
from one who is vicious. I have things I like to do. I have things 
I wish to do. I have limitations, I am taught, and in turn I teach 
others. I am not cut off from individuals of any other order, but 
I have my interests and they have theirs, like to men of equal 
intelligence passing on a city street. I carry with me the engrav- 
ings of my attainment. I go to what I admire, and am attracted 
to those who are interested along the same line. Spirit life is 
not so different from human life, except that as we advance we 
drop off limitations. We become more intangible as it were. 

A spirit of the first sphere or order of human existence, after 
death is intangible to a living human one. 

A spirit of the second sphere is intangible to those of the first 
order, except it assume the first sphere conditions or limitations, 
and so on to the final perfection of exalted degree, where though 
they retain their individuality, they are dissolved into the body 
of the spirit of God, as it has been said, or become so God-like, 
that his wishes are their wishes in every degree. They have not 
limitations of action, but they have not wish to act, except in 
accordance with law, which is and must be perfect. They assist 
less capable spirits to attain, they assist such as I am, to aid living 
mortals, and discarnate spirits, to their own harmony, etc. 

The wonders of God's great Universe are indeed beyond finding 
out. We have a means of being taught, which I might describe 
as projected pictures, from the land of the sure to be. 



200 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

I ask any question, and see the answer at once thrown on 
to the screen of my consciousness, in Symbology. This is a 
universal language. Our power to prophesy or know the future 
depends on our ability to read these symbols correctly. 

Clairvoyant humans have power at times, to sense these symbols. 

In some of your past letters of enquiry, you have asked me 
in regard to evil spirits, etc. The deceptive spirits are as a rule 
misplaced spiritual powers, as fire, which is a blessing indeed 
to man in artificial environments, of northern climate, but destruc- 
tive without our responsibility if set free. It is governed by exact 
laws, that must be followed or obeyed with care. Your lamp 
and your stove are devils indeed, but waiting an opportunity to 
destroy your home and you, one might say; but if properly 
managed they are blessings indeed to all men. 

In mediumistic experiments these forces are not always balanced 
properly, if so they would revitalize the medium, as they do in 
the case of this instrument. (The Human-Psychic-Telephone.) 
In the case of J. B. Jonson they are exhausting his vital forces ; 
and if he continues to give seances he will die. Perhaps a pro- 
tracted rest might enable his guides to learn how to provide for 
his better protection, I do not know. I do not know so much 
more than I did, when living, but I have added capacity to sense, 
and at my request in any line, I am kindly and carefully taught 
how to proceed. Sometimes I proceed along as a child would 
play a tune that it had been taught. At other times I proceed 
by repeating a record given to me, as one would play a pianola. 
In either case it is my act, but governed by my capacity to do. 
There are bands of spirits, like to the bands about mediums. 
Sometimes these bands of discarnate spirits, aided by elementals, 
invade weak-minded people, and produce peculiar or evil acts. 
Thus in suicidal mania, certain astronomy, or large spirits believe 
it is sad that a human soul or spirit must be kept in the limita- 
tions of life. They believe it desirable to set them free, that they 
may enjoy the broader life, and knowledge granted to discarnate 
spirits. If by accident or design, one of these becomes attuned 
to a weak or diseased mentality, it may suggest suicide, but the 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 201 

spirit that so does it is not a devil, instead it is a spirit that loves 
living men too much, etc. Sometimes elementals and men become 
fraternal, and change work as it were. A severe power of levita- 
tion's kingdom, accustomed to the exact execution of an elemental 
servant, is displeased, when a man is substituted in service, and 
fails in exactness of execution from his wish to know what the 
result of so doing would be, etc. In these cases the elementals 
in their efforts to protect their friend, the reasoner, place him 
in an ill man's body, and in trying to teach him, or divert the 
attention of the severe power from him, sometimes cause obsces- 
sion, and other injury to humans ; but this is not the result of 
an evil intention, but of a good intention wrongly placed. 

A child sent for a wire might remove a wire from a piano and 
so do great harm or damage, but it would not be to blame, if 
its judgment could not comprehend the harm done. So guardian- 
ship is extended all along the line. 

If a heavy vibration spirit, by artificial aid, is placed and left 
in wrong environment, we produce its comfort and return it to 
its element. 

Like to a fish on land, it could be kept in comfort in a small 
amount of water till it could be conveyed to the sea, its home. 

A man could be conveyed through the air, but could not of 
himself fly like a bird, etc. 

Elementals and men combined, produce evil effects, at times. 
The law of the elemental is that it shall obey the commands of 
men. It is glad to serve men, in their bodies, and after they 
are freed by death. Its reward is in the service, and in being 
allowed to imitate the thoughts and acts of its chosen charge. 

Attraction and repulsion are not laws of all life, and all matter 
is life in a positively negative degree, or in a proper state or 
attunement, for growth and development of individuals, of 
animal, and vegetable forms, that perfect the geography of each 
sphere. 

As you believe or think, I might say that the elementals belong 
to the sub-conscious portion of the God mind, and have in them- 
selves only the sub-conscious power to think and act. Attempt 



202 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

to teac,i a child of three the principles of Geometry, and you 
will realize in some degree the limitations I feel in trying to give 
to yourself, a but slightly developed medium, an idea of that 
which is really outside of your comprehension. 

Suppose I should describe the first three spheres like to ocean, 
earth and air. A fish to live on the earth must have water about 
it artificially for its comfort. A man might go down to the fish, 
but he must have air about him for his comfort. A bird might 
come to the earth to stay with the man, but to fly in the air is 
possible, while to the man it is not, etc. An imaginary large 
bird could carry a man from one point to another, but it must 
be sure and deposit the man on the ground, or in his native 
element, or the man would be, if left on a high tree, helpless 
and in trouble. 

In Jonson's case of mediumship, he is not revitalized by his 
guides, and his spirit cannot of itself go to or gain this vital force. 

I may become like to your wife, May, as like to yourself, but 
neither of you can become like to me. The power to do so is 
in each of you, but it is not yet developed, or grown to your 
power to use. 

God is good. All o'f the wonders of nature and spirit are good, 
and wonderful to the last degree, in utility and economy. We 
are all parts of the whole of God, as plants are parts of the 
landscape, but we each retain our own individuality, and we are 
protected and aided in our growths, and development. To die is 
not calamity, but to be cut off by death's law from loved faces, 
and soul communion, is a calamity indeed; but you who feel 
the withering of this great woe, are in a way assisted along the 
barren way, of these your after years, by belief and hope in 
continuity of life beyond the grave. I believe that this trouble 
is to you as the furnace in making the steel. It has shaped you 
into a proper instrument, to fulfill God's great purpose, and aid 
many to see even in slight degree, the smile of hope through the 
blackness of their woe. I like the name, "Dawn of the Awakened 
Mind," and am told that good will follow in the wake that this 
your book will make. I love you and your work, and everywhere 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 203 

I can I will aid you to aid your fellow-man. I think the name 
Human-Psychic-Telephone is good. She is in truth an instrument 
of that kind. She is peculiar to herself in her line of power to do. 
I use her power to write, and so communicate with you. She is 
to me an instrument, just as the pen is to her an instrument. 
I cannot do without her aid, if I could I truly would, for I knew 
you were aware of this her power to write. I have at different 
times, and in different places, used such instruments as were at 
hand. I will continue so to do. I will also be with you, your 
life-time through, and after death has set you free, I still your 
guardian will be, to aid you to your harmony and to your future 
power to do, in after-life, allotted you. 

Question 21, J. S. K. I appreciate most fully this opportunity 
which you have granted me, and thank you heartily for all that 
you, as spirit guide and aider, have done for me during the many 
years of your relationship to me, but now and more especially I 
thank you as a teacher, for the knowledge you have imparted 
regarding mind and thought and soul, and spirit and their 
attributes, as well as your special promises yet to be fulfilled; 
and for your permission to reproduce your views, as here and 
now expressed, as well as others of deep interest which are to 
follow to complete this special chapter. I therefore accept the 
privilege you afford me of further questioning, and will ask you 
to enlighten me regarding some psychical phenomena. Is it a 
transient body that is seen when you appear at a seance ; and is 
it made up for that occasion for purpose of recognition only? 

Answer by Hypatia. It is so done by spirit aids that come 
at wish of me. They come from the levitation Kingdom, or 
from the hall of record here. They see the picture we wish to 
show, and aid us so to do. At Jonson's they draw strength from 
you, but with this one (the automatic instrument) vitality is 
brought directly from below, and in the end she's rested usually, 
instead of feeling tiredness and woe. Much there is indeed, my 
beloved one, that you do not yet know, and when I try to teach 
you, I feel at loss indeed, for I must see the view of you, and 
limited my answer true must be. 



204 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Question 22, J. S. K. Do you and the other guides, as well as 
May, May Donna, and each of the loved ones who materialize 
and speak with me, have any part in producing individual transient 
forms ? 

Answer by Hypatia. We have a part in large degree. It is 
as if a ball of living clay was there, and it could sense us as free 
spirits, and instantly shape itself like living car which we propel 
with ease as we would use a medium. It has not expressed 
personality. It simply makes itself to us a useful part, and we 
need to do nothing with the art of body-making or retaining. 
We simply enter it, as easily as you would enter an elevator, or 
moving car, and instantly we see and touch, and are ourselves 
again, but when we disappear, another spirit comes the same 
clay to serve its purpose in its way. 

Question 23, J. S. K. From what material is the transient 
body formed? 

Answer by Hypatia. It is produced from several substances 
at hand, which I cannot describe, or make you understand. Like 
to radium, it is co-existent in common substances, and yet when 
free is powerful in a large degree. So in all matter is balanced 
force in silent state, this is unbalanced in a proper way to make 
an image that will stay upon the consciousness of any human 
present. It is your radiation that we take, and like an artesian 
well, you are in ordinary life, but we with pump exhaust your 
pond of power, which later is developed for your use. It 'does 
no especial harm to you, but aids us greatly in the work we do. 

Question 24, J. S. K. I presume to think the atoms of the 
transient body are all physical, but separate and invisible. If that 
be right how are they summoned into regularity, and apportioned 
each its appropriate place? 

Answer by Hypatia. In the case of atoms you err, for atoms 
are not physical, but are instead spirit or mind, that from its 
choice is negative or moves not in the least degree, just as you 
in a small degree would say, I will not move at all, but let another 
rule me all. This negative force is not negative, instead it is 
positive beyond all positive degree, by that I mean it is a posi- 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 205 

tively negative force, that has for its beginning, minds completed 
by perfected growth. If they are ruled, they must be ruled by 
living men, not by discarnate spirits. So in case of materialization 
and de-materialization. These individuals of levitations land 
obedient are to some one individual in life like Jonson, by some 
decision or decree they say we will this individual obey, and will 
allow a slight digression of a natural law to be, so they record 
it and agree, and then if so is best, you know the rest and out 
of matter, matter comes like to the smoke upon a winter's day. 
It is not as you seem to think. This negative power to serve is 
capable of changing itself to a tube or wall so that vibrations 
cannot go at all, or may proceed in peace along the way. The 
minds I refer to, are astronomy powers, or developed mentalities 
perfected by ages of teaching and experience, they serve man's 
best development but they think slowly. If a medium is entranced 
it is one of these that requires it. It is a complicated study, but 
ultimate good for the whole, and for each individual as well, is 
their view and intention. If the stove, chairs and piano would 
persist in dematerializing or moving from your touch chaotic 
state would be resultant in a large degree, but law transgressed 
alone permits such things to be, and when it is allowed, a bonds- 
man strong is with such action everywhere, to observe it in small 
detail, and keep all harm away if possible to stay. Now in the 
case of Jonson to be able to cause forms to show is his power, 
but he is exhausted and depleted there by it so the balance of 
power advises and suggests that he cease to use this peculiar, 
but not to his best development necessary gift. What he will 
later do I cannot tell, but he must for the present cease if he 
would after live in peace. 

Question 25, J. S. K. I have other questions which relate to 
various matters of interest to me, which I may at a future time 
ask you, but at present date I will only ask a few, to which I 
would like response by you. What was it that you taught or 
said, that created enmity and incensed the mob to take your life 
at Alexandria? 

Answer by Hypatia. As I look back at life of me, lighted by 



206 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

knowledge here attained, I wonder at the zeal I felt, in teaching 
those about me to believe in things that men, now Christians say 
are true, but then were altogether new, to those not looking from 
my view. But one must judge each mortal from his education, 
and environments, as well as from his own mortal view of right. 
I was born and bred in Alexandria, in the atmosphere of Art 
and Culture, of the highest kind attainable in my time. In the 
museum or university presided over by my father Theon, I was 
taught to believe in the wonders and beauties of nature, as revealed 
to men through astronomy, aided by mathematics. After, when I 
went to Athens, I became proficient in the plotonic philosophy, or 
rather the philosophy as taught by Plotinus and others. Plotonic 
teachings were to me acceptable in some degree only, so I became 
of the New Platonics, or Neoplatonic teachers, like the beliefs 
of modern men. Each great teacher, inculcating in his or her 
work new, or personal thoughts, became a practically new teacher, 
of a new thought. I believed that spirits could return. I was 
not afraid to boldly affirm, that the spirits could supply themselves 
with bodies, and even commix with frail mortality. This was my 
belief and came from my being gifted in large degree with 
mediumistic power to see and hear, and therefore know, that this 
philosophy was so. I read the works of all the thinkers of that 
early Christian day. I wished to discourage the belief of a 
personal God, and other forms as then taught by the early 
Archbishops. Cyril, an Archbishop of the Christian Church in 
Alexandria, in his zeal to carry out the work begun by his uncle 
Theophilus, who because of his cruelties was said to be in a 
compact with the devil, left no stone unturned in his efforts to 
remove all teachers or leaders of other creeds. My popularity 
among the students and people aroused his jealousy, and so he 
persecuted and murdered me. It was a severe and cruel age, 
but it was the same spirit that has caused more modern people 
to persecute, and execute the witches, or those gifted with peculiar 
or psychic powers. To be severe and cruel was the custom of 
the age in which I lived. 

Question 26, J. S. K. Did you teach a new creed ? 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 207 

Answer by Hypatia. I did not teach a new creed, but rather 
a modification or blending of those teachings that had been given 
forth by the thinkers who preceded me. 

Question 27, J. S. K. Did you secure disciples from among 
the people who had been opposed to you? 

Answer by Hypatia. I had great influence over the students 
of the Museum or University of Alexandria, where my father 
Theon was teacher of mathematics, and later I was teacher of 
sciences, and philosophy. Many new ideas I had gained while 
at Athens. 

Question 28, J. S. K. Did you know the contents of Kingsley's 
book named after you? 

Answer by Hypatia. I know of the work of fiction you refer 
to, as Kingsley's book. I do not know its exact contents, but 
have been told it is good, and has done good for the human race. 

Question 29, J. S. K. Will you please define for me the 
foundation stones of y^our philosophy? 

Answer by Hypatia. The foundation stones of my philosophy 
were that God was unknowable, and unapproachable, and that 
from him proceeded by emanations or growth subordinate indi- 
viduals or personalities. 

Question 30, J. S. K . Is the special work in which I am 
engaged designed by you, and is it endorsed by the spirit world 
as a good to be, to all humanity, and why am I selected to be 
your medium? 

Answer by Hypatia. The special work in which you are 
engaged is to my taste, I alone did not design it, but since my 
earth life, I have sent out a continuous soul or spirit prayer for 
means to be given to me, of being useful to the living humans. 
You are the one I have selected in this age, because old credal 
prejudices, to many advanced thinkers are inadequate to their 
soul needs; and to you I have now reached from my advanced 
spirit plane, and am endeavoring to use you as an instrument 
to aid me in supplying this earth soul need. I have planned to 
use you, as an instrument, to aid me and others like to me, In 
our present attempt to supply this soul hunger, or thirst after 



208 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

knowledge, that may in truth be demonstrated to their personal 
cognizance. Your work is endorsed by me, and by the spirit 
world about me, as a stepping stone on the way to more advanced 
thought, and knowledge. It is, I believe, needed in this age. 
You were selected because you are capable, or adapted to the 
work of compiling and collecting, and presenting the truth, as 
gained by you along the way of your experiences. You have 
proper personal education, and position to command the respect 
of those who may differ from your judgments, and conclusions. 
Even the thorns of criticism will blossom beautiful indeed in this 
life you are in, and in your after-life, and like a crown they will 
uplift, not bear you down. 



CHAPTER XXIV 

[Note: — I wish here to make an explanation, which may 
prevent misapprehension by the reader, in the interpretation of 
certain statements found in the pages of the present chapter, viz. : 
The chapter was not included here until much of what fallows 
it was completed ; as it was my intention to assign it to another 
publication ; while the reason for the change is, that I desired my 
interview with the philosophers to immediately follow my inter- 
view with Hypatia — herself a philosopher of that age — upon 
the same subjects; and because it was due to her intercession, 
in response to my wish, that I was fortunate enough to secure so 
valued an opportunity. J. S. K.] 

TO this psychological session I brought with me several 
previously written questions, sufficient to secure from 
the alleged philosophers their present view on the mind 
and soul questions, should Hypatia succeed in securing their 
presence. 

With the questions in my pocket, and with grave doubts in my 
mind as to whether I could or would have so great a privilege, 
as to secure their views, expressed as of their present knowledge ; 
and as the first two days of my sojourn were to be occupied 
as I had already arranged, I asked Hypatia if my wish could 
be gratified on the third day, by devoting it chiefly to the purpose 
mentioned. 

Hypatia in that gracious manner characteristic of her every 
effort to meet my wish,' wrote in reply to my question, through 
the automatic hand, "I hope to have them here, and will do my 
best to accomplish it." 

When the day and hour selected had arrived, with the psychic 
seated at the table, I asked the question which I had then in 
mind. 

J. S. K. Hypatia, do the philosophers know anything regarding 
what is contained in my writings as to mind, soul and spirit ; 
or the other features of the book I am compiling? 

209 



210 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Hypatia. Aristotle is in interest near to me, and well informed 
regarding the nature of your work; and he doubtless communi- 
cated with the others, since I requested them to be present here. 

J. S. K. Hypatia, if Socrates, Plato and Aristotle are all here, 
I am indeed most grateful to them; and hope they will forgive 
me, if I questions ask each one of them, during this extended 
session, for I have strong mental hunger, or "wish to know." 
The questions I will read aloud. 

Hypatia. All three are here. 'Tis best to so proceed as you 
suggest, and we will write for you. 

Before I had further time for remark or for question, the 
psychic began to automatically write rapidly without stop, the 
following response from Plato, viz.: 

Plato. We see as you now do, and in regard to soul, we too 
believe it is the whole, and body but machinery, which is result 
of soul degree. One may be tall or short, or thin or stout to 
some degree, no matter what his thoughts may be. I, Plato, was 
a man of power, and named as broad in shoulders so, but I was 
narrow in my thoughts as now I see and know ; and as you ask 
me I will do. I do not think that I am cognizant of all your 
book; but we are present here today to hear and see, and also 
say an answer back to you, if you request us so to do. I idealized 
the human life, and made the soul of man to be superior, or of 
lasting quality; but what it was, and where it went, I could not 
tell as well as you ; and so I listen here today, and much approve 
of what to you is plain. The working of the lower brain was 
to me not apparent, so I could not teach what I had not the power 
to know. We did not know the power of one living mind over 
another in my day (hypnotic). That study is as modern new, 
and is there well described by you. I had in mind a wish to 
know, and followed with my teacher Socrates, along each line 
of knowledge or surmise ; and what we gained thereby was aided 
by the souls exalted near, but this I did not know was so. 

When Socrates was lifted from his clay, I looked and wept 
beside his bier; and prayed as you, that he might be allowed to 
follow through my life with me. I sometimes saw him in a 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 211 

dream like sleep; but he was gone, and I alone to weep. It 
has been so for years — two thousand now — and you are one 
to make it plain by arguments, not faith and hope alone. I 
thought and wished it true, but could not prove as you. If I 
could have proved even one step, I should have been proud indeed. 
I had a pupil Aristotle, he was teacher of a king called great. 
I taught the King of Syracuse, but he rewarded me by slavery; 
and yet I led the thought of men, so they by ransom set me free 
to found a University. So you may arouse arguments, and if 
'tis so, 'twill lead to glory, and not to future woe. All that you 
do is brought to me by those wlio love me honestly ; and I approve 
of all you do to prove what I now know is true. I did not come 
direct to you, but learned from Aristotle, what one visited by 
him. had done for men, to prove that spirits come again. If I 
have failed before, I will not do so any more; but will stand 
ever ready here to aid you, till you're in the bier. I'll answer 
the questions you ask. 

J. S. K. What would be your present definition of soul? Of 
what composed? Have you knowledge of Reincarnation? 

Plato. My present definition of soul is, that which occupies 
the body as a whole in life, and at death departs a whole to be, 
of what the mortal is and was, and is to be, a living "himself" 
in capacity to use what God's laws bring to hand, for his best 
powers to command. In earth life, or physical body life, five 
senses seem to be sufficient for his need ; and out of matter living 
cells are taken, to replace the wear and tear of the anatomy, 
which like to a machinery generates forces needed to bring 
harmony of soul till he by death is from the body free; then 
added senses come to wakened state, and what he needs in 
forces wait for his command; and higher thinkers teach him 
how to rightly understand, or use what is his own, as in earth life 
'tis also true, as was the work of me, or you. Hunger of soul 
exists, this is twofold as I might say, hunger for love or com- 
panionship; and hunger for entertainment and knowledge. 
Appetites, normal ones, are voice of God, or spirit which is part 



212 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

of God, but Ego made complete in individuality, after a mortal 
birth as I now see. 

To undergo reincarnation is not true from literal or mortal 
view ; but minds deprived of proper growth in mortal state, will 
be allowed, or forced to undergo a second living like to human 
fife, so they in soul to proper state may grow. We all assist in 
work of love for minds of mortal plan, just as you work sad 
and alone, to aid your fellow-men, who feel your woe, but do 
not consolation know. Ideas are expressed and proved in this 
new work called "Dawn of the Awakened Mind," and it will be 
of use to men, where simply ideality is useless quite entirely. 

[The psychic's mother here intimated that "lunch will be ready, 
when it suits your convenience."] 

Plato here interjected, through the psychic's hand, this remark, 
"I will be here, if you must go, you will not thus disturb me." 

[To the psychic — at the moment objectively normal — the 
author suggested a few minutes more, and then it would be 
1 P. M., which might be followed by a recess for our spirit 
friends and ourselves, of one hour, which was adopted.] 

J. S. K. Have you present belief in immortality, or have you 
knowledge that a human ego has immortal life? 

Plato. We have not knowledge of the Deity. As individual 
I have been allowed to meet men of exalted state, who tell me 
they are children yet, and never need to wait for something new, 
so I believe in immortality as part of God or Deity begun. I will 
be so, no matter where or how I go ; and injury but sets me back, 
as lightning jars the trunk of tree, but makes the root more 
strong to be, for future growth. So I observe and believe that 
when a being does his best, a spirit beautiful and good, will plan 
and guide the rest. 

J. S. K. Can you define or demonstrate your human personality, 
to a critical psychologist of the present day? 
. Plato. I would describe it as a thing which has the power to 
hold past knowledge ; and has power to gain and grow by added 
knowing gained from sources new, no matter what forms it 
passes through. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 213 

[The writing stopped" at 1 P. M., we went and had lunch, and 
were back in our seats at 2 P. M., when the psychic's hand again 
began to write. J. S. K.] 

Plato continuing. I will add further that it is of form or 
characteristics, uniform or typical of its own individuality, 
through all these its powers to do; and all the changes it passes 
through tend to, and do cause it to grow, and improve, and 
become God-like, or more to its ideality of what perfected man 
should be. Beneath a rod of beauty, of comparison, we spirits 
free are here allowed to grow and be, and as we improve, we 
become radiant; and as we retrograde we become darkened in 
degree. 

J. S. K. Are my views as recorded in my book such as you 
can endorse as true? 

Plato. I can endorse them all as true, and wonder at your 
power to do so well, regarding what is hard to tell; or what is 
to the language of all men, hard to encompass true, so reader 
shall think as you do. 

J. S. K. Had you in human life knowledge of, or the power 
to control the mind of a fellow human by suggestion to the 
subjective mind, which is now known as hypnotic power of 
suggestion; by which means you now convey your thoughts to 
me through the subjective mind of the psychic, who conforms 
to your dictation to her subjective mind, to transcribe in writing, 
what do you wish me to know? 

Plato. I had knowledge of it in a superficial way; but did 
not know its source, or limitations; or whether it was natural, 
or morbid. No one of my time that I knew, had thought of it 
as false or true. 

J. S. K. Will you kindly explain for the benefit of readers 
who may wish to know, how it is possible for me to have attune- 
ment with yourself, or with others in spirit life, such as the 
example I gave elsewhere regarding my corresponding friend 
Wm. T. Stead, then in spirit life, calling my attention to the 
interesting fact that he sensed my thoughts toward him at a 
particular time, which was mentioned? 



214 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Plato. An attunement is a track unseen, over which thoughts 
and answerings may flow, like to communication to and fro ; and 
if no spirit sense in you awakened be, we use your intuition key ; 
or that which leads a horse to drink, a wiser power than 'tis to 
think. Wise in this sense means more perfect or exact; or less 
to be questioned than is judgment born of reason, which starts 
from the limited premises of human power to sense. 

[A break or interruption here occurs to the writing of Plato, 
and its place is taken by the following in explanation. "It is the 
wish of the discarnate spirits mentioned on your tablet page, 
especially to do the very things you ask them to ; and so when you 
requested it to be, he, Wm. T. Stead, brought to bear his wish 
to do; and other guides assisted him to be able to thus present 
to you the fact he sensed you ; and he knew your wish to be able 
to thus express to him, this truth" — -The attunement, between 
author and Wm. T. Stead.] 

J. S. K. Does the evidence presented in my book in your judg- 
ment sustain the claim I make regarding , 1st, Continuity of Life; 
2nd, Spirit Return; and 3rd, Spirit Communion? 

Plato. It is my opinion that the evidence compiled for your 
book, "Dawn of the Awakened Mind," is very conclusive, because 
it takes up normal mentality from your developed student view; 
and distinctly tells where its powers end; and so produces the 
necessity of belief, that added suggestion must be given to produce 
the effects observed by you, and nearly always others present 
with you. In your belief you are candid and honest, and men 
like to you, will follow your reasonings with interest in every 
step; and the how you come to your conclusions is so well 
explained, that they will wish to be able to do, as you in printing 
say, that you have had the power to do. Doubting Thomases 
will ever be, or those who do not wish to know; but honest think- 
ers lost in mist of facts, mixed in with theory, will be assisted 
by the steps you make; and what you teach will aid them to go 
forward, and proceed with care, and learn much of the "Over 
There." 

J. S. K. Were not the various dogmas, theories and plans 
of all the philosophers speculative and idealistic? 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 215 

Plato. In our time we had superstitions of peculiar types to 
combat, and idealism was the basis of most of my philosophy. 
Gods, heroes and men with mythological powers, were to the 
generality of men like to realities at then. 

J. S. K. Is not the soul the nucleus of the origin of each 
human activity of whatsoever sort? 

Plato. Oh yes, a soul or ego, like to a cell of a human body, 
selects its food from what comes within its reach; and morbid 
or unwholesome food may be taken, when it is deprived of what 
is wholesome to its state of best development. 

J. S. K. If you know what my views and thoughts are regard- 
ing mind, soul, and spirit, have you also knowledge of the other 
consecutive contents of the book as it is prepared for general 
readers ? 

Plato. I have been informed of the contents of your book 
by Aristotle, as I before have said. Hypatia's interest in my 
teachings, and in the teachings of my pupil Aristotle, have caused 
us all to be in touch to her capacity to come and go, and let 
us know. 

J. S. K. I try to make clear to reader that the dual mind 
functions for both soul and body in the incarnate state in the 
human ; and at the parting called death, the mind still functions 
for the soul ego; and new senses, attributes and powers are 
manifest. Can you, friend Plato, confirm this from your own 
experiences, as a solution of this special psychic problem? 

Plato. It is difficult to define and picture intangible things, 
but the functions of each portion of mind observable by man, 
are in your book well defined, it seems to me. The mincTand 
soul are like to the growing tree, the body more like the pot in 
which it grows, but that does not of necessity combat or change 
your definition. It is the same in appearance, as what the body 
would be if perfect. Scars, illness and evil fate to body do not 
change appearance of the soul. The soul is copied by matter in 
the growth of body. 

J. S. K. Have you knowledge and experience regarding the 
flight of the incarnate Ego. My Ego has visited relatives and 



216 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

friends at varying distances, and in various directions, and has 
been seen and heard by them; but I do not wish it so unless by 
my own desire, except it be for some wise or important purpose, 
and conducted by exalted spirits connected with my band. 

Plato. Your body is pervaded by a thing etherial, and of 
certain habit, and of certain size, call it what you will, it is the 
habitation of the man, when death of body comes. This body 
may go forth, as you so did, by other ego in attunement — - like 
to you — being in space it occupied in your anatomy. This thing 
I speak of is not divisible, it cannot be abbreviated or changed 
in its appearance, or capacity, but it may be limited in its freedom. 

You yourself, with the body were, and spoke to friend as you 
now speak to her (the psychic), and while Marconi-like conditions 
existed between yourself and your anatomy you were at ease 
even though free, and loving spirit hands like bands produced 
this power to do in you, and aided the friend to be able to hear, 
and able to see. It pleases me, whatever you have wish to do, I, 
Plato, am with other two, and all of us wish to serve you, (See 
Hypatia's explanation elsewhere.) 

[Note: — The communications from Aristotle follow those 
from Plato. They are the first of extended length which I have 
received from him.] 

Several years ago a control speaking through the vocal organs 
of a psychic while entranced claimed to be Aristotle; but only 
a sentence or two were spoken at the time, and really no con- 
versation was entered into to confirm an opinion, and hence no 
evidence to my mind was presented which would establish any 
view. 

Again through another trance psychic, a year or two later, in 
Hamilton, Canada, while entranced, some intelligence utilized the 
vocal organs to give expression to thoughts which were philosophic 
in character and claimed to be Aristotle, and spoke a sentence 
or two, as in the former instance. A third time, a call was made 
upon me in the trumpet seance held in New York State, only a 
short time ago. The medium who held the seance to which I 
refer was under the control of Gray Feather, the strong Indian 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 217 

guide and control of J. B. Jonson, of Ohio, who took the place 
on two occasions of the psychic's own guide. Then for the first 
time, Aristotle, as he alleged himself to be, conversed with me 
by the aid of a trumpet, the date being the fourth of August, 
1912, and his speech conveyed the impression that his words 
were those of a wise man; and one of much experience; and 
were of a character that made them seem similar to those which 
found expression through two other psychics, who were in the 
trance state. As I felt deeply interested in this personality, I in- 
vited him to meet me at the home of the Human-Psychic-Telephone 
that same afternoon, which he did; and there did write for me 
beginning at the hour of 4.15 P.M. and what next follows is 
what he wrote through the automatic hand, viz. : 

Aristotle. I, a philosopher of long ago, worked on the problem 
of the power of thought, and how the mind divine, and mind of 
man, could be so placed in unison by certain laws of behavior 
and speech, and so your "Dawn of the Awakened Mind" appeals 
to me. I had to shape each dart of thought, as from my heart 
it flew, and I am interested in this careful work you do. This 
carving out of stepping stones up cliffs of known degree, that 
lead to flights above the stars, it much appeals to me ; and so as 
a philosopher, I came and spoke to you in trumpet seance (a con- 
firmation) ; and I will aid you all I can in this work that you do. 

The present interview will do more than confirm what had 
preceded it, and goes far to establish the reputation, and the 
identity of this famous philosopher. 

I may add to the foregoing, that my questions all were read 
aloud by myself, while responses came immediately, and were 
there and then recorded, in my note-book, by the hand of my 
psychic, using my fountain pen; and when written and finished, 
were handed to me without copy, change or additions while under 
my sight from first to last. Though the questions were prepared 
by me, they were offered viva voce or read from the page on which 
they were written, and the answers came without hesitation or 
delay, and were as written by my own fountain pen, in the 



218 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

psychic's hand; which pen has come to be almost a psychic pen, 
for it has had its guidance by hundreds of different forces, or 
separate intelligences. 

But to return to the communications. After the assurance that 
Aristotle was present and ready to write, I proceeded with my 
questioning. 

J. S. K. Aristotle, I desire to know your views upon the 
subjects I embraced in the chapters on mind and the soul, in its 
present and future state. As you have evinced an interest in my 
researches, and my proposed publications, as shown by your 
communications, audibly and also through this writing psychic, 
I feel a strong desire to attune myself to you at this time, and 
request from you your present view, regarding these selfsame 
subjects. With many of your former views no doubt changed, 
as have my own, I desire to learn from you if what my book 
presents to mortal view regarding mind and soul or spirit is the 
truth, as you now know it. 

Aristotle. I agree with you that what you are at birth, you 
are at every future state, with modified degree of fate. A violet 
in nature never becomes a lily or a rose ; and men are varied like 
to flowers, but each a one alone, or white, or pink or blue, as 
he was from the seed, but strong or frail, by circumstance of 
fate. Set out a rose, and rose 'twill stay, and when a man's soul 
blossoms in the light of God, his spirit beautified by added priv- 
ileges, is still his spirit only and alone. 

J. S. K. Do you agree with what I claim that the discarnate 
spirit or soul of each human presents the same personality, that 
formerly existed in the incarnate state ? 

Aristotle. My present view is like to you. The garment body 
as a man is cast aside at death; and like to butterfly, the soul 
set free, but uses what it had in body crysalistic state, but for 
its growth it had no wait. 

J. S. K. What would be your present definition of soul? 

Aristotle. My definition of soul, if well expressed, would 
mean the whole. The body, if one could speak true, is but its 
tenement of clay, in which, imprisoned for a day, it holds itself 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 219 

alone complete, till called or wafted to God's throne it comes into 
its very own, or comes into its power to be complete in powers 
men cannot see or sense no matter how they try. Yourself is 
taken to the sky, and what remains is nought to you. As to the 
body of yourself, at three, it is now gone entirely, and nothing 
but your memory retains its form, or semblance. So 'tis with 
life here through which you go. Your acts are all recorded where 
they may be found by you ; but you have entered into state that's 
altogether new, and body has no part with you. 

J. S. K. Kindly make clear to my perception, what, in your 
view, discarnate spirit or soul is composed of. 

Aristotle. It is composed of substances to spirits only tangible, 
to man material 'tis nothingness. If you were able to communicate 
with me, by your latent spirit faculty, I should not have so done, 
or needed to ; but as it was material I had to be, to come to earth 
and talk to thee; and so to do. I take a transient body like to 
you, made from substances of small degree, that for the purpose 
moving rapidly, they impress man as a reality. Matter does not 
exist, by the way; but is as scientists believe and know, made 
up of Eons plus and minus so they seem to be to man as a 
reality. 

J. S. K. Have you present belief in or actual knowledge of 
Immortality? 

Aristotle. I have present knowledge that it is true, that I 
am part of God complete, and may use matter as a means to be 
able to so communicate with you, and aid you in the work you 
do, which is to teach the present age to realize that it has reached 
a stage of flood tide of experience; and you show this flood or 
current where it is to go, to reach its wish to sense or know 
that it may find its living dead, after their powers of earth 
have fled. 

J. S. K. Is re-incarnation of spirit a fact recognized by you, 
or is the word misapplied, or misunderstood? 

Aristotle. Reincarnation is a fact recognized by me from my 
standpoint. Undeveloped discarnate spirits are replaced in earth 
life experiences of health and good, until they grow to learn and 



220 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

know. But into babes born on the earth they never go, and it 
was not intended it should be so understood ; but literal minds so 
believed from teaching true given by ancient psychics to the men 
who listened near. 

Reincarnation is not allowable in fact, but souls discarnate are 
allowed to act as aids or helps to men, who may not ever be 
informed that this is true, that spirits may return to you. 

J. S. K. How can you demonstrate or define your human 
personality to me, or to any critical psychologist of the present 
day? 

Aristotle. My personality is made up of my inherited traits, 
added to by the results of impressions made upon my power to 
sense, by my senses five, while in body, and added ones here, 
for instance, as a babe I discovered light, and learned to know 
it through my organ eye, but what I saw in color or degree, 
would not be just what any other eye would see. Each picturing 
of my imagining is my very own, for it is made of what I saw 
or heard, or sensed; and as this premise was a different one 
from every other one in life, each picture so created would be 
mine alone. These are retained in record, and to me they are my 
worn geography, in which I trace the way I learned to know my 
Master's face. 

J. S. K. I understand, through Hypatia, that you are cognizant 
of much, if not all that I have written for the book I am now 
compiling. Are my views as there recorded such as you can 
endorse as true? 

Aristotle. I can endorse as true, that spirits may return to 
you, for I am one of those who do. I also endorse your way 
of seemingly agreeing with a possible argument, and then show- 
ing its weakness later in what you say or prove. "Dawn of the 
Awakened Mind" is good from many points of view. It is imper- 
sonal. It treats of facts you have experienced ; of disappointments 
you have been through ; and of consequent joy in revelations new, 
and by added observers certified to as true. 

J. S. K. Does the evidence in my book, in your judgment, 
sustain the claim I make regarding 1st, Continuity, 2nd, Spirit 
Return, and 3rd, Spirit Communion? 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 221 

Aristotle. The evidence of Indian girl (spirit of Pansy), who, 
as you say, described location of pictures in your home of which 
you were not aware, but later comprehended and confirmed as 
true. Your symbology is good, starting proof, afterwards ful- 
fillment of promises through different psychics having no acquain- 
tance or possible collusion is to me a very positive proof. The 
disappointment of the man Stead in not being able to use the 
ones you hoped he would, and yet used others strange to you. 
The change of heart or mind in girl after messages were cor- 
roborated. The rose experience, interesting and convincing, 
because of success after long lapse of time. Your wife's fulfill- 
ment of ante-mortem agreement is also strikingly convincing. 

J. S. K. Were not the various dogmas, theories and plans of 
all the philosophers speculative? 

Aristotle. All of the dogmas were speculative, but many had 
origin in some form of supposed revelation either real or imag- 
ery. Myths were means of picturing desirable results from good 
acts to a primitive savage people. 

J. S. K. In my human life I have experienced great change 
in view from youth to advanced adult life; and so I presume 
that your centuries of experience in spirit spheres enables you to 
discern changes in character and number quite a few in your 
belief of then, your human life, and what now you know. 

Aristotle. We do not cast aside the rudiments of our arith- 
metic; so. with my teachings, I but attained the rudiments of 
what to you in wholeness or completeness have proved true. 

I grew with added knowledge to see the errors or incomplete- 
ness of my human theory; and yet to men in my time, it was 
new and grand, and difficult for them to understand. 

J. S. K. Is not mind a necessity for the functioning of soul, 
and like to a highly skilled workman, qualified to solve difficult 
problems of construction or performance; whether on the one 
hand it be reasoning out or developing human attributes; or on 
the other classifying the memory records, and the culture and 
development of the Divine attributes, or those attuned to the 
"Over-soul?" 



222 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Aristotle. Mind and reason are necessities to the soul, but 
mind is like an organ, and reason what it does. Reason is a 
function of the mind, or mentality. Instinct and moral impulse 
are from the soul. I entertained theories founded upon very 
limited knowledge. As my knowledge increased my belief was 
changed, so that I now believe as you, that what is man is God, 
and so is indestructible; but it may as it advances become above 
or without the necessity of fixed apparent form. A body is a 
means of holding and withholding and as spirit becomes God- 
like, it loses the need of restraint and protection. It is true to 
this extent, I remain myself and on record in my memory, and 
recorded in fact are the feature and form, I had in human life, 
and in after spirit state. If I materialize in any sphere, I'll be 
as I was when I was native there; but when the need of doing 
ends, I leave my body and proceed to be, as to her now a soul 
set free. 

[Note: — At 5 P.M. the interview with Aristotle ended; and 
in view of all the subjects dealt with, and the time consumed, I 
feel it to be wise to leave to Socrates the field, to speak upon 
such matters as his wisdom and my requirements would suggest 
to him as of most advantage, in the object sought by this special 
session. J. S. K.] 

Next following is the deliverance of Socrates. 

Socrates. As you wish to do so do I. Socrates I am, and 
also here, and if when you're away a new thought comes to you 
to ask a question regarding it, write it, and we will answer 
automatically. We all shall linger with your band, to aid you 
in the work you've planned, and hemlock tea will not be given 
to thee as reward of what you do in sacrifice to men. I also 
know that spirits come again, and Plato is to me disciple dear, 
and what he wrote to you, and what you read to him I heard, 
for I was near to him, and also near to you. 

I'll try to aid your wish to be a speaker eloquent, for to me 
it was like a necessity. I walked upon the shore with pebbles 
in my mouth, to be a means of teaching my delinquent tongue 
to understand it must obey my least command. Yet when I won 
the hemlock tea was all that fate awarded me. Yes, I still live, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 223 

and here today I have my influence; and the words I say show 
thought and power. 'Twas not to me a known fact that a soul 
could come and like to brother help me through ; but I had faith 
and hope, and love of all humanity, and I was helped to bear 
the load, and aid humanity out of the rut of fixed belief in 
idolatry and superstition's fear, into a way to see more clear; 
and later pupils taught it so, and like to river in its flow it 
washed away in large degree the followers or beliefs in the 
idolatry of period then; and made a way for souls of men to 
grow, though what I taught I did not know. 

Otelleo (an Egyptian of the long ago and member of my 
spirit band). Sift out the gold some men would do, but it is 
not the case with you. You sift the dross away from what you 
wrote, and all is gold, that you allow to stay. Like to a crown 
of gold buried for ages in the halls of~time, dust gathered clings 
to it, and you have made its wonders beautiful and true, and it 
will prove a crown to you. 

Precious indeed it is, and we have led you forward carefully 
to this its nearly completed state ; and when sufficient time is 
passed, no longer wait but put it through, for we in thoughts 
are guiding you, and lighting up your veil of care, till you can 
see the one is there. You have selected well and true, and good 
will be the completion of the task for thee. I am Otelleo as you 
believe. 



CHAPTER XXV 

ONLY five short months have gone, since the November 
series of 1911 ; and I return with increased earnestness 
and zeal to prosecute the study of the wonderful occult 
problems, at a Jonson seance in Toledo. Truly impressive and 
important are the demonstrations of such a seance. They mark 
the possibilities, and develop the certainties of actual meeting of 
representatives of two realms of existence — the earthly and the 
spiritual. 

When I remember that over twenty years ago, a female babe 
was born to my then living wife and me, but passed away at 
birth to spirit realms, to be from care and trouble free — and 
few there be but would agree, that it had gone to heaven. I did 
not then know, that we should meet again on earth, but I do 
know now. 

The mother, May, was always of the desire and strong belief, 
that she would some day, when she had passed to spirit life, find 
her angel daughter. 

For the past few years she had joined me in this important 
work and earnest study, and with me visited during passing 
years, this wonderful medium Jonson, time after time ; and often 
hoped as years rolled on to see her angel baby. On September 
29, 1911, May passed out of earth life into spirit realms. In 
forty-five days after this change, she returned in form, and 
brought along with her our angel daughter, on the 13th, 15th 
and 16th of November, 1911; "and it was in this same home, 
where she and I had before investigated, as will be found recorded 
in previous chapters. 

The first seance of this present April series, 1912, which I was 
privileged to attend, opened as a public one, on Thursday night, 
the 11th of April. 

I have quite often there, and for a long time pursued the 
avocation of a critical psychical researcher; and not alone but 

224 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 225 

aided by my then mortal wife, and by an officer of my Society, 
and also by other members, have tried and tried in vain, to 
account by every known hypothesis, for human-like forms and 
features, dress, voice and conversation; and with many other 
natural conditions, thus coming into close communion as relatives 
and friends; and in full hearing and presence of all sitters for 
a brief time, then bidding all goodnight, disappeared as physical 
through their anatomical dissolution at the floor, some time to 
reappear. The only satisfactory hypothesis that can account for 
all the demonstrations here, is the one which I have, after twenty 
years of earnest, honesT, critical examination and careful study, 
fully adopted, viz. : the Spiritual Hypothesis. I found when 
I first came to this psychic Jonson, I was not a lone investigator ; 
but that scores of others from far and near, not only on the 
American continent, but individuals from other countries too, 
had also sought him out, and have labored incessantly to solve 
the problem; and had professed belief that they could, each in 
his own way, and according to his ideal hypothesis. So each 
as he arrived proceeded to unlock the mystery, with his own 
magic key. 

Some very zealous ones would proceed to seal the window, 
and lock and seal the door; and be prepared for all designs of 
trap doors and panels, and armed with mosquito netting; and 
ready were for all confederates. The cabinet was in an upstair 
room, within it naught but a single chair; and to the critic's 
surprise, the medium was not there, but sitting with the sitters 
in the room outside the cabinet, in full view during the seance; 
or while a part thereof was held. 

The whole most nearly resembled a friendly family circle, 
ready to receive the callers from spirit land; and thus time was 
allowed the critics to examine to their heart's content the cabinet 
or room, and all else. When they were through and seated, 
some forms came by the way of the floor, just in front of their 
feet, while some came by way of the cabinet; and others from 
the air and room ; which was so well lighted one could pick their 
own friends out. 



226 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Just here I wish to make my statement plain, that of the expert 
gentlemen above alluded to was one, a National Government 
official of credit and renown, possessed of well known skill and 
high integrity. He had been deputed by those in authority to 
make discovery of a supposed fraud; but was soon convinced 
of the realty of existence, from the most critical observation 
and investigation, of a fact and truth that would not down, by 
this among many of his plans, viz. : taking a flashlight picture 
of an apparition standing near, he found it was a spirit relative, 
who there and then conversed with him, and proved he was his 
spirit brother; and had a transient body clothed, and conversed 
and answered questions, and proved his personality to his living 
brother; and gave testimony quite in conformity with what I 
have also given in previous chapters ; and hence hereafter there 
will be no necessity for further reference in any sense to pre- 
cautions taken \>y expert researchers of different classes in the 
work of investigation of J. B. Jonson; and of the phenomena of 
physical character, whenever present at the seance. This much 
and more is commended to such authorities as have in past years 
expressed their conviction that Jonson's phenomena were not of 
psychic origin, and who in an official capacity, and with authori- 
tative tone, invited him to depart. 

After many years of close observation and repeated investiga- 
tions, I have secured much evidence — only a portion of which 
I give in the psychic series of my publications — which will, I 
am confident, sustain the hypothesis I have adopted; and which 
I believe to be quite strong enough to baffle and successfully 
resist the ablest criticism that can be brought to bear against it, 
by the best qualified detective, conjurer, scientist, psychical 
researcher, priest or man. 

A Public Jonson, Seance April 11th, 1912. 

The medium sat on a chair in semi-circle or horse-shoe form, 
along with all the sitters, for a major portion of the seance. 
After the Lord's prayer had been offered in unison, and the 
instrumental music began the harmonizing, Jonson was seen to 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 227 

be in a trance state sitting. Nearly every sitter had one or two 
callers, and there were two apparently advanced spirit guides, 
one of whom was Hypatia. When advanced spirit guides appear, 
the room is usually lightened up by, or during their presence. 
There were twelve sitters in the room besides the medium Jonson, 
and without actual count I would estimate there were some 
twenty forms presented. 

The personality that has frequently communicated with me 
in broken English, through trumpets and through the Human- 
Psychic-Telephone in New York State, as will appear in chap- 
ters of the book elsewhere, proved then, and in that way, to 
have an interest in my spirit wife, as well as in myself, and 
showed by the language used, that he was the selfsame Indian 
personality, so well and widely known as chief control of J. B. 
Jonson, and held him thus throughout the entire seance, in a 
trance condition ; and did not respond to the suggestion of Mrs. 
Jonson, "Had you not better go inside, Gray Feather?" to which 
he quickly replied, "No," and waited till after he brought my 
wife May, who had with her, her angel daughter, two forms at 
once ; while Jonson was still sitting outside of the cabinet as a part 
of the circle. After I held my conversation with the two, they 
dissolved into invisible state (which is reported by the stenog- 
rapher), and as I returned to my chair in the circle, he, Gray 
Feather, said, "Me now go ; I stay till I bring 'em two together 
for you, Big Chief." 

One circumstance out of the ordinary that I noticed, and in 
which I also participated, was this. I sat at the toe of the horse- 
shoe circle, or form of sitting before the curtains of the room 
called cabinet, and at a point fully ten feet from them, and I 
as well as all the others, had some candy placed in my mouth, 
by the deft fingers of what had the appearance of a beautiful 
angel form; but without wings. (Wings are symbolical, but 
are not attached to bodies, nor made use of in any other way, 
so my spirit guide Hypatia informs' me.) This angel form resorted 
to a humorous tantalizing manner with one or two, who sought 
to have her place the candy in their hand, so as to take her hand 



228 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

as well. This visit was near the close; but she first appeared 
when the seance opened and was addressed by many sitters 
familiar with her appearance as being "Viola," the control of 
Mrs. Jonson, who is a trumpet medium. 

The Stenographer's Report. 
Toledo, 11th April (evening), 1912. 

(A report of conversations had, or of words spoken, in indicated 
cases, at Jonson's Seance.) 

Gray Featheb: (Who is alleged to speak through the vocal 
organs of Mr. J. B. Jonson) .... "Good evening." 

Members of the Circle All : "Good evening, Gray Feather." 

Gray Feather : "Me glad to see big medicine man here. Me 
come to help you all me can. Me not say anything just right. 
Me only beginning." 

Dr. John S. King: "It is all right, Gray Feather, and I 
thank you." 

The form that now appears is that of the alleged spirit guide 
of Dr. King. She was pretty and was clothed in white flowing 
garments, with bright bands about the head, and sparkling jewels 
around her arms and neck. She came to Dr. King. 

Dr. King: "Hypatia, have you May with you tonight?" 

Hypatia: "Yes, she is here." 

Dr. King: "Will you bring her to speak to me?" 

Hypatia : "Yes." .... "I want you to press on and finish 
your book while you have your strength. There are many other 
writings yet to come." (She then disappeared from view.) 

Dr. King: "Come again, Hypatia." 

(Two other forms do now appear who are announced as Mrs. 
King, the Doctor's wife, and his daughter May Donna.) 

Mrs. King (patting the Doctor on his left shoulder) : "Johnnie 
dear, I love you ; I love you so." 

Dr. King: "Yes, yes, I know you do, and I am so glad we get 
a chance to talk again." 

Mrs. King : "Though I am gone from earth life, yet I am with 
you all the time, and will be as long as you live." 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 229 

Dr. King: "Yes, yes, loved one." 

Mrs. King : "I want you to finish your book, and I will give 
you all the information that you want. I do want you to finish 
your book." 

(May Donna Not in Sight.) 

Dr. King: "Is May Donna with you now?" 

Mrs. King: "Yes." (And then May Donna appears.) 

May Donna : "Yes, I come with mamma. We stay with you 
all we can/' 

Dr. King: "Will you sing for us tonight, May Donna?" 

May Donna: "I don't know whether I can or not, but will 
sing for you before you leave Toledo." 

Mrs. King : "I love you, my dear one. I will come again. May 
Donna will sing for you before you leave Toledo." 

Dr. King: "Do you ever see Mabel, and your sister, is she 
with you?" 

Mrs. King : "Yes, I see Mabel often. They are both with me." 

Dr. King : "Will you try and get a message for me from Mabel 
for her father, or send it to him?" 

Mrs. King (again patting the Doctor on the shoulder) says, 
"I love you, dear one." 

Dr. King: "Yes, I know you do." 

Mrs. King: "Good-bye." 

Doctor: "Good-bye, dear." 

[Note: — May Donna was rather below medium height — had 
golden hair and curls — gold bands about head and neck, and 
arms bare, and flowing draperies were worn.] 

(A form now appears of an elderly man with a long, heavy 
white beard, who appeared to be familiar to all the sitters, and 
was greeted by them as Dr. Sharp, who is the alleged control 
of Mrs. Wriedt.) 

Dr. King: "Good evening, Dr. Sharp, I'm pleased to meet 
you again." 

Dr. Sharp: "I'm glad to see you here." 

Dr. King : "I'm always glad to see and meet you." 

Dr. Sharp : "I am the control of Mrs. Wriedt, who will shortly 



230 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND - 

cross the ocean for a time, and I will not soon have the oppor- 
tunity of meeting you again. I wanted to call and say that the 
ones who have passed away are all in sympathy with your work ; 
and they will aid you all the time. ,, 

Dr. King: "I thank you very much." 

Dr. Sharp : "Mrs. King is a member of my band, and we all 
work for you." 

Dr. King: "I understand." 

Dr. Sharp: "There are many others who wish to appear so 
I must go now," and he then disappeared from view. 

Gray Feather: "I do as I said: I bring them as I said I 
would." 

Dr. King: "Yes, Gray Feather, and I thank you." 

(Sgd.) Minnie Noble, 

Stenographer. 
State of Ohio, Lucas County, U. S. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me, a notary public in and for 
Lucas County, Ohio, at Toledo, this 20th day of April, 1912. 

(Sgd.) A. H. Peiter, 
Notary Public. 

[Note: — The foregoing appearance of Dr. Sharp is one of 
several referred to in the attached article, which appeared in 
"Light," of London, England, over three years later. J. S. K.] 

"THE DIRECT VOICE. 



A Correlation. 



By Vice-Admiral Usborne Moore." 



(From "Light," of July 10, 1915.) 
"The best evidence that can be put forward of the existence 
and identity of a spirit is afforded by correlations, i. e., when a 
spirit is able to manifest in one place and then tell someone in 
another place, through another medium, where he has been and 
what he has said or who was present. When this takes place 
in two different countries with different sitters it is more satis- 
factory than when it occurs only in two cities of the same country 
or to the same sitter. I have experienced these correlations very 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 231 

often in the United States and three or four times between the 
United States and England. I cannot, however, remember ever 
having such a clean-cut or convincing example as that which I 
am now going to relate. 

In December, 1914, the Editor of Light received a letter from 
Dr. John S. King, the well-known physician and psychic investi- 
gator in Toronto, Canada, telling him that "Dr. Sharp," the 
spirit guide, or "control," of Mrs. Wriedt, had spoken to him 
and others at certain meetings in Toronto in November. No one 
knows better than Dr. King the rules of the game. He does not 
give away details ; he only mentions one item of "Sharp's" talk 
— that he had first visited him on a night when he (Dr. King) 
had delivered an address, when he "came over from Dover." 
Enclosed in the letter was some corroborative evidence of one 
of those present at the Toronto seances and a narrative, also 
testified to, a sitting with J. B. Jonson at Toledo, Ohio, on which 
occasion "Dr. Sharp" had materialized and spoken to him. The 
ladies of the society at Toronto (not named) were much inter- 
ested and had asked Dr. King to write to England and ascertain 
if "Dr. Sharp" would corroborate the fact of his having visited 
their circle; it was known by some that Mrs. Wriedt was in 
England. 

The Editor waited a few weeks for an opportunity of seeing 
Mrs. Wriedt. None having occurred he wrote to me on February 
13th, asking if I would investigate the matter. I received this 
note, enclosing Dr. King's letter, at breakfast on Sunday, Febru- 
ary 14th, at my club, skimmed over it, put it in my pocket, and 
immediately after breakfast went to Mrs. Wriedt, with whom 
I had an appointment at 10.15. I did not mention the letters 
to Mrs. Wriedt. 

In a few minutes we went into the seance room. "Dr. Sharp" 
soon made his presence known and the following colloquy took 
place : — 

Question : "Have you been over to Canada within the last 
three months?" 

Answer : "Do you mean to 'Paul'?" ("Paul" is the pseudonym 
of a Canadian gentleman who has contributed under that name 
to Light and who is known to me and "Dr. Sharp.") 

Q. : "No, somebody else." 

A.: "I went to Dr. John King at a seance where there was a 
man-medium for the voice. I wish you to write to Dr. King 
and tell him from me that medium is quite genuine. A number 
of people were there ; among them Mrs. Calvert and Mrs. Sales 
—(spelling) CALVERT." 



232 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Q.: "How do you spell 'Sales'?" 

A.: "I forget. We went over a bridge to get to the seance- 
room. It was Toronto, Canada. The people asked after Mrs. 
Wriedt and they asked after you. They were anxious to know 
if it was me speaking and wanted this to be confirmed in Eng- 
land. Tell Dr. King his wife spoke to him, and his little girl 
was sitting on his knee." 

Q. : "Can you give the date ?" 

A.: "No; I can't remember dates." 

Q.: "Have you manifested to Dr. King through L B. Jonson 
at Toledo r 

A. : "I most certainly have, and through other mediums. I am 
very pleased to meet Dr. King, as he has done so much for the 
cause. I wish you to tell Dr. King that I was the first person 
to introduce phenomenal mediumship into Canada." 

("Dr. Sharp" did not volunteer anything about a lecture or 
an address.) 

On the following morning I had an opportunity to speak to 
"Dr. Sharp" again. I said, "The paper from Toronto said that 
you told the people you had come from Dover. What is the 
meaning of this? Is it a mistake?" "No mistake at all," he 
replied, emphatically. "I was at Dover, or near Dover, in a 
hospital ship, looking after the wounded. I was hovering about 
between Southampton, Folkestone and Dover in the hospital 
ships, and I was nearest to Dover at the time when I left to visit 
Canada." 

All this was sent to Dr. King at Toronto, and in course of 
time he sent me an account of his seances. One of them was on 
November 18th when "Dr. Sharp" informed him that he had 
come over for the first time from Dover on the night of Dr. King's 
address, November 14th. Dr. King goes on to say : 

On November 19, 1914, a seance was held at the house of 
Mr. and Mrs. Julian Sales in Rosedale, a residential part of the 
city, by the same medium, and twenty-six sitters were present, 
including Mrs. Calvert. In order to go to this seance we had 
to cross a ravine, with a roadway below at the distance of 120 ft. 
/ inquired after Mrs. Wriedt, and you were inquired after by 
Mrs. Calvert and, I think, by one other. (The italics are mine.) 

Want of space prevents me from quoting the whole of Dr. 
King's interesting letter to me, but he mentions that his deceased 
wife did speak to him at this and all his other seances; that his 
daughter's presence was felt by him, and that the medium was a 
man-medium for the direct voice, a Mr. Burroughs, who was 
placed under the strictest test conditions. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 233 

I have never been to Toronto. Though I have heard of him 
from W. T. Stead and others, I have not yet had the pleasure of 
meeting Dr. King and I do not recollect ever hearing or seeing 
the name of Calvert, in connection with Canadian affairs, before 
this incident. Mrs. Wriedt is acquainted with Toronto and knows 
Dr. King and Mrs. Calvert, but she did not hear of the November 
seances till my talk with "Dr. Sharp" on February 14th; and, 
even if she had, it would not account for "Dr. Sharp's' 1 loud and 
clear utterance on that day in a London flat. Nothing is more 
certain than that "Dr. Sharp," though working with and assisting 
Mrs. Wriedt, is an independent personality." 



CHAPTER XXVI 

TO me this seance was more realistic than the previous 
one, as I seemed to see and hear much more distinctly, 
than in the first or public seance, though not so well as 
in the November series. When my spirit wife stood at the open- 
ing of the curtains, in the doorway of the room, called cabinet, 
I took my stand on her left hand, and she close to my right 
shoulder; and I saw her bring our spirit daughter close to her 
right side. I standing thus, and my stenographer opposite to 
me, enabled her to write by the light on the opposite wall, and 
still not prevent its slightly shaded or diminished rays from falling 
directly on presenting forms. 'As our conversation proceeded, 
and seemed so true to life, my thoughts reverted to the falling 
clods of earth upon the coffin in the tomb, containing the corrupt- 
ible body ; while I stood in the living presence of my loved one, 
who had put on the transient body and exhibited her living 
duplicate, with mirrored likeness of features and familiar voice, 
for this occasion; and then conversed with me, as in the home, 
to prove her human personality. Her form all could see, and 
her voice all could hear ; and having lived the mortal life, she 
had entered upon the spiritual one and yet was present here with 
me. And thus I find that life's experience, as matured by age, 
but verifies the early intuitions of my boyhood days. (See Chap- 
ter I.) 

The thought does now present most strongly, that mortal life 
is short, and but a time for preparation for the perfecting one, 
known as the immortal. As I have so recently dealt with her 
presentment to my normal senses, as found in Chapter XX, I 
will conclude this introduction to the Stenographer's report, by 
directing special attention to a very strong evidential matter of 
more than passing moment. While I stood listening to her 
language, and viewing her placid smile of satisfaction, and also 
speaking with my daughter, / felt May's fingers pulling at my 

234 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 235 

scarf-pin; and her eyes directed towards it. It seemed as if she 
were trying to test it, whether securely retained or not, for last 
12th of November, at the first seance with Mrs. Wriedt, the 
trumpet medium, she asked me most decidedly to have her single 
diamond ring made over into a scarf pin; but to be sure and use 
a "safety" pin so as not to lose it. Again at the fourth seance 
of the series, held at Jonson' s on the 15th of November, 1911 the 
stenographer reported what here follows, viz.: "The diamond 
I want you, as soon as you go home, to have set as a scarf pin. 
Be careful and zvatch where you take it, do you understand? 
and when you wear it, it will make it easier for me to come 
near to you." (See Chapter XVI, No. 11.) These facts she had 
retained in memory {she and none other) and now sought to 
satisfiy herself by reason, and by examination, of the security or 
safety of the pin's attachment. When she found it all secure, 
and worn as she had requested, she looked me in the eyes and 
said, "You used to be so proud of me, when I was wearing it, 
and so I am most glad to know you wear it now" 

The Stenographer's Report. 
Toledo, 15th April, 1912. 

( A report of conversations held, or of words spoken in indicated 
cases at Jonson Seance.) 

Gray Feather (who is alleged to speak through the vocal 
organs of Mr. Jonson), after greeting other members of the 
circle, says : "Me glad to see big Medicine Man here/' 

Dr. King : "Thank you, Gray Feather, I'm glad to be here, too." 

Two forms now appear which are claimed to-be the author's 
spirit wife and daughter. 

Mrs. King: "I am so glad to see you tonight, Johnnie dear." 

Dr. King : "My, you do look so well ; and May Donna, you're 
here, too!" 

May Donna: "Yes, papa." 

Mrs. King : "It seems as though " 

Dr. King: "Yes." 

Mrs. King: "It seems as though my love grows fonder ever 



236 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

since we have parted, my dear Johnnie. How happy we will be 
when the time comes, when you come with me." 

Dr. King : "I have missed you." 

Mrs. King : "And, my dear Johnnie, I want you to have every- 
thing ready, so that you will be prepared when I come for you." 

Dr. King: "Yes, but I have more work to do yet?" 

Mrs. King : "Yes, that is what I want you to do. I love you 
so much. You were so good to me through my sickness." 

Dr. King: "No more than I ought to have been." 

Mrs. King : "If it had not been for you hanging to me, I never 
would have lived so long as I did." 

Dr. King : "I know, my dear." 

Mrs. King : "Never mind, my dear Johnnie, there will be one 
time when we will meet, never more to part." 

Dr. King: "Yes." 

Mrs. King : "I am so glad you have come, Doctor." 

Dr. King : "My dear one ! I am so delighted that you are able 
to come so soon and do so well." 
k Mrs. King: "Yes, I want you to give me strength." 

Dr. King : "Draw all the strength that you can from me. Tell 
me how I can help you." 

(Here she noticed pin worn by Dr. King made from Mrs. 
King's ring.) "You used to be so proud of me when I wore it." 

Dr. King: "That's right, I did. You will come again before 
I leave Toledo, won't you?" 

Mrs. King (turning to stenographer) : "And I want to thank 
you, and I want you (looking at the Doctor) to be good to her. 
Do all you can for everybody. You will get a star in your crown 
for it, my dear Johnnie." 

[Note: — Before leaving the Doctor she showed her warm 
affection by patting him gently on his shoulder, and smoothing 
his hair with her fingers, and kissing him audibly, twice on his 
right cheek, bade him good-bye, and disappeared from sight.] 

The next form appearing for the Doctor claimed to be that 
of his father. 
Dr. King: "I am so glad to see you, father." 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 237 

Stephen King : "I have tried so hard to talk to you." 

Dr. King: "You are doing fine for the first time." (First 
time with Jonson.) 

Stephen King : "This is not the first time I have tried ; this 
is the first time I have succeeded, in Jonson's seance." 

Dr. King : "I am so proud of that." 

Stephen King : "It gives me more confidence." 

Dr. King : "You will come again." 

Stephen King: "I will try." 

Dr. King: "Good-bye, good-bye." 

(Sgd.) Minnie Noble, 
Stenographer. 

State of Ohio, Lucas County, U. S. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me, a notary public in and for 
Lucas County, Ohio, at Toledo this 20th day of April, 1912. 

(Sgd.) A. H. Peiter, 
Notary Public. 



CHAPTER XXVII 

iWAS again honored as in November last, with an invitation 
from the "Sunflower Class," and hence the third seance of 
the April series was held with excellent conditions. The 
reason for this courtesy, as last time explained, was due to the 
fact of my being an officer of the Canadian Society for Psychical 
Research; and conditions certainly specially favored me at this 
time, as in addition to my own guide Hypatia, my spirit wife May, 
and my daughter, there were also my spirit mother Margaret P., 
who came in company with my father Stephen King, who formerly 
lived with me in Toronto. Besides these were other three, a 
Mr. Hill, the silent boy, and a third one called himself Mac- 
Donald, and two unrecognized. The lighted room was changed 
more frequently, in the degree of light, than previously, and 
especially was it observed when advanced spirits came, the more 
advanced the brighter was the light, while some required the 
darker stage to form their body and to move about. All seemed 
to realize a fine condition of harmony; and it was perhaps 
singular, that forms did appear for a longer time. 

The more important evidential matters that are here noted 
have reference to the promises which have been made by Hypatia 
and my wife on various occasions regarding their appearance 
with me, and with other spirit forms upon the photographic plates 
which are promised in the not distant future. This was again 
alluded to at this appearance, and a strong desire expressed, to 
make it all a grand success for evidential purposes. 

The Stenographer's Report. 

Toledo, 16th April, 1912. 

(A report of conversations held or of words spoken in indicated 
cases at Jonson's Seance.) 
Gray Feather: Greets Gathering. 
Sitters: "How do you do, Gray Feather?" 

238 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 239 

Gray Feather: "Me do all right. Me talk to big Medicine 
Man. Me feel bad canoe {Titanic) went down. Me talk to him 
(Stead) many times. Me often been at his wigwam." 

(Refers to Titanic disaster, and loss of Stead; and to speaking 
through trumpet in Stead's home.) 

Dr. King: "Yes, Gray Feather, that's right." 

Gray Feather: "He comes over where I am. That not sad. 
There is much work to do. He not finish work. That is what is 
sad. It's bad when you no finish what you do." 

The next form to appear announces herself as Mrs. King, the 
Doctor's wife. She strokes the Doctor's hair, and kisses him. 
He gives her a rose and asks her if she would like some perfume 
which he had previously bought for her, but which she had never 
received owing to her having passed away at that time. 

Mrs. King: "Like you used to give me?" 

Dr. King: "Yes. Shall I bring it with me? I have it here 
at the hotel." 

Mrs. King : "Ye^s I want you to have picture of me 

as I am, at Chicago." 

Dr. King: "Yes." 

Mrs. King: "I will try and come with some of the guides." 

Dr. King here asks Mrs. King if he will send a rose to May 
Donna, and she replies: "Let her come and get it. It teaches 
her to larger grow. Every time that you come it seems to give 
new force." 

Two forms now appear who claim to be the father and mother 
of Dr. King. The Doctor does not at first recognize his father, 
who keeps plucking at his coat-sleeve to attract his attention. 
Not much conversation is carried on, but the form claiming to 
be the Doctor's father intimates that he approves of the work 
upon which the Doctor is now engaged, and the Doctor thanks 
him. After Mrs. King (Doctor's mother) had received a pink 
rose from the Doctor they disappear from view. 

Here a form appears claiming to be May Donna, the Doctor's 
daughter. She greets the Doctor as "Papa." 

Dr. King: "And you came without your mother tonight?" 

May Donna : "Yes." 



240 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Dr. King presented her with a rose, which after receiving she 
holds out for the stenographer to smell. 

Dr. King: "Will you sing for us tonight?" 

May Donna: "I don't think I can tonight, papa. I will try 
some time, but not tonight. I am so happy. . . . And this 
little girl is helping you so much" (turning to stenographer). 

Dr. King : "I was going to ask your mamma to send a message 
to Minnie, the housekeeper who looks after me." 

May Donna: "Yes. .... Your guide Hypatia is here. 
Good-bye/' and she disappears. She also kissed Dr. King. 

Form claiming to be Dr. King's guide now appears. She is 
dressed in white garments, low neck and short sleeves (Grecian 
costume). She walks out to the middle of the room, courtesys 
to all ; and retires behind the curtains, where she holds conversa- 
tion with the Doctor. She is accompanied by a somewhat similar 
form, who also claims to be a guide. 

Hypatia : "I want you to give your dear wife all the strength 
you can." 

Dr. King presents Hypatia with rose which she takes away 
with her. 

Hypatia: "With your pictures you will have success." 

Dr. King: "Yes, yes." 

Hypatia: "And we will appear." 

She then disappears from view. 

Form now appears who claims to be MacDonald by name. 

MacDonald: "The good book that you are writing, I am 
interested in. I take a great interest in all that is good. I will 
help you all that I can. I think we can be of great assistance." 

A form now comes who, when asked by the Doctor if he is 
Hill, a person known to the Doctor in a business way, says he is. 

Dr. King: "Well, then I have a message for you. Can you 
take it and read it and let me have your answer before I leave 
Toledo?" (Hands him paper.) 

Mr. Hill: "I will try if possible." 

In all there were eight forms who appeared for the Doctor, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 241 

one of whom was a little boy who was not recognized by him. 
(See Chapters XII, XIV and XXXI.) 

(Sgd.) Minnie Noble, 
Stenographer. 

State of Ohio, Lucas County, U. S. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me, a notary public in and for 
Lucas County, Ohio, at Toledo, this 20th day of April, 1912. 

(Sgd.) A. H. Peiter, 
Notary Public. 



CHAPTER XXVIII 

CONDITIONS at this, the fourth and last seance of the 
April series, were most harmonious, and more interesting 
and important than any which preceded it among the 
series. There were several guides of sitters present, and features 
quite a few ; and all of the dozen sitters seemed to have evidence 
to them satisfactory. Singing by my daughter was predicted on 
20th February, 1912, by her mother, May, in a written message 
through the automatic writing psychic, "Our daughter has the 
power of song; and I am told that she will later come to you 
.... and her voice to you will be apparent." May Donna 
herself likewise promised at the first seance of the present series, 
held on the evening of 11th of April, as did her mother. May, that 
she would sing for me before I would leave Toledo. During the 
present seance, stenographically reported, I had joy and satisfac- 
tion in the fulfillment of May's prediction, and May Donna's 
promise, when the latter walked out alone into the circle from 
the cabinet, and sang most sweetly the well-known selection which 
is as reported by the stenographer. 

My brother, David Williams King, also wrote through the 
New York psychic on the 10th of April, 1912, to say: 'When 
you are there at Jonsons, please look for me, and father Stephen 
too;" and when I complied with the suggestion, I again found 
fulfillment of prediction, and this was what my brother, standing 
in his transient body, said to me: "It is with great pleasure that 
I return to you. Death does not end all." 

Though father was present with my brother — as the latter 
previously predicted he would be — he consumed no time in speak- 
ing, evidently due, as after realized, to the power being required 
for the singing by my daughter, the first attempt of William T. 
Stead to materialize, and other features for other sitters. 

As to May, she is all the time in evidence, as anyone who 
follows her throughout the various recent records, can satisfy 
their curiosity by tracing. 

242 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 243 

Again I assert, and I fear no successful contradiction, all the 
foregoing is more evidence, presented to sustain my contention, 
that continuity is a fact, and Spirit return can no longer be 
disputed ; and that those who can see and hear, can do as I have 
done, and for themselves be as well convinced, as I have been. 

As usual I have only retained for publication my own cases, 
of satisfactory and continued evidential matter, all ending in a 
most wonderful demonstration of spirit power, which, though 
belonging to this chapter, will be made a continuance of the 
seance, though incorporated in Chapter XXX, in connection with 
the associate communications, alleged to be signed and sent from 
W. T. Stead. (See Chapter XXX, which is wholly devoted to 
him. See also Chapter XXXI, and the remaining ones.) This 
seance, held on 18th April, 1912, closed with this sudden mani- 
festation, and its dissolution. 

The Stenographer's Report. 
Toledo, April 18, 1912. 

(A report of conversations held or of words spoken in indicated 
cases at Jonson's Seance.) 

Gray Feather (who is alleged to speak through Jonson's vocal 
organs), greets gathering. 

Circle: "How do you do, Gray Feather!" 

Form reappears claiming to be that of Dr. King's wife. He asks 
her if she will send a message to Minnie, the housekeeper at his 
home in Toronto. She responds : 

"Give her my love and tell her how I have come, and how I 
have talked, dear Johnnie. Tell her not to worry about me, that I 
am happy, and it only keeps me back for them to worry about me." 

Here Dr. King asks the form presenting if she can take his 
ring and return it to him in the near future, to which she replies : 
"I will try." 

Dr. King: "This is for 'Babe'," and puts ring on finger. 

Mrs. King: "Yes, dear Johnnie." 

Dr. King : "I didn't bring the perfume. It was so awkward, I 
thought I would let you take my ring. Take it and give it to me 
another time." 



244 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Dr. King: "Is May Donna going to sing for us tonight?" 

Mrs. King: "Yes. (Turning to stenographer) Now I want 
you to get every word of it. She sings beautifully." 

Mrs. King (to Dr. King) : "I don't want you to stay away 
so long, I want you to come, so that we can talk. When you 
get your book finished, I want you to come so as tc* give me a 
chance to .develop. I want you to come to mediums anywhere 
so that I can talk to you." 

(Here says she will come again and with "Good-bye" dis- 
appears.) 

Here form appears who claims to be Hypatia, the Doctor's 
guide. She walks out into the circle, courtesys and retires partially 
behind the curtain, where she holds the following conversation: 
"We have got a certain portion of strength that is necessary for 
the pictures, and I think now that the vibration is as it is, this 
would be the best time for you to go for the pictures — I think 
about Saturday, for the strength is very strong at present, and I 
am afraid if you sat in many more circles, you would not be 
able to get the results you would just now." 

Dr. King : "I see, I want to ask you one question. Will Mr. 
Stead be able to come tonight, and talk?" 

Hypatia intimates that she cannot tell for certain. 

Dr. King now asks if he shall make public messages which he 
has received from Mr. Stead and she replies : "Say nothing until 
it all appears in the book." 

Dr. King : "That is all right." 

Hypatia: "And I want you to give your wife all the strength 
you can, for you know how she and you loved to be together." 

Dr. King: "Well, how can I ?" 

Hypatia : "I want you to give her every opportunity to return, 
for you know that is all she cares for." 

Dr. King : "And shall I leave on Saturday and go to Chicago ?" 

Hypatia: "Yes, yes, and all others will be there. Everything 
will be satisfactory for you when you reach there." 

Dr. King : "That is good." 

Hypatia: "For I have things so arranged. ... I will not 

t 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 245 

be able to do and explain things as I will when I reach Chicago 
with you. I will have everything shown plainly there for you, 
so that you will be able to understand it and have it all on paper 
at once." 

Dr. King: "Yes, will you show yourself to the others once 
more ?" 

Hypatia: "I will talk to you or write to you, and I do not 
want you to stay away from some medium of whom you will 
hear; I think that she (Mrs. King) will return again tonight, 
seeing that you will not be here again. Good-night." 

Here form appears claiming to be May Donna, the Doctor's 
daughter, and greets the Doctor as "Papa," advancing out into 
the circle. 

May Donna: "Mamma is here tonight." 

Dr. King : "Mother and daughter." 

May Donna, having advanced just inside of the circle, now 
sings : 

"Holy, Holy, Holy, Lord God Almighty, 
All Thy works shall praise Thy name 
In earth and sky and sea," etc. (All of the Anthem.) 

May Donna: "Is this not grand tonight?" 

Dr. King here introduces Mrs. King to an acquaintance, who 
says : "I am glad to meet you." 

May Donna and Mrs. King both kiss Doctor King. 

May Donna: "Mamma and I will be right with you, when 
you go away," and the two forms disappear. 

Form now appears claiming to be David (David Williams 
King), brother of Dr. King. Dr. King greets him and says: 
"I will tell Sam that you were here, and that we talked." 

Brother: "Yes, I am your dear brother." 

Dr. King : "Will you go on the picture ?" 

Brother: "I will try." 

Dr. King: "Yes/' 

Brother : "It is with great pleasure that I return to you. Death 
does not end all." (Here form disappears from view.) 

Just before the closing of the seance a form appeared who 
advanced to the middle of the room with arms extended. Several 



246 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

of the sitters alleged that it was the form of Mr. W. T. Stead, 
who was drowned recently. After coming to the centre of the 
room in the direction of Dr. King, he slowly backed toward the 
curtains and disappeared. 

(During seance one form appeared who was not recognized 
by the Doctor, it being that of a man.) See Chapter XXXI, 19th 
June, 1912. 

(Sgd.) Minnie Noble, 

Stenographer. 

State of Ohio, Lucas County, U. S. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me, a notary public in and for 
Lucas County, Ohio, at Toledo, this 20th day of April, 1912. 

(Sgd.) A. H. Peiter, 

Notary Public. 

Corroborating Testimony Regarding Author's Mother as 
Received from a Friend. 

"Toronto, 24th July, 1912. 
"Dear Doctor King: 

What I am writing I have given to you before, and referred 
to many times, and spoken of with others, but as you have asked 
me for my written statement of facts, I give it as it impressed 
me deeply years ago, and was remembered. Hoping you will 
excuse my composition, and as it is the facts you want, I'll give 
you them correctly. 

While spending two weeks' vacation, in the month of August, 
1901, at the spiritual camp meeting, held in Lily Dale, New York 
State, one evening I attended one of Mrs. Effie Moss' materializa- 
tion seances. After several materialized forms had appeared, and 
were recognized by their friends, I was called up to the cabinet 
and I went, wondering who it could be who wanted me. I waited 
perhaps a minute when the curtains parted, and there stood a 
stately lady whom I did not recognize. She stood looking at me, 
for several seconds, first stroking one hand, and then the other, 
as any person would do when putting on kid gloves. I watched 
her movements, and wondered why she did not speak. I thought 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 247 

perhaps she could not speak until I spoke to her. I then said, 
is there anything the matter with your hands? as I could only 
see the tips of her fingers, as she had white lace mitts on. She 
said no, and extended her hand to shake hands with me, and said, 
"How do you do, Miss Donaldson, I am Mother King, mother 
of Dr. John S. King, of Toronto, Canada." 

I then said, "Oh, indeed, I am very pleased to meet and welcome 
you here." She again spoke and said: "Yes, I am very pleased 
to meet you, and I want you to take a good look at me, so you 
can tell my boy, and he will know it was me." 

She stroked one side of her head several times, which I took 
notice of, and saw a dark spot on the side of the forehead, near 
the temple. 

She next asked me this question: "Will you carry a message 
to my boy, for he is hungry for this knowledge concerning me." 
I told her that I would be very pleased to carry any message 
to him, she would give me. She said, "Tell him that yesterday, 
after hearing that you were in Lily Dale, he went in his office, 
sat down in his chair, and said, "Mother, if you are here now, 
will you please go to Lily Dale, and find Miss Donaldson and 
aend me a message by her?" Tell my boy when you go home, 
that I was there, by his side when he spoke, and tell him, I started 
right away for Lily Dale, and had quite a time to find you; but 
as I heard you were going to attend this circle tonight, I came 
and here I am." 

She gave me other messages to convey to you on arriving home. 
When I got home I sent word to you to call and see me, which 
you did as you doubtless remember. This is what you said to 
me when you called : "You have been to Lily Dale. I wonder if 
you have brought a message to me?" I told you I had some 
messages for you from your mother. I first asked you the ques- 
tion : "Did you on a certain day send out a thought, or ask your 
mother to go to Lily Dale, and find me, and send a message by 
me?" You said, "I did." I then told you how your mother had 
materialized, and gave me a message for you, and that she had 
asked me to give it to you. 



248 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

I asked you if you knew why your mother wore those lace 
mitts on her hands. You then exclaimed, "That was Mother sure, 
for she had rheumatism in her hands, the joints were swollen, 
she always wore mitts or gloves on her hands when receiving 
callers, because of unsightly joints." 

Then I further asked you, what did it mean about stroking 
the side of her head, and the dark bruise on it, and you told me 
she had fallen down the cellar steps, striking her head against 
the stone wall, which was the cause of her death, before next 
morning, all of which was news to me, for I had never heard 
the cause of her passing out. 

Yours in truth, 
(Sgd.) M. A. Donaldson." 

Evidential Matter Relating to Family History, and All 
Names and Relationships Correctly Stated. 

In The Progressive Thinker, published on the 20th July, 1912, 
at Chicago, and for which I am a subscriber, I found the follow- 
ing message intended for me, in the columns devoted to messages, 
which come through the psychic Maggie Waite, and are published 
weekly, viz. : 

"For Dr. John S. King, of Toronto, Canada. — I am Grand- 
father Hess, and I am bringing his Grandmother Alice Taylor 
King and her husband, James, with me. He says that she is 
with Stephen and Margaret many times — that is his father 
and mother. We visit you all on earth as we go to see each 
other in earth life. I am glad that John is engaged in the good 
work he is doing. He knew the truth for many a day, but he 
had to hide his light for a long time under a bushel, but every- 
thing is harmonious now, and I often go into your home with 
the rest of the friends that are here. I just thought I would 
drop into this place and send a little word to you all. Don't 
think I am idle in this life. I am busier than I was in earth 
life, and Daddy Hess was always thought an active and busy 
person. Well, Toronto has got woke up the last fifteen years. 
The truth will crawl in everywhere without asking anyone's 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 249 

permission. The rest of the folks are here with me, but I am 
the spokesman on this occasion and the rest can come some 
other time and do their own talking. Good-bye for this time, 
but keep on working for the truth." 

[Note: — I have acknowledged to The Progressive Thinker, 
and now do so to the readers of my book, the correctness of the 
names and the relationships of all who are mentioned in the 
message. My work to which he alludes is evidently the prepara- 
tion for publication of this book. He also speaks truly when he 
says, I knew the truth for many a day, but had to hide my light, 
for a long time, under the bushel. It is also true that he was 
called Daddy Hess by everybody over sixty years ago. He and 
his family connections were widely known as U. E. Loyalists. It 
must be nearly sixty years since he passed to spirit realms, after 
a mortal life of 97 years. What hypothesis can best account for 
all the facts as given? Methinks it is the spiritual one, for I 
don't see how one can adjust another to fit the facts in this 
case. J. S. K.] 



CHAPTER XXIX 

[Note: — The reader, to appreciate their full import, should 
halt, and read Chapters XII and XXIX consecutively. The 
former is by the author; and the latter, the response, is by his 
spirit wife. The rhyming, grammar, words and sentences are 
shaped by the instrument (the medium), but not by her normal 
self. It matters not what personality makes use of her, it rhymes 
when read, and is euphonious.] 

MY beloved 'Johnnie.' — It is to me a delight, to be 
able to write my answer as the Key that has unlocked 
the mystery. 

As to the Ante-mortem Agreement Conditions that favored 
psychic results, I have this to say, I remember it all, as I do our 
wedding day; and all the bliss of human harmony that you, my 
loving husband, gave to me. 

One cannot change himself into a tone of thought, until he 
thinks it out, in his own way; and I was born with prejudices 
strong, that were as part of me ; and like a bending in a tree, I 
had to change these in a gradual way. I thought of you as 
changed, in love for me, and following a myth, and bringing to 
the ground, the garments beautiful of scholarly attainment, and 
good repute, that you through many years in your town had 
gained. It was to me a woe, a dreadful woe, that you were thus 
inclined to go where deceivers were, in every key, as it was talked 
by others, and told to me. I wished to snatch you from the 
burning, so I thought it best to wish you not to go, for I believed 
the love you had for me, would keep you from your downfall 
permanently. And when you ceased to go, I felt at rest ; and still 
I wondered if I did the right ; or was I doing ill, and was it all 
the best; and was it right if it was true, to thus withhold that 
which you loved, from you. I asked about the subject everywhere, 
and seeds that you had planted, grew in me, till I with my own 
wish began to wish to< know if after death we live, was so. I 
thought if it is true, my Johnnie boy and I could both this truth 

250 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 251 

enjoy ; and that is why I bade you go to centre of the spiritualistic 
thought; and be able with me to hear and see, and in all of it 
feel quite free to say, it is so, or is not ; or I cannot it so see, or 
this thing thus appears to me. I had a wish to know, if from the 
sky my sister Gertie and our daughter dear could really come, 
and to ourselves appear. I gleaned with you along this open plain, 
and hoped with you that I might also gain, the very knowledge 
that would be able to bind us two eternally. 

As ill health came, I clung more strong to planks of truth, 
that came along, into my power to touch ; and so I gathered knowl- 
edge here and there ; and thinking earnestly and honestly, I said 
if ever I am taken I will do the things that I have promised you — 
come back and write, and speak, and be as much as possible in 
touch with thee. 

My death was like a restful sleep, I lay upon my bed and hardly 
did I realize that fate had cut the thread that severed me my one 
love free, from thy kind presence ever dear, faithful and sweet, 
and ever to me near. I felt alone, bereft upon a mountain bare. 
I could not find contentment anywhere. I love my 'J onnn ie only, 
I would say. I do not love the beauties of this way of living here. 

Thy guardian Electra, stays with me, Saphrona and another 
also here Hypatia, your mother aided by many who are known 
to you, pass from me, dear one, now, to you, so I have from this 
knowledge comforts not a few, and I have gained in spirit growth, 
from seeds planted by you. If I had not this 'blessed power,' I 
don't know what I'd do, to be on this side alone and not go back 
to you. But as it is I'm happy, and patiently I wait till your 
time comes to join me in this second living state. 

Light is my path, the way is bright, and many beauties throng 
my sight, and I have much I wish to do, but greatest pleasure is 
to go to you. 

When I had learned that I was really dead, that body dear to 
me lay silent ever more, that locked to me was every mortal door, 
and spirit ever more I was to be. how grateful was I, my beloved, 
then to know that you so honest in your love and true, were a 
believer in this truth now bright. What had appeared a stigma 



252 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

in my sight, was now the door ajar to me; and angel songs afar 
might be if I could go again to thee. 

He is prepared I told the angels near, and he will joyful be 
to hear and see. Please therefore tell the how to me. 

The guardians listened to my prayer, and told me you were 
praying too ; and shortly I was then allowed to go dear heart to 
you. I grow, I lean upon this staff of truth, to me it grows more 
stable and strong as time goes on; and every time I may do so, 
I do as far as possible the thing that I have promised you. I 
call you 'Johnnie Boy/ I reach with loving hand for every blossom 
of this truth you gain; and I will be one to rejoice with every 
living mortal brain, that walks through critic's thorny path, and 
prejudices' bitter hate, until at last they gain this height, that God 
has granted me ; and learn to know that this is true, their friends 
may grow to be able to come to them again, and make their 
personality and loved forms of expression true, with them to be. 
When this the truth is to them known, and its laws properly 
obeyed, — tho we cannot come without a human aid — we sweep 
the heavens' golden shore of every sand of hope, and treasure 
it to brighten those who still remain in this. 

My husband is to me as dear as he was in earth life. I 
lived in pain and woe. All that I do is to him dear, and I use 
instruments whene'er I can, and try to bring him cheer. / try to 
ope his spirit eye and ear, so he shall be though still in life a 
spirit free, able to sense me, as I living be, across the gulf of 
death unfathomed and unknown, to many men a terror like a 
mighty sea, that takes their friends from them to be, hidden 
forever in its mystery. Lost in the tomb in iinal sleep, in silence 
ever more, how many living loving dead would touch the portal 
closed of those who weep; 'and lift the pall a curtain to the heaven 
shore, and prove they may come back once more, if friends would 
learn to ope the door. But when the bands of angel hands, aid 
the enlightened mind to see that we are but transplanted flowers 
which grow in more perfect degree; when thoughts as things 
completed be, and we come back our friends to see. When men 
believe that this is true, how great the benefit, how new the good 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 253 

to all. How shallow then will seem the pall, that of the body, 
covers all. / lift the curtain of the dreaded grave, and glancing 
back across the life of me, see that it all was planned as best, and 
I am happy here, and am in harmony and joy, because I may 
communicate with my dear 'Johnnie boy.' One may endeavor 
every way, and gain but smallest crumb of hope; but climb as I 
in life did do, till angels point the way to you. I kneel and pray 
to Highest Deity, to aid me in my powers to do, till I may come 
to our own home, and show 'J°h nn i e Boy/ to you; whatever is 
the best for me, I take it as a remedy. I realize that I am here, 
that I am loved by faces sweet, that I am aided everywhere, to 
make my wishes here complete ; and though I feel it when I 
cannot do, I grateful am that I was taught, before I fell asleep, 
that life continues ever more; and I may make your last years 
sweet, and aid you in your efforts to bless other men, as this 
truth blesses you and myself too. 

Like to photography each demonstration be, and if a little 
error, or a little change, is made in light or chemical upon the 
plate, nothing will come into the human view. Whatever is is 
right, and right in end shall win, and after it has won, the truth 
triumphant is to stand, with wands of peace on every hand ; and 
you shall echo forth from every land, because of this true history, 
men have unlocked the greatest mystery. 

May E. King/' 

The foregoing was written May 4th, 1912. 



To her this was my acknowledgement. 
"To 'Babe': — 

My loved one now in spirit realm. While thanking you for 
many words of cheer, in many messages, through trumpet and 
through automatic hand, as well as while in your transient body, 
many times and dates at Jonson's, I truly now relieve you, for 
you've kept your promise, and thus redeemed your Bond. 

'The Gem of Truth' for which we searched together, has now 
been found; and we can surely claim in fact, as well as name, 



254 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

to have demonstrated to mankind, that there is continuity of life, 
as well as terrestrial and celestial intercommunication. 

John S. King." 

[Note: — Read November, 1911, and April, 1912, series and 
Chapter XX.] 



CHAPTER XXX 

[Stead's picture, made by spirit artists in natural life coloring, 
about three-quarters life size, immediately before that of Hypatia, 
on the 27th of April, 1912, in the presence of the Bangs sisters, 
in the city of Chicago; also in the author's presence, on a base 
selected by him, was completed in a trifle less than fifteen minutes. 
The figure was dressed as he first appeared at the Jonson seance, 
soon after that of Hypatia, on the 18th April, 1912. The selection 
of the base, and the subsequent developments, were similar to 
those in the case of -Hypatia. J. S. K.] 

IT may be mentioned here, that in the early messages received 
by me after the Titanic disaster — selections from which will 
be found recorded in this chapter — that Hypatia, an 
advanced intelligence, made known to me, that she along with 
Julia Ames and Stead's son, Otelleo and other guides, escorted 
Stead's spirit from the sea to the psychic instrument, in New York 
State, where he was enabled to communicate with me, and he 
(Stead) also so states to me. 

To the reader's mind the thought will readily occur, when Julia 
Ames, the guide of Stead, would naturally be there on the scene, 
why was Hypatia there as well? 

Be it remembered from reading Chapter VIII that Hypatia 
had previously in Stead's own home, communicated with him, in 
response to my request. Be it also remembered that Hypatia con- 
stantly communed with me through the "Human-Psychic-Tele- 
phone" (the New York psychic) ; and what more natural then, 
than for Hypatia to aid Stead, to a satisfying state of continued 
existence, and an opportunity to prove the same ; and demonstrate 
his ability to communicate with the writer, his corresponding pen 
friend, for he had in life promised me to aid to prove these very 
conditions ? Whatsoe'er the view that anyone may take, I hope to 
prove it clear, by his own evidence, which I have been enabled 
to accumulate, that Stead himself, in my judgment, well estab- 
lished continuity, return and communion. 

255 



256 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

I never met William T. Stead in life, nor did I ever see him, 
or hear him speak. However some years ago I became interested 
in his attitude towards the spiritual philosophy; and he having 
learned of psychical research-work, wrote requesting me to 
endeavor to secure the consent of a famous American psychic 
(Jonson) to visit England, to afford himself and others similar 
opportunity to that which I had enjoyed, of studying the wonder- 
ful phenomena of a physical and psychical character. In my 
effort I failed, but it led to a cordial corresponding friendship, 
which existed up to the time of the Titanic disaster. Much of 
the evidence is too voluminous to find place in this chapter; but 
I may briefly refer to it, and can produce it as received by me 
when in writing. I will indicate briefly the evidence of various 
kinds. I have in all received over seventy written messages signed 
by Stead. These came from different sources, and are modified 
in expression, by the psychic through whom they are produced. 
As the mould-board of a plow shapes each furrow, no matter what 
man guides the plow ; so no matter who the writer may be that 
uses a particular psychic, a certain characteristic is made manifest. 
This, however, does not nullify the thoughts conveyed. We know 
but little of conditions, either here or there required to accom- 
plish physical demonstrations. We however know men use differ- 
ent words at different times, to express the same thought. The 
church bells ring out the National Anthem, and all who hear it 
know it is the prayer "God save the King." So too the same 
anthem may be rendered through an organ, trumpet, piano, cornet, 
flute, accordeon or violin, even by the same musical interpreter; 
still the sounds or tone in each and every case are different, 
though each may be harmonious, and convey the true thought to 
the listening ear. The listener not only recognizes the anthem, 
but can readily distinguish it, and name the instrument by which 
produced. Rhyming messages through the writing psychic create 
doubt of the true origin from its strangeness ; but the National 
Anthem rendered through the bagpipes is quite as unfamiliar to 
many men, though they do not impair the thought they render 
for the ear that is accustomed to them. Marconigrams between 




WILLIAM T. STEAD. 
(From Painting by Spirit Artists for the Author.) 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 257 

sections of the Allies in the war zone, are full of information 
and both origin and destination are well understood. On the 
other hand, if one of these same Marconigrams reach the enemy 
its origin and its thought conveyed is not understood, and to such 
enemy such a Marconigram is simply meaningless jargon. Because 
a spirit has acquired a new mode of speaking, due to his new 
necessity; or because no two instruments or psychics used are 
alike, through which he speaks, by aid of trumpet, or writes by 
aid of the psychic's hand, is not sufficient reason for denying 
the source of the voice, or the thought conveyed as being that 
of a particular individual spirit. 

It is a well-known fact, that no spirit intelligence can write the 
same through one writing psychic, as through another; nor speak 
with the same intonation through each trumpet; and further 
presents a different aspect through different materializing 
mediums in slight degree ; nor does any photograph of a human 
by one photographer resemble exactly that of every, or any other. 
It will be further conceded that the spirit cannot write at all 
times the same through any one psychic ; cannot always speak the 
same through the one trumpet; cannot always materialize the 
same in the presence of the same materializing medium, every- 
thing being so absolutely dependent upon the present existing 
conditions. Again it is true that specified spirits, speaking 
through different trance mediums, whose vocal organs differ, do 
not each time speak in the same key or tone ; nor does a vocalist 
or pianist always sing or play a selected song, in the same 
tone or key; nor do public speakers on the platform always use 
the same words or language, in expressing their thoughts, 
which alone are truly convincing to the hearers for whom 
intended. 

When a prediction or promise is made through one psychic or 
medium, and fulfilled through another of different phase, at wide 
distance apart, and at very different dates; and this repeated in 
various ways, or through several different phases of psychic 
instruments, who know not each other, and at unfixed dates, it 
surely cannot be classed as fraudulent; and would in ordinary 
human events be accepted as a corroboration. 



258 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Two days after its date, I received the following message 
from the "Human-Psychic-Telephone" in New York State, 
while at Toledo; but will again remind the reader, that whether 
I am present, as in the interviews with Hypatia, and with 
the philosophers, and others as recorded in preceding chapters — 
as well as those to follow — or absent from her presence, all 
messages which I have received through her, are more or less of 
a rhyming character. Particulars regarding this psychic instru- 
ment are given in a separate chapter devoted entirely to her 
(Chapter XXI), and her peculiar and wonderful gifts. 

445 p.m. 16th April 1912. From William T. Stead. (No.l.) 
"All of us try, but when we fail, as one in health I tried to sail 
to you my friend for ever dear, I did not land, I now am here/' 

From what I gathered from the press at the time, the great 
ship "Titanic" made its dive below, at 2.20 a. m. of April 15th, 
and Stead with spirit aid wrote his first message from spirit 
sphere to me 38 hours and 25 minutes after that event. 

Following are extracts from other messages. 

5 p.m. 16th April 1912. From William T. Stead. (No 2.) 
"Stead I am, and it is true, that I am now cut off from you my 

friend of the past" (a fact) "My hand-writing is known 

to you, (a truth) and I will see what I can do to make it proved 
beyond a doubt, that I a spirit, come again from this side" 

(prediction). 

8.15 a.m. 17th April 1912. From William T. Stead. (No. 3.) 
"I am of those who are in the higher life. I hope to be able to 
write for you, and for Hypatia, your guide, who is with me in this 

my wish to have this hand write it for you" (prediction) 

"I started on a pleasant way, and storm came not, a sudden jar, 
and then the grinding, and the crushing of the iceberg and the 
sea. It all was done suddenly" 

4.35 p.m. 17th April 1912. From William T. Stead 

"I did not realise that death was the cause of my sudden harmony. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 259 

. . . . / hope to be able to prove identity (prediction) in several 
ways, not known to the hand that I use to write to you" 

9 AS p.m. 17th April 1912. From William T. Stead. "My 
name is world-wide in its fame .... and yet with all my 

faith, and psychic power, I did not once foresee my fate 

It was ocean grave to me, and my foody now lies beneath the sea." 

4.30 p.m. 18th April 1912. From Wm. T. Stead 

"Hypatia" (author's guide) "seems to be away; but she is to be 
here." (Was present later.) .... "Oh very hard and very slow, 

I learn to leave my friends / am so earth-bound still. 

. . . . I see by me your loving wife. I'll go now, I must learn 

the way if I am truly here to stay /'// make it so you'll 

surely see and know me, if I can." (A strong prediction later 
fulfilled.) 

That same night, while in a materializing seance at Jonson's 
in Toledo, Western Ohio, Hypatia and my spirit wife "May" 
materialized, and conversed with me ; and while doing so I asked 
Hypatia this question, "Will friend Stead be able to come to- 
night?" She answered me in these words, "I cannot tell for 
certain. I fear he has not power as yet to come and talk." 

May, my spirit wife, was pleased to say to me, "May Donna 
(our daughter) will sing for you tonight." — / placed my ring on 
May's finger, and she wore it during the seance, returning it 
before disappearing for the night. Our daughter, while material- 
ized, said, "Mamma is here tonight," and I responded, "Mother 
and daughter." 

May Donna then advanced out among the sitters in the circle ; 
and as both her mother and herself had previously promised me, 
she would sing for me before I left Toledo, now did so. Her 
selection was the anthem 

Holy, Holy, Holy, Lord God Almighty, 
All Thy works shall praise Thy name 
In earth, and sky, and sea. Etc. 

Her singing was received with surprise, and admiration, by 
those who were assembled there ; and after bowing her acknowl- 



260 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

edgement of their appreciation of her effort, along with her 
mamma then kissed me good-bye, and dissolved from view. 

As we neared the hour of closing, 10 o'clock p. m. — while all 
in the circle sat at ease, and were quietly talking — the curtains 
of the cabinet suddenly parted; and out there came, with arms 
extended, and with a determined, yet hopeful appearance, a man 
who walked straight over near to me, and was proclaimed by 
those who knew him, as William T. Stead. He did not speak, 
but retraced his steps, until near the curtain of the cabinet, and 
melted — so to speak — from the view of all the sitters. 

His predictions as expressed in the written message through 
the Human-Psychic-Telephone at If.3Q that same afternoon near 
Buffalo, New York, were here fulfilled, some five hours and 
thirty minutes after they had been made. 

This appearance was shortly followed by another and longer 
communication, signed by Wm. T. Stead, as coming through the 
same automatic writer; and from it I quote a few brief extracts, 
viz.: 

"I wish to say, I'll often show to you from this time forth, 
and help you all I can to prove the continuity of life" (prediction). 
. ... "I am convinced at last, that I am from my body free, 
and I am growing more content that it was so to be. I climb the 
steps of God's great outer throne, that every man, whate'er his 

fate, must climb alone J showed myself to you at 

Jonson's" (fulfilled promise), "that settles all the questions in 

my mind tonight. I'll visit you at Chicago" (prediction) 

"I will do everything' which is possible for me to do, to aid your 
heart plans to come true" (prediction). "After I showed myself 
to you, and realized that I was known by you, I thrilled with 
power of thought, and of desire to do; and I am very glad indeed 

you gave me opportunity to show / have with me tonight, 

your mother Margaret P. King." (The P is correct, though in 
ordinary signature she rarely, if ever, used it, in life) "and your 
father Stephen King I will ally myself to you," (predic- 
tion) "for Julia loves Hypatia; and I free spirit unallied to need 
or necessity .... float forth to be aider to thee, in your heart 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 261 

wish to set men free / will hope to be able if possible 

to show to thee" (prediction) "and on pictured page of your book 
too, if it is wished dear friend by you" (prediction). 

He next went by spirit route and met me in Chicago, Illinois, 
on the 27th April, 1912, nine days after his appearance at Toledo. 
He met me at the psychic sisters window, and there his picture 
was produced, as he had appeared in the clothing worn when he 
came to me at Toledo (prediction fulfilled). 

The Process of Spirit Painting. 
The day was fine and beautiful, that is the sun shone bright, 
the time between one and two p. m., the 27th April, 1912. The 
twin houses of the Bangs sisters had undergone artistic renova- 
tion; and paper, paint and varnish of human selection, had been 
employed by skilled renovators and decorators. The room, a 
southern one, had but a single window, but it was bare of blinds 
and curtains, no pictures on the wall, no bric-a-brac about, no 
chair or seat or furniture at all; the room contained but odor, 
light and air, as we entered in; and as the sisters worked at 
replenishing, I watched, to learn just what was necessary, before 
we settled down. A light and empty table, was first brought in, 
and placed near the only window, at the southern side of the 
room ; and next were placed three common chairs, on three sides 
of the table, the east and west for them and the northern one 
for me. The pastelles, cards, or canvasses, or whatsoe'er their 
name, which were prepared, or stretched or mounted on wooden 
frame or rack, were next brought in, some six or eight ; and placed 
at western side, and northern end of room. There were no spirits 
in sight, nor smiling "angel forms," and no other articles in view, 
save a dark colored curtain, and its purpose will be made known 
soon. So the work of preparation was now nearly through ; and 
as there was no darkness, and therefore vision clear, I was per- 
mitted to make my own selection of the necessary two canvasses, 
out of the group before alluded to; and such I brought as I 
selected them ; and the bright light of day was shining in on them, 
and also through them, for they were not opaque. The position 
in which they were placed may be thus specialized. 



262 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

The two blank canvasses, clean and pure white, which I had 
selected from all that were in the group before alluded to, were 
next placed on the table, back to back, the two frames together 
meeting in their whole circumference; thus with the canvasses 
completing the walls of a cavity, like with the two slates for spirit 
writing is produced a cabinet of small degree, on the same prin- 
ciple as is the larger cabinet at Jonson's, in which the spirit forces 
act ; and so by aid of this unique cabinet, Hermes is able, as ruler 
of the pozver of levitaiion, to utilize the elements, which may be 
rightly called the pigments, [ or coloring of clay, in accord with the 
design of the spirit-picture artist, architect or designer Rembrandt. 

The canvasses, as I have described them above, were placed 
between the window, and myself, about the center of the little 
table. The upper corners East and West were held in close apposi- 
tion, after the bottom margins had been so placed by the sisters. 
The upper corner of the canvasses on my right, at the Western 
end, first placed in close juxtaposition, was so held by the thumb 
and finger of the one sister's dexter hand ; while the other used 
her left, and did the same at corner nearest her, while she sat at 
the eastern end; so that each of them had one hand free, but in 
my sight were both of them quite constantly. 

The question arises in the mind, as to why this is done. I may 
answer briefly there are but three reasons which occurred to me, 
the one as I have explained was to keep the two frames in apposi- 
tion, thus to create a cavity or cabinet; another to keep them 
both erect, for it was evident they would not stand alone; and 
as to the second hand of each, it was constantly within the angle 
of my vision. By some it is asserted, that there is a reason third, 
which is claimed to be important, and is said to be no less than 
a psychic current force, running from the living mediums to the 
inorganic base, on which appears the picture. As to the curtain 
I referred to, I have this to say, the window did need it not, 
and with it was made a border at the top and sides, to help to 
concentrate the light and power upon the base, which was fitted 
to the frames ; so that the various colors of the pigments, as they 
came in waves from the bottom towards the top, were made by 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 263 

contrast so much more clear or visible. I hope the reader will 
comprehend the true situation of the sitting psychics to the small 
improvised cabinet; and I wish such to be assured, that my 
description is a truthful delineation so far as I am concerned. 

I learned from one of the sisters, that the spirit artist was 
alleged to be no less an one than the famous Rembrandt, at least 
most generally; though at rare intervals, some special pictures 
ivere said to be the work of Raphael. 

I was and am satisfied, that 'twere quite impossible for skilful 
conjuror, or artist in legerdemain, to work a chance to deceive 
my experienced eye on this occasion, for I may enlighten readers 
by telling them, that I have been a confidential guest, right on 
the stage with the best of them, to witness the wizard acts devised 
by them and am not therefore a "gullible." But to resume, as 
there appeared to be no more to do, we took our seats in the 
positions I have specified. The room was light, as I have said, 
and my sight was clear, and believe me true, that I always was 
a critic most skeptical, and never credulous, and harbored doubt, 
until I could no longer entertain it, for I had a mind my own, 
and quality of great activity ; and now was my supreme opportunity 
to detect a fraud, if such existed. 

I have in mind the one I want, I said, for such can read my 
thoughts ; and if the work be done by spirit true, 'twill come just 
as I now desire; and so I looked upon these two sisters, and 
quiet sat, with watch in hand to note the time, which was half- 
way 'tween one and two ; and gave my strict attention alternately 
to hands and arms of sisters both, and canvas before my face; 
and all within the area of the angle of my central fixed vision; 
while I felt a glow of subconscious knowledge elevating, which 
seemed to indicate, as if by intuition, that he, my friend Stead, 
was now coming; and I gazed most critically upon the pure 
white canvas, with full light of day on front and back of it, and 
watching from my favored position each change, however slight, 
in motion or position of the psychic sisters; and I was as well 
extremely quiet, and motionless and listening, and could have 
almost heard the flappings of the wings of a butterfly in air, or 



264 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

the breathing of a humming bird, as I was constantly on the 
qui-vive of great expectancy; and so anxiously watched for the 
slightest indication of the work of spirit artist, no matter what 
moment, nor in what position it might appear. 

Very presently just two feet in front of me, I noticed beginning 
change, from clear white light on surface of the canvas, to that 
less clear, and on from that to faint shadow, slight evidence of 
waves of color, mixing with the shadow, and all in motion, like 
small wavelets, or ripples on an almost placid lake ; and creeping, 
or rather rolling upwards, one after another, in orderly succession, 
as if striving slowly to attain the top ; and then a portion in one 
place would deepen in shade, making form; and this with other 
delineations came into view, and slowly filling in with light, or 
darkness here or there, and colors more and more in evidence, 
along with apparent movement, and eyes forming, as if closed 
in sleep ; and as the picture finished, the eyes were widely open, 
as in wake from sleep, or to emphasize "Dawn of (his) Awakened 
Mind," and before me, as natural as he could be, I saw and recog- 
nized the face of William T. Stead, who wrote through the 
Human-Psychic-Telephone, near Buffalo, at 4.30 p. m., 18th April, 
that he would try and show himself to me; and who that same 
night at 10 p. m. came from the cabinet at Jonson's in Toledo, 
western side of Ohio State ; in transient body, clothed as he is in 
this spirit picture of him, and crossed the room to me, to prove 
as he has once more done, that he, my friend and co-worker, in 
human life, still lives and returns, and thus proves continuity. 
He surely fulfilled his promise to meet me in Chicago. 

On the following day another message came from the same 
source, hundreds of miles distant, and from it I also quote. 

"Well brother King be sure I'll bring you every proof I can" 

(prediction) "I am glad the artist of Bangs sisters 

pictured me" (prediction fulfilled) . ^ . . "and the whole of us 
together decided that my picture would be of use to your book, 
as it would go to show that it is true that I, a discarnate spirit, 
known through press to many men, may so come back in\ touch 
with life, and show my face to them. More dreadful than the 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 265 

wave that struck my life from me with final blow, is that great 
hatred of this truth, that we dear brother King are trying hard 
to make the living see .... but smiles of God's approving 
son will be with us who suffer most; and we are both of us upheld 
as by an angel host; and naught can conquer us who are upheld 
by truth's great majesty. In all thy work, I am with thee!' 

Hypatia, whose form, voice, and personality have been observed 
by many hundreds of people in America, as well as by a well- 
known author in England, gave me her views regarding the spirit 
picture of Mr. Stead, by utilizing the Human-Psychic-Telephone, 
and those views are recorded here. 

"Beloved one, I'll try to tell how it was done. Rembrandt in 
spirit paints the picture here, and it is held aloft in psychic ray, 
and on the canvas is repeated, so the colors come to stay. Hermes 
the levitation ruler, of the earthly powers to do, repeats exactly 
on the canvas, what Rembrandt tells him to. It is done by a 
repeating from light to heavy tone. The short waves become 

long waves Hermes like a town clock, keeps time exact 

in key with Rembrandt like a Swiss watch held, so it shows to 
him. Hermes like a set picture of fireworks, does so attune him- 
self, that he can be repeater of the thing that he in Rembrandt's 
picture sees. It is like clay-moulder, copying a picture shown to 
him. Rembrandt the composer, and levitation key ruled by this 
being Hermes, at once responds to him. Tis process very beauti- 
ful, and much admired by me, and I encourage you to say 'twas 
free from fraud in every way. Let critics talk, I look on with 
pride, and aid you through to prove to men that it was true." 

From Hermes (a levitation spirit). 
"Hermes I am, Bangs sisters did not do it. The artist could 
not do it, though wise he be. I Hermes help the labor, I do it 
with a tone of heavier octave than is now Rembrandfs own. 
Light is a wave of substance, and I from nature's own great 
kingdom of the clay kinds, make pigments of my own. I do it, 
as Marconi tower I make myself to be, and what Rembrandt 
suggests as best, I answer real to him, or in the tone of painting 
that is preserved by thee!' 



266 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

At 2.15 p. m., 10th June, 1912, a spirit intelligence who signed 
his name as Rev. Theodore Parker wrote: "I wish to give this 
word to you that I believe that it is true all you have said ; and 
if I can, I'll aid to so enlighten man, that men abroad in every 
land shall look at it, and understand what had been as mist before, 
will come out clear and plain; and you will be successful in 
trying to explain. Bangs sisters are not fraudulent, I stood 
where I could see, and I approve of what you've done in every 
degree. For all eternity the men of enlightened thought will 
proudly speak of thee ; and as I feel great love for you, receive 
this word from me." 

A Criticism of William T. Stead's Spirit Picture by 
E. J. B. Duncan, a Relative of Him. 

"Toronto, 23rd February, 1913. 
To John S. King, M.D. 

Elliott House, Toronto. 
Dear Sir: — You are authorized to use my letter of 18th 
December, 1912, to you, in your coming book, in connection with 
the picture of William T. Stead, giving it, or rather a truthful 
copy of it, and without making any change in its wording. 

Yours very sincerely, 

E. J. B. Duncan." 

"Toronto, 18th December, 1912. 
Dr. John S. King, 

Toronto. 
My Dear Sir : — I have now before me a large picture, pur- 
porting to be one of my cousin, the late W. T. Stead; and a 
photograph, said to be taken from same. I do not consider either 
the picture or photograph to be a faithful likeness of my late 
cousin, although there is a very strong suggestion of his face, in 
both of them, particularly in the expression about the eyes, and 
in the firm set of the mouth. I may further say that the moment 
I saw the large picture, I knew at once it was, or at least was 
intended to be, one of my late cousin. It is five years since I 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 267 

last saw him; and I further understand, the picture referred to 
is alleged to be a spirit picture, and not one of a living human. 

Yours very sincerely, 

E. J. B. Duncan." 

[Note: — On the occasion of Mr. Duncan's view of the spirit 
painting of Stead, he exhibited a photograph of Stead procured 
some five years previously which served him in his critique. When 
Stead came to me accompanied by Julia Ames, his guide, in the 
seance held by Mrs. Wells, he appeared with features more nearly 
resembling the photograph than the spirit painting; while else- 
where in the book he (Stead) especially calls my attention to 
the fact that he so appeared to illustrate that his features at 
that time were correct on the photograph, just as at the present 
time his features are equally true to the complete spirit painting. 
J.S.K.] 

Julia Ames, Stead's Alleged Guide. 

It was not long after the foregoing letter, and our conversation, 
that Stead's alleged guide, Julia Ames, was heard from as follows : 

2 p. m. 21st Feby. 1913. From Julia Ames. "I am Julia Ames. 
I write today to Dr. King. It is noi a very desirable work to be 
an author. It is like a soldier baring his breast to his enemy's lance. 
He must do his best, and wait for the smile or frown of a fickle 
public. I approve of the remarks you have made regarding the 
spirit picture of Mr. Stead. It is true to his? appearance, as he is. 
I was there when it was painted. There are many living mortals 
with psychic gifts, so it is foolish for any sensitive to say I am 
the only one through whom this individual communicates. It 
would be like a pen saying I am the only instrument so used. 
Psychics are to us instruments, and we use them according to 
their capacity to serve us, be they black or white, be they ignorant 
or wise. Wisdom in a psychic, especially a conscious one, is 
often a disadvantage, because their wishes interfere with what 
the spirits may desire to do. I'd not use a psychic at all if I had 
my choice. I would instead communicate directly to the individual 
addressed by me; but we are limited in our capacity, and all we 
do, is aided or withheld by acts of men, when we make instru- 



268 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

merits of them. You will do much to aid humanity to grasp, 
and understand this truth, that we the souls departed come again 
to be, by aid of sensitives in touch with thee. 

Health and good mental power is to be granted to you, and 
angels near will guide you through to what you really wish to 
do. Displeasure may be aroused in small degree, but most of it 
will come from jealousy. I'd have written when Mr. Stead did, 
but the medium was too ill and tired to write more that day. 

May peace and joy attend thee, all the way, is wish of me, 
guide of thy friend, stranger to thee." 

[A few selections from messages, from over seventy received 
from Stead, will be found in Chapter XXXI ; while some direct 
communicating will be found recorded in Chapter XXXIV.] 

Regarding Mr. Stead's picture, each reader will form his or 
her own opinion, and will be entitled to know mine. Had he 
in mortal life selected the best two artists in Europe or America 
to paint his portrait and bust, I think it will be conceded that, 
even with the same pose for each of them, and working from 
the same point of view, they would neither of them be an exact 
duplicate of the man, nor yet a perfect duplicate the one of the 
other. 

I think it will likewise be granted, that no artist whosoever 
could produce his second picture of either the mortal subject, or 
the original painting of him, doing it entirely from memory. So 
too it will be readily conceded that no two photographers can 
produce under similar circumstances, a picture which will dupli- 
cate the other photograph in every detail. But the similarity 
of picture, and its original, constantly undergoes change, so that 
if we were, a year or two later, to make the comparison, this 
difference would be more apparent, even strikingly so with the 
constantly changing original, as the years pass away; so that it 
is in ordinary experience, often changed to so marked a degree, 
as to cause doubt to arise in the observer's mind as to whether 
two pictures represent the same original. 

In the absence of two such pictures of the late Mr. Stead, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 269 

while a mortal, I have illustrated this assertion by giving a photo- 
graph picture of myself at the age of 65 years, which will be 
found at the end of this chapter; and another one at the age of 
70 years, at the beginning of the book. But supposing the spirit 
picture in all its natural coloring — from which this half-tone 
photo-engraving is made — to be a copy of another painting, or 
an original, then challenge its production, and prove my state- 
ments wrong. Until that is done, I rely on Stead's statement that 
no such picture is in existence. The pictures everywhere recognized 
as Stead's, were pictures of him in mortal life, at different times. 
Nor am I aware that spirit artists ever make pictures of men in 
earth life ; or if so I have not knowledge of it as a fact. Stead's 
picture had not prior existence ; but it was produced in conformity 
with a promise made to me by himself as a spirit, and its produc- 
tion was complete in my presence a fortnight after he passed to 
spirit life, in a manner already described by me. He has confirmed 
this as fact through the trumpet and in the hearing of others. 

A Brief Synopsis of the Author's Varied Experiences with 
thf Spirit Personality of Wm. T. Stead, up to the Close 
of the Year 1912. 

1 . Stead began to give messages to me, through the Human- 
Psychic-Telephone, on 16th April, 1912, in New York State, and 
up to the close of the year 1912, I had received many messages 
from him; and corroborative testimony, from Julia Ames, his 
spirit guide and control, and from others. 

2. Stead sent a message to me at 4.30 p. m., 18th April, 1912, 
that he would try and show to me. He materialized to me that 
same night at 10 p. m. in Jonson's seance in Toledo, Western 
Ohio State, as he had promised me from New York State, 
between five and six hours before, although I did not receive the 
promise till next day through the mail. 

3. I sat for spirit pictures in Chicago, Illinois, and Stead met 
me there as promised, in the home of the psychic sisters, on the 
afternoon of the 27th April, 1912; and his picture came on 
canvas clear, and was finished while I sat a little less than 
fifteen minutes. 



270 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

4. On the 2nd of August, 1912, through the psychic's hand in 
New York State, Stead wrote and signed his name to the state- 
ment: "I will try to communicate with you through a trumpet 
tomorrow morning. , ' 

5. On the 3rd day of August, 1912, through a trumpet, also 
in New York State, as promised the previous day, but in a new 
home, and in the presence of a trumpet psychic, who was under 
the control of Gray Feather, the strong Indian control of Jonson, 
who had invited me by a letter also, to come there (Lily Dale), 
and be witness of what he (Gray Feather) could do. Of the 
sixteen spirit voices which came and spoke with me Stead was 
one; and he there reminded me of the previous promise he had 
made the day before, regarding this effort of his. 

6. When I was through with the above seance, I immediately 
returned to the home of the writing psychic; and Stead was 
again present with me there, and controlled her hand to -write: 
"My name I gave to you through the trumpet successfully, did 
I not?" I there and then acknowledged it to be so. 

7. In Los Angeles, California, on 20th December, 1912, a 
communication was written me by Rev. B. F. Austin, A.M., B.A., 
D.D., and forwarded to, and received by me through the mails, 
to say: "Dear Brother King: I am going to give you in detail 
the circumstances of my sitting today with Mrs. Inez Wagner 
of the People's Church, to secure an answer to your letter." 
(Without any clue contained.) "Mrs. Wagner was thoroughly 
blindfolded by me, before the sitting began. Leather pads over 
the eyes, and a bandage over these, and about the head. She 
first read a letter from a lawyer in Syracuse, New York, and it 
was done in a very remarkable manner. Then your letter was 
taken up and extracted from the envelope" (addressed to him at 
Rochester). "It had been opened in Rochester, but had not been 
opened since its arrival here, as I wanted to guard against 
telepathic influence on the medium's mind, and placed between 
the medium's palms." (His family lived in Rochester.) "'Why,' 
she exclaimed at once, 'Stead is here, and so is Julia. Stead 
says he wishes to answer this letter. He has written to Dr. John 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 271 

S. King many messages himself. He says 'on the 18th of last 
April I wrote a message, and presented myself to Dr. King.' ''' 
(My records prove both statements true.) "In Julia's Bureau, 
England, matters were given pertaining to Dr. King." The letter 
goes on to report, "King had communication with Stead from 
the Bureau in England, and" (for copy of minute of what occurred, 
see Chapter VIII), "Stead now says, 'I wish to corroborate. 
I will come again and give more messages, and these I will 
corroborate.' At the close, Mrs. Wagner, still entranced, said, 
Why, here comes another John King, but no relation of the Mr. 
King getting the message.' 

You can judge how surprised and delighted I was in reading 
your letter, after the seance was over; and finding many if not 
all the points touched on, and answered. Doubtless there may 
be some slight errors in writing out from memoranda; but I 
think you will find the main points answered satisfactorily. The 
medium read the word as from Stead's lips, 'corroborate/ which 
I also find in your letter. With best wishes. 

Fraternally, 

B. F. Austin." 

8. On 24th December, 1912, 1 spent an hour of first experience 
with a lady-psychic in Ohio, who is a non-professional medium, 
and while there some twenty forms appeared to view and also 
spoke, some of whom I had known in earth life, and others by 
reputation. But the phase of the medium was to me quite new, 
still the first guests who came were — and of this there could 
be no doubt in mind — my own spirit wife and daughter, and 
William Stead and Julia. What was most peculiar, the psychic 
was not entranced, and conversed with me, while the guests were 
arriving and departing. The spirit friends came to me in what 
appeared to be their transient bodies, though I did not examine 
any of them. Their mode of coming also varied. Some walked 
out from the cabinet, some arose from the floor, some from the 
walls and ceiling, but all conversed with me; and departed like 
a puff of smoke or steam, on a frosty morning. One who came 
was William Stead, who simply announced "Stead is here." He 



272 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

was accompanied by Julia Ames, his guide ; and when I saw him, 
he was high up to my left, where the wall and ceiling meet. 
He looked his natural size, and his face and bust were like his 
photograph of five or six years ago; and he spoke to me, but 
when he ceased to talk, went with a whirl across the room's space 
near to me ; and passed on through the right hand wall. 

9. On the 26th December, 1912, I called upon a doctor in 
Toledo, Ohio, in whose office I had never been before ; and while 
we were conversing my friend, the doctor, said: "I have clair- 
audient gift"; and he wrote what follows with his pencil and 
handed it to me : "Well I am William Stead, and I will tell you 
Dr. King you are mistaken; Professor James did not lack con- 
fidence, he was too weak. Myers was also too weak. I will try 
and write for you the first opportunity I have." [The efforts above 
referred to were made in a Jonson seance on the 23rd December, 
1912. Failure to write I called want of confidence in their power. 
The intention was to write upon my office pad, with my fountain 
pen.] 

10. On the 27th, 28th and 29th December, 1912, while in the 
home in New York State of the Human-Psychic-Telephone, Stead 
wrote me several messages ; and conversed by aid of the psychic's 
hand; and his spirit guide, Julia Ames, also wrote me to cor- 
roborate the evidence regarding Stead's picture, and his many 
messages to me. I have no doubt that my corresponding friend, 
Wm. T. Stead, who has sent me many messages, also materialized 
to me, as well as spoke distinctly as a natural voice, now visits 
me; and thus writes, talks and shows himself in different parts 
of the country and through different psychics, in accordance with 
his desires as expressed in a written message which is one of 
many included in the pages of this book: 

'"Tis well thai relatives and friends, and mediums of every 
phase should know and realize, that all spirits are free to come, 
and do so too, through more doors than one; as they know no 
selfishness, nor jealousy, as humans may, but have the good of 
all in view" 

In my final revision of this book, before its publication; and 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 273 

when concluding this chapter, I felt there was much additional 
evidence, which I could now add, as secured since the chapter 
was written. Such evidence corroborates that which I received 
through various communications and demonstrations ; and were 
spoken through the trumpets of two mediums, strangers to each 
other ; as well as some which were entirely new, through an auto- 
matic writer, I have not as yet met. My private sittings were 
about a score, at which Stead talked with me ; and half as many 
more at least when he talked with others present also, as well 
as myself. 

Communications purporting to be Stead's will be found in 
remaining chapters, together with his handwriting of three com- 
munications on slates, which I held in my hands, felt the vibra- 
tions, and heard the sounds as he was writing them; and which 
are in a group of photo-engravings in the "Independent Slate 
Writing Addenda," which embraces over a score of such writings, 
immediately following Chapter XXXV. 

In some cases, among the many messages signed by W. T. 
Stead, I found statements which bore in their construction, what 
impressed me as probably evidential matter; but owing to lack 
of corroboration from any source I did not include them in the 
book. As examples of these I quote briefly. From a long com- 
munication (No. 17) dated 15th May, 1912: "I think it is true, 
about my writing through Mrs. Joslin's hand; and also about 
my appearing in the seance at Rothesay, as I threw my condition 
over the medium there/' Again in the same communication I find 
this sentence : "I. did not tell the band to play 'Nearer my God to 
Thee,' but they did play it; and that tune is ever present with 
me yet." Another quoted sentence reads : "I had no premonition 
of any kind, regarding death or calamity." 

In the evening of the day specified in the foregoing, I sought 
to reach my friend Stead,- as I have for a long time reached my 
chief guide ; and within 48 hours I received through the mail this 
written message: <( Wafted to me like a zephyr is this thought 
now, Brother King, 8.15 p.m. (15th May) 1912. I feel your 
presence here. W. T. Stead." Immediately following I read his 



274 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

expressed view or admonition, which is as follows : "Regarding 
your capacity to send your subconscious out of your body, it is 
interesting, but I believe it is unwise to practice it." [This was of 
course known to myself, but not publicly known at that time. 
My chief guide and members of my spirit band were aware of 
it from the first, and consented to my demonstrating it as a truth, 
in the presence of a circle of Toronto investigators, all of whom 
knew me; and as is set forth more in detail in Chapter 
XXXV.] 




THE AUTHOR— JOHN S. KING, M. D. 

(At the Age of 65 Years.) 




THE AUTHOR— JOHN S. KING, M. D. 
(At the Age of 60 Years.) 



CHAPTER XXXI 

An Evidential Chapter, of Strong Testimony. 

A Long List of Volunteer Witnesses. 

Evidence for Truth of Life's Continuity, 

Return and Communication, in Perpetuity. 

Are Not My Loved Ones, Who Have Proved to Me ; 

And My Spirit Guides, and Others Near, 

Including Noted Ones, Who no Longer Fear, 

Bringing to Mankind Good Cheer? 

Are Not Work and Book Endorsed by Them, 

As Coming from the Spirit Sphere? 

The Evidence Bids Strong for Coming Change, 

From Base Desire, and Sordid Greeds, 

From Selfish Wants, and Warring Creeds, 

To Waking Minds, to Truth and Human Needs. 

From War, Distrust, Unrighteousness, 

To Peace, with Knowledge, and Pure Happiness, 

To Trust in God's Own Fatherhood, 

To Faith in Man's True Brotherhood; 

When All Humanity Will Know and Realize, 

Immortal Life Awaits Them in the Skies. 



WHENCE the origin of all the thought, which herein- 
after is to be found, clad in great variety of expressive 
language ? It courses through the automatic writing- 
hand of "The Human-Psychic-Telephone," as the web of cloth, 
gathered from the scattered threads, emerges from the weaver's 
loom. Each thread would seem to have different origin, in either 
carnate, or discarnate mind. 

To each reader is left the solution of the problems of whence, 
and why. From the hundreds of messages received, as intended 
for me, either in my presence voluntarily, or in quick response 
to my questioning; or in my absence from the psychic, and 

275 



276 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

by her sent on to me through the mails, containing specific 
knowledge which she could not possess; but all alleged to be 
from discarnate intelligences, whose signatures are attached to 
them; and I reproduce here but the few, leaving others for the 
pages of other books, or held by me personally. 

Suffice it to say, that when any alleged intelligence is writing 
through the psychic, it will promptly respond to my previously 
prepared questions, by immediately writing answers; and these 
are frequently a test of personality; but necessitating an infinite 
range or extent of personal knowledge, supremely greater than 
is the possession of any single individual human mind. This 
holds good whether I am present to receive them; or absent, 
and they are sent to me; and this likewise applies to those who 
passed from earth-life before the psychic was born. Universal 
knowledge is surely not the possession of any individual human. 

The messages as here collated, embrace, as I verily believe, 
great variety of source ; and are alleged to be from those whose 
earthly homes in life were found in countries widely separated 
in both time and place. Some were of recent times, and some 
were of the long ago ; some were near and dear to me, such as 
parents, wife and child, and other relatives, as well as former 
friends, and public men of my time; while some were those of 
ancient dates, and long sojourn in spirit realm. Again some of 
the alleged personalities who spoke through the vocal organs of 
Mrs. Piper in the years gone by, to investigators of that time, 
now desire to communicate with me ; as those same investigators, 
gone to the spirit sphere, wish themselves to do so now with 
me; and the solution of the problem as thereby presented may 
engage the best thought and judgment of the supporters of the 
two hypotheses. The claim of some is that the thought and 
expressions of the alleged personalities have their true origin 
in the incarnate mind of the psychic instrument herself; while 
that of others is that the alleged messages have in truth discarnate 
origin; and are suggested by the discarnate spirit to the subjective 
mind of the psychic, and are transmitted in the same way as 
those which have their origin in the mind of the incarnate psychic. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 277 

As in the case of a careless stenographer, what may be spoken 
to her may not be rightly interpreted, or fully comprehended, 
and thus results error of record, or change of view from that 
sought to be conveyed — so in the conveyance by the psychic's 
operation messages are sometimes modified or changed by acci- 
dent or misinterpretation, of suggested thought by psychic's 
subjective mind, as in the case of the stenographer's objective 
mind; or the constantly recurring instances through the receiver 
of your telephone, where the organ ear ofttimes conveys an 
erroneous suggested thought to your own objective mind. All 
psychics are not clairaudient. ''The Human-Psychic-Telephone" 
has that phase, so when she hears a message by her spirit ear, 
she stops writing; and while she writes a spirit message, she 
ceases to hear it. 

I le'ave each reader to decide for himself or herself the problem 
of hypothesis, first bearing in mind the fact that of these same 
personalities, some of them have materialized, and with the 
vocal organs of their transient bodies, have assured me that they 
wrote through the automatic hand certain messages to me; and 
likewise through different trumpets conversed with me. Some 
have used four or more psychics, in as many widely separated 
places, utilizing their different phases to convince me of their 
personality. In the case of Wm. T. Stead, he utilized psychics 
of seven distinct phases ; and communicated with me through 
fourteen different instruments or mediums ; the evidence through 
all of whom harmonizes, and one part the other corroborates ; 
and predictions made through one instrument found fulfillment 
through another. The last door that I opened for him to com- 
municate with me was the independent slate-writing door ; and he 
came to me through it, three times in two days. His communica- 
tions as written on the slates have been photo-engraved and 
reproduced in the Addenda, along with others, at the end of the 
book. His purpose throughout, I am convinced, has been to give 
me conclusive evidence, that as a discarnate spirit he could return 
and communicate with me, and fully establish his human per- 
sonality. 



278 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

These are the different psychical phases, and the various 
instruments or mediums utilized by the spirit Wm. T. Stead; 
while the other spirits made use of two or more of them, and 
hence they are listed here for future reference. 

A. Automatic-Writers. 

1. Miss Maud Venice Gates—Lily Dale, N. Y. 

2. Mrs. Arnold — Scarboro on the Hudson, N. Y. 

3. Mrs. Jennie Crossley — St. Louis, Mo. 

B. Materializing and Physical Mediums. 

4. J. B. Jonson— Toledo, Ohio. 

5. Mrs. Harry Wells— Toledo, Ohio. 

C. Trumpet Mediums — for spirit speaking and singing. 

6. Mrs. Bartholomew — Lily Dale, N. Y., and Lake Helen, 

Fla. 

7. Dell Herrick— Lily Dale, N. Y., and Boston, Mass. 

8. Hugh Gordon Burroughs — Chicago, 111. 

D. Spirit Painting. 

9. Bangs Sisters — Chicago, 111. 

E. Clairaudience. 

10. Dr. U. S. Grant Deaton— Toledo, Ohio. 

F. Trance Speakers. 

11. Mrs. Inez Wagner — Los Angeles, Cal. 

12. Mrs. Maggie Turner— Lily Dale, N. Y. 

13. Mrs. C. Smith — Toronto, Ontario. 

G. Independent Slate- Writing. 

14. Pierre L. O. A. Keeler— Lily Dale, N. Y., and Wash- 

ington, D. C. 

For particular records of Wm. T. Stead's evidence, consult 
Chapter XXX, and also the Addenda, and other chapters devoted 
to seances, some of which records precede and some follow this 
statement. 

The value of such evidence so attainable, is enhanced by a 
knowledge of the fact that some of the messages and conversa- 
tions were spoken, not only in my presence, but in the hearing of 
others; as well as in my absence, the intelligence making the 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 279 

request of some one present who knew me, to convey certain 
information to me, in my home. (See latter part of Chapter 
VIII.) From Hypatia; and afterwards, other guides, my wife, 
Wm. T. Stead and others did likewise. 

In the foregoing instances, the theories or hypotheses of mind- 
reading, telepathy, thought-transference or fraud in the psychic's 
mind, cannot account for it, and are proven untenable. Besides 
other persons who were present with me in the materializing 
seances not. only saw the forms of my wife and daughter, Hypatia, 
my guide, and others who appeared; and also who heard our 
conversation; and heard them refer to what they wrote to me 
through the writing psychic ; or said to me recently through the 
trumpet; but also what they said to me while they, my friends, 
were present with me, when speaking through the trumpet. This 
has also occurred frequently in the case of trumpet seances. 

Assume if you will that the automatic writer is not only a 
scholarly person, but also very clever as well, and with it all 
is fraudulent; then turn to Chapter XXIII, and carefully read 
each question which I had previously prepared in writing, and 
read separately to the psychic; and further, note each answer 
which follows immediately, in rapidly written words by the 
psychic's hand; and can you think it possible for her to evolve 
from the subjective mind of her carnate self the thoughts there 
embodied as her own? 

Again, refer to the following Chapter XXIV, my questions 
to the alleged philosophers (likewise prepared) and note the 
profoundness of the replies, which one could scarcely credit as 
being instantly recorded, without time to mature thought; and 
does it appear reasonable to credit those answers to the psychic's 
own mind? 

All rendered music betrays the kind of instrument through 
which the harmonious sounds are evolved, and doubtless the 
written expressions of the psychic are sometimes mixed with 
the transmitted thoughts, impinging upon the psychic's subjective 
mind, as the smoothness of the stream is modified by the nature 
of the surface of the channel through which the water flows. 



280 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Again, I will admit that where the psychic may have a motive 
in view, such may purposely or even unconsciously interweave 
her own thoughts, with a view of making them appear as the 
thought of the intelligence who is writing the message, but 
thoughts so committed to writing are usually evident; as is the 
case when a person is speaking into the 'phone, and a friend 
who is near may interject a word or sentence, to create a certain 
impression upon the mind of the listening one at the receiving 
'phone. In such case where I suspect the psychic, when feasible 
I resort to other instruments, to test the source of the thought, 
and question the intelligence; and in that way I have secured 
conclusive evidence, to warrant the belief that both of these 
features can and do sometimes occur. 

Comment is freely made by spirits who have used "The Human- 
Psychic-Telephone" in communicating with me — regarding the 
expressions by the instrument, and the rhyming tendency of the 
writing, which interferes with the language they use — see latter 
part of Chapter XXI, devoted to her psychic faculties ; also special 
and extended comment by Dr. Richard Hodgson ; F. W. H. Myers, 
and others in this chapter. Prof. Thompson J. Hudson in par- 
ticular, refers in a humorous manner to this exceptional psychic. 

The first automatically written message from my wife was 
dated December 26, 1911; and as I have her permission to use 
her name publicly as "May" (her home name), I am doing so 
where there is occasion for referring to her. From that date 
until the closing of this book, I have communications quite 
frequently, indeed I may say scores of them, but not included 
here, as well as a written chapter by herself (See Chapter XXIX), 
in fulfillment of a post-mortem promise. 

I give here a communication made through the psychic's auto- 
matic hand, written under date of January, 1912, and signed 
"May." Quotations are selected: "Your letter, I heard her read 
it aloud. She is not impressed by my thoughts, but her hand is 
governed by a mind (the subjective) that is intelligent enough 
to transcribe what I dictate by words. It seems to me, or to 
my conscious mind, very much as if you could step to a telephone, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 281 

and talk to a friend; and as you spoke the message, see a hand 

writing it, as if ruled by the spoken word The slavery 

of your work, is to be a benefit to you. The constant need to 
do will make your hours less long. . . . We will be reunited 
by a bond or key, that will make it so that I can come and speak 
to you; and have you know that it is true, that it is I, and this 
is so." 

12th March, 1912. 

From Mother : "My son, be sure that I love you for yourself 
alone, and often stay here in the home with thee. I do not need 
to hide my hands for they are well, but I will be with you, my 
dear, if you are there, if you are here. I love thy work, and wish 
to stand beside thee, when the crown is won ; and I foresee it to 
be truly a great success to thee. I feel proud to write to show 
you what you understand, that I may freely use. my hand. 

Margaret King." 

[The foregoing was written in my own home by the psychic, 
in the presence of her mother, my stenographer, and myself. 
The psychic could in no wise have known the facts. In human 
life my mother had Rheumatic Arthritis, and hence all her finger 
joints were enlarged and stiff; and she named them hickory-nut 
joints. Her habit was to hide them by wearing gloves or mitts; 
and hence the foregoing reference. She identified herself also 
at the Moss seances 18 years previously, in London, Canada. 
(See Chapters IV, V and VI.) Also in Jonson seances of more 
recent date. She likewise materialized at a Moss seance at Lily 
Dale, where a friend of mine received from her lips a kindly 
message to be given me on that friend's return to Toronto.] 

12th March, 1912. From Father : "Son of me, be assured 
that I thy father am most glorified and proud of you, and of 
the things you now do." 

Stephen King. 

(See Chapters IV, V, VI and the Jonson Seances.) 

12th March, 1912. From Des Asia: "I whom you have named 
as Asia, stand more high than younger minds ; and I am aiding 
you in all you try to do. Be not afraid of failure, for we 



282 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

appreciate the earnest heart wish to benefit the human race, who 
look at death as lost in space. Thy book will awaken many a 
mind to this exact knowledge, and belief. I aid thee ever, and 
do all I can for thee. To aid thy fellow-man is wish of me." 
This giant spirit form has spoken to me through three dif- 
ferent trumpets, one in Michigan, one in New York and one in 
Toronto; he materialized in Ohio, at a Jonson seance, in view 
of a room full of sitters; and has written much of interest 
through the New York psychic, which will appear on the pages 
of this book, and of my future publications. 

12th March, 1912. From King Edward: "I Edward am and 
as a man I with this man agree, for death's mantle has made 
of me a well and earnest thinker here; and I agree with what 
you do, and give my signature to you. I had a confidence in the 
power of spirits to communicate; and I believed in the power 
to heal in this way. I would have died before my coronation, 
if I had not had assistance in this way. Bedford, he was to me 
a man of confidence, and we often tried hard to pierce the veil 
of future state. 

We will give further tests to thee when you are with a proper 
instrument (medium). I will talk to thee through the trumpet. 
I have been told that it (the book) will be of benefit to earnest 
thinkers everywhere; and it will be translated into French and 
German also, that students of those nations may see, and with 
your thoughts try to agree. All sincere thinkers are respected 
in this age. I respect thy sincerity." 

14th March, 1912. From Princess Alice: "Alice am I, the 
daughter of the Queen of England. I was often near, so I could 
make my mother hear my voice; and also see that it was I that 
came out of the land of spirits. Yes, also use the fact, that my 
brother Edward, also England's King, in later years had seen 
me at seance, too. We were able to show ourselves complete; 
and Grandma too, the mother of my mother Louise Victoria, 
and Francis Charles, two other names of Albert, called the Consort 
of the Queen. His names were many and his virtues too." 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 283 

Prof. Thompson Jay Hudson's Views Now. He Tests "The 
Human-Psychic-Telephone" from Spirit Side of Life. 

In a previous chapter I referred to a mental problem I had 
met with, in a psychic whom I considered to be a mental curiosity ; 
and with her written consent I have since designated "The 
Human-Psychic-Telephone," with automatic action, including 
movement, writing and speech ; as having also both conscious and 
sub-conscious minds, each with independent action; and I stated 
that I considered it "a poser," and expressed the wish that Thomp- 
son J. Hudson from spirit side of life, would see how he could 
utilize this psychic instrument, and give his views concerning 
her. My wish went forth and brought response on the 15th 
March, 1912, the day set apart for such as wanted opportunity. 
Hudson's communication is produced here, from the automatic 
writing of that date, in my home, and in my presence. 

From Thompson J. Hudson: "I hasten to thy wish. The 
more I tried to make my meaning clear, the more of questions 
came to me, and so I am of those like you, who now believe 
that both are true; that is I believe that both carnate and dis- 
carnate minds, may impress and communicate through proper 
instruments. I, like you, have studied this instrument from this 
side of life; and I wish to especially agree with you in the fact, 
that she has not double personality, though she has double mental 
action; or the action of the other portion of her mentality is 
similar to the normal mental action. Therefore if she has dual 
personality, it was born twins. I authorize you to use this 
statement over my signature. I started out with a certain premise, 
and I tried to prove it. I often could not. This one case is most 
peculiar of all, because the two are interchangeable; and neither 
disturbs the other. Also she is well and strikingly normal; and 
balanced both in bodily and mental action. All great students 
will do well to read your book from cover to cover. I am of 
these." 

3.45 p. m., March 31, 1912. From William James of Harvard: 
"I am William James of Harvard, / will it, that you shall be the 
one to have the secrecy between me and the other scientists. It 



284 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

is I that was to be first of seven to read it; and some one will 
know what I mean by that. It is a truth, and it will win. To 
look into it was no sin, and I am glad I did it, though I did not 
think I was to go. I have so many friends. I love the truth 
wherever it is found, and the truth only. I studied a trance 
medium for many years. I do not believe in direct communica- 
tion. I believe a medium is as much of a necessity, as is a pen 
in a written letter. If I had not this hand, I could not write. 
Good Night, and good to be result to you, in this the work you 
try to do. I was and am an earnest thinker too." 

9.05 p.m., 9th April, 1912. From Professor Croft of Old 
Toronto University: "We worked together in the long ago; 
but what is forty years but a short span. I loved you as a student 
and a man. I was with William James of Harvard University 
when he used this hand here and wrote to you. It is a shock 
sensation to a busy, active teacher, when he finds himself cut 
off from all he knew. I know your sterling quality, and it is I 
who taught to thee, the wonders of God's chemistry. But there 
is chemistry of thought I know nought of, and you have under- 
taken to send forth an acid of activity that will bind all the 
restless minds of men into a salt of human harmony. To prove 
that we communicate is hard to do; but I like method of the 
work of you. 'Tis not a narrow creed, but to all human souls 
a need, and we will stand beside you everywhere, and try our 
best to aid you to accomplish what you try to do. My student, 
I am proud of you, and of this work you try to do. I give you 
my endorsement; and old Toronto University is still in memory 
dear to me. Adieu, I'll write another time for you. I have not 
yet gained this power, so I be at ease you see. Hypatia, your 
guide, is aiding me." 

[I studied practical chemistry under this great teacher when 
a youth ; and as he left Canada many years ago, I had no knowl- 
edge of his location, nor any word from, or of him, after his 
departure, until I received it in writing through the automatic 
hand of "The Human-Psychic-Telephone."] 

10 p.m., 27th April, 1912, From Wm. T. Stead (No. 11). 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 285 

To Dr. John S. King. "I am Wm. T. Stead. I did not select 
anyone to communicate through. I was in too much woe, but 
Hypatia and Otelleo knowing me, came to help my band, and 
with them I went to you. At first I did not realize that I was 
dead, and so I floated in an atmosphere of health, like to mortal 
warmth. I saw Hypatia use this hand (the psychic's), and after 
she was through, she aided me to also do. At all times I have 
been in touch with you ; but I have also tried to demonstrate 
through other instruments. I went to see Mrs. Wriedt, but 
Hypatia stayed with me, and so as I wished to aid to prove spirit 
return / first sent messages to you, Dr. King, I mean. I did not 
exactly know what was happening to me at first. Hypatia and 
your guides aided by my own, assisted me; and when I found 
I was materialized, I looked for you, and knew you, but could 
not talk. (See Chapter XXVIII.) Yours was the first recogni- 
tion, I had by a mortal. Until that time I myself was uncertain, 
as to whether I was dead or delirious, and in power to again 
return to life later. I was one of many who floated in the ice 
cold sea, but a short time. . I do not see my body. I try to shake 
off the earth condition. Hypatia will tell you or let me tell you, 
without the danger of return to that most awful woe of water 
all about, and nothing near to cling to. Even my plight was 
preferable to some, for I was hurt by something like a blow, 
and so I quickly sank below the surface of the sea. No one will 
find my body, I can tell it now, for they are aiding me to see it 
as a picture; and I know that I am one of the numerous ones 
who lie below the surface of the sea, and float away from touch 
of mortal hand. What better winding sheet than the great sea, 
so full of life and energy. My body like a coral shell is hidden 
in the mighty well, and the great waving throbbing sea as living 
pall has covered me. I listen to the ocean's crone, and know 
that this is meant for me, for I am truly now its own. and as 
it whispers in its sleep, it names me in each living sweep, as 
member of the mighty deep. I sleep Tn ocean's heart, and if it 
aches I do not know. I aid to fill it with the mystery that it has 
held since long ago, when the great continent Atlantis, called by 



286 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

men, sank from all sight and ne'er returned again. My angel 
helpers are with me, and on this bright eternal shore I bless my 
God for evermore. My body lies beneath the sea, my body once 
so dear to me, no echo reaches either shore, no man will see it 
ever more, no whispers of its secret be. My body is the ocean's 
prey and on its breast will sleep for aye, till angels roll the 
stones away from all man's ignorance and doubt. Till angels 
lift the shroud of me, and show what's hidden in the sea. 'Twas 
fate's decree and I believe it was to be. Now Brother King 
believe and know that it is I who zvrite to thee, that you were 
first one here below, who received word direct from me. I'll 
stay in touch with you and the ones who aid me to write to thee, 
and when the "Dawn of the Awakened Mind" is seen by men, 
I hope to be with others there to prove this truth to men. The 
spirit, the immortal part of man living after death has swept 
the body from the living view, and I am living now in harmony, 
and it is I who write to you. All men are truly brethren when 
death the great calamity calls for their breath, and I am one of 
these, and find myself in harmony and hope, and with the others 
reaching loving hands to clasp the hand of you, my brother here. 
'Tis beautiful, and glorious to be free, you'll hear quite often 
now from me." 

9 p.m., 28th April, 1912. From Wm. T. Stead (No. 12). (To 
the Instrument.) "Your Grandmother has gone, and I want to 
write a word or so.' Tell John S* King that I went to him the 
first of all. As soon as I recognized Hypatia, I asked her to take 
me to where I could communicate with him. She brought me 
here, and I wrote, she took me to Toledo, and I showed myself 
to him. (See Chapters XXVIII and XXX.) I was so new I 
could not speak, a feeling best described as weak. I could not 
do a thing myself as free, partly from my anxiety to do so well. 
I scarcely had the time to show, before it came the time to go. 

(To Dr. King.) Well, Brother King, be sure Til bring you 
every proof I can, and I'll remain near you and help you in this 
work you do. "Dawn of the Awakened Mind" is to reach every- 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 287 

where, and maybe I will be a means of teaching this great truth 
to men, that though I am in spirit life, I still remain in touch 
with them. I am glad the artist of Bangs sisters pictured me, 
but it was not done by them so much as by my band (see Chapter 
XXX) ; and the whole of us together decided that my picture would 
be of use to your book, as it would go to show that it is true, 
that I, a discarnate spirit, known through press to many men, 
may so come back in touch with life, and show my face to them. 
More dreadful than the wave that struck my life from me with 
final blow is that great hatred of this 1 truth, that we, dear Brother 
King, are trying hard to make the living see. But like path- 
finders we must be prepared for opposition's key, and smiles of 
God's approving Son, will be with us, who sutler most, and we 
are both of us upheld by an angel host, and nought can conquer 
us, who be upheld by Truth's great majesty. In all thy work, 
I am with thee. I close my eyes to the details of this calamity. 
I have my work to do as well as you. Your brother in love 
of this truth." 

And here a word or two of comment I wish to make upon the 
contents of the two preceding messages, one bearing date of 
April 27th and the other of April 28th. The former is regarding 
the catastrophe, and the latter where Stead alludes to evidence. 
By those who knew Stead as a writer I feel it will be admitted 
that in its force (though not wording and rhyming, which is 
psychic) and its multum in parvo composition, and comprehensive 
embrace of the condensed history from first to last, with vivid 
description of the catastrophe all written in connection with the 
picture demonstration, on 27th April, 1912, intended to be a 
confirmation of not only human personality, but of face and 
feature, and natural expression of the man, as of the living dead, 
whose spirit picture will henceforth be known as Wm. T. Stead ; 
and which was placed on canvas in a manner described in the 
chapter devoted to himself. (See Chapter XXX.) 

10 a. m., 12th May, 1912. From Professor James of Harvard: 
"James of Harvard I am. I want to write to John S. King of 



288 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Toronto, Ontario. I am told here, that his book 'Dawn of the 
Awakened Mind/ is to be a great success in every way. I have 
been shown the work, and I approve of its sentiments, and 
/ hope to be able to sign my name, on a pad he holds, at a future 
date." (To Dr. King.) "It is too bad I had to wait, for better 
opportunity (See Chapter XXXIII) ; but I will do this thing 
for you Friend King, and it shall be one means of proving the 
spirits of the living dead, return to men again (prediction). 
During my experiments with Mrs. Leonora E, Piper through the 
years that she was under the observation, of the Society of 
Psychical Research, of which I was then a chief officer, I could 
never exactly decide from whence came, all of the peculiar, and 
enigmatical matter, from this entranced, and perfectly honest 
woman, whom I was obliged to call a white crow, or an exception 
to the normally accepted rule, that all crows are black; or all 
mediums dishonest. My brother, Henry James, the novelist, and 
my father, Henry James, the mystic, had founded in my heart 
the desire to know more, and understand more fully, the wonders 
of that to man, intangible part of him, the mind. I was a close 
student, of every phase, and yet I could not at the end of many 
years of careful study, say positively 'I know/ but like a ship 
cast out at sea, without a chart to guide, so was I cast upon this 
to me, unknown shore, and / am glad to say with thee, the spirit 
does live ever more, and holds its interest with men, after it is 
cut off from them, and if I can, I will do, as you ask of me, sign 
my name, on your pad, as I have promised you, that I would 
do, in my own signature of long ago (prediction). I see wherein 
I failed to see, and now I too agree with thee that spirit, the 
real part of man, fulfills its portion of God's plan, in this frail 
earth anatomy, then as a perfected butterfly, out of its crysalis 
set free, enjoys the beautiful of God's Domain, and does not 
wish to be again, in its more limited degree, as living men are 
forced to be. I with the wording of your Pronunciamento, quite 
agree, it is also at present time, my creed indeed. I was Professor 
of Psychology at Harvard University, but as the blind I led the 
blind, and into the same ditch I fell with them ; but now I come 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 289 

in hope, through you to witness, that your thought is true, that 
spirits may come back to you, and bring their personality, and 
others here now at hand, to use this power at their command, 
and write as witness through this hand. My brother and 
co-worker, Richard Hodgson, too, would like to be a witness 
here with me, that we are as to mortals, free from pain and 
need of gain, and so can follow out the bent of thought we had 
in life below, and find out truths we did not know, because to 
us it did not show. When I can do, I will do all I can for you, 
to prove that this great truth is true." 

11 a.m., 12th May, 1912. From Richard Hodgson: "I, 
Richard Hodgson, standing near, would like to write to make 
it clear, to readers of this book, that you, John King, have in it 
spoken true. That you are honestly endeavoring to cause men 
to know, and understand, that this the truth is really grand. 
I am assisted by your band, and came with William James this 
morning here, to make my thoughts on paper clear, while yet I 
have time in this your first book written so, which teaches spirits 
come below, and speak, and sometimes to men show. Free am 
I a thinker here, to write a word or so, regarding things that 
while in life, I really could not know. I had no thought, that it 
was true, but hoped to prove instead, that those who were believ- 
ers, were not right in their head. I hoped to prove it fraudulent 
in some phase or degree, but it seemed true in every way, as 
it was shown to me, and demonstrated by the acts of Mrs. Piper, 
who made me convinced that these are facts that have been 
shown by you. It is a quarter of a century, since first I came 
across the sea, to make this truth proved false to be. The phe- 
nomena produced by her, is the most baffling thing I know,' so 
declared Prof. William James in that time long ago. At last I 
thought that her subliminal self, must have been a kind of a 
ghastly appendage, through which discarnate spirits might com- 
municate ; and from my study of her case, I became convinced, 
and converted to the belief that I could communicate with 
departed spirits through her. In this hope I was when from 
my body freed. It was with me a hope only and not a settled 



290 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

creed. I had a thought or two, attuned to the correct idea, but 
when as spirit I could see from this exalted view, I was then 
sure it was a fact, as it is shown by you. How beautiful and 
grand it is to be able, to have attunement to the spirit sphere, 
and realize in life that spirit friends are near. We have not yet 
an open door, and limited is every human power to do, but I 
with other thinkers standing here, approve of this the work you 
do, to prove we live, a truth to thee, and that we come as our- 
selves too; and last of all the brightest strain is that we may 
return again, and aid in even slight degree, to prove its truth 
as told by thee." 



12 a. m., 12th May, 1912. From Prof. Thompson Jay Hudson : 
"My friends Richard Hodgson and Prof. William James have 
just written to the doctor, who is trying to prove this truth true. 
(To Dr. King.) Let me be one of many men, who say I know 
they come again. I studied Mrs. Piper too, as these two did, 
who wrote today to you. She was a curiosity who was of perfect 
honesty, and I was one who studied long, and tried to learn mind 
like a song. I struck in truth a note or so, and then it was my 
time to go. And here I am, and here I stay, as one now blessed 
in perfect day. I look back at my life work small, and see I did 
not 'know it all/ As author of the Laws of Psychic Phenomena, 
etc., I wished to see this Mrs. Piper, out of curiosity. I found 
her honest, and the subnormal power, was to my mind accounted 
for, on purely psychological principles and thus I said as man 
has a dual mind, or two states of consciousness, the 'objective 
and subjective;' an entranced psychic is dominated exclusively by 
her 'subjective' mind, and her reason is in silence. Hence she 
is controlled by suggestion and telepathy. I thought I made it 
clear to men, but as I am now one of them I know, that spirits 
come again, that we float out of our frail body shell, and cannot 
even answer 'All is well' to waiting friends upon the shore, but 
we go forward evermore, learning and knowing truths more 
bright that are not yet shown to the mortal sight. So write it 
to the living doctor; who is proving now to men, that spirits 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 291 

may return again, and tell him I, a living witness now more high 
in thought and means of knowing, say I wish to come from just 
'across the way.' The silent land has held us all too long, let us 
too join our voices in the song, of great rejoicing that is soon 
to be, when men with this truth known to me, a spirit from my 
body free, at least agree. Consider me at one with you, and in 
a wish to prove this true, even if it proves what I said in life, as 
not the truth, I look at life as at my youth, I spoke what I believed 
at then, and did not know spirits could come again; but now 
quite free I clearly see, and with thy statements quite agree." 

My strong desire to know just how my guides and friends 
and loved ones make use of the Human-Psychic-Telephone to write 
me messages, and how the wonderful evolvement of the life- 
like growing features of my friend Stead could come on pure 
white canvas on a bright sunshine day by skill of spirit artist 
Rembrandt, brought me these explanations from my spirit guide 
Hypatia. 

15th May, 1912. From Hypatia: "It is not difficult to make 
this subject (the Human-Psychic-Telephone) write, that is if she 
is active, in the automatic key; but as she of her conscious self 
does neither hear nor see, unless she thinks of writing, the door 
is closed to me ; and as her mind sub-conscious, is our instrument 
alone, her mind aids our suggestion. If she reads the words your 
own, it causes her to listen, and give proper time to me, and 
then I write to answer, as 'tis written there by thee. If you were 
present near her, and she in pose to write, she could then know 
your question, with her telepathic sight. Each instrument is 
different in every tone and key, and Ides of levitation are as 
instruments to me, in all the different phases of the phenomena. 
Hermes, who wrote the letter, a giant called by me, is like a 
living human in live symbology. He is the thing of substance 
the artist uses, so to paint upon the canvas, so living men may 
know. To him (the artist), he is a servant, although of high 
degree, he's held by love of medium, her wish the law of him. 



292 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

He is to Rembrandt a living hand, that paints upon the canvas 
as you stand, or sit before it in a wish to be served by his Art's 
capacity. Like man's subconscious in that tone or key, an Ide 
is often spoken of, as an Ide of one idea, as a mind that follows 
in one thought till it completed be, these faithful acting servants, 
act only in one key, they follow in one perfect tone until its 
sound is all their own. They come from God's great storehouse 
of levitation's key, and are like warp threads, in a loom in any 
work they be attached to, as a servant, like to the rays of light, 
they change it to a picture, what was the canvas white. It is too 
complicated for you to understand, but when they work together 
they are completed band, and this is case of Bang's sisters, and 
Hermes as you will see, is the chief work mechanic that was 
there used for thee, by Rembrandt, a great artist, who was human 
here, but follows still his natural bent, though now in spirit sphere. 
Asia, an ancient human master, a friend of Hermes Key and 
Hermes himself assuming proper tone wrote through her hand 
to thee." 

The next to communicate was a friend of my father's family, 
and knew me from childhood days, and later became my teacher, 
though I have not heard from him before, I hope hereafter to 
hear from him many times. 

12.15 p. m., 17th May, 1912. From Dr. James H. Richardson : 
"May I write to my former student and assistant, Dr. John S. 
King of Toronto? I have not the knowledge of the spirit, that 
I had of the anatomy, that wondrous machine, through which 
the spirit moves, and serves its maker's purpose. While in life, 
I could not reach the goal, of how to know of the beyond. My 
mind was so, that it clung, wise or otherwise, to the necessity, 
to see and touch and know, because it is here shown to be, and 
was like a law to me; or was thus demonstrable to the human 
sense, of power to see; but wonderful indeed is power to do, 
after that sight has gone from you, and you have added senses 
three, that with some living men now be. The power to sense, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 293 

and also know, though nothing 1 is to prove it so, and in these 
later days to me, most perfect seem these added three, in life 
called clairvoyancy and spirit power to hear and know, and be 
inspired, by the flow of the great heart throbs of the spirit ocean 
near, that aids us now to see and hear. It lifts us as an ocean 
warm, that with responsive wish to ours, conducts us with intelli- 
gence, along a way to us of flowers. Like esculator instrument, 
for aiding man to climb up buildings tall, so we in spirit go to 
where we wish, and do not move at all; and what conducts us 
is the flow of mind completed, in perfection's key, that loving 
all, and having all, loses its selfish personality, and does as aider 
to the ones like me. Oh brother student of the laws of life, God 
has deprived you of your loving wife, that you as one alone, may 
be of service in a high degree, to aid the sufferings of humanity. 
For each one loses loved ones, like to thee ; but has not comfort, 
as what comes to thee, from loved ones from the other shore, 
who prove they live for ever more. Help man to open like a 
shell, God shall then supply him well, with means to see, and 
sense to know, and stronger in these powers to grow. I leave 
thee, Brother King, but be assured you have the love of me, and 
that I hope in every way to aid you in your hope to be successful 
in a high degree. I surely much approve of thee, and of thy work, 
as shown to me, and I am also an M.D." 

My former teacher and valued friend, whose communication is 
the next following, has spoken with me on more than one 
occasion through a trumpet, and thus identified himself to me 
in the past. What I present here however is his first communica- 
tion through the writing psychic. 

2.30 p.m., 17th May, 1912. From Dr. James E. Graham: 
"My beloved friend of long ago, it is not long ago to me, from 
where I stand upon the higher platform of the known, for one 
may prize a knowledge small, when he has gained from it new 
view, of how to see and know to do. I passed the portal dreaded 
so, and entered into power to grow, perfected with an added 
sense, and it is ever so. When one has learned to add, he then 



294 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

is taught new jugglery with figures small, until he tries to 
measure all the length and breadth of space, and what therein 
exists, of God's domain, we try to hold it in our mortal brain, 
a thing of circulation and of cells, that be of ever changing 
tendency ; and after we have done our best, we then leave to our 
God the rest, and like to children on our final pillow lie. Neither 
the teachings, nor the ideality of men, has aided us, at all. We 
enter here an unknown sphere, we do not know at all, as does a 
child at birth, and learn our way, as he does on the earth. Your 
book is a good book. Its teachings are all true, and I am glad 
that you have put it forth, and are candid and honest enough 
to stand by what you believe is true. I believe it also, and I know ; 
because I'm here and do it so communicate, return and be as 
specimen I am to thee, to place with others in the alcohol, of 
thy approving thought; and from the study of us glean, the 
glitter of the gold, that your new book to men shall hold; and 
I'll be there, in pride to see, and say to listeners here by me: 
'He was my student thus and so, before I from earth life did go. 
And from some seed, planted by me, this thought has sprung 
and grown, maybe/ " 

Cleopatra, one of the most beautiful guides in her transient 
body, and grandly gowned, has accepted my arm, and walked 
with me from the cabinet in the materializing seance room, in 
plain view, out to the sitters in the circle; and again returned, 
dissolving from view, outside of the curtains. She also previously 
promised me through the trumpet, to thus appear on that special 
occasion. She sang sweetly for me on one occasion, so that her 
voice could be heard in the street. I give but one at present, of 
the many messages written by her. 

3 p.m., 17th May, 1912. From Cleopatra: "I, Cleopatra, 
wish to write. If man in truth is like a shell, we love him, and 
we treat him well, from every point of view. I serve as aider 

here today We of your band across the way are like 

to yourself in our tone, and we will aid you with new capacity 
to do, till it shall be ended by you in such a way to give you 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 295 

pride, and give us pride as well. Your power to analyze, and 
exclude from attention uninteresting detail, and make prominent 
that which is the central thought, is wonderful ; and your experi- 
ences, as a writer in your more youthful days, are all as stepping 
stones to thee, that make thy pathway smooth and easy quite, 
and we all aid you as you write. We will assist you in the things 
you write, till angel showers of love, like flowers, shall fall upon 
thy pathway bright, and you shall be assisted in the thing you 
wish to write. Bondage is freedom, when 'tis leash of love, that 
ties thy body to the work of stone; and it shall be a resting 
place for thee, of pillow-like softness, as the years go by. We 
will provide for thee in every way, and will provide the things 
to say." 

3.20 p.m., 17th May, 1912. From Dr. I. K. Funk, late of 
Funk and Wagnalls Company, Publishers, New York: "I. Dr. 
I. K.- Funk, of book fame in the past, find time to write to you 
at last. Like one who enters at a playhouse door, too early, or 
too late, so it has been with me, in my endeavor to use this hand, 
and write to thee. With publishers it's ever so, it is not what 
men write, but what the people want, and need, that proves a 
glory in their sight. This book you write is as a wedge, 'tis 
needed like a key-stone in a wall, it makes what other men have 
tried to teach, but could not reach, in a convincing way, more 
plain, and interesting to the reader's brain. I reached, as reaches 
growing sprout out of a darkened crevice in the wall. I could 
not tell the why, I knew that following bent I would come soonest 
to the glowing light; but somehow in the heart of me, was that 
soul hunger, now in many men, that made me feel I need it so ; 
I simply must go forward, though useless is argument to me. 
I too am blind, I cannot see, I told my reasoning brother near; 
but I can feel and sense and know, and I believe that it is 
so. It glorifies the life of me, to think the loved ones dear to 
me, are in a sense of freedom, so that they may come and also 
go, and wipe the weeping from my eyes grown dim, with helpless 
hope, and prove their presence real and true. I now approve of 



296 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

this the work of you, and try in every way to roll the stones of 
doubt away, between men and the tomb's grave face, that coldly 
shuts upon the loved embrace of soul to soul, for evermore, 
unless through faith we ope' the door. Be thou the one to point 
the way, and prove the best you can; and it will be of benefit 
to every living man, for having continuity, and power to touch 
in distant reach, we each may learn more perfectly, and then 
have power to teach. Like to the blind man long ago, healed 
by the Saviour's touch divine, I cannot tell the way it be that 
brought this blessed truth to me, but whereas I was blind, I 
see, and am now blessed the same as he. We say, I do not 
really be able to make it truth to thee, from your own point of 
view maybe, but brother living, through this woe that all man- 
kind must undergo, when blessed loves are taken, be blessed in 
the knowledge that to me has been a blessed remedy. I approve 
of your work and book. Psychic Research is the only true way 
to go at this complicated study. Arguments are useless to those 
who do not wish to know, but if one hungers, in his soul for 
knowledge, proof in small degree will prove a stepping stone 
to be. Your book will aid to lift the clouds of doubt, and turn 
the darkness inside out, until the silver lining be as shield, to 
grief a remedy. Our spirits live for ever more, and we may 
visit from the unknown shore, and prove ourselves alive to be. 
This is a pleasure great to me, to speak on continuity. I live, I 
am myself, and I come back to be an aider and a writer for your 
book that's soon to be. Believe that they have told me true who 
say 'twill be success to you. Of New York City once, but now 
of spirit life to thee, but to myself a bird set free from narrow 
cage to fields' bright view. In endless power of view and flight, 
I will now say to you goodnight. I bid adieu to writer and to 
Doctor too." 



10 p.m., 17th May, 1912. From May: "Do not let me be cu. 
off in my love of thee, because she (the instrument) has so much 
to do. I live in every thought, and heart love I have here. My 
soul with your soul intertwines till we are one, and all in all, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 297 

and I am here a spirit, blessed by aiders good, and kind. Saphrona 
(her guide) and my brother, who is often spoken of by you, 
are dear to me. Mabel and Gertie and May-Donna are here 
tonight protected by an angel guardian's love, aided to waft me 
to this sunny clime above. We go to every clime, we labor all 
the time, to bring completed harmony in any way thy thought 
may see. I love the ones you love, and you are good, and kind, 
and fond and true; and one we were, and one will be completed 
in eternity, in power to do, but not at then more near to you 
than now I am, and am to be. We guide thee into harmony. 
I with May Donna too, are doing all we can to help you work 
it out, this book to aid your fellow-man." 

8.15 a.m., 18th May, 1912. From Dr. I. K. Funk: "Dawn 
of the Awakened Mind" is strong, as well as true. I like the 
book as it is now; also the proclamation made by you, and if 
my 'widow's mite' of evidence, is found of use to thee, I who am 
now on heaven's shore, most gladly give to thee my signature 
of an approving mind, gone on before, who knocks upon your 
casement to prove we come once more." 

On the sixteenth of November, 1911, at the third materializing 
seance of the series, at J. B. Jonson's (See Chapter XVII) there 
came to me an ancient-looking, and peculiar-visaged spirit form 
of giant size, different from all mortals that I had ever seen ; 
and who alleged he was a spirit guide of mine, the most ancient 
of all my guides. Two days later, in the seance room, of Mrs. 
Etta Wriedt in Detroit (see Chapter XVIII), this same spirit, 
whom I designated des Asia, came and spoke through the trumpet. 
Since then this same personality writes through the New York 
psychic to me frequently, and the following is one of his com- 
munications. He has thus demonstrated his ability to use each 
of three different phases of mediumship. His contributions are 
invariably interesting. 

11.30 a.m., 19th May, 1912. From des Asia: "My delight 
is to be able to write to my chosen mortal. My home was on 



298 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

the Himalayan Mountains long ago. What now is a great desert 
capped with snow, was to us then the fertile land ; and we had 
power to command our spiritual to some degree, advanced from 
what the present mortals be. My senses were as humans are 
at now, but more acute; and I had other senses added so that 
I could sense, and also see my loved ones at a distance, ten 
miles or more away, and tell if they were busy, or if they in 
danger lay. We journeyed with our footsteps and with a staff 
in hand. I wandered here, I wandered there, with no one near 
me, in the open air. I sensed the second sphere most plain, and 
knew that spirits came again. With you at this age it is not the 
same, you do not use the senses, thy Father God has given thee. 
Even the wisest of this age, is as a child on this first stair of 
learning who, and where, they are, who live outside the mortal 
shell; and I believe you have done well, to place what proofs 
you have before them plain, and let the present living race, 
use judgment of their brain. When I was living this your native 
land was under water, as you understand, and only heights of 
mountains now, were islands in the sea, and that was why my 
home-land was country of fertility. There was a chain of islands 
that we could reach, with footsteps not, but with aid of rafts 
that we made from; growing tree upon the shore. Weaving we 
knew in some degree, and also how to use the animals as aids 
of transportation here, and there. We rode upon their bodies, 
bare of leather holds. To govern them our voice was all sufficient, 
we trained them so from infancy, and prodded them to cause a 
little pain, or make impression on their brain. We are the very 
ancient race, and very large were we, ten feet in height or more. 
We were so powerful in anatomy that we had strength of present 
mortals four or more. Much more I'd tell thee of our life and 
race, but it would take too much of space. Suffice it that I 
Asia am to thee, and was a member of the human race, when 
this your continent was submerged, and only islands here and 
there would show. I aid your work, and help your hand to write, 
and try to bring you second sight, so you my medium shall have 
the power to see us clear. I try to wipe away each tear. Asia 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 299 

is the continent I was born in and as you could not spell or 
pronounce my name, with your symbology of sound or sight, 
let it in silence be, and Asia I will stay to thee." 

Otelleo first materialized before my view, at the seance first 
attended by May, when Hypatia convinced her that spirits do 
return. He claims to have lived in Egypt centuries ago, — B. C. 
8,000 years, — and like Hypatia is exalted in character. He hab 
often spoken through trumpets, and written messages for me. 

3.30 p.m., 19th May, 1912. From Otelleo (to the instru- 
ment) : "My child, write Dr. King that I who often visit from 
the sky am one of many spirits who have tried to write through 
hand of you ; but duty here and duty there, have caused my time 
to go to where, I cannot know, or say, but it is gone, and gone 
to stay. (To Dr. King) "Like pebbles glinting in the shine 
of sunbeams, on the shores of time, so are life's opportunities 
to do, take those at hand, while your frail boat is moored upon 
life's sand, for soon your chance to do will go, and you will 
live regretful. So would I feel here, if I was not a writer for 
your book. I never cease to do for you, though I am as a stoker, 
in this your ship of fate, and have more power, loved medium, 
to do, than I have time, to write to you. I'll bring some others 
here to write and e'er you close your mortal sight, your book 
will be a beam of light, to point to mental mariners the way. 
In all your work you're helped by me like cog in the machinery." 

12.50 p.m., 31st May, 1912. From F. W. H. Myers (late of 
London Psychic Research Society) : "With 'Imperator,' my guide, 
I come to be the writer of a message here, in a book they will 
print. I studied Mrs. Piper too, and she was of much use to me. 
I tried to find the limitations of the subliminal self, of her (as 
an instrument). I loved the study, and I thought the guide 
'Imperator' her own, but he was waiting here for me to guide 
me to my home, and since I'm of the living dead, I find this 
guide my own. One may philosophize, and guessing try to see, 



300 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

but what is not within our mental reach, is very difficult to 
teach. One theory is made of God's domain, but like a bubble 
beautiful, it floats up for a day, and shows upon its transient 
sides, the ray of sunlight wonderful, and grand, and hard for 
mortal mind to understand. I did not wish to exceed actual 
proof in any way, and could not of this proof quite say it shows 
beyond a doubt, but he who studies mind is often like the least 
of mortals blind. I tried in every way I could to prove that 
laws not understood govern each mind, and when the active mind 
asleep did be, the subjective or subliminal could show as in 
eclipse of sun. The rays' extension men can see, but cannot 
tell of what they are. With Mrs. Piper in a sleeping state, 
I for resultants then did wait, hoping by groping, and by judg- 
ment's plan to find the limitations of a man. But one can study 
wise, and study long, and still be ignorant, in large degree, 
and this condition was my own, as I from higher plane now 
see. The continuity of life is proved beyond a doubt; and it 
is to me natural law, that lets the spirit out. The body like a 
tuber root, supplies the need to mind, till it reaches its upper 
air, and grows to its perfection there. The body like the tuber 
root, forgotten quite must be, and fruitage new results to you, 
and to ourselves, our judgments new, eclipse our other judgments 
so, we simply say we did not know, we could not sense, we 
could not see, we could not judge aright, though we were climb- 
ing steadily to light, and learning slowly of the right. The 
Psychic Research Society of London is filled with earnest, honest 
men, and I am very proud indeed to be called one of them; 
and I am proud indeed to have the earthly doctor call for me, 
to write through mortal hand to him. This book, 'Dawn of 
the Awakened Mind,' so called by you, is to be beneficial. The 
kind of work you do is earnest work, is honest work, and I 
approve of you. I communicate this message. It is a peculiar 
thing to do. I do not govern this hand. I speak to it and the 
hand writes my words. It is governed by my words as was 
Mrs. Piper's hand in long ago. You've heard, or else you may 
not know, that we spoke to the discarnate spirits, by holding her 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 301 

hand to our lips. Now in this case I stand by and talk what I 
wish to say, the mortal senses me not, though she is in conscious- 
ness I am told. She only sees, as I see, what the hand writes. 
I see it is not my handwriting, but her own. You are, dear 
Dr. King, a help, a stool, a step, to aid the hungry multitude 
of thinking men, to reach the fruit your active thoughts have 
gained. You culled through thorns, of climbs and falls, but 
held the good as fast, secure, a part of thee, and treasured it 
as farmer treasures grain, and never let it go again. Now on 
the shelf of your experience, all may look, with aid of this your 
coming book, and you the farmer standing by, will let the seed 
at broad cast go, and from these seeds much good will grow. 
I Frederick Myers am, as much as if in life, though all I thought 
was as the shaping of a ball of clay, that I did then, like childish 
play, it seems to me. I tried to limit to my idea; but let it 
pass into oblivion, or let it be, like a loose plank at sea, a means 
of buoying some silent swimmer near, till he shall through its 
aid see clear. We all are babes, whate'er our wisdom be, and 
walls of limitations, with us be like florists' jars, these limita- 
tions seem to be to man's best blossoming necessity. We come 
back and communicate, and also we continue as ourselves, take 
this from me, and so to the subliminal, it is not all, in all. I 
hope to have from you another call. I hope this introduction 
will be but the beginning of more that I may say, for you, dear 
Brother King, some other day. Your studies are of interest 
to me, but whereas I in life was as the blind, I now can see 
and realize, and love to hold this knowledge like a pearl, that 
I now give in writing through this hand. Our living knowledge 
is small, in each degree, but all of us are growing, to divine 
humanity, when the spirit as a portion shall be recognized, and 
know when we make the portal of God's palaces our own. The 
mind of man awakened will lead to this degree of humanized 
perfection, that I hope is soon to be. Listen, brother, at thy 
casement, and from the hearts of men will come to thee this 
answer. Spirits do return again, and we who swell the chorus, 
and move this soul song so, will thank you for enlightenment, 



302 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

and for telling what you know. Wm. T. Stead is with me 
now. I will go away, and write to you, co-worker, upon 
another day. 

F. W. H. Myers, of 

London Psychic Research Society. 

12.15 p.m., 1st June, 1912. From Lombroso. (Note: Lom- 
broso Cesare, born 1836, a noted Italian criminologist) : ' 'Within 
an area small are all mankind, and I am one of many men called 
wise, but what is wisdom in a human here? One life, and ten 
lives added to its span, could not encompass in its power to scan, 
the thoughts and the beliefs of man. Let us as one, as brothers 
be, and join in this divine degree, that we the dead may come 
to you is truth; and I to prove it true, come near to write a 
word of truth. I was a student from my youth, and hope so 
high in heart of me, expanded like growing tree. In this my 
present life, my countrymen will wish to know, if this philosophy 
is so, for Catholic is the land of me, and of the saints I now 
must be, in wish to aid humanity I am, for of those who have 
been in life, and wished to know if this was truth was I. I am 
called Lombroso or its English form. Buffalo instrument (the 
medium lives near Buffalo) I use to conduct this my thought 
to thee, and English with a nasal twang, is native tongue I'm 
told of her. Let us be like the flowers most sweet, when most 
in silence, we the least say, so I smile at all the teachings of 
the wise in earth below. Men of every nation are gathered 
here today, and so I step aside, to let them have a word to say." 

From Guillaume Guizot. (Note: 1787 to 1874. French 
Historian) : "I, Guillaume Guizot, was historian of France, and 
I would write if I but had the chance, for I approve in every 
way of what the living doctor does say. His is a mission to 
perform, and all of us are here, to prove the living come again 
from out the spirit sphere." 

"I, Gottlob Hoose, am standing near, of Germany was I. 
I wish to give my witness that the spirits never die, but come 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 303 

again to be able to talk to mortals, like to Dr. King, who wishes 
us so to do." 

From Labodie Jean and De. (Note: Jean Joseph de Labodie 
— French financier and philanthropist) : "Labodie Jean and de 
was name that was attached to me. I tried to teach the multitude 
the things I did not know, and with great leaders it is often so. 
I lead toward good, and if we gain the goal, we all must try 
to analyze the soul. What is it, Where is it? And what is it to 
be, when death has claimed the frail anatomy? All have a soul, 
and all must die, and all must ask the reason why that thing 
we know; and we who have been living men, and come to 
earth to speak again now aid to shape men's thoughts again. 
Let us all try to learn the way. It is all good, the words you 
say are not in language born to me, but I approve the thought 
of thee, and I will do all that I can, to help convince my fellow 
man. My countryman Francis Marie de Voltaire heard of by 
thee is standing near, and he would say a word or two to you 
today." 

From Voltaire. ( Francois-Marie Aronet — a French philoso- 
pher and versatile author, b. 1674) : "Like golden shells upon 
the sea, nearness makes crudeness, thus with me, I see the errors 
of it all, and must class myself as one small indeed, but glad 
I am to come, and be a witness of approval here. My name was 
Aronet, but Voltaire is how I am most called by the English- 
speaking race of every class and kind. I tried to see and tried 
to help mankind to be of thinkers independent. I went about 
it anyway, and thinking independently was one thing that brought 
fame to me. I much approve the words you say, and I foresee 
success to thee, and much good to humanity." 

From Francesco Zabarella (prelate and canonist) : "Fran- 
cesco Zabarella near would like to tell you he is here. To be a 
Cardinal to me was what I wished from infancy. I gained my 
end; and so I see you'll gain the end in view of thee. Like to 



304 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

my sunny Italy, so is the shore of mind set free. I love those 
who love good, and gain a grand contentment, that the brain 
of mortal cannot understand. We give to you our loving hand, 
we help you in your language's flow, 'tis not so very long ago 
since I was here, five hundred years is but a day, and I have 
much I'd like to say, but most of all I wish to do, is give approval 
to the work of you; and add my witness to the fact that you 
give forth to men that which is true." 

5.15 p.m., 3rd June, 1912. From May: "I will not let this 
letter go till of my love for you I've said a word or two. She 
(the instrument) has to work to get it done, and so must you, 
arid I am patient, dearest one, and help you all I can, and we 
will be together as one, whate'er you do. My sister Gertie, and 
my brother John, and Mother King and Father too, and David 
spirit brother you lost in the long ago. We will each write 
tonight." 

8.30 a.m., 4th June, 1912. From Otelleo: "Triumphant 
like a conqueror of circumstances small, you will o'erride your 
fellows and really lead them all. Under each flag of whatsoever 
clan is mortal, with the heart and love of man ; and what you 
have with your earth labor won, will be as path made through 
a tangled wood, a traveller coming after may easy find his way, 
for it is marked in slight degree to show a man was there before, 
and so with footsteps toward the 'other shore.' You open up the 
path to show this is the where to which we go. . This is to all 
men final goal. This is the thing reached for by every soul. 
We'll aid you to climax it well, and little secrets we will tell, 
that you will know and understand. Your wish at heart is our 
command. With your wife and mother here with me, I who 
am strong write this to thee; Otelleo I am and underneath the 
feet shall be all of the thorns and brambles that retard the work 
of thee. May started in to write to you, and I assisted her to 
do, till what I wished to say to thee was more her wish that 
it should be, than what her heart has said before." 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 305 

4 p.m., 4th June, 1912. From George Brown: "George 
Brown of 'The Globe' known to you, and much I love to have 
you do, this work that brings success to you. The Globe' was 
name of paper. I was editor of it you know, but you will rule 
the mind instead, of the 'Great Globe/ of all below. Which is 
the wise man of an age? The one who brings to hand of men 
the thing that gives most good to them and you; who proves 
that man be joined to his loves across the sea of that oblivion 
to men, where dead are never known again. You are like the 
lighter of a torch that lights the lighthouse ray. You send forth 
an enlightenment that on the earth shall stay, and really never 
pass away. The words may change but thought of you will never, 
never pass from view. You open up a brooklet's flow down arid 
mountain's side, and soon the waters everywhere come forth, 
and there abide, and follow, follow in the pathway new, till 
brook to river grow, and onward, onward evermore continue 
in its flow. 'Twill sweep all opposition from its way, and show 
this thought has come to stay. And smiling from its dimpled sides, 
blossoms and fruits will grow, that had been silent evermore, 
had you not done it so, like landscape in a desert dead, but for 
the rivers flow. Even the sun of opposition's key is beneficial 
to this work of thee, for you will start enlightenment in men, 
by causing argument maybe, of them. What you have done is 
well done, and will in end prove true, and I who was your friend 
on earth am proud indeed of you; and I will try to aid you in 
everything you do." 



4.30 p.m., 4th June, 1912. From Imperator: "Imperator I 
am. If my beloved Myers can, he'll later write to you and I 
will try to aid him in the work you wish him to now do for 
you. One is so small, and God's great light so bright, that why? 
and how ? are dim indeed to every mortal sight. If you a mortal 
with your senses five, should try to talk to one alive, who had 
but touch alone, what would you do to make him understand 
what other four have brought to you? Thus limited are living 
men from our enlightened view, and it is hard to bend our rays 



306 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

of power to know, so they will right impress your mortal power 
to reach. It is one thing to know a thing, but one who is to 
teach, must not alone possess the knowledge he has wish to 
teach, but also be able to bring that knowledge to the tone of 
thought capacity to understand, of pupil near. So with the senses 
at our own command, we gain and gain, and then we find it 
difficult indeed to limit them again. And this is thing we all 
must do, when we come near to talk to you. We change this 
knowledge true, and all our power to do, till it fits into tone, 
to come again to you. With thought communication it is difficult 
for one like me, as well as for the mortals just departed and 
who come again to thee. We work as one in caisson, and none 
of us can say, if we have power to do so, when we try to do, 
the way you ask us to. I am to F. H. Myers, as Hypatia is to 
thee, and will try to do the thing to give you harmony. ,, 

4.10 p.m., 12th June, 1912. From F. W. H. Myers: "Myers 
I am. I have no one to talk of to you today. My life was one 
of care, and grave anxiety. To pursue this study was to me as 
difficult at first, as 'twas for you; but broken thread in my own 
family, soon lead me to the light, and when I was convinced that 
it was right, I stood up for it as now you do. The ones I love 
are, I cannot name to thee a special one to send it to, but when 
they write to thee you'll know, and be able to think as I, that 
he who took the place of me should not be forced to buy. His 
office is his signet ring. Let him receive from John S. King a 
book that is his own ; and also send one to King George, who 
now on throne of England is, and it in end will, prove to be 
of benefit, dear friend, to thee. Hodgson and James, and oh! 
so many of the ones who worked like me, are of the liberated 
souls set free, living in soul-life here with me. Let us all be 
united in the wish to prove to live humanity that mind has 
continuity, from sphere to sphere after they've left the living 
here." 

7.20 a.m., 19th June, 1912. From Hypatia: "Within a week 
that which you seek will come within your view, and you will 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 307 

realize, and know that we are leading you into that power to 
understand and reach us with thy spirit hand. We follow thee, 
and we shall be able to do as you command us to. Live as a 
child of God, for underneath the stars of fame you are to stand 
as one alone. We lift thee nearer to the throne. We climb 
ourselves by aiding thee, and thus the continuity of spirit is 
to be brought forth as true, and proved in this the book of you. 

10 p.m., 19th June, 1912. From Jesse King: "My father 
is your brother, and I am Jesse as you think, 'twas true; and 
I at Jonson's showed to you, but could not speak, I was so weak, 
or it was all so new. I will try to show so you will know that 
it is truly I, and that I look like you, and like my father too. 
I have made several efforts to communicate, with my father, 
and through him with you. I'll visit you in your room soon, 
because I want to see if it is possible for me. I'll walk about 
the room and lift the paper shade, to show that it is I, the one 
you know, or think of lately. It is to me a difficult power to 
use, and I am careful not to it abuse. Perhaps I act with too 
much care, but it was I whom you saw there." (That was at 
Jonson's third of April, and is thus referred to by my stenographer : 
"In all there were eight forms which appeared for the doctor, 
one of whom was a boy who was not recognized by him.") 
See Chapters XIII, XIV and XVII. 

10.30 p.m., 19th June, 1912. From Sir Oliver Mowat: 
"The silent man was Sir Oliver Mowat and he will be glad to 
show himself to you in your own room. Keep your mind silent 
like to reverie and when you see, don't seem to see, or do not 
lose the passive state of your mentality, and soon I will show 
quite plain to thee." (See Chapter XXVIII.) 

8.30 a.m., 22nd June, 1912. From Sir Oliver Mowat: 
"I am of those living in the heaven of love, that God prepares 
for men above ; and I am of those who know that spirits come 
again. In all the stars there is no home like to the earth to 



308 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

me, and I am very glad at last, that I may write to thee. My 
image is the thing you saw, when in the seance where I saw you. 

"I fell into a restful sleep, when angels brought me here, and 
when I was awake, to me it normal did appear. I did not realize 
or know that I had left my friends below, until a guardian 
told me so. So consciousness is held in its own state, and for 
the change they slowly wait, till we in our minds grow to sense 
and see, that here we are from body free, and yet still living 
happily. So mind in living men is to awake, and grand will 
the awakening be, and we are of those who like you, herald the 
dawn of this idea; and when the minds of men awaken from 
their sleeping state, we all shall be in joy indeed, for this glad 
time we wait. I too, believe as you in your book, say you do. 
Your work and book will prove it true, for now, adieu to you." 

(In the fourth and concluding seance of the April series, at 
Jonson's in Toledo, one form appeared, who did not speak, it 
being that of a man who, according to this letter, was Sir 
Oliver.) 



3 p.m., 26th June, 1912. From Sir Oliver Mowat: "I have 
a vivid memory of all that was. What is to be is glorious I'm 
told for thee, as a bright afterglow that follows thee along thy 
sunset way. You will be proud at seventy that you have had 
your say; and fame to follow your good name, shall come to 
stay. Broad is the way ahead of thee, and though it leads to 
good, it is the 'narrow way' of old, not as yet understood; but 
when in glorified degree men's friends may come to with them 
be, and death no unknown quantity; when we who listen here 
above, may come again to those we love, how glorious the day, 
how broad and perfect then the heaven way. The 'narrow way' 
made wide by modern thought, made broad and smooth in every 
way, with angel's whispers in man's ears. How glorious the 
day, that you will open up to man, when 'Dawn of the Awakened 
Mind' fulfills its plan; and I of many standing near, look for 
this time to soon appear, when narrowness and greed shall cease 
to be in every creed; and broader life, and broader scope come 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 309 

to each soul in wider hope. The loving- spirits from this side, 
come to your home and there abide. Under no flag, under no 
creed, your book fulfills a human need." 

Practical Psychological Study Profound in Character. 

Full Recompense for Many Years of Devotion to the 

Subject. Satisfactory Knowledge Gained Beyond Every 

Doubt. 

In the . psychic's presence results to me usually prove most 
satisfactory. So for the early days of August, 1912, I arranged 
for a series of seances; and likewise secured two unexpected 
trumpet seances, with another psychic, where familiar spirit 
guides and aiders of my own were present; and where "Gray 
Feather," the strong Indian guide and control of Jonson, for 
my satisfaction and benefit, assumed control of the psychic, 
instead of the one claimed as her own. This was due to his 
long acquaintance with me, in the Jonson seances, and his desire 
to serve me, and the cause I had espoused, which of itself was 
gratifying; and I was also enabled to engage, as previously I 
did, in a psychological interview with Hypatia (see Chapter 
XXIII), and with the philosophers (see Chapter XXIV) in the 
study of psychology. I have not been a student with, nor disciple 
of the cults which have been teaching it; but have followed my 
intuitions, and exercised my reason; and feel that by the aid of 
spirit intelligences, I have built my foundation firm, and on it 
now erect a fortress cemented throughout by truth. 

Prior to the seance with the Human-Psychic-Telephone, I had 
been conversing with a friend who was also there, regarding the 
various hypotheses of the mind which had been adopted by others 
to account for the psychic demonstrations ; and I read to her my 
analysis and criticism of them. 

What is now to follow will be more of variety than simply 
volunteer messages, and will embrace question and answer, date, 
time and place; and explanation, as well as confirmation in the 
matter of evidence. 

The instrument for use (the Human-Psychic-Telephone) is in 
her own home in New York State, and in a room with absence 



310 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

of interruption; and there with her I take my seat. I must be 
honest in my mental attitude towards her, as well as with myself ; 
and try, so far as able, to make conditions favorable ; and exclude 
each act or thought or thing, which may tend to condition of 
disturbance of harmony, such as criticism or dispute. I must not 
be too positive or anxious, but rather quite normal or fairly 
passive; remembering that I have within my body, myself, a 
spirit, which I have attuned to spirit realm ; and it acts as motor 
which operates the mind, and through the latter in my subjective 
self, the discarnate mind of a discarnate spirit, can read my 
thoughts, and answer them by using as an agent, the subjective 
mind, and physical machinery of my psychic, to write its dis- 
carnate thoughts to me, and in this way substantiate my claim, 
of the possibility of psychical communication. 

I had only just been seated when the psychic's hand began 
to write, before I had a chance to question, or make a remark, 
and this is what she wrote: 

9.45 a.m., 2nd August, 1912. From May: "I am the first 
of right to come, and I was disappointed too, because I could 
not speak to you (that was last night at a trumpet seance). 
Tomorrow morning I will try to give to you through a trumpet 
some test complete, so you will know that it is I who visit you 
from out the sky. My name is public property, and that I'll give 
of course to you, but I'll try also to proceed in such a way that 
you will be convinced that I, May, talk to you." 

J. S. K. "I will be pleased to talk with you there." (Note: 
Another trumpet medium, and not the one where I was last 
night.) 

9.55 a. m., 2nd August, 1912. From Mother: "Mrs. King 
I am; I am his mother, and I wish to speak a word of joy to you 
dear boy, before Hypatia comes to be servant to wish of thee. 

Margaret P. King." 

J. S. K. : "To the instrument I speak and say, before I ask for 
anyone, or make remark, I want to know if Hypatia, my spirit 
guide, is here?" 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 311 

At once the psychic's hand begins to write in my own book, 
which I handed her, and this is what the communication said: 

10 a. m., 2nd August, 1912. From Hypatia : "I hear as well, 
you will observe, if she, the psychic, has her mind quite digressed, 
for we are using her subliminal entirely. We use it in harmonious 
consent of her awake, and present consciousness, as you a guest 
would use a room that is her property. So we assume the power 
to rule her subliminal consciousness. She as a hostess in her 
conscious state observes that we have harmony, but leaves us 
quite at liberty/' 

J. S. K. "Hypatia, I much desire to have present here certain 
ones that I may communicate with them, regarding the psychic 
instrument, and my conclusions as to process of transmitting 
messages, proving personality, and my analysis of mind hypo- 
theses. The special ones that I most desire are Frederick W. H. 
Myers, late of the London Psychical Research Society, Dr. 
Richard Hodgson, of the same, or its branch, the American; 
Prof. William James of Harvard and Prof. Thompson J. Hudson, 
all in spirit realms." 

Hypatia (through psychic) : "I will see that they write for 
you for publication properly. The ones you have named are 
now here. They came here with you, as they were with you 
before. Their interest holds them here. They heard your con- 
versation, and what you read. They will remain until you go." 

J. S. K. : "Friends and Co-workers : As psychical researchers 
in earth-life, you were more or less co-workers one with another, 
and held in high repute by those who knew of your important 
labors; as well as by one (myself) who worked silently, and 
almost alone, but still with confidence that in time, and with spirit 
help, I would yet reveal my work, and prove the truth. 

"What you each had done in human life encouraged me to 
seek with you in spirit sphere attunement, and your quick 
vibration of response in messages proved that I had struck the 
key. For this alone I am thankful, and feel indebted for your 
messages ; but I further wish to thank you one and all, for your 
proffered aid to me, and now wish to say, the compilation of 



312 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

my book, 'Dawn of the Awakened Mind,' is nearly completed, 
still I desire from each or all of you, your judgment of the 
article on Mind Hypotheses, with my analysis of them, which 
constitutes the major part oT Chapter XVIII ; and likewise your 
judgment, and your testimony to the truth, regarding the name 
I have given to the instrument, together with the manner of 
transmitting spirit messages through her to me; and also have 
you criticize or endorse my conclusions, or judgment give of 
what I have seen fit to say, which I have carefully reasoned 
out, from what I know from study of the mind in normal state, 
and also by aid of hypnosis, aided likewise, it seems to me, by 
a weak sense may be, of intuition. If it be correct, I would like 
to be assured of it by you, and I'll prize your endorsation ; or if 
I be incorrect, I wish your judgment and instruction, as to the 
functioning by which the message comes from you to me, which- 
ever way it be, it would, I feel, be greatly prized by thinking 
men throughout the world, and do much to strengthen the work 
in which I am engaged, as well as that of others ; and aid 
enlightenment of mind, and pave the way for proving other 
truths of value to humanity. 

"My friends, this is my explanation of the modus operandi 
of dispatching these various messages from the sender to me; 
this is the description as I interpret it, or as I now make it, not 
absolute, but as it seems to me to be. The sender speaks the 
word into the mental ear of the non (to her) subjective self 
of the living psychic, as one speaks into the telephone receiver. 
The discarnate spirit is not seen or heard by psychic's objective 
self, and is not announced by her non (to her) subjective mind 
to its fellow-occupant, the objective mind, because elsewhere 
I have already noted, it acts independently ; and in this respect is 
different from all other individual ones, so far as known to me ; 
and therefore this may account for what appears to be the 
ignorance of psychic, as to what was being limited, or withheld 
(knowledge to the objective mind) ; and not being subject to 
its former master, nor acting in consonance with the objective 
partner, it therefore acts on its own initiative, or rather when 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 313 

this (to her) non-subjective mind, or independent one, hears the 
suggestion of the words and sentences, which the discarnate 
spirit speaks to it, in form of a message, and name announced 
as if in signing, by such discarnate one, it then of course adopts 
the suggestion, and sets in operation its own functioning of 
nerve energy, and puts in motion the machinery of muscular 
movements with which it is quite familiar; and makes the 
symbology with pen to represent the words of the message, which 
is in no way strange, but quite familiar, just as the discarnate, 
now bereft of the physical, used to do itself, when it had similar 
machinery to operate (the human body). 

"I feel that my solution of this psychic problem is correct, 
and can be sustained. All of it can well be illustrated by this 
fact, that by hypnotic influence the objective mind of my subject 
can be put to sleep, and thus be deprived of its normal power 
to rule or control, for the time being, the subjective mind; and 
thus we gain the freedom or state of independence of the sub- 
jective mind, by artificial means, whereas with our psychic instru- 
ment, her subjective is constantly independent, or non-subjective 
to its own, and can no longer be considered abnormal, as such 
to her, although a most wonderful exception to the normal rule 
or state, for it has at length become from long existence, to her 
(the instrument) quite normal. At this point to which I have 
brought my hypnotic subject by artificial means, I can proceed 
to make suggestions to him, along similar lines to those of the 
discarnate spirit who suggests to the psychic, and ask him to 
speak or write, and leave him act as of himself he chooses; but 
if exact knowledge I wish to gain, or otherwise impart, a caution 
I must give, that it must be true and right, and he will not 
swerve from it, and can follow me in repetition of what I say, 
for an whole hour, and remember in his subjective mind each 
word of all I spoke. When truth is spoken in his ear, and he 
is told to repeat it, by word or message made in writing, he will 
so do at such time as I may fix for him ; and so with suggestive 
direction from the discarnate to the independent (to her) sub- 
jective mind of this psychic, with equal results; and so my 



314 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

argument, as you can understand, is that the machinery of the 
operation of the subjective mind of the psychic acts in accord, 
or in harmony with the wish of the discarnate operator, who 
desires to send his message through the subjective mind of this 
psychic to me. 

At times the instrument with me will talk, while with the 
hand she'll write, and claims not to know what is written, unless 
she reads it; but now her hand begins to write, in answer to 
what I have read, and as she writes she reads it out, so that 
her interest is aroused, and I am entertained. This course con- 
tinues until the subject is completed. The writing is on the 
pages of a writing book I handed her, and date and hour of 
each message is recorded with all the messages, and here are 
some that follow, viz.: 

Responses Come from Those Addressed. 
10.30 a. m., 2nd August, 1912. From Dr. Richard Hodgson : 
"We approve the name (Human-Psychic-Telephone) for we 
the extended subliminal in her case can see. It is to us as you 
have said a means of communicating to you directly without 
the formality of materialization. I, Richard Hodgson, and the 
others (Myers, James, and Hudson), have listened to your read- 
ing, Brother King, for we are brothers true in this the work 
you do, and I was one who often tried to prove that man's 
mentality alone could sense and know by thoughts of men living 
or dead; but I had not the objects at my hand to study from 
hypnotic view, and these advantages to you, have given knowl- 
edge that I also know, at this time; and it proves 'tis so that 
the subliminal must be suggested to, either by its co-worker 
the conscious mind, or by the conscious mind of another, either 
living or dead. Discarnate is a better word, for a dead man 
would hardly talk. But being of these discarnate now, I stand 
beside the instrument of you, and talk with my mentality. I 
think the words exact as you would think them, if you read 
a speech. The hand of her at once responds and writes them 
in the words that she in childhood learned, or the subconscious 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 315 

like a piano player at once repeats the record of my thoughts 
although the instrument is quite complete if no record is used. 
Ripe is the fruit upon the tree of knowledge, and you have the 
advantage of a college education, and much thought in each 
line of psychology, and so we all salam to thee. I must admit 
that it is true, as stated on the pages read by you. — Richard 
Hodgson/' 



10.35 a.m., 2nd August, 1912. From Frederick Myers: 
"Frederick Myers I am. I was so interested in it, I forgot 
formality, and crowded in as you can see. What Dr. Hodgson 
said was also sentiment of me. In fact on this side, we all quite 
agree with what is now belief of you. To state in simple words, 
I would say the subconscious is like the exalted mentality of 
animals like to a good horse, it will obey a master, and preferably 
its own master; but it will never reason why. In this case the 
master rides conscious beside each driver; and if necessary 
speaks the word of command. In case I could not use the rein 
the hand of the owner draws it taut. It works in such com- 
pleted harmony, that I am left in pleasure and in joy, after each 
driving, instead of feeling I am unable to express completed 
thoughts to you. There are other mentalities who assist us like 
to servants in a well regulated home. In fact the tendency to 
rhyme is fault in some degree of one of these zvho near her (the 
psychic) stand, and aid us in our least command. Like to a 
megaphone they be to my completed thought to thee. They 
confirm and direct it to its best service, but suggest not. 

"I was president of the London Psychical Research Society. 
I studied every instrument I could, and tried like you to know, 
and I am living glorified because you've done it so. You have 
a good knowledge of the normal functions of the human 
mentality, and so can recognize, when a wire is crossed, or an 
instrument is imperfect. The arguments you make in regard 
to Pansy, an Indian maid (See Chapter XVIII), are to me very 
convincing. I like plain distinct terms of expression, for the 
mind, even to scientific thinkers, is a very illusive problem If 



316 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

you could take a mind, as you can take a watch, and place it 
in front of you for observation, you would find its peculiar 
necessities and complications more intricate by far to understand, 
and so you like a jeweller are trained by education, and long 
study to understand each working part, and I endorse your 
labor from my heart. I'll listen to the words of you and write, 
for it is blessed to my sight to see all prepared for print by you. 
I much approve of what you do. — Frederick W. H. Myers." 

10.45 a.m., 2nd August, 1912. From Professor William 
James: "William James I am, Professor I was of Psychology, 
and as an earnest student I spent years in observation of different 
psychics. I eulogized Professor Myers when he died, for I was 
living then, but now I am as he is, and we come back to you 
again. I wanted to get hold of proofs that no one could gainsay. 
I did not think that I had them, so I would not sign my name 
among the convinced. A man may believe in a hell, but it's hard 
to produce it on a lecture platform. Hodgson, he was convinced 
before he left the earth, but I was still looking, for more light, 
when the windows of heaven opened and took, me to the broader 
view, and I am now convinced like you. Hudson's theory was 
like that of the ancients who, believing the world was flat, sailed 
forth to prove it, and found it a globe. Columbus believed it 
round, but he thought it much smaller than it is. So with us 
who study into psychological problems. We all learn some truth 
that is new, from our persistently different points of view, and 
like the globe the truth is plain, and when 'tis known to many 
men, they'll all agree as I with thee, that spirits come again; 
that they communicate, and I as one of these am glad 'tis true, 
and I approve of present work of you. — William James of 
Harvard University." 

10.50 a. m., 2nd August, 1912. From Thompson J. Hudson : 
"I, Thompson J. Hudson, am here to communicate with Dr. 
John S. King, the author of 'Dawn of the Awakened Mind.' 
I was like you, believer in the acts of two parts of the mind, but 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 317 

I could not make a definite border to either. I wrote my 'Laws 
of Psychic Phenomena' with the belief and hope to start a stone 
to rolling, so that later students with advantages not given 
me, would be able to clearly see. A widow's mite was my gift 
to men, and it was all I had for them; and I was like to I. K. 
Funk unable to tell the law that tips the table. It was not 
explained by any theory that I could advance. Your mind 
analysis (see Chapter XVIII) is good. Your thinking is an 
open book to Hypatia, and others near to you; and they record 
like bulletin for us, the things you do, especially a theory that 
would appeal to one like me. The facts I knew as well as you, 
but what to say to make them be in rhyme with my philosophy, 
I did not know, and so like genealogist, I could not tack them 
to my family tree, and so I mentioned them in slight degree. 
What you said (in Chapter XVIII) in regard to the communica- 
tion of Pansy, an Indian maid not known to you, communicating 
through an instrument, unfamiliar with facts not in your own 
mind; and telling the truth which you afterwards confirmed, 
would surely tend to prove that she, the disembodied spirit, knew 
and actually communicated with you, as a living mortal might 
have done under similar earthly conditions. I think you have 
given to many of my pet theories a knock-out blow, by doing 
so. I confirm that I a disembodied spirit now communicate to 
you, regarding things you did not know I knew. That would 
confute the telepathic theory at present. Man is a creature of 
habits both mental and physical. The telepathic theory will not 
account for the incident you state. Neither will the mind-reading 
theory. — Thompson J. Hudson." 

11.00 a.m., 2nd August, 1912. From the foregoing four con- 
jointly, we will all write again for you, and state as you require 
us to. 



11.02 a. m., 2nd August, 1912. FromT. K. Funk: "I of the 
'Widow's Mite* want you to know, that with me here are many 
minds like you, who wish to be able to teach humanity. Water 



318 DAWN. OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

will run down hill. That is a law you say, but it will never do 
it so without a rainy day. The drouth condition in the hearts 
of men is past in large degree; and you are one of the few 
thinkers who have knowledge of the mind from a physician's 
view, and so the ordinary critic cannot laugh and say no more; 
instead he is as cornered, and the solid 2 by 4 of the foundation 
of the arguments, the braces here and there, will make the 
thinkers wonder, and say 'I do declare.' I, Funk, was of this 
belief too the same as you. It is one thing to know and another 
to teach. 'Widow's Mite' of me, was good in its way. Each 
man's thoughts are as planks, and each is of a different wood, 
but each is useful to aid thinkers in building up their own especial 
theory. The strength of your oak sentiment is such, that the 
foundation of your theory as expressed in this completed work 
of you, will combat every other view. Mice may gnaw holes in 
planks of wood of soft degree, so that they soon sink in the sea, 
and lose their interest in popularity; but critics cannot gnaw 
through the principles as defined by thee, is the judgment of 
your friend and co-worker for the uplift of man. If I was alive 
I'd enjoy to publish your work, and push it through to great 
success in every land, you understand.- — I. K. Funk/' 

When Funk had signed his message the psychic's hand then 
ceased to write, and I exhibited to her a photo-engraving of her- 
self, for use in my book; and also another one made from the 
spirit picture which I obtained of Wm. Stead, by sitting with the 
psychic sisters. When she had finished viewing them she handed 
them back to me, and began again to write, and this is what 
was recorded. 

11.52 a. m., 2nd August, 1912. From Wm. T. Stead (No. 24) : 
"I was glad to have her see my picture as prepared by you. I like 
it most exceedingly. I'll try to communicate with you through 
the trumpet tomorrow morning.— -Wm. T. Stead." 

4.40 p. m„ 2nd August, 1912. From Revd. Theodore Parker: 
"I think you have done it best of all the writers, who have tried 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 319 

to demonstrate the facts that you and all of us believe are true. 
I made my teachings too creedal I now think. Spirit return and 
power to communicate after death, applies to all mortals of what- 
soever nation or belief. Let it be proved as true, and then the 
other conclusions will as a consequence follow. It is a high and 
lofty view to take, and the great and good of the past ages 
are gathered near to see and hear, and help whene'er they can, 
so you may be of service to help your f ellowman. 

8 p. m., 2nd August, 1912. From Queen Victoria : "I am 
here, dear subject of mine. The wonders of this truth were 
known to me in life, and you — through losing of your wife — 
but undergo the constant woe that I went through, when I lost 
my beloved consort, and Alice too. The belief in spirit return 
was strengthened in me, and as my reign was lengthened to its 
close, and sunset of the heavens near began to be so near to me. 
I had no woe nor grief, but felt instead relief ; and I believe that 
what I said was like a growing seed in many a heart, that will 
find in this knowledge a relief from woe, like what we both have 
had to undergo. The mention of the fact that I believed, and 
the heart wish of you, triumphant stand the leader of this thought 
in every land ; and I your Queen with you agree that it as truth 
was known to me, before I touched this unknown shore I sensed 
my loved ones near, and I was but delighted when I grew to 
see them clear. My consort was the first of those who clasped 
me as his own, and we are both together now in our bright spirit 
home. My wish is with yours on this subject. Stead's tragic 
ending, and the fact of his defending this truth, will be a means 
of arousing curiosity at first, and then an interest like to you, 
from arguments that prove it true. To proclaim it without fear, 
was to me in the years of prejudice a woe, but I believed that 
it was true, and so made sacrifice as you often in past years 
had to do. Pretended belief in anything is not required in this 
age of modern candor. Each man respects his countryman who 
is honest in his convictions, whatsoe'er these convictions may be. 
I, Victoria, will write to you before you go, and often so. She 



320 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

(the psychic) need not wait. We all are near in private state, 
and it is rest, as well as you, to know that this belief is true. 
— Victoria." 



Second Day of the August Series, 1912. My Second 

Trumpet Seance, and Different Psychic. 
An hour I took from the early morning of my second day, 
August 3rd, and spent it in a seance of a trumpet medium, as 
the same was arranged for me by Gray Feather, the control or 
guide of Jonson, and by my guides and aiders ; not by the psychic 
nor her usual control. The room was darkened at 9 a. m. and 
forty-five minutes were consumed in my conversations with six- 
teen spirit callers, of whom one was Stead, or claimed so>to be. 
The Indian race are said by some to be most near to nature, and 
have great magnetic power to harmonize conditions at a seance ; 
and have also knowledge before the body dies that they as spirits 
can come back again. That this is so to me seems true, for when 
at Jonson's in Toledo, Gray Feather greets me through Jonson's 
vocal organs, while Jonson is in a trance. On Thursday night, 
August 1st, I sat in a trumpet seance where I was not expected, 
and the psychic was a stranger whom I'd never met, and the 
first to speak to me in tones familiar was Jonson's control, Gray 
Feather. He said he had sent me a letter to come — which I 
received and so admitted — and he said he wanted to get me 
there (in New York State) for a purpose. He would brjng 
others with him to make conditions good, so I would have May 
and others talk with me, through the trumpet of another psychic. 
Sure enough he took control of the trumpet seance on Saturday 
morning, 3rd of August, 1912, from start to finish, as was 
manifest by his native voice, and this is the order in which each 
spirit caller spoke with me, viz.: 1. Gray Feather, 2. May, 3. 
May Donna, 4. Hypatia, 5. Electra, 6. Brother David, 7. Father, 
8. Revd. Dr. Parker, 9. Wm. T. Stead, 10. A nephew, Jesse, 
11. Prof. James of Harvard, 12. Dr. Richard Hodgson, 13. Gott- 
lieb Hoose, 14. Emperor Wilhelm of Germany, 15. Sir John A. 
Macdonald and 16. Bismarck, and I received them all alone. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 321 

Again with Human-Psychic-Telephone. 
From this trumpet seance I went direct and met the Human- 
Psychic-Telephone in private sitting at 10.30 a. m. August 3rd. 
Today again the evidence appears to corroborate, for some who 
have already written, talked through the trumpet with me today ; 
and others said they would try and write, when opportunity 
presented. No> sooner were we seated than the automatic hand 
began to write, and messages arrived without intermission. 

10.30 a. m., 3rd August, 1912. From May : "My dear husband, 
I call you that today. Gray Feather helped me so today, that 
I was enabled to talk to you through trumpet; and it gives joy 
to me to have you here and to me near, the possibility to do. 
— May." 

The following conversation or communication viva voce by me, 
and in writing through the psychic hand of the instrument by 
Stead, is really personal in character, and still will prove of 
interest to all readers, and especially such as knew my friend 
and co-worker Wm. T. Stead in life. It is also evidential in 
character, as it corroborates or endorses his conversation through 
the trumpet this very morning (August 3rd). So as a witness 
he has made every effort to prove his identity; and certainly 
exhibited his personality to all, by his various demonstrations to 
me ; and in his several efforts has successfully accomplished what 
he sought to do. He wrote me several messages, at the beginning 
of his efforts, the first one through the Human-Psychic-Telephone, 
the first day after the "Titanic" 'boat went down, which was 
dated If.^5 p. m., 16th April or 38 hours and 25 minutes after 
his body sank, and these messages were forwarded to me in 
Toledo. But the seventh one was dated lf.30 p. m. of 18th April, 
predicting his appearance to me, and was, so I am informed, 
mailed on the train at 6 p. m. It had not reached me in Toledo 
till the morning after Stead showed himself to me at Jonsoris at 
10 p. m., the close of seance, when several others recognized him. 
This was a physical proof of his identity, and somewhat of his 



322 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

personality ; while on the 27 th of the month, he met me at Chicago, 
by appointment, at the psychic sisters', while I sat with white 
canvas or portrait board before me, and the psychic sisters right 
and left of it, at an unshaded window, where I watched some- 
what skeptically for his promised appearance to me, as a picture 

— particulars of which are elsewhere given (Chapter XXX) , 

— until he came into my critical view in a trifle less than fifteen 
minutes, similarly dressed as he was in the Jonson seance, thus 
offering physical and permanent proof of his human personality, 
and personal identity, and lastly this very morning conversed 
with me through a trumpet, giving his name, and then conversing 
upon a matter regarding which he had written before, of which, 
however, the trumpet medium could not have had any knowledge. 

I feel like saying here to the scientist, the psychical researcher 
or critic great or small, that had you been with me, and seen 
and heard, and experienced what I have, you would be dumb- 
founded to produce a reason or an hypothesis that would or 
could account for it all, in its variety, other than the one I have 
after careful investigation and ripe thought adopted. 

10.50 a. m., 3rd August, 1912. From Wm. T. Stead (No. 27) : 
"My name I gave to you through the trumpet successfully. Did 
I not?" 

J. S. K. : "That is correct, you did. 

Wm. T. Stead: "I am an investigator still, and I listened 
in interest to what you said regarding the moral standing of 
the intrument used. I am grateful to you for affording to me 
this opportunity, for I will so be enabled to decide for myself 
when I have done well, and not depend so much on a guardian's 
judgment. 

"My presence here is with my son, or I have him with me, 
and Julia Ames and others here are trying to appear to you, or 
give to you the knowledge true that we are able to convey across 
the sea, the truth of what in thought you said, and laid out 
printed (typewritten) on your bed. The thing I as a man, like 
you, am trying earnestly to do is to get proof exact, that I am 
myself, though I had to die. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 323 

"I will tell it to someone, so it will come and you will know. 
-Wm. T. Stead." 

11.20 a.m., 3rd August, 1912. From Sir John A. Mac- 
Donald: "As one benighted I have often stood and wished that 
I might be in touch with proper instrument so I could talk to 
thee. It is a pride to me, this work you have in view ; and I am 
glad that England's Queen believed that it was true. I wish to 
give my. signature of faith and hope, to be an aid to prove the 
questions that you have marked as three. Especially the third 
one, that is the joy to me, or is the final giant in path of those 
who try to combat all theories and reach the truth most high." 

11.30 a.m., 3rd August, 1912. From Bismarck: "Corre- 
spondence of you is to lead to far better power to distribute, 
and reach humanity as a whole, than would have been result to 
you if your first plan had worked out true. Horatio at the bridge 
you stand; and we as soldiers are at hand in armor quite com- 
plete and strong; and we will aid you before long to touch the 
proper target, so of this great truth the world shall know. I, 
Bismarck, was a fighter too, and to combat was to me joy, if 
I had right as I believed leading me forward. Let all of us be 
aiders, and follow in your wake, and your book shall accomplish 
all that you undertake. That which you undertake to prove is 
hard indeed to do; and I am glad your standard high is well 
upheld all through." 

8.35 p.m., 3rd August, 1912. From Samuel Hess: "What 
you have said regarding me I hear, and that I was successful in 
even small degree of bringing a true test is pride to me, and I 
your 'Daddy* called by you, and still respected in your view to be. 
Or I, though old, am nowi in spirit free, and young I am com- 
pared to thee. (He spoke at the third trumpet seance.) You 
will be old yourself before you knock upon our heaven's door, 
and I am told that though I lived until one hundred came in 
view, I did not live so long as you will do. You will retain 
vitality, and added spirit power will be given to you till I young 



324 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

man in your view; or I as young compared to you. I cannot 
now exactly see how long you live after, to me my dying day, 
but I am told you are to stay a little longer on life's way." 

The foregoing message was written through the hand of "The 
Human-Psychic-Telephone" by my mother's alleged father, 
Samuel Hess, one of the small group of United-Empire-Loyalists, 
who settled in the section now known as the city of Hamilton, 
and the township of Barton, where he was known by everybody 
for many long years, as "Grand-Daddy Hess," and who passed 
from earth-life at the age of 97 years, when I was a youth, some 
sixty years ago. In July, 1912, there was printed in The Pro- 
gressive Thinker of Chicago, a message from "Daddy Hess," 
which came through the well-known medium Maggie Waite, and 
addressed to me, in which each name, relationship or other state- 
ment was absolutely correct. (See Chapter XXIX.) 

5.45 p.m., 3rd August, 1912. From Emperor Wilhelm: "I, 
Emperor Wilhelm, father of the present ruler there, come in the 
seance to advise with you; and I with Queen of England quite 
agree that it is truth as shown by thee. Some of my people 
believe it is true, and so I come to write for you, to confirm 
what you say and do. I'll aid in this the wish of you. To have 
my countrymen peruse the book, is wish of me, for they are as 
advanced in thought, as now the English be. I have learned that 
this is the truth, and come to so proclaim to men, for I a spirit 
am of those who truly come again. I spoke today through 
trumpet, I write it now. The trumpet was used by my voice to 
thee; and now I write to make it plain that no mistake can be. 
(He spoke through trumpet, as one of the sixteen in the early 
morning seance of today.) — Wilhelm, Late Emperor of 
Germany." 

Third Day of the August Series 1912, Third Trumpet 
Seance, Second One at the Same Time and Place; and 
Same Control and Psychic as Yesterday. 
By arrangement with the trumpet psychic yesterday it was 

agreed that the seance would be held at the same time and place 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 325 

today, and so I was on hand at 9 a. m., the time specified. The 
psychic's own control was nowhere in evidence, but in his stead 
the noble Red Man Gray Feather again held command with his 
aiders, and brought a royal lot of guests for my benefit. And 
first of all to come was the Manager Gray Feather, who had 
yesterday promised me, that he would do his very best to afford 
me every satisfaction, with the promise added, that I would get 
information of moment and would be very pleased. Another 
was Egyptia, my guardian spirit, who first appeared to me in 
MacRoberts' home in London, Canada, some 18 years ago, and 
many times thereafter in her transient form, and always spoke 
to me, so her voice was normal and familiar. May Donna was 
next to use the trumpet, with which she was familiar, for she 
learned its use in November of 1911 in an Etta Wriedt seance. 
My own spirit wife May followed the daughter, and her conversa- 
tion was as life-like as when in her earthly form, and she was as 
pleased, as she could be, that the proofs and tests she had given 
others as well as me, were entirely satisfactory, and she would 
yet give others. May's sister Gertie gave me in conversation 
the best of evidence of her personality. After that Hypatia, 
my spirit guide, spoke with me, and as she had so frequently 
proved herself in great variety of ways, she spent her time in 
encouragement of me, and in helping my loved ones. After her 
there were others who alleged themselves to be Asia the Ancient, 
so named by me ; I. K. Funk of Funk & Wagnall ; our beloved 
Queen Victoria, who has frequently written me; Wilhelm, late 
Emperor of Germany; Swedenborg, who attained to fame; 
Aristotle and others. 

The trumpet seance concluded, I went direct, as on the previous 
day, to the writing psychic, and my first greeting came from May. 

10.40 a.m., 4th August, 1912. From May: "I am reunited 
by this creed that was so long a woe to me. I feel in joy of 
sympathy in this the added power that he, the psychic's Eberling, 
and guides of you, have promised me that they will do. The 
change in your capacity to sense so you will hear from me, in 



326 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

heaven now to stay, but really just across the way. I am to 
unite with you in all this thinking strife, and what soe'er you do 
or say I am with you as here today. Your talk last night was 
heard by me, and I was glad that you could know that it was 
true, I come into the atmosphere of you, and feel at home; and 
so I am delighted when I can make you know, that with my 
child and others, I am so I may hear and realize with you the 
things that are so true. As a test I say, Maud Gates you are the 
one with us where we sat on piazza there, two years ago. I am 
myself here, Mrs. King, and John is sitting here. (One of scores 
of little tests given me from time to time by May and correct.) 
I will not go, but I will stay by you here, and listen and give 
sympathy of thought in every way to what the other writers say, 
through this her writing and today. Your spirit wife now living 
in the other life, May King." 

10.50 a. m., 4th August, 1912. From Mother : "Mother of 
you I am, and I want you to know that I was there at trumpet 
seance, though I did not speak. May and May Donna, and 
Gertie were three of the loved ones; and then the exalted ones 
advised that information be given to you on subjects to you 
new. — Margaret P. King." 

10.55 a. m., 4th August, 1912. From Daughter, May Donna : 
"Papa, don't think that I'll ever neglect you, or leave you alone. 
We are trying to help you when you are at home, and when you 
can listen and know we are near, 'twill be a great blessing; but 
later you'll hear, and then I will sing in songs that are sweet, 
and those you admire, I'll after repeat, so I'll be a real little 
daughter at home, though the angels soon took me, and carried 
me home." (She died in birth over twenty years ago. J. S. K.) 

11.10 a.m., 4th August, 1912. From Yama: "Destiny points 
to you, as one who going forward in his latest span may be used 
by the spirit forces near, to bring this blessing to each living 
man. Be thou a standard-bearer high, and what you try to do, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 327 

we will assist in every way, and bring success to you. As one 
who digs a little trench upon a mountain side to teach a sweet 
spring where to go, the added drop beside, added to what you 
yourself know, will form a river in its flood, to that great ocean 
of the power to do, that is sword sensed by you. And God in 
matter is to be made nearer to humanity; and that which some 
would dread or fear, will be made glorified by thee, and will 
bless all humanity. The psychic sense, the psychic power that 
touches mortal man each hour, will be as friend to many men; 
and proof that spirits come again will by this treatise be made 
plain, but you will write a book again, and in it make some matters 
clear that in this one do not appear. I am also an Atlantis seer, 
Yama by name, I come to you to make your wife's prayer to 
come true and I am like to him the one who gave his name 
(Yerma) to thee. (At the trumpet seance.) The power to come 
to men is to me possible; but if no one of them appeals to me, 
I stay in what is home of me. But what you have done, and 
now do, attracted me to aid you." 

11.20 a. m., 4th August, 1912. From Yerma (of Atlantis 16,000 
years ago) : "What are the ages that are past to one who through 
the epochs walk with ease ! ( Here follows a long communication 
personal and of much interest to me.) Remember I usurp no 
way, I simply aid, and always stay. — Yerma. 5 ' (He previously 
conversed with me through the trumpet.. J. S. K.) 

11.30 a. m., 4th August, 1912. From Hypatia: "I too rejoice 
that the great teacher found a voice, and adds his interest to me, 
in glorified fraternity. — Hypatia/' 

12 noon, 4th August, 1912. From des Asia: "Hypatia is held 
by me as flower in vase ; and I a powerful Ancient Master will 
aid you as you try to fulfill your own destiny. I, Asia, will 
remain with you. This afternoon I will bring the others who 
will be prepared to write for you. I also aid Egyptia, Electra, 
Cleopatra, Omar and Otelleo; or we, Hypatia, myself and these 



328 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

five, your band of seven, are as one completed strand, of what 
is to be made completed by added forces new, attracted by the 
life and work of you. 

After a Recess of Two and a Half Hours. 

2.35 p.m., 4th August, 1912. From Judge Rose of Toronto: 
"I, Judge Rose, won out in the desire of my heart to talk to 
you that first night. (Thursday night, 1st August.) I kept 
saying 'Rose,' and after you spoke I gained power, so I too could 
talk. I would have spoken since, but others had so much to 
do, I did not interfere. I saw the exalted masters gathered near, 
that first night, and I said, exalted spirits will assist you in the 
second great book that you are to write. I, Judge Rose of 
Toronto, not known to the writer or the trumpet medium, assisted 
by Gray Feather, demonstrated. Did I not?" 

J. S. K. : "You certainly did, and I heard you distinctly, every 
word you spoke." 

Judge Rose : "Was not that of itself a test ?" 

J. S. K. : "Your name and occupation, and your conversation, 
as given through a trumpet of a medium I had never met, 
together with your present writing through this Human-Psychic- 
Telephone, all combined, does satisfy me as to your identity." 

Judge Rose : "My name indicated a flower only to the others, 
and I< was not in your thoughts till I mentioned my name. I'll 
demonstrate to you again, at some future seance near at hand. 
Something you do not understand is shaping itself into a reality, 
and it will prove of use to you, and to us in our power to do 
so I am told, and tell to you. Judge Rose of Toronto I am. 
I want you to do it. I had fear lest you! should consider it too 
trivial for comment. I wanted to call your attention to the fact, 
that I had really added my one demonstration, in proof of spirit 
return. I was a respected person, my judgments were looked 
up to; and I believe and know, that what you say is true of me 
in every way. I continue as myself, I return as myself among 
strangers to me, I communicate and prove my identity, as far 
as possible, in my limited opportunity. — Judge Rose." 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 329 

J. S. K. : "I had a conversation with the normal self of this 
Human-Psychic-Telephone regarding the many difficulties of a 
psychical researcher, in obtaining true tests, or proofs of human 
personality or personal identity; and the great expenses of time 
and money for the little proof. I had fared better than many 
men, for I was absolutely satisfied that my wife had kept her 
promise, and in many ways had proven her ability to return to, 
and communicate with me; and identify herself beyond all cavil, 
and prove her human personality, by speaking and conversing 
through the trumpet; using her vocal organs, while present in 
her transient body, and writing through the automatic hand of 
you, as psychic. 

On this very point I should like to get some evidence from the 
psychical researchers and psychologists in spirit sphere, especially 
the four which I named the other day. Even though it might 
not prove conclusive to me, it might be accepted as such by the 
close associates of each of them, in earth life; and yet I hope 
to receive it, in time to be presented in my book as evidential 
in character." 



3.20 p. m., 4th August, 1912. From Professor James of 
Harvard: "I, William James, am near and hear, but I had a 
'doubting Thomas' ear, and through life, even my wife, or any- 
one departed, could not do the very thing to prove to me life's 
truth of continuity. I had a wife in heaven, so this is a thing 
you do not know." 

J. S. K. : "My wife was a member of our Psychical Research 
Society, and I arranged with her in life to come back as spirit 
if she could, and how to prove to me her human personality, 
and this she did, as is recorded in my book." (Chapter XII.) 

Professor James of Harvard: "Yes, I heard what you said, 
and as you say I could but prove it by mind-reading. But that 
would not clear the personality, or careful interest in the details 
of care given by her in talk." 

J. S. K. : "Do you not think, Professor James, that my wife 
has given to me good proof of her human personality?" 



330 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Professor James : "I think she, your wife, has given to you 
good and sufficient proof, in every detail. The earnestness and 
candor of your speech, the education of experience, and observa- 
tion, added to your education as a medical man, give you great 
strength of power to do, and so I as a living brother near, am 
very proud of it, this work of you. 'Dawn of the Awakened 
Mind' is a good title, and the way that you treat every part is 
strong and true. I as one who knows, stand strong for the 
way that you lead up clear and slow, from one thought to 
another; and I as earnest thinking brother, uphold you in your 
effort to prove this truth to men. It was to me beyond my own 
capacity, and so I would not say I do believe, though I was 
open to receive. I believed much that I could not prove, and 
when I was in life, I received much information which I classed 
as problematical, because it had no foundation beyond my own 
sensation and beliefs. This is the fountain pen I'm told?" (My 
own pen, now used by the psychic.) 

J. S. K. : "Yes, I had it and office pad with me at Jonson's, 
for you to try and write your signature, when I was there in 
April last." 

Professor James : "I could not do it. I will yet do it." 

4.05 p. m., 4th August, 1912. From William Stead (No. 28) : 
"Yes, brother, I, William Stead, will also do it if I have power, 
this act for you. I think the things we cannot do often prove 
more beneficial in the end. The sums you could not do remain 
in memory of you, while others soon forgotten he, and thus it 
is with James and with me, who am writing now. I feel it like 
a solemn vow, and I will it fulfill if possible. Be sure to take 
this pen, and a pad too, and I will try my best to do." 

4.10 p.m., 4th August, 1912. From Hypatia: "I, Hypatia, 
think I used this instrument (the Human-Psychic-Telephone) and 
gave an aiding test to you, when I caused her, the instrument, 
to speak to you in public view before the other members of a 
circle, before that trumpet seance, when Mrs. King was with 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 331 

you here. I spoke through her vocal powers and said as you 
and she now remember, 'I will come back again to you, and bring 
the rose and ribbon too.' Later (in the second year thereafter) 
at Jonson's I came and fulfilled what I had promised, through 
a stranger then to me, and you, that I would in the future do." 
J. S. K. : "What you have said I now confirm as true, and 
record make of it, as one of very many proofs, of your spirit 
identity." 

4.15 p m., 4th August, 1912. From Aristotle: "I a philosopher 
of long ago, worked on the problem of the power of thought, 
and how the mind Divine and mind of man, could be so placed 
in unison by certain laws of behavior and speech, and so your 
'Dawn of the Awakened Mind' appeals to me. I had to shape 
each dart of thought as from my heart it flew, and I am interested 
in this careful work you do. This carving out of stepping- 
stones up cliffs of known degree, that lead to flights above the 
stars, it much appeals to me, and so as a philosopher I came and 
spoke to you (in trumpet seance) ; and I will aid you all I can 
in this work that you do." 



8.20 a. m., 5th August, 1912. From Emanuel Swedenborg : 
"As an expounder of philosophy I was a noted man. I was 
looked up to in my day, and I was aided too by intuition, and 
in large degree this intuition guided me in all I said. My earnest- 
ness of purpose, was the thing that caused my brothers, living 
men about me everywhere, to say: 'If he says so 'tis true! and 
this will be the way with you. So many minds are as a clock 
not set in any way, and need a leader always to point the time 
of day; and after they are started they go in that one way. 
Your 'Dawn* of the Awakened Mind' does much appeal to me, 
and I will stay and write for you whenever well I may, and 
when I cannot aid or write, I'll stand at ease at hand, ready to 
learn and listen and better understand the wonders of the teaching 
of these masters who are new, and tell me they are shaping your 
path ahead of you." 



332 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

8.30 a. m., 5th August, 1912. From Hypatia : The one you 
called for as above came, and I let him write lest his attention 
might be digressed, and leave you disappointed. (He had talked 
with me through the trumpet on "Sunday morn. J. S. K.) His 
interest in living men is not attuned to all of them, and so he 
goes with purpose high to follow masters of the sky, or rather 
of the unknown sphere, for up and down are equal here. We 
have not bodies that to men are as real necessity, that is we are 
not ruled at all by laws of gravity. I may go up, I may go down, 
and I may go here or there, and of the law of gravity I need 
not be aware. A ponderable body from that view the mind is 
not, but what to you are senses five oft added to in man alive, 
are added to in large degree after man enters spirit key. What 
I would now explain as our necessities are not the same, and 
when I try to teach I must use thoughts within your reach. To 
give a slight impression clear, how would you tell to blind man 
near, the wonders that your sight to you gives you ability to do ? 
With fingers crude he'd touch each flower and nothing in them 
know, but just the wonders of their shape, and coloring would 
be beyond his comprehension in every degree, and yet its added 
radiance is everything to thee. So with the spirit senses they 
are to us so new, so much beyond the others that God has given 
you, that when I try to tell you, I am at a loss you see to find 
in your mind, power to grasp a means of teaching thee." 

J. S. K. : "I wish to ask May another question before I go : 
Shall I place your picture at head of Chapter XII, where I 
describe the key that unlocked the mystery ? Or shall it be before 
Chapter XXIX, the one you as a spirit wrote for my book, 
for me?" 

8.40 a. m., 5th August, 1912. From May : "I believe it is 
best to place it before the first one for the reason that it then 
introduces my features to the mind of the reader; and from 
that time on they are able to picture me when I am spoken of 
by you." 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 333 

Interesting Voluntary Messages. 

I left the psychic's home on the morning of the fifth of August, 
and hence the messages of later date which came through the 
psychic's hand came on then by mail to me, and in proper order, 
and are made part of the record. 



3.15 p.m., 23rd August, 1912. From Queen Victoria: 
"Beneath the flag of England's King you were born subject true, 
and so the former rulers are now drawn near to you, and this 
is why they gather, they are told you are to be the teacher of 
this thought to men, and it was wish of me, when I was Queen 
Victoria, to aid some one to teach, and bring this truth so blessed 
within the public reach. The continuity of life applies to every 
one, and it is to be aid I'm told to many a living man. The form 
of arguments you use appeal to everyone, and you will be a 
pride to me, as worthy England's son. For though you're of a 
colony, your interests in heart of me, are very near indeed, and 
you are right in what you do, to leave alone each creed. The 
continuity of life applies to every man, and we all may do our 
part in God's perfected plan; and if we may continue, and live 
beyond the grave, and even come again to men, 'tis knowledge 
we all crave. If life keeps on its rolling to a more completed 
ball ; and if it is continuous 'tis glory to us all. I loved it when 
my Alice, and my consort Albert too, were taken by the dreaded 
fate, that took your wife from you. I suffered and I hungered, 
to reach their spirit key, and I found rest, and some content, 
when they came back to me, through instruments imperfect, and 
yet with proof most strong. You'll set a ball to rolling that will 
push this truth along. 'Dawn of the Awakened Mind' is what is 
needed sore, by many types of thinking men, on this and Eng- 
land's shore. Your years of education, and observation, will bring 
about conditions, that will aid to prove this true. I watch you 
at your labor, and I feel this added hope, that the exalted spirits, 
will aid you so to cope with every type of hardship and every 
form of woe, so that you will prune it properly, e'er it to public 



334 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

go. The readers are so careless, and few will think as you, and 
so with heart approval, we watch the things you do. Albert and 
Victoria, for I have him here with me, though I alone dictate 
the words, that she now writes to thee." 



1.10 p. m., 26th August, 1912. From Dr. I. K. Funk: "I was 
of those who listened to the reading of your Analysis of Mind 
Hypotheses, and I appreciated it greatly. It was to me a thing 
incomprehensible of analysis, like to the universe. I was but able 
of this truth to say to myself or another, this is, or this seems 
to me. to be. But I could not its substance show, or give the 
proofs, that made me know. I was as the one who could see, 
after his blindness was removed by miracle. I could not tell 
the processes by which I reached the change of view, and so I 
followed what was said by you, with view to see how in my life 
it had appeared to me, and I believe you make it plain, as far 
as possible for men to know. You are not satisfied to say simply 
this thing is true, or that it thus appears to you, but you go 
forward by a process slow, and tell the how you gained each 
point of view, and so you aid each candid follower to come to 
a conclusion like to you. Telepathy does not explain it quite, nor 
does the power of second sight, or mind-reading, or anyway; 
but that the spirit passed away may come to those who certain 
laws obey, and by attunement of some kind or tone learn to 
become able to do as have the ones described by you. I wrote 
the 'Widow's Mite' as all that I could give and so I hoped that 
some one would later be able to do as you now do, explain in 
a minute detail, the how you did, the why you know, for it is 
more convincing so. 'Dawn of the Awakened Mind' is most 
conclusive of its kind, and we are proud of you, and of the work 
you are to do, to better all your fellow-men, and I will aid you 
in this plan, and stand with others who have gone before, trying 
to help you from this farther shore. I was a well-known worker 
for the Cause of Truth, and hope to be restored to power to do 
through you, assisted by exalted guides. I stand near guides of 
you, and profit by the words you read, and by the teachers too." 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 335 

9 p.m., 26th August, 1912. From Prof. James of Harvard: 
"I am William James of Harvard, and heard what was read. 
I cannot think how you could better do than you have done, 
explain the two, and then go forward one step farther, so to 
prove that spirits come and go. The wonders of the mind com- 
plete, are studied but by few, and to have this great privilege 
the fates have granted you; and after normal men are shown 
to have such functions, we are proved to be alive by you through 
added functions we add to the living psychics, and demonstrate 
to thee. /, William James, intend to do as you request, write on 
the printed pad of you, while I stand there completed so at 
Jonson's seance (Prediction). Then it will be printed I see. 
'Dawn of the Awakened Mind' is wonderful indeed, and we 
are glad you go with care over each act and deed; and it will 
be a jewel rare, that all men are to be informed about. Future 
work you are to do for I am told a man is old, only as he is frail 
and weak and you are strong. We all are here to help you 
every way we can, and my now present chief regret is, that you're 
not 'a Harvard man,' the college long ago* so dear to me, but 
/ have hope to come to you in Jonson's seance anyway, as I said 
I would before, but could not do. At present I am 'after you,' 
as toasters say, but I am not so long away from the now mortal 
plane, and I would like to see it proved that spirits come again." 



How often we hear the uninformed say, why do the spirits 
require a medium? Why cannot spirits come to us here and 
now, if they can really come at all? Why do they need condi- 
tions if there is no fraud? I have anticipated these questions, and 
dealt with them in my chapter on 'Relationship Between Con- 
ditions and Results' ; but the reader should fully realize that it 
were folly to assume that human-made conditions will adapt 
themselves to spirit requirements. The reason simply is, that 
absence of what is requisite for spirit purpose of demonstration, 
is beyond the knowledge of the mortal. A better evidence of 
this cannot be had than what will be found in the following 
message or communication, as the experience of an incarnate 



336 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

spirit once a noted investigator along the lines of psychical 
research, and thus has a knowledge gained by the double 
experience terrestrial and celestial, in practical psychology, the 
well and widely known Dr. Richard Hodgson, who deals with 
the difficulty, of communicating through another party with me, 
and shows that the difficulty increased when I am absent alto- 
gether, and thus makes plain certain truths, one that suitable 
conditions are necessary to the production of psychical demonstra- 
tion; another that conditions vary according to results required; 
and still a third that even advanced spirits cannot of themselves 
command or produce the requisite conditions, in all, if in any 
single case. 



5.30 p. m., 2nd September, 1912. From Dr. Richard Hodgson : 
"I wish to write that spirits when discarnate be in a disturbed 
mentality, was what I thought would best explain the fact, that 
they at times remain and say they are the ones called dead, and 
yet the words that they have said are not distinct or even true. 
This is observed dear friend by you. If I am here why cannot 
I do as I try to do, would be asked by the mind of you — because 
I am assisted by the spirit guides of you, and what I sometimes 
fail to make you know, I let her (Hypatia) aid to do it so that 
what is done when quite complete, is like a medley more, than 
work of me ; or like to talking in a dreaming state; some things 
are clear, and some must be repeated in a thought degree till 
often it would cease to be in my own personality; but what I 
think, and what I do, is carried in the thought to you, through 
other thinkers' aid, until it strike the mortal hand, and there is 
written as my wish command, though in the process it might be 
distorted or changed entirely. I know your thought transference 
argument. It is good, the message in this case is not changed 
materially. For us to communicate, it is more like telepathy 
from living minds might prove to be ; what I say is repeated, so 
that into pictures it must go, and from these pictures back to the 
power of the mortal language key. So if it come without a 
break, I conquer what I undertake, but if like notes, some notes 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 337 

have silent key, I fail in what I wish to do, express my thought 
to you. You might ask here why must it first into the pictures 
go? I answer 'tis recorded so, and must pass through that 
censor's fate, and for this change I stand and wait. I wish I 
could come near to you, and talk without this rhyme; but we 
must wait in proper state, so to abide our time. I could not when 
in life believe that if a friend was near, he could not talk direct 
to me, but now I see more clear. I write this message as I say, 
but I am helped in every way, and so it may not sound like me 
according to the wish of you ; but I am hoping it will be a means 
of helping you to know the how and why of what is so. My 
mind is clear, and I stand near, and yet I cannot do; and what 
I write is my thought bright, repeated here for you. One is the 
guardian of me, the other is the one by her who writes for thee. 
They give with changes seeming slight, but so it does not sound 
as if I do it, though I do the best I can for you. Myers and 
Hudson and I heard the paper read. I think you are an accurate 
thinker, and have done well indeed, in your analysis of each of 
the different theories. You make the mind a more tangible 
thing than the others who have done in past a work like you. 
"We with your explanations agree, although we do not agree 
with each other even here. I think one thing, and keep thinking 
it till I am convinced of my error by proof, not argument. I 
believe every human soul either carnate or discarnate must work 
out his own best enlightenment. I solved the problem* of mis- 
information, from the spirit side. I said the spirit mentality is 
disturbed or unsettled. I was right in the effect but not as to 
the cause. A discarnate spirit is as powerless to communicate 
as is a living human with a blow on the head. If he cannot use 
his brain he cannot let his loving family and attendants know 
his thoughts. The body is to the mentality as is a pen to the 
hand of a writer. Except we have some instrument attuned to 
our use, we cannot communicate no matter how brilliant our 
thoughts. Though all the keys of a piano are in tune, if other 
mechanism of the instrument is at fault it will not play, so with 
the human instruments called mediums, our minds may play 



338 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

upon their mental strings, though they are merely human things. 
Faults of complete control give us silence here and there, so our 
best efforts are but fair, and not to be compared to the efforts 
we made when here in life. I have been here some time you 
know, and now I cease to write and go. I'll live with you and 
try to be of future use somehow to thee. Your book is to be 
something new, and will lead men to broader view. 'Twill be 
indeed a 'mental dawn' for those who read it through. For 
present now, adieu to you. — Richard Hodgson." 

An Invocation and Address by the Exalted Spirit Yerma. 
In the record of the fourth of August, 1912, which includes 
the trumpet seance of the morning, there will be found a brief 
reference to two spirits of the long ago as human, who claimed 
that their terrestrial home was on the lost continent Atlantis. 
One of these wise seers of time remote, gave his name as Yerma, 
and as one, if not the most exalted one at that seance, offered 
up an Invocation to Deity, and spoke on behalf of an angel host, 
as if by authority to me, in a voice that was loud, deep and strong 
and afterward did both speak and write much that was personal 
to me, and unavailable for publication. My interest was keen 
for further knowledge from the spirit sphere, and I felt a growing 
inspiration ; but I subsequently craved that I might have repeated 
through the psychic, the Invocation to the Deity; and so much 
of the address as might be given publicity, in the pages of this 
book. I awaited in silence, after my return home, the consumma- 
tion of the answer to my prayer, and it finally came to me through 
the psychic's automatic hand, and through the mail, and .bore 
date of 

9.30 p. m., 13th September, 1912. Yerma's Invocation : "Oh 
Thou Exalted Ruler of all Good, called by the name of God by 
Christian men, allow me as an infant yet, in power to understand 
compared to Thee, to reach my helpless mental arms, toward 
Thy protecting hand. Even a child may need, may reach in vain 
for what may not be for its good, and I so reach with brain. 
Aid me to reach before I teach that power Divine to me, where 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 339 

I may sense and understand, and act as aid to Thee. I bless 
this thinker here and try to make it be to him, as possible to do, 
what is the wish of me. Give me, I pray, the right to be in touch 
with him eternally, to aid his present human work, on to com- 
pleted plan. Bless him I pray upon his way, till he is lifted into 
power to do, by myself, aided by you. Eternal Good, shine on 
my way, and light my wish to-be, till I gain broader knowledge, 
of how to help and be of use in this great work, that he, the 
mortal, tries to do for men. Aid me to aid, to prove this truth 
that spirits may return again. Awake great dawn of brighter 
thought, and aid us till this thing is wrought. — Yerma." 



8.30 p.m., 17th September, 1912. From Yerma: "I with the 
exalted rulers near, oft try to whisper in the ear of John S. King. 
I breathed the invocation from my heart, and may but give to 
you in part the things I said ; but now I say may angels roll the 
stones away between you and the dome of fame. May you receive 
from living men a most, exalted name. May I be of those gone 
before, who help you everywhere, and guide you even unaware 
into the great and perfect power, to give expression to the 
thoughts that you now feel, and know are really true. I pray 
the father part of me to help me in my power, on earth to do 
the very thing required of you. Oh, Most Exalted Unknown 
Power, whom men call Deity, aid me, I pray, to roll away the 
stones and make the blind to see all that is true regarding the — 
to most men — unknown quantity. Leave us not, whatever is 
our fate, but help us here, and help them there, until the mind 
of man enlightened, like a lotus bloom, shall ope in loving thought, 
in earnest hope, and show itself as capable of the attainment 
of this new capacity. All of us hold this work as flower, and 
try to aid it every hour to its completed state. Let all things 
hasten so that no one wait. I clasp my hands in constant prayer, 
to aid the living over there, to join with you the living here, 
and cause your doubts to disappear. 'Dawn of the Awakened 
Mind' is logical and clear, and it will cause much doubt and woe 
to lift as cloud, and then to go." 



340 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Again with the Human-Psychic-Telephone. 

From the afternoon of the 21st to the forenoon of the 24th of 
September, 1912, 1 again spent the time in the home of the Human- 
Psychic-Telephone, where I continued my investigations of this 
exceptional psychic, and pursued the profound study of practical 
psychology, and secured further evidence, in support of what I 
contend for; and can now with confidence and satisfaction affirm 
that I know, what I was formerly confidently taught by the 
teachers, was unknowable according to their belief. 

These records are chiefly personal and instructive, yet otherwise 
varied; but the major part thereof will not be included in the 
present book. 

My thought wish, on September 23rd, being, to have the 
presence of Hypatia, she responded by writing her name through 
the hand of the psychic instrument. I had noted in a general 
way, in writing, the various matters for a conversation with 
Hypatia, my loved ones and others, asking information or advice, 
all of which was fully dealt with in a regular way; and each 
request or wish was answered according to its necessity. These 
had to do with the evidence, and also with the matter of publish- 
ing the book, as well as matters personal to me, and not suitable 
for publication. 

1 p.m., 23rd September, 1912. From Frederick W. H. Myers: 
"Polite refusal is better than an unfulfilled promise. What you say 
in your book in regard to the mind hypotheses interests me in 
two ways, first as a thinker or philosopher I endeavored to solve 
the question put by skeptical thinkers, the same as you in your 
book do. Imperator, through Mrs. Piper, the entranced psychic, 
gave me much information regarding soul life, and the develop- 
ment of power to do. I am now a spirit free, and in my now 
return to thee, I find out where I failed to teach; or what the 
points I failed to reach; or how the truths expressed to me by 
Imperator and Rector, failed to hit the target impression in my 
then human mind. Even a scientist is often blind, or biased in 
his opinion, by the especial 'hobby' he has selected to ride. It was 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 341 

so with Hudson; and to some degree, I find out now 'twas so 
with me. I could not comprehend or understand what was then 
written through that hand. Eels are not more slippery than 
are the threads of thought into the realms unknown; and thus 
with you in your own home, you reach and reach, and try and 
try, and seeming slow it comes to you, though it is good, the 
thing you do. Brother King, I much approve of this way of 
treating the mind hypotheses. It is to me the best of several 
attempts by others. I like your thought. Here and there we 
work and trace something of moment to the human race; and 
when we mount to realms unknown, we find we are not here 
alone; but up the stairs of thought we climb, aided and aided 
all the time, until we see most clear, and all the former dimness 
disappears. 'Dawn of the Awakened Mind' will mark the dawn 
indeed, of liberal endeavor to try to cope with truth; and I am 
glad in all of it you have attacked no creed ; for it becomes more 
classic so, and will forever onward go, in its ability to do. We 
scientists approve of you, and I, F. W. H. Myers, — >, last but not 
least, in power to know, for in earth life, I studied so, and had 
advantages, and also ability to do, — come here and write that 
I approve of you, and also of the work you do. My signature, 
I too will try to give you, upon your office pad at later date, 
when Jonson is in the proper state (prediction). I am a listener 
at the keyhole of her (the psychic's) consciousness. I will be 
able to hear what you may say to me today. I shall not once 
go far away. I express it in writing, as I see she heard my 
expressed thought. It was this, I feel it a privilege to be of 
those who are permitted to listen, and also to be in touch with 
you, beloved thinker. I will follow you to your home, and be 
in touch with your spirit guide Hypatia. Imperator is of her 
order. When in end the book is complete 'twill be as laurel 
wreath to you, and later added power to do will bring your 
secret wish to you. You climb unaided up this stair, and seem 
to be alone ; but many an angel unaware is with you there." 



A TABLET PAGE. 

To Honor Those Gone on Before — Though in Another 
Sphere, They Are Co-workers Here, in Establishing Con- 
tinuity, Return and Communion. 



As a humble mortal in this my first attempt to publish some 
of my psychic records, I wish to thank the very many men of 
note, and prominence, while mortal life and labor was their 
privilege, for their contributions to my book from spirit realm; 
which is rendered of great value from the wisdom of the words 
they wrote; and more especially do I desire to' single out those 
who were co-workers, and students of psychic matters during 
life, and since they became discarnate spirits have entered into 
my work, and with me engaged in discussing the problems of 
the mind, and aided me in demonstrating the study of practical 
psychology, they from the spirit view, and I from the human. 
I further crave their co-operation in the future, and I shall as a 
psychical researcher contribute to their memory my meed of 
personal appreciation, and trust through the pages of this book 
to assist in some measure to perpetuate the names of Myers, 
James, Hodgson, Hudson, Stead and Funk; because of my 
personal knowledge of their concurrent work; and because I 
seemed to sense the presence of each one of them at times, while 
I was engaged upon the problems of the mind and soul. 

John S. King. 



342 



CHAPTER XXXII 

AFTER twenty years of honest, earnest, careful study of 
psychical subjects, which I investigated fully, without 
fear or favor of any man; and determined, so far as 
I was able, to lay bare the truth of continuity to mortal view, I 
feel that I am justified in asking any reader of my book, to be 
honest, unbiased, impartial and sufficiently judicial to not select 
one single statement, fact or phenomenon, and on it alone base 
an argument in support of any hypothesis, or to strengthen a 
critical attack; but wait until you have most critically examined 
every part of it, and sifted the evidence as a whole, on which 
to base your conclusions; or if you could have followed in my 
footsteps to where the various psychics are, and taken part in the 
various investigations of the phenomena described, your con- 
clusions, I feel quite sure, would be in harmony with mine. 

It were not the act of a wise man to claim that his conclusions 
are correct, unless his investigations have been most exactingly 
conducted, and with a degree of frequency, as well as under very 
different conditions of existence, environment and variation, as 
to time, place and method of observation. If after scores of 
investigations extending in each case, over years of time, and 
along particular lines, with a single object in view, I gain the 
same results, no matter what the phase of mediumship ; no matter 
who the individual psychic may be ; no matter when or where 
I may be researching; whether I am known or unknown as a 
man, to the psychic; no matter whether materializations come 
from the door of an improvised cabinet, or from the ceiling, 
walls or floor; or levitated between the ceiling and the floor; 
and when finished talking, like a whirl of steam, from a loco- 
motive engine on a frosty winter morning, passed through the 
walls to the outer air; or if it be the familiar tone of a loved 
one's voice, or that of former friend, who speaks with an inde- 
pendent voice in the atmosphere about me; or if through the 

343 



344 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

aid of a psychic with clairaudient gift, or one who can see clair- 
voyantly ; and further still with that other condition known as 
trance, where the vocal organs of a psychic instrument are used 
by spirit power other than the psychic's own to speak in language 
which conveys evidence of some other human personality, which 
most usually announces itself by name, to the one addressed ; and 
lastly suppose it be the writing psychic, whom I have named the 
Human-Psychic-Telephone, who seems to be quite different from 
all other automatic or psychic writers, I hold or claim, that if 
through all these channels there come messages from the same 
personalities ; and if identified as such, it must needs be accepted 
as evidential. 

The feature to which I now call the reader's attention is, that 
through all the various psychics of different kinds and phases, 
at different times, and widely separated places, I hold conversa- 
tions and receive messages from the same intelligences or per- 
sonalities, which facts or evidence can be supported on oath, by 
many witnesses, and cannot be controverted ; — and it comes, as I 
am thoroughly convinced, from my spirit wife and other relatives, 
from my spirit guide Hypatia, and others of my band, and from 
former friends of earth, as well as other men interested with 
me as spirits desirous of proving continuity of life, and spirit 
return, — there is no mention of creed. 

There is then, I claim, good reason to accept what I have 
selected as evidential of spirit power and continuity; and I may 
further add that if you desire to advance an attack or criticism 
of the psychic situation, you will do well not to destroy, nor 
remove the pontoons, over which you proceeded, lest you may 
have further need of them when retreating. 

I shall attempt to abbreviate, and thus include in the few 
remaining chapters my last ten days of research experience, at 
the close of the year 1912. 

First Trumpet Seance of December, 1912, Series. 
I reached Detroit on Friday afternoon, December 20, 1912. 
I 'phoned Mrs. Wriedt, and secured a sitting for 8 o'clock p. m. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 345 

Her house was the one I visited before, but I had to reach it 
by a new car route. While on the car a coincidence presented. 
While standing in the aisle, because the seats were occupied. I 
asked a passenger who sat near to me, and whose eye I caught, 
"Can you tell me where this car meets Baldwin Avenue?" He 
replied by first asking me, "What number do you want to find 
on Baldwin Avenue?" and when I told him, he then said, "That's 
where I am going now myself, and I will show you if you leave 
the car when I do." He did so, and found that he and another 
man along with us were booked for the seance. The one who 
entered the house with me had had about one year's experience 
at intervals of seances ; while the third man whom we met there, 
and who helped to form our semi-circle in the seance room, had 
only sat once or twice before ; and who, though fleshy, large and 
strong, was nervous, which he preferred to call anxiety. In this 
seance I received but a few demonstrations strictly intended for 
me, but had a few friendly talks with loved ones, and a guide 
or two; and my interests were otherwise divided between the 
efforts of inexperienced spirits, and the "anxiety" of the inex- 
perienced man. 

Second Trumpet Seance of December, 1912, Series. 

This seance, by appointment, was held for me alone, on Satur- 
day morning, December 21st. It was a lengthy sitting, and to me 
satisfactory, as my lone sittings usually are. As soon as the 
electric light was* turned off in the room, the spirit lights appeared 
to view ; and the demonstrations in the room were beautiful. 
Lights in all parts of the room appeared to view ; and then a 
spirit brought the trumpet to me, and asked me to examine it; 
and as I looked into it, at the expanded end, I could see all 
through to where the mouthpiece was, and the whole of it 
illuminated, while I held it so that I could see the whole inside 
from end to end, aglow with light. 

' Hypatia, my spirit guide, was the first to come ; and she told 
me that my band of guides, and several of my loved ones were 
present with me ; and that while May and some of my loved ones 



346 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

would talk with me, the guides would either talk with or sing 
for me. Hypatia was the first one to sing, and she gave a stanza 
or two of song, so loudly that she could be heard out in the 
street, Mrs. Wriedt, the medium, meanwhile remarking, "Oh, 
isn't that wonderful." Then the ancient guide des Asia, as I 
have named him, came., He was on earth, as he alleges, nearly 
twenty thousand years before the Christian Era, at which time 
he claims North America was under water. Electra, sister of 
my guardian Egyptia, and an alleged member of my band, came 
and spoke and sang. She sang loudly and distinctly, as did 
Cleopatra also. All three of these alleged themselves to be 
members of my spirit band. Then there also came Otelleo, and 
so there were in all six out of seven of the alleged members of 
my spirit band, each one of whom spoke as loud as I do when 
I am speaking to other persons. All these alleged guides have 
materialized for me at the Jonsons on several occasions, and two 
or three with other mediums; and conversed with me while 
presenting to me in their transient bodies. Each one of them 
has also written messages to me, through the Human-Psychic- 
Telephone. Both Egyptia and Electra appeared to me materialized, 
at the seances held by Effie Moss at London, more than twenty 
years ago; and some fourteen years thereafter, they again 
appeared in form, when Mrs. Moss was holding seances at Lily 
Dale. Both of these spirits also came together and walked around 
the circle of relatives and friends, to whom I introduced them. 
This was at a seance held by Nichols at Lily Dale, some years 
ago (in 1908) ; when some members of the Canadian Society 
for Psychical Research, and a few other selected friends, held a 
seance under test conditions ; one of which was that the medium 
lay on his back, upon the floor within the cabinet, while the 
heavy vice-president stood astride of him, as the various forms 
materialized, including Egyptia, and Electra, who claim to have 
been my guardian spirits from the time I was born,* and were 
familiar to the view of May, my spirit wife, while still in her 
mortal life ; and since then they now attend upon her necessities, 
as she herself tells me in her messages through the writing 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 347 

psychic to me, though on the first occasion that Electra was 
materialized, she was brought into the seance at Jonson's by 
Hypatia in the presence of the selected company. Gray Feather, 
the strong Indian control of J. B. Jonson, materializing medium 
of Toledo, came and spoke with me at this trumpet seance to tell 
me, that Jonson was coming home ; and he wanted me to come 
down there on Monday afternoon. This same Indian control 
Gray Feather, in my presence in a former Jonson seance in April 
last, announced the arrival of Stead in spirit land ; and told the 
listeners who were present there with me, 'that he had visited 
and talked with Stead in life in Julia's Bureau, in England. 
Gray Feather also on his own initiative wrote through the hand 
of a writing psychic, and urged me to meet him on a certain day 
and at a certain place, in New York State, of which a record 
appears elsewhere ; and when I did so he brought the late Judge 
Rose of Toronto to speak to me, which was the first and only 
time that Judge Rose had thus spoken with me, though he wrote 
a message on a slate for me, and signed it. I have it also recorded 
in a previous chapter that he, Gray Feather, controlled, on two 
separate days, another trumpet medium instead of her own 
acknowledged control. He not only spoke through that trumpet 
himself, but brought on those occasions thirty-one spirit person- 
alities to speak with me. May has acknowledged, when sending 
messages to me, that this noble Indian spirit has often been a 
strong helper to her. 



Third Trumpet Seance of December, 1912, Series. 

I remained in my room at the hotel till nearly noon, the 22nd 
day of December, then I went by invitation to a friend's home 
for dinner ; and finally reached Mrs. Wriedt's at 3.30 p. m., the 
time appointed for my seance. I had my sitting not alone, but 
with one gentleman whom I never met before. 

MacRoberts, at whose home in London the Moss seances were 
held over twenty years ago, came at this seance and talked on 
several subjects with me. The communication was interesting 



348 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

and among other things he said to me, "Doctor, you have out- 
lived most of the boys." 

It will be noted that this and other two of the four seances 
were what is known as mixed circles, where both time and interest 
are divided between the sitters; and the share is lessened which 
comes to each one, though opportunities are all the time presenting 
for investigating and considering conditions ; and estimating the 
relationship of conditions presenting and results obtained ; as well 
as observing the effect of harmonious conditions. 

One unexpected caller from the spirit land was a man well 
known in my city, and likewise a man of wealth, who lost money, 
caste and influence, on account of acquired habits undesirable 
in character; and his language and tone of speech were sad 
when he spoke with me, as he was aware that I knew his habits. 

Among others who came and spoke with me, on matters of 
personal interest, or benefit, but not specially of public interest, 
was des Asia, my alleged ancient guide of the very long ago, 
who came and talked in English language, and told me much 
that I was pleased to know. And so it was with others of my 
guides, especially my chief spirit guide Hypatia, and also another 
one, Cleopatra. 

May Donna, my daughter, who passed to spirit life at birth 
more than twenty years ago, also made her presence known and 
now told me that when I reached Toledo she would again 
materialize and talk to me there. 

May came to me as usual, for she always does whenever I 
am with a psychic, and proves herself by calling me according 
to our ante-mortem agreement, by the test name "Johnnie." I 
had a good talk with May about her personal possessions, and 
what she suggested I had better do with everything, and she gave 
me her directions explicitly. May talked with me this time, I 
believe, without a trumpet, and said she had no suffering now, 
and I must try and be cheerful and enjoy myself; and that she 
was told I was to have splendid health and strength and live 
to be very old, and had most important work before me to 
accomplish. She also wished me Merry Christmas and a Happy 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 349 

New Year. Before she bid me good-bye she told me that she 
was going home tonight to see her mother, but would be here 
again with me at the morning seance at 8 o'clock. 

I may here add that when the spirits assume the transient 
bodies formed for them, they look as natural as in life, though 
the garments which are upon them may or may not resemble 
those worn by human ones; and they claim they are creations 
of their own desires. 

The Fourth Trumpet Seance of December, 1912, Series. 

In the early morning of the 23rd of December, 1912, I had 
my sitting with another gentleman in the last trumpet seance 
of the season, which will be the last one also to be recorded in 
the book, which will go forth to the world as an expositor of 
truth, and upholder of the spiritual philosophy. 

The reader will remember that as reported in the seance 
preceding this one, that May said to me through the trumpet, 
that she was going to her mother's, after the seance, but would 
be back in time to meet me in the seance this morning. 

I entered the seance room feeling slightly chilly, and Mrs. 
Wriedt brought me a cup of hot coffee, remarking, "You are the 
man who drank the first cup of coffee in my seance room." When 
the coffee cup was empty, and the light turned off, a man's voice 
loud and natural said "Good morning," and I enquired, "Who 
is this?" when May answered me, "Why, it is Pa." I then 
remarked, "Your coming is a great surprise, for this is the first 
time I have heard from you since you left your body many years 
ago," after which he gave through the trumpet his full name, 
as if to corroborate what May had said, and seemed to be over- 
joyed, at this his new-found mode of conversing. May was also 
very pleased on account of my surprise, as I did not know why 
she was going home, and something prevented my asking her. 
She probably knew that his inclinations would most likely take 
him there. All of this seemed very natural, and I had a good 
talk with both of them (father and daughter). May, while she 
was talking with me there, cried a most life-like cry, and said, 



350 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

"Oh, it makes me feel so sad, to see you all alone, and no one 
about you to do or care for you, when you were always so good 
and kind to me, and did everything you could for my benefit. 
I am near to you nearly all the while, though I cannot seem to 
impress you, by myself alone." 

Asia and Hypatia, two of my guides, came again, and Dr. 
Sharp, control of Mrs. Wriedt, told me that Gray Feather, J. B. 
Jonson's strong Indian control, was busy gathering spirit bands, 
and forces, so that I might have the very best results along the 
lines I had in mind, especially so because Jonson was not strong 
in vitality. 

May Donna, my daughter, humorously remarked to me, "Some 
time while you are at Jonson's, I'll walk out from the cabinet 
and kiss you." 

Cleopatra, as she alleges herself to be, and also claims to be 
a guide and aider, told me during the seance, that she would 
try and find an opportunity to materialize while at Jonson's. 
Stainton Moses, as he claimed to be, and whose name and fame 
are known to Englishmen, also made a call at this morning seance, 
and spoke quite unreservedly to me. I told him I would be glad 
to hear again from him, and communicate any message which 
he might have for his fellow-countrymen. 

Mrs. Effie Moss, the physical medium, I first met in London, 
Canada, at the MacRoberts home, was pleased once more to 
come from spirit sphere and talk with me, and thanked me for 
all I said and did for her, and for her manager, at the time they 
had their trouble there some twenty years ago. 

MacRoberts' alleged guide, Cynthia, also came and talked 
with me. 

Dr. Sharp, Mrs. Wriedt's control, then spoke a word or two, 
before he closed the seance, and in doing so, said, before you 
leave Toledo I will be down to show myself, as I always admire, 
and like to honor you. 

One feature of this seance, as well as of some others, has 
developed a circumstance of importance, inasmuch as it has 
helped to unfold a secret which has been withheld for many years, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 351 

and establishes, beyond any doubt, all the three contentions 
claimed by me, viz.: 1st, Continuity of Life; 2nd, Spirit Return, 
and 3rd, Spirit Communion; and to this may now be added 
Prophesy. The personalities concerned will in no way be dis- 
closed, but the circumstances I will now relate in support of my 
repeated contention made in tripartite as above. Many years 
ago, there resided in my city a man, his wife and family, together 
with a sister of the wife. His means were ample, and occupation 
and reputation were both good. The wife and family were sent 
to the summer residence, while the husband and father remained, 
as did the sister of his wife. The time was fast approaching 
when an event of importance and of anxiety was due to most 
certainly transpire. It came and so did I as doctor, and I was 
therefore present at the birth of a son to the father, this well- 
known citizen, and the mother, who was a sister of his wife. In 
brief, the boy was illegitimate, and had come to stay ; and what- 
soe'er was said or done, it must be kept a secret by the doctor 
and the two concerned. A foster-mother was .soon found, and 
the boy was well cared for. Everything ran quite smoothly, and 
the secret was not divulged. A few years elapsed, and then the 
father of this growing lad took ill, and passed out of the body 
to spirit realm. 

On two or three occasions prior to the present seance, the spirit 
of that father came and conversed with me through a trumpet, 
about his anxiety of mind regarding the past and the future of 
this illegitimate son. He told me that he had made provision for 
the boy's education and advancement, and had placed it with the 
mother of the boy to be administered ; but she did not evince 
an interest of earthly mother character, but preferred that he 
would go to heaven. He has not, however, gone to that place, 
in accordance with her wish, as will be realized by further read- 
ing. At the present seance, the spirit of the father again came 
and spoke with me, and told me exactly where I could find his 
boy, and how and where he was employed, and that he had grown 
to be a man. He asked me to divulge the secret to the boy of 
his true parentage, and let him know of what was placed with 



352 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

the mother for his benefit, before he, the father, had gone out of 
the physical. He also said that he would try and bring the boy 
and me together, and let me know the address of the mother. 
The latter part of this strange foregoing communication was 
made to me in the seance room at Mrs. Wriedt's in Detroit on 
the morning of 23rd December, 1912. 

Developments are promised, and will climax very shortly, and 
if they are presented in time will be added to this chapter. 

Fulfillment of a Spirit Prophecy. 

While in my office this afternoon 'tween 2 and 4, a tall young 
man of over six feet high was shown in, and requested to take 
a seat; and as my eyes were cast on him, I was so strongly 
impressed that I called him by his name, as when I knew him 
as a child of five, but who was now a man of over 24 years of 
age. As his spirit father told me, he was a resident of a western 
city in the United States; and I questioned him as to his visit 
to Toronto, and this one to me. He proceeded without delay to 
answer, and told me also that about one year ago, while at a 
trumpet seance, his father came and spoke to him, and said, 
"I want you to go whene'er' you can, and have a talk with Dr. 
John S. King, Toronto, who will corroborate all that I have told 
you and more; and what I have done for you; and will reveal 
the secret of your life, and will give you necessary advice." 

The time and place and privacy were all opportune for me to 
tell this man what his father had requested me to make known 
to him. On his part he also assured me that his father had 
instructed him to come to me to learn just what I had to say. 
Suffice it to briefly state, that though this man has not seen 
his mother, nor can have recollection of her ; nor does the mother 
know aught of him, nor retain remembrance of his face since 
baby days, and later has no trace of him, still this young man 
now knows her name, and who she is, and what she does, and 
where she lives, and will shortly go to her, and introduce himself 
to her, and let her know he has notf yet gone to heaven, and is 
now prepared to receive what was left for him in trust with her ; 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 353 

and expects for some time at least to be a resident of earth, 
similar to herself. This record is of course abbreviated. I have 
divulged only what I had authority to divulge, but I have pre- 
served each one's identity. 

If I had no other proof, I feel that what is contained in 
particulars of this case suffices to establish my contention. 



CHAPTER XXXIII 

FOUR seances in Detroit, Michigan, with the trumpet on 
the 20th, 21st, 22nd and 23rd December, 1912, together 
with four seances in Toledo, Ohio, on evenings of the 
23rd and 26th, with materializations at Jonson's; one afternoon 
at a private psychic's, with materializations and features new; 
and also one with a well-known physician, who claims to hear 
clairaudiently, and who commits to writing what he alleges he 
hears, on this trip so far occupied all my time for a full week; 
and following this three days devoted to practical psychology, 
and messages which were sent to me through the human-psychic- 
telephone while I was in her home in New York State and resting. 
I am thus enabled to complete my book up to the closing of the 
year; but in doing so, have had to have recourse to abbreviation 
of the cases, and the chapters as I approached the latter pages. 
When I reached Toledo on the afternoon of the 23rd December, 
1912, and got myself located in a comfortable room, I 'phoned 
to the home of the Jonsons and secured a sitting for a seance 
that evening. When I reached there and was seated in the seance, 
I found that with me there were five others ; and I realized also 
that Jonson and his wife were a pair of sick ones, fit subjects 
for a hospital. There was no question but that both were sick, 
having only reached their home on Sunday after an absence, he 
of four months, and she of two. But with generous consideration 
and with personal sacrifice of rest and comfort, rather than have 
their patrons disappointed after the distances travelled and the 
corresponding expense incurred, together with the lingering doubt 
existing as to whether there would be many or even any more 
seances, owing to the worn-out condition of both man and wife, 
but especially the former, who, acting on the advice of the writer, 
has determined, for this winter time at least, to abandon his 
sittings and to try and improve his health. This compromise to 
be in effect after the present week had terminated. 

354 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 355 

It was then to all present, medium and sitters, a question 
whether it could be possible to have a successful seance, but it 
was agreed to try, taking our sittings and Mrs. Jonson set the 
music in operation; and notwithstanding lack of the best con- 
ditions, we saw and realized much that was interesting and very- 
convincing, along the lines of spiritual phenomena. I note that 
when in a Jonson seance, whether the sitters be few or many, 
that there is most usually a fairly equal distribution to the sitters 
all, although a few seem to be favored with more than the average 
to the rest, while now and then I've noticed some have no guest 
at all. My stenographer for instance was paid to come with me 
to work, and I also paid for her admission, yet still she was 
present at each seance, and there were four, but no guest came 
to her, while for me there were no less than eight at one sitting 
of the four which we attended, on the occasion to which I refer ; 
and usually from four to six each time, if others were with me 
sitting. The foregoing fact did not affect the general average 
to each in the circle. 

But to resume my record at this seance, I had my third call 
from the late Mr. Hill of Toronto, who simply came, and showed 
himself again, but was not able this time to speak. The results 
as a whole in this seance, as well as in the next, were not up 
to the standard of seasons gone by, nor of others before the 
power weakened, evidently much less, and the conditions not as 
favorable for the reasons which are referred to elsewhere. 

Cleopatra, who had conversed with me at Mrs. Wriedt's through 
the trumpet, and gave me her promise to materialize when I 
would be in seance at J. B. Jonson's, kept her promise as will 
now be seen, and talking with me through the vocal organs of 
her transient body, walked from the cabinet out into the room. 
She told me in the presence and hearing of the other five that she 
was helping others, to create such conditions as would enable 
May to appear and talk with me, when in my home alone. May 
herself came again, and brought along with her May Donna, our 
daughter. They each stepped out from the cabinet, or room 
where they formed transient bodies and stood in front of the 



356 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

curtains, and while there they both kissed me (my daughter, 
through the trumpet at Mrs. Wriedt's, told me she would), so 
that all present could both see and hear them, then and there. 
May talked quite as clearly as ever before, while in seance, 
through the vocal organs of the transient body in which she 
appeared. May Donna, who resembles in some respects both 
May and me, had ringlets hanging down each side of her head, 
and wore a pleasant smile. She took her mother's left arm, and 
the mother took mine, and we stepped forward a pace, and 
stood in a row in front of where the curtains separate; and the 
sitters came up and viewed their faces and raiments, while Mrs. 
Jonson was spoken to by May, who knew her in life. Having 
backed up to the opening, they kissed me again, and said "Good 
night" quite as naturally as any humans could do. My descrip- 
tions are confined to my own guests, as much space would be 
needed if I described all that were there, for an average seance 
will bring eighteen to twenty-five guests,- or even more, if too 
much time is not consumed in talking, and walking here and 
there. 

I will now ask my readers, to try and remember the prophesies 
or promises in preceding chapters of Professor James, F. W. H. 
Myers and other two or three to try and write their signature 
on my office pad with printed heading for me, by using my 
fountain pen, at a Jonson seance, in time to be included in my 
book, if possible it be, and there be good conditions. If so you 
will realize, that with conditions now impaired — not only by 
the sickness and depletion of Jonson's vitality, but by several 
reasons otherwise than by the cause referred to, which is itself 
to me more or less alarming, having reference to both health 
and mediumship, — results could scarcely be successful, but What 
there were I give you. Professor James of Harvard, as he 
alleged himself to be, and who has been communicating messages 
to me in writing, with his name attached, through the hand of 
the Human-Psychic-Telephone in New York State, desired to 
establish his human personality, and on one occasion wrote to 
say that he would try to write his usual signature as in life, and 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 357 

would meet me for that purpose, in a Jonson seance, when I 
would visit Toledo. He kept his promise, or at least tried so 
to do. The seance I am now recording, and possibly another 
one, would be his last opportunity for his signature to be pro- 
duced, and to be incorporated in my book, as well as his promise. 
The very fact that I was anticipating this, would, along withi 
the sickness of the medium, and also with that of his wife; and 
the depletion of the medium's nervous energy and psychic power ; 
and the absence from the house for several months, allowing 
magnetic, electric and psychic forces to more or less disperse, 
would materially depreciate the value of conditions for demon- 
strations. With a knowledge of these various facts, I naturally 
felt considerable anxiety, which could not in any way assist to 
make harmonious conditions, which are essential to success. I ( 
had no picture or photo of Professor James ; I have no recollec- 
tion of having seen his face; and therefore on this occasion I 
waited between hope and doubt for some personality, who, when 
he appeared, would prove himself to be the man that I did want ; 
and the one who was desirous of proving himself to be the pro- 
fessor of Harvard University. I had not long to wait until a 
form materialized, and in some way which I have not noted, 
impressed Mrs. Jonson to call me to the cabinet. I spoke to the 
form and said, "Is this spirit now for me?" and with a gentle 
inclination, or bow of head, he thus answered the question. Again 
I asked, "If you are for me, please tell me your name." His 
answer followed in one word, "James." 

Though I had nothing to guide me as to his appearance or 
feature, except that he exceeded my age by a trifle more than 
a year, I felt a degree of disappointment when I took a general 
glance at him, for I expectecTto see an older-looking man. He 
appeared to be a man of medium stature and build ; but had no 
beard or whiskers, but a heavy moustache; and extending over 
his head from back to front, and meeting the line of his forehead, 
he wore his hair in parallel locks with wavy ends which in the 
light in which I viewed him, seemed to be the color of a shade of 
red, the same as was his moustache, and his features were 



358 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

younger than his years would permit them to be. He had a com- 
manding countenance, an elevated, broadened forehead and 
scrutinizing eyes. He was neither fleshy nor very thin, and 
seemed to have assumed the middle age or younger, — as most 
forms presenting appear younger than in life, — but looked very 
wistfully at me, as I drew from my pocket my office pad, and 
exhibited my fountain pen. The form then spoke as if dis- 
appointed, while I extented the pen to him, and these are the 
words I caught : "I fear I cannot do it now." No further effort 
was made, and the transient body melted from view. This was 
the first time he materialized for me. I tried to encourage him 
to make another effort, if not now, then at some future sitting. 
As this form disappeared another came into view rising up 
from the floor, where the curtains of the cabinet divide, to full 
height in front of the cabinet. This was also the form of a man 
whom I never saw in life, nor did I know his features, but the 
name received from the other form led me to suspect, that this 
caller now before me, was F. W. H. Myers, late President of 
the London Society for Psychical Research, for in a communica- 
tion through a reliable source, he promised over his own name 
that he also would try his best to meet me here, and give his 
signature. Though never seen or known by me in life, or in 
picture, he was born the same year as myself. I will describe 
the appearance 61 this form in outline at least, as it presented 
to me. He had more hair on his head than Professor William 
James, and it divided in the centre of the top of his head, and it 
was dark in color, and was mixed with gray ; he had a full beard 
and moustache, both of which were iron gray and also curly. 
His forehead was high and features indicated intelligence, but 
for 4 some reason I did not get a good view of his eyes. When 
he announced himself as "Myers," I, without delay, asked him, 
if he desired to write, and gracefully bowing his answer affirma- 
tive to my question, I, without hesitation, held my pad with 
the top of it resting midway up my left chest, meanwhile I 
steadied it with my left hand. I next offered my fountain pen, 
and the form responded to my expectancy, and my delight; and 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 359 

with a prompt and emphatic effort, with his right hand he reached 
for and took from me my pen, and placed its point upon a leaf 
of the pad. That was about as far as he was able to demonstrate, 
for when he made a second effort to grip the fountain pen tighter, 
his fingers relaxed, and the pen slipped from them and rolled 
on the pad, and was not recovered by him. I interpreted the 
event as an evidence of partial success, sufficient, however, to 
encourage my belief that with good conditions and renewal of 
his effort he will yet succeed. When he failed to write his 
signature I felt perhaps it was want of confidence, for he quickly 
stepped back to the cabinet, and sank from view, at the entrance 
where he first appeared. I then walked back to my seat, and said, 
"I really believe that was Myers," when three loud raps were 
heard in the cabinet room to affirm it. I then spoke and said, 
"You made a good start, and perhaps if you try again, before 
the seance closes you may then succeed." One very loud rap 
was then heard, which I interpreted to mean most emphatically 
"No." I next suggested that he try again at some future seance, 
but that my presence in Toledo at this date would be the last 
opportunity to secure his signature for my present book. 

As I have other seances with other mediums in view, I have 
every hope that I will yet hear from both James and Myers 
regarding their effort here, and learn the probabilities of this 
and other experiments in the future. 

It will be seen that I had thus six presentations at this seance, 
the foregoing two having special interest to psychical researchers. 
The other four forms which came were Mr. Hill, whom I knew 
in Toronto, May, my spirit wife, May Donna, my spirit daughter, 
Cleopatra, one of my spirit guides, who spoke so I could hear 
distinctly every word; and these latter three all walked with me 
from the cabinet into the circle, the wife and daughter walking 
side by side on my left, for a distance of a few feet, while 
Cleopatra walked, later, out with me a little farther. The two 
psychical researchers James and Myers have had double experience, 
as to the difficulty of communication, and may yet possibly 
explain through some channel why they were not successful in 



360 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

giving me their signatures, or rectify any errors which may 
have arisen in some of their many communications. 

Wonderful Experiences, New Phases, and Some Surprising 
Results, with a Private, or Non-Professional Psychic. 

On the afternoon of Tuesday, 24th December, 1912, I secured 
the valued privilege, through a letter of introduction to a private 
lady medium, or non-professional, location — for reason expressed 
to me — not indicated. During all of the many long years of my 
interesting ventures, and investigations, it has never fallen to 
my lot to participate in more wonderful developments of unusual 
phenomena. The note which I carried was a brief one, and simply 
stated that I was a friend of the writer, and from Canada, and 
that the note would be a sufficient guarantee of my integrity 
of purpose. She had no further knowledge whatsoever of me, 
and though very busy getting ready for Christmas, sat herself 
quietly down for a minute and then unreservedly consented to 
give me a seance. The seance lasted for an hour, beginning at 
3 o'clock p. m. 

The seance room had the appearance of a back parlor, separated 
from the front and large one by sliding doors. Nothing what- 
soever appeared unusual, or that would or could arouse suspicion 
of any mechanism or device, or suggest an idea of trickery or 
conjuring, nor in her personal attitude or speech, which could 
be construed to suggest chicanery to the senses or comprehension 
of a psychical researcher, of long continued experience. I found 
the frame and curtains of the cabinet similar to many others 
I had seen, and it occupied six feet square in the south-east 
corner of the room, while the psychic herself during the seance 
occupied a seat on my left, and was engaged with myself in 
conversation, or with the spirit guests who called on us during 
the sitting, and never for a moment was she entranced, and in 
this respect entirely at variance with other materializing mediums 
I have met. Another marked feature was the fact that when 
the psychic pulled down the blinds and darkened the room so 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 361 

as to exclude all light, the spirit callers each began to come, 
and they each as they entered produced the light by which they 
could be perceived. 

I was welcomed as a guest by a personality which claimed to 
be the control of the medium. I did not see his form, nor could 
I designate the location from which he spoke, but it sounded 
to me like an independent voice in the air. The cabinet did not 
seem to be the exclusive place of origin of the various forms 
presenting, in fact it seemed to be used by only the few, for my 
attention would be drawn to a light above me in the air, and 
there I would see the transient form of a spirit coming from 
the ceiling, or rather as I was in darkness, it had the appearance 
as if coming from the sky. Places and directions were all utilized 
in this respect, for the spirit forms would come and go not only 
from the cabinet, but from the walls and floor, and it seemed 
as if I were in a dark cloud up in the air, meeting the various 
spirits in their transient bodies there. As I am crowded for both 
time and space I will abbreviate and say that at this seance no 
light was burning, and each and every spirit brought their own 
with them ; and thus being in the dark, made each stand out like 
a picture in a frame more clear, or like a sculptured image with 
a dark background, though the features of the face in the seance 
I attended were not as distinct as usual, in the materializing 
seances which I had been accustomed to, but were in every 
instance darker than natural face, yet at the same time their 
voice and language were clearer and more distinct, as I can 
always hear them when they speak to me when I have a solitary 
seance, or one in which I sit alone. 

The control who gave his name, and claimed to once have 
been a doctor, kindly greeted and welcomed me. Each spirit 
presenting seemed to be happy and contented, and spoke a word 
or two with me. I made a list of the alleged personalities of 
each and all who spoke to me, and that itself was most interesting 
in more respects than one. 

The first and second forms to present were my spirit wife 
May and my spirit daughter May Donna, who both seemed to 



362 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

come together, and greeted me as usual, and in appearance, 
manner, voice, with which I was so familiar, varied but little. 
That little was the darkness or shadow over the features and 
the color of the textures which were worn, and these remarks 
applied to all. So I criticized the color, and said I preferred the 
lighter, when my loved ones returned to the cabinet, and very 
shortly after came back again with both features and apparel 
brighter. Confirmation then I have once more, without any doubt, 
in the case of my wife and daughter, as I have had before at 
different materializing seances, with different mediums, in dif- 
ferent places, and on different dates ; and in a manner, and with 
conditions similar regarding seances, with trumpets and with 
automatic writing. My two loved ones came from the cabinet 
and returned thereto as they were accustomed to, in other seances. 
The spirit form number three, which came with an apparent 
rush to me, from the region of the ceiling, was in life the 
materializing medium Mrs. Effie Moss, whom I first met at the 
MacRoberts home in London in the year 1894. She thanked me 
for my kindness and sympathy at London when they needed it 
many years ago; and completed a promise made in life, which 
will be again referred to below ; and then, like some of the others, 
seemed to leave me with a whirl, or like a puff of steam from 
an engine, or from the pipe of a smoker on a frosty morning, 
and in a second the transient body which stood before me and 
conversed like a woman, had gone like a puff of smoke, from 
her position off to my right and through the wall. No. 4 was 
a girl whose name I could not catch, but she told me that she 
died from trouble in her throat. No. 5 was an old man whom 
I failed to recognize. After he had likewise vanished at a tangent 
down through the floor I heard a voice mention me by name and 
no one standing near me. I began to peer about, and as I looked 
up where the ceiling and the wall met, I saw a head and face 
and bust quite familiar to me, smiling, and he said: "Stead is 
here." I had no conversation, nor heard more from him, and 
like a flash of pale light he went from view across in front of 
me right through the northern wall. No. 7 was a female form 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 363 

who only remained long enough to announce, "I came with Stead. 
I am Julia." No. 8 was my spirit guide, who showed herself 
to let me know that she was also there, and uttered only one 
word, "Hypatia." No. 9 was a boy who gave the name of Will, 
but I was unable to identify him at the time. No. 10 was Gertie, 
the sister of May, who came and went as did her sister, from 
and to the cabinet. No. 11 claimed to be Ex-President McKinley, 
and No. 12, he said, was his wife, who had travelled much with 
him, adding that for years she was an invalid. I thanked them 
both for their call on me. No. 13 was a female that I failed to 
recognize. No. 14 was the ancient giant spirit guide Asia, who 
rilled the room with sonorous vibrations of great depth and power, 
and sang for us a stanza or two in his own language, as he after 
explained in English to us. No. 15 and 16 were my own father, 
Stephen, and mother, Margaret P., who always in one way or 
another are quite able to identify themselves to me. No. 17 was 
the spirit of a man who alleged himself to be Dr. Burroughs, 
late of Detroit, a former friend, I think he was, of a present 
friend of mine, or possibly a fellow-student of mine during college 
days; but whose whereabouts for some years past have been 
unknown to me. No. 18 came and with sweet voice and manner 
said, "I am a little Indian girl, my name is Silver Star," and 
the light she made resembled one, but only for a moment, and 
then with a flicker it shot upwards and away through the ceiling. 
No forms appeared again for a short space of time, and in 
their absence, the lady psychic made the remark that "sometimes 
spirits from other planets call here, and show themselves and 
talk," and she went on to speak of their size and peculiarities. 
She also mentioned that some of the people of Bible times would 
return here and converse, and named a few, of which one was 
King Solomon, when I remarked that it was a matter of interest 
for me to learn that fact, as one of the several she had mentioned, 
viz.: King Solomon had written me, or at least I had received 
some messages signed by that name and addressed to me through 
a writing psychic, and I wondered if it could be really and truly 
a fact, that King Solomon of old had interest here now or no. 



364 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

The cabinet control, responding to my thought and wish to know, 
announced that King Solomon had written me some messages 
but would write me many more, as he was helping me because 
I was to be his medium, though King Solomon himself did not 
appear to my vision here. When I subsequently enquired of 
Hypatia she told me that he did not speak or show today, but 
that it was truly so that King Solomon wrote the messages signed 
by him and sent to me. 

No. 20 Lily, the bright and intelligent little cabinet control 
with the late Mrs. Moss, materializing medium, who has been 
seen and heard by thousands, during the many years of Mrs. 
Moss's mediumship, and who never seemed to look older, nor to 
get any larger, at least that was my experience of some eighteen 
years, announced herself unexpectedly, in her doll-like cheerful 
way, by laughter of the giggling kind. Lily promised me in 1894 
in London, Ontario, that in case of the death of Mrs. Moss, she, 
Lily, would connect herself with my band. At the first when 
Lily came I did not see her, and no word of her was spoken, 
nor any reference made by another, but when she giggled and 
laughed, I spoke and said, "That's Lily, I'm sure that's Lily," 
and so it proved to be. To my remark Lily replied by saying, "I 
promised you long ago in London, Ontario, that when Mrs. Moss 
passed to spirit life, that I would come to you, and today Mrs. 
Moss brought me here, to stay with your band." And I then 
added words of welcome. 

Thus was a promise made many years ago confirmed today. 
Thus also more evidence has been created confirmatory in 
character regarding wife, daughter, wife's sister, Hypatia, my 
parents and Wm. Stead. After the psychic's control had closed 
the seance and bid me good-bye ; but before the light was admitted 
Lily came back, and while not visible seemingly had power, and 
had a brief conversation with the psychic and me. 

At some future time, or in another book, I may explain the 
kind of spirit Lily is, and so of the cabinet and levitation spirits 
generally, which differ materially as a class from the others, quite 
as much, in fact, as different men in the human race. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 365 

A Clairaudient Message Received and Written in My 
Presence by a Physician. 

I had only met the doctor once before, and that was in Toledo ; 
and after our acquaintance was formed, he had given me a 
letter of introduction to a private lady psychic who did not give 
public seances. The seance held for me by that lady, I have 
described, and now only refer to it, as I promised the doctor 
to call, and let him know my experience while at the seance ; 
and what I thought of her and it. This call I made on Thursday 
afternoon, and while I sat chatting with him regarding the new 
phase of materialization, he kept telling me of things he heard 
clairaudiently and then he ceased speaking and began to write 
what he alleged was said to him for me; and he grasped his 
pencil and paper, and as he wrote he handed it to me, and as 
I have it now before me, I will copy a part of it, which says : 
December 26, 1912', 5 p.m. (No. 2,7). From Wm. Stead. "I will 
tell you, Dr. King, you are mistaken, James did not lack con- 
fidence, he was too weak. Myers also was too weak. I will try 
and write for you the first time I have the opportunity. Good- 
bye. — W. T. Stead." 

The foregoing refers to what I thought or said regarding the 
failure of James and Myers to write their signatures upon my 
office pad. 

Last Seance with J. B v Jonson, 26th December, 1912. Seven- 
teen Sitters in the Circle. The Author Has Three 
Callers. 

J. B. Jonson and his wife have both been away for a season, 
and therefore held no seances, but they came home again on 
Sunday, 22nd December, and of course held a seance on Monday 
night, though both man and wife were sick, and the report of 
it is given in this chapter, and shows a degree of success. But they 
both felt the strong draught on their supply of energy, and 
psychic force, and felt the withdrawal or exhaustion of vitality. 
They cancelled their invitations and would make no appointments 



366 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

unless there should be improvement in both, of their conditions, 
and so three days went by, Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday, 
and the evenings of both Tuesday and Wednesday, and thus they 
were enabled to make a little gain, and by Thursday afternoon 
arrangements were entered into for another seance on that 
evening, which perhaps may prove to be his last, for he has 
changed his occupation and will go away and free himself for 
this winter at least, and maybe altogether, of holding seances, 
which are without a doubt a very heavy drain upon his physical 
and nervous vitality, and will undoubtedly shorten his life. 

I was privileged to be present at the seance on Thursday night, 
26th December, 1912, which may prove to be my last with him. 
The demonstrations were truly wonderful considering conditions 
presenting. The sitters numbered seventeen, old and young, and 
everyone had one or more callers, for there were some tweny-five 
in all; but the interviews were short and it was evident that 
the power required was weakening. I may note in passing, that 
there was nothing to report different from other seances, or in 
addition to what was recorded before, and will conclude with 
a reference or two to my own experience. 

May came to me again and seemed inclined to try again and 
better walk. Touching my left arm she stepped out from the 
cabinet five or six feet so all could see her well and seemed to 
have gained strength, and was now able to both walk and talk 
better than on some previous occasions, though she has not yet 
been able to speak as loud and clear, as when she used the 
trumpet. 

Cleopatra the beautiful again presented herself to our view, 
and at my request touched my arm and walked with me out in 
the circle, where the sitters were able to approach near enough 
to obtain an excellent view. 

I wish here to conclude my reference to Mr. and Mrs. Jonson 
and their psychical demonstrations, by acknowledging my fullest 
appreciation of their uniformly courteous attitude and good will 
extended me continuously, during eight years, as well as to my 
wife, when she with me conducted critical investigations ; and 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 367 

where since passing to spirit realms, she now returns to meet 
me, and corroborate from both points of view the facts I strive 
to demonstrate, and prove as true. I hope and trust that Jonson 
and his wife may live to enjoy many years of human life; and 
that each year may be well rilled with health, happiness and 
prosperity. I wish also to thank Gray Feather, the strong Indian, 
with such noble character, who takes the control of Jonson in 
the seance, for uniformity of his kindness and friendship, not only 
in the home of Jonson, but elsewhere, ■ and for his repeated acts 
of bringing messages to me; but likewise for some advantages 
which he has shown to me, by his control of other mediums, 
one especially, where he could speak himself through trumpets 
to me, and also bring loved ones, friends and others to talk 
with me. 



CHAPTER XXXIV 

AGAIN I had a valued opportunity while resting for a 
day or two, during the closing week of December, 1912 ; 
L for in accordance with an understanding between 
Hypatia, the psychic and myself, on my first arrival as a guest 
at the home of the Human-Psychic-Telephone, it was agreed that 
time for communication should be divided into parts, so as to 
afford my loved ones, guides, and the group of friends, scientists 
and researchers, all a fair opportunity to communicate with me, 
and I with them. My loved ones came and our communings 
were a joy to all; but this feature was mostly personal, and not 
available for publication, with one or two exceptions ; but to me 
as well as to them, was very gratifying. 

So too with my guides, who encouraged me, and gave me 
information, and instruction; but here I make exception, and 
share with the reader, the pleasure, knowledge and the advantages 
I gained, from communications held with Hypatia; and a part 
of this I have already given in a chapter by itself, devoted to 
some questions of moment, and of deep interest, which I com- 
mend to the reader's thoughtful consideration. (See Chapter 
XXIII.) 

I now desire as before, on a previous visit, where my presence 
alone with the psychic seemed to improve conditions, to ask viva 
voce questions, and have my spirit friends answer me, as well as 
to commune or converse through the automatic hand and pen. 

I now speak to the instrument, and wish to say, that as this 
is my final levee here, for my spirit friends, before I close my 
book, I wish especially to afford early opportunity to all, and 
will myself be ready when you are at ease. 

The Instrument. — I am now free to be continuously at your 
service, for the remainder of your time here. Your loved ones, 
and also Hypatia, are here, as well as others. 

J S. K. — Hypatia, I would among the first desire to hear 

368 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 369 

from some of those with whom I held converse before. I expect 
to hear from Professor James and F. W. H. Myers. And I also 
expect to hear from Wm. Stead, regarding some matters on either 
side of the Atlantic which are in the minds of us both. 

Hypatia. — The three you name are now here, and will remain 
until you go away. And there are others also from whom you 
will be pleased to hear, 

11 a. m., 28th December, 1912. (No. 38.) From Wm. T. Stead. 
■ — My dear friend, I remember it all in spirit, if not in detail. 
I will be here and listen. It is plain to me that jealousy is to 

be cause for silence I feel assured that it will be all 

straightened out eventually. 

J. S. K. — Friend Stead, your spirit picture does not fully 
coincide with your photo taken a few years ago. 

Wm. Stead. — It is my picture that you have, and as I told 
you it is copy of no other. If you cannot print it you can describe 
it, and tell how it was obtained. Your description of the picture 
coming into view is remarkably concise, and direct, and at the 
same time readable, or presented in a way to arouse interest of 

the casual reader It is like me to some degree. I think 

my desire to have it differ from all other pictures of me, may 
have caused the assistants to change it too materially. I will 
remain here most of the day, and while you sleep I'll go away. 

J. S. K. — You will remember the error in your message, 
where you said, "My son and wife are with me here," and that 
some one at home had condemned the messages as not genuine 
on that account, and then, I wrote an explanation for the book, 
showing how errors creep in, and how easily I accounted for it, 
by using the word "your" before wife, as that had occurred 
frequently, for both she and you had told me so; and now I 
feel I want to know if what I added is to your mind quite 
satisfactory ? 

Wm. Stead. — What you have said is true, attended by the 
wife of you, I always am, when I am here, for when the hand 
is writing she (your wife) is near; and if she thought it proper 



370 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

space, her thought with mine the pen would trace, as mixed 
photography could be without design, but carelessly. A person 
speaking loud in the same room when telephone is used, might 
be heard at a distance so. This is a mental instrument of similar 
degree, and often by an accident a message mixed may be. 

J. S. K. — / understand that a certain medium known to you 
and me, was first to hear that you had gone to spirit sphere, the 
fact being made known to her through her guide; and that / 
was first to receive word direct from you, through the hand 
of this present instrument, which was dated on the 16th of April; 
and that / was the first human that you recognized, and that 
recognised you when you first appeared in your transient body, 
at J. B. Jonson's, April 18th, 10 p. m. 

Wm. Stead. — I think she refers to the fact that I told you, 
that this hand was the first that I wrote through but it was not 
a case of favoritism on my part at all. Your guide Hypatia, 
capable and strong, came to me in my need and woe, and held 
me to my harmony, tilt I grew free from earth conditions' woe 
in me. What she says is true to this extent, that she was the 
first trumpet instrument used by me, but I came here with 
Hypatia, and wrote, assisted by her and Julia. It is of small 
moment anyway. / was too weak to use a trumpet at first, and 
had to be assisted every way to write or talk. 

Your explanation regarding interjection of words in error, is 
to me wonderfully exact description. Like to that which I just 
wrote, a person speaking in a room when telephone is being used, 
might have his or her voice conveyed to distant listener, without 
design, or desire to interfere with what was being done by 
speaker at the 'phone. We all are in a state of harmony, and no 
deceiving evil thinker is allowed at hand. This is attended to 
by her (the instrument's) small elemental servants known to 
thee as "Mike" and "Lala Lee." Outside are strangers, inside 
are friends in harmony, as your guides, her guides and such ones 
as James and Myers, and others who work for good of all human- 
ity like you are trying now to do. Serving spirits may be crude 
in some degree, but they all love and serve in harmony 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 371 

The description of my picture is remarkable and assists your 
scientific endeavor to prove the fact of continuity of life. 

J. S. K. — You know the attitude assumed by a certain inex- 
perienced one, that the messages over your name were not 
genuine. 

Wm, Stead. — The messages were written by my dictation. 
This is true, the same as it is true that I was sitter for the picture. 
I would like to have them published as far as I myself am con- 
cerned, but if you know of any serious reason, why they should 
not be, do with them as you think it best. / do not see what harm 
'twould be if it should be proved true, that I communciate through 
many men. Does it not also prove I come again? If you were 
spirit free, zvith all your thinking life and energy, would you 
not go to every open door, and use each power at hand, and then 
feel sad, to see so little was your power to do? It is that case 
with me. I think and argue too. Why cannot you be blessed 
with psychic power to touch and see and hear the loving spirits 
near, when others who do not make use of it like you would 
do, are blessed indeed. I also tried in every way to teach man- 
kind, but often found them most perverse and blind. 

J. S. K. — 'Friend Stead, if you know its wording do you 
approve of my Pronunciamento on the first page of my book? 

Wm. Stead. — I do indeed, 'tis stated like a creed, and semi- 
prayer, or dedicatory benediction. 

J. S. K. — I would like to have your opinion as to whether 
law or public sentiment would be opposed to the publication of 
the contents of the messages from members of the Royal Family, 
which is in no way disrespectful? 

Wm. Stead. — It would not seem to me to be in any way a 
harm to Royalty. It is well known that our good Queen was 
student of this thought, and thinkers of this age have liberal 
grown, so they allow a man to think quite free, and all the state- 
ments you have made have come to you through medium's aid, 
and what you think is what you say. I think it is a book of 
experience and belief; and will so impress any reader. You do 
not use the names of Royalty in any but respectful way; and 



372 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

I believe no word they'll say, I do, and I believe it would apply 
for even a law' court could not question that you so received it, 
and that to you it seemed acceptable and true. To me it seems 
a readable interesting description of mind in normal and sub- 
normal consciousness, and I fail to see wherein it is not right 
or free from stain. I'll write to you today again. I'll step aside 
and let Hypatia be writer instead of me. 

2.30 p.m., 28th December, 1912. From Hypatia. — I wish 
to say that I have been with you the whole week through, and 
I with you believe 'twill be beyond question of law or creed, 
and you will feel quite glad in end; and realize your woe was 
friend; for it has armed you for a fight that is ahead, you fear, 
but as I see, no fight will be. The danger has passed. Near 
to you is good indeed, and you will be made proud and strong, 
and what you pray will come to you this very day. 

J. S. K. — Thank you, Hypatia, for what you say. 

2.45 p. m., 28th December, 1912. From William James. — We 
are listeners, interested ones indeed. I am William James who 
write. It was to me a grief and woe that I could not use your 
pen so to> write upon your pad; and here I wish to say, that I 
will yet do that act for you. 

J. S. K. — I never met you in human life, and when you 
materialized for me, I felt somewhat disappointed, as I expected 
to see an old man, with gray hair, and instead, it appeared to 
me as shade of red. 

William James. — After we are in spirit for a time, we go 
back to our youth or prime, and so I do appear since I am living 
here, like to a man of forty-five or fifty at the most. It was 
myself at best, and you will find it true that it was I who so 
appeared to you. My idea was that the picture of me as gray 
were common to humanity, and might be in your memory, there- 
fore I showed myself to you as myself whom you never knew. 
My hair was reddish blonde, and later it was mixed with gray 
and nearly white when I was free from my own frail anatomy. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 373 

From F. W. H. Myers. — I gave to Professor James first 
opportunity, as it was understood by you; and when he failed, 
I thought now I will wait till I have strength to try and surely 
do; and this I did in sight of you. It seems divulged to be to 
you, the fact of my appearance true. We have been talking 
here today; and wondering why we cannot with this hand give 
our personality. The laws of God's domain are strange beyond 
compare, and it was myself who was there to view of you. I 
took the pen in hand and thought that I might it command, but 
after second effort, the power of support was gone from me, and 
I was spirit only without power to rule the pen. I now intend 
to try again at future day, and hope to be successful in the view 
of you, upon your office pad to sign my name, as I did when 
on earth. My appearance to you was not so very plain, but what 
I tried to do was write to you. 

J. S. K. — Friend Myers, can you not write for me, something 
of such a character as will prove your own personality? 

Myers. — I will answer the question when I may, perhaps 
some other time today. 

From Queen Victoria. — My beloved subject, I, Victoria, 
have listened to your thought and prayer, and woe, and I for 
one cannot see why it should not be produced in print, what I 
have written so, through psychic hand. It is the truth and many 
living men knew I believed that spirits come again, and if I have 
not won the prize by speaking words I promised you, it is not 
fault of me. I surely thought I did it so, that it made living 
mortals know. There is a mental tension there (at Julia's Bureau), 
that jars capacity to do; but it is to me quite enigmatical, the 
same as it has been to you. It is like a repellant force, and jars 
us from our plan and course. 

My son Edward, and my consort Albert, both believe that it 
will not be cause of harm or injury tot you, but we may err, so 
talk with man of law, if you believe it wise. In other books we 
have been mentioned so, at least myself and Albert good and 
true, and loved by me the same as wife to you. Alice also to 
me very dear, and I found comfort in a; way, because of words 



374 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

that I believed came from the dear ones through the different 
psychic instruments that I had opportunity to use and see. 

Yes, I would have signed on the pad for you, if there had been 
sufficient power. I'd have given my home signature familiar 
to the family, and others too; and I still hope this thing to do. 
Hypatia is wide awake and tries in every way to fulfill prayers 
of you. 

The medium new (private lady psychic in Toledo) and doctor 
psychic too, gave to you hope of future promise in case of Jon- 
son's silence or death. 

J. S. K. — At this point the psychic's hand ceased to write for 
Her Majesty, but did so for another, and hence I enquired by 
speaking, is Queen Victoria still here? If so I wish to say I am 
grateful for her encouragement. 

From Victoria. — Yes, I Victoria remain, but wishing a slight 
rest, I let a stranger to me speak, till I should be in readiness 
to write. You will sleep well tonight. It is a wise thing for 
you to fast, for you have not a need of food. I was of your 
temperament in some degree; and I will stay near you, and be 
able to write at future date upon a pad you hold in your own 
hand. I will, if possible to me, fulfill what I have promised you 
that I would do. 

Etherializations will appear to your mortal view, life-like but 
transparent. I say it because I remain, but it is given to me by 
another. I will go now and let your spirit brother David write 
to you, my subject true. Goodnight. 

11.22 a.m., 29th December, 1912. From Hypatia. — I am pre- 
pared to write for you in any way you ask me to. It is as easy 
for me to write in one order as another. 

I have with me at present time your wife and spirit brother, 
and Jesse too, nephew of you, your daughter also is with May, 
and will write later in the day. 

From Wm. T. Stead. (No. 39.) la listener am, to what 
you say to me today. I am also studying the features of this 
cut before me. I believe that I, a spirit bereft of earthly clay, do 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 375 

really look more like to the picture received by you at Bangs 
sisters. 

When I appear to you in seances, do I not in some degree 
appear as in the picture here? 

J. S. K. — The picture which came into view at Chicago on 
April 27th, was certainly a true picture of your form, and clothed 
appearance, as you came from the cabinet in a transient body 
to me in the Jonson seance on the 18th of April, the difference 
in time being only nine days. 

Wm. T. Stead. — / told you true it was not a fake, or 
fraudulent. It is my opinion, and this opinion is founded on 
experience, and observation, that the spirit, or soul, if you prefer 
that word to designate that which departs from man, when life 
goes out, is personally engraved and impressed, and truly is the 
man, and I myself believe I look like this the picture here. If you 
were kicked or battered in the face — to human view the scar 
would show; but when you were a spirit free, the normal face 
would show to thee, or to the ones like you in spirit free. Old 
age and circumstances of my life, would change my face and hair 
in some degree, but when at ease my spirit free comes forth 
to view, it would appear more like this cut to you. In the private 
lady psychic's seance (on December 24th) I made a special effort 
to appear as I was known or remembered. At Bangs sisters I 
had it in view, that I should give a picture true of me, as glorified 
by being spirit free, and thus remove all thought of trickery of 
these the sisters gifted with this power. Why is it that it cannot 
be published as what you received at Bangs sisters, I myself 
cannot see? It was so received by you, and if it looks like me 
even in slight degree, it does as well as much of human effort 
in that line. Take this one's photo, is it like to her (the psychic) 
and if it may go forth as artist's work, I see no reason why the 
same privilege cannot be granted to me. If relative of mine 
(a cousin) unbiased by affection's jealousy, can see in this my 
looks, improved may be, why should it not go forth to show 
the general public what to you is interesting, as a view of spirit 
face as shown to you. 



376 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

J. S. K. — I think I'll act on the suggestion of Hypatia, in 
regard to publishing two pictures of myself. The one, side view 
at age of 65, will appear at the end of Chapter XXX, devoted 
to yourself, while the one, full face view, at age 70, will face 
my declaration at the first of the book, and though they both 
are pictures of myself, which many might discredit, because 
there are so many points of difference, and still they both were 
photographic pictures of me. Though the earlier one is 65 it 
looks older than the one at 70, and so in your case, with a greater 
range for difference between the human and the spirit pictures; 
and hence whate'er the doubt of others, we both know that your 
picture and my picture are each genuine. 

Wm. Stead. — I like the idea also. The first one is presented 
(in side view) in a view that cuts off natural look of you. If 
you so do, and say the question arises, are we as spirits free, 
changed in our looks in some degree. And was it not the truth 
that Stead so wrote to me by written words at a distance, saying 
the picture thus presented was a view of him at then, and alto- 
gether new. It is my intention to sign my name on your pad 
too, when it is held in hand of you, 

J. S. K. — Hypatia, do you approve of my having the picture 
of Stead published? 

Hypatia. — I favor it because my opinion is in the line that 

you present I also favor it because if I had not favored 

it, I would not have allowed you to have the cut made. 

J. S. K. — You intimated the last time I was here, that I would 
have another sitting with Jonson, but that it would not be as 
successful as some in the past, and this I since found to be true. 
Still I feel satisfied to have the evidence from James and 
Myers, even though it was incomplete, it was partially successful, 
for they materialized, and made the attempt to write; and I am 
encouraged to anticipate greater success at some future day, 
with favorable opportunity, and thank them both, for the effort 
at fulfillment of a previous promise, made to me at another time 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 377 

and place, namely through this psychic here, other than the one 
through whom they materialized to me. 

From F. W. H. Myers. — I felt the need of effort strong, 
for I was told 'twas my last opportunity to get my signature, 
in public view presented in the first book of you. His (Jonson's) 
vital force is low. His winter work is ended quite, and I am 
glad that you appreciate my effort strong to write. I presented 
myself as more youthful than pictures taken at the last, but how 
I looked as shown to you is in your memory fast. 

From Prof. William James. — I, William James, listen with 
earnestness to what you say, the why this one cannot tell you 
how Myers looks is because her (the psychic's) guides do not 
allow him to tell it. She don't see him and if she could, she 
could describe him. It is true as you say, but in a way the little 
guides depend upon her conscious knowledge in the matter. They 
hold a private censorship over it. In the message in which 
"Martha," your first wife, was mentioned, the instrument had 
never heard that name associated with you, and she did not 
know, if it was right or not. It slipped in, and as she sent the 
message to you as her hand wrote it, you received it, thus, but 
if she'd copied it, she might have left it out, for fear of error. 
Her little guides do not judge, except by her judgment or past 
experience. It is a peculiar thing that you are working out, dear 
Brother King, and if I can in any way at any future time complete 
or compete in effort to write my name, I will do so. 

In regard to the description of Myers it is like this hand not 
being permitted to write in imitation of my own. 

We have been about here, since you came. In fact we attended 
you here, and at the other seances (in Toledo) and I have 
contended with the ancient guides at her side, or managers of 
her capacity to do, and I have argued, if it is her wish, and your 
wish, and Hypatia's wish, why can I not be permitted to use 
these pliable muscles in giving my signature to you. It produces 
no effect beyond their permission to let her know that I so wish 
to do. 

From Dr. Sharp (Guide of Etta Wriedt). — Your book is 



378 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

shown to me in symbol of a book upon a cloud, and by its aid 
you'll lift the shroud of death in large degree from readers, or 
humanity. It is my opinion that your book "Dawn of the Awakened 
Mind" will be a standard of its kind. 

My medium is not exhausted, and she enjoys the work, and 
she will feel proud of the words you say regarding work of her. 
Yes, it will please her. She don't want pictures of her in print. 
I, Dr. Sharpe, want you to decide yourself what to do regarding 
the picture painted by the spirit hand. It is my opinion its better 
left out, but my opinion does not coincide with what Hypatia 
and your band believe is best. I, too, admire how you're dressed. 
It climaxes your dignity in very marked degree. 

As the words were spoken out, as they were written, they 
provoked a humorous remark or two, from those sitting in the 
room, and provoked as well a quiet titter of laughter among 
them, when Dr. Sharpe quickly responded as here follows: 

"Oh, I don't question your dignity, or respected position. I 
was simply remarking on your choice of plumage. I believe the 
selection of chapters or pictures in your book is truly a matter 
of choice, like your selection of apparel, really none of my affair. 
The season's greeting to you, Doctor dear; I am delighted too, 
tO' see you here, in happiness and rest. It is for you the very 
best you can do. As to the spelling of my name, / think it should 
be signed zvith an "e" added after the "p" , it is as I have used 
it so. 

I'll give your respects to Etta, Doctor King. It is to me, 
speaking seriously, a joy to have met and respected you, so many 
years of this your mortal life. Your statements regarding her 
work will please and delight my medium, Etta Wriedt. She 
likes and respects you, and I also do. Your Professional brother, 
Dr. Sharpe. [The way he wrote his own name in human life, 
others omit the e now.] 

From Julia Ames. — Gains are like golden grains of sand, 
and what your book is here, is like a mountain made of precious 
stone. Each statement has a beauty of its own, but all together 
it is good and strong. I wish to help thi9 work along, and help 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 379 

my medium William Stead to be able at later date to prove that 
this is true what he has written through this hand for you. 
I also like the picture too. 

From Clegg Wright. — To Dr. King I wish to say that when 
my spirit went to stay, I was for a time clairaudient like in power 
to sense the earth and spirit sphere. I was transferred to the 
other end of the tube of my consciousness. I myself was complete 
where my consciousness was accustomed to be taken when I was 
entranced. After I was there by a similar process my conscious- 
ness was allowed to return to the vicinity of my dead body. I 
could sense it at a distant point, and yet be conscious of my 
spiritual surroundings. I saw William Stead, and Julia Ames, 
who by the way are here now — and many of the noted, advanced 
thinkers, that I have met from time to time. Of course my wife, 
of whom I was deprived for year or so, was at my side, and with 
me during my transition from ill body, into consciousness of this 
the glory of eternal life. The mind set free. I was an analytical 
thinker, and I often wondered too, the same as you, and so I 
make a picture of the way that I was taken from this life to stay. 
It was like going into a trance state, except that state in my 
case was an unconscious one, except my own consent to have 
it done. But in transition, I was broad awake, and knew my 
friends, and felt the break, that set me free. Oh, life is not the 
wonder or the good, that men believe it is. To me before I died, 
I felt that I so wished to live, and gain my health, so that I might 
work do, but after I was free I felt and realized and knew, the 
wonders of the spirit view, and wondered how I could have felt 
content to live and suffer as I had to do, in body frail, and thin 
and pale. 

My guides Rushton, John Shaw and others are with me here, 
and help me all they can. I am told this the work you do, will 
benefit your fellow man. "Dawn of the Awakened Mind" is a fit 
name and strong, and you will feel the benefits of years of 
study, now before so very long. Your contention is proved in 
many a way. Spirits do come to earth to stay, and to assist men 
on their way. I, Clegg Wright, am here, and I am just as real, 



380 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

and just as much in life as when I was a visitor at Lily Dale 
before. I see you too, I also see why I was shifted. I am 
nearef and beyond the rhyming necessity. Eberling, the instru- 
ment's guide, in accordance with the expressed wish of my guides, 
permitted me to be shifted beyond the rhyming zone. 

It is a great privilege indeed to be a teacher of teachers, and 
I am told that you will cause much discussion, but it will be of 
a friendly, or argumentative type. What a frail thing a man is 
anyway. It is my condition that the medium gets, but is it not 
a comfort to be able to write like myself, and not rhyme? I am 
glad she is protected so she don't feel the condition I went 
through. I suffered more than people knew. Yes, I want to 
be of those who try to give characteristic signatures to you. 

I see Myers here. If I get into the knack of entering this 
central zone, I'll give description of him to you, some time when 
censorship is off its guard. 

J. S. K. — This description by Clegg Wright has proved 
wonderfully interesting, and brings to my view something new 
in the operation of this wonderful instrument. 

From John Shaw, Guide of Clegg Wright. — Yes, it is a 
most peculiar mediumship, Dr. King. I, John Shaw, his guide 
and speaker, am a student from this view, and state this fact to 
you. Rhyming again you say, well that is true, I will now take 
Clegg Wright away, and he will come another day. 

J. S. K. — Hypatia, I have heard from each of those whom 
I expected, and therefore am free to give attention and reception 
to others, who have or have not shown, spoken or written to 
me; and before I could give verbal expression to this idea, I 
am greeted by Clegg Wright, whom I did not expect, but whom 
I always considered genuine as a psychic, though not investigated 
or studied as others were. His presence here, and his description 
of his former trance condition, and his experience in departing 
from his mortal tenement, and passing through different phases 
of soul condition, with his psychic experience, and his wonder- 
fully clear-cut differentiation of the conditions existing in and 
actions of the subjective self, during the unconsciousness of the 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 381 

trance state, and the consciousness of the passing hence, once the 
cord of connection broke, and the spirit gained the greater free- 
dom, without regrets regarding his separation from his poor 
worn-out body or home of clay, were each and all exceedingly 
interesting and instructive, and were given in his natural way, 
through the psychic, without the usual rhyming, which of itself 
is most exceptional. To his guides as well as to himself I am 
very thankful for this, to me, new knowledge gained/ and for 
all that he has been pleased to communicate today. 

The order of communications having been completed, if there 
be any who have a further word to say, well and good, I await 
your pleasure, and will greet you with heartfelt welcome. 

I cannot print all the communications, it would make the 
book too large, but I select those which to me appear more 
evidential; and it should be remembered that I have intimated 
previously, that this book will soon be followed by another of 
equal or even greater interest than this one. 

From May. — I've waited long for you to get time to write, 
or have her write for me to you. It is a little careless what 
you do with that scarf pin (and unusual also, for I am careful of 
it). If you would pin it on the tie, and lay the tie in your valise, 
in haste of need, there would not be a danger of its loss maybe. 
It would be to you a great woe, to lose that pin. You see and 
know I'm looking after you. It may be that her hand (the 
psychic's) will be allowed to write in signatures at later date. 
Editor Brown is here, he calls you "Son," also. 

From George Brown. (This honored man, with whom I was 
employed as long ago as 1870, was kind to me and fatherly, and 
called me "Son."— J. S. K.) — A "babe" of you (the wife's pet 
name) is here with me, and she is comely too. I'll stay beside 
her here, for she as wife of you, my relative may be. Editor I 
was, of the "Globe," and what I had in view was to present 
a symbol of it in some way to you, but your guides, and exalted 
spirits, from on high, tell me to wait, and soon or late, I'll be 
able to give this "test" to you. 



382 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

From May. — Did you change the grammar, dear, at where I 
first spoke to you? Yes, do it so. Don't let it go. 

From Des Asia (The Ancient Guide). — I, Asia, giant strong, 
walk in a pace ahead of you. A beautiful name, a worthy cause, 
a lifetime of experience and research. Do not fear, I, Asia, see 
a glorious success to thee. 

From Dr. Sharp. — I see Stead's point of view regarding 
publication of his picture. He thinks let the public judge, if that 
might be a wise course. It will arouse discussion to be sure, 
but no one can deny that you so received it for a price. 

From May. — I would not have you careless be of any small 
details of the protection of this book, a work of years that you 
have struggled for in hope and tears. / rhyme because it is 
easier to so do. If I let it rhyme it sort of runs itself like to 
a pianola or piano-player; but in the case of Mr. Wright, John 
Shaw and Rushton served instead of rhyming guides. 

The whole of it is good; and when 'tis understood how you 
obtained Stead's picture, and what view you take of it, 'tis wise 
to do as you have thought of late you would. What harm can 
it be if the picture of Stead is reproduced in your book., It was 
his wish, it is your property, let it arouse discussion as it will. 
It will but sell more copies so. It will arouse attention in the 
two lands of France, and Germany; and Italy and Spain in less 
degree. They all have spirits that will be set free in time. May 
I am and guides assist me some in this my last dictation to the 
hand, for this time. Mr. Stead is trying hard to gain the power 
to write his name in signature for you. Mother King is a great 
comfort to me here. Gertie, May Donna, John and father, and 
several relatives and friends besides are often together near to 
you. Mabel Kelly was here with me today, and Martha King 
was too. Widower you are not this time, but with me more 
and more till angels lift you from this life up to my heaven 
shore. A road well trod it is to be and so you'll travel easily. 
Don't weep, my dear, for it is best. To be deprived of me is 
hard indeed, but what is done can never be undone. No vascilat- 
ing in a death decree. No power can give me back to you in 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 383 

home life, as I used to do; but I am growing- beautiful, and in 
a way content, and I would like to have you rest and realize, 
that I with arms entwined about your neck, will follow every- 
where no matter what you do, or who are there. As to Mrs. 

C 's photographic work, be it good or bad there will be other 

opportunity, where I will stand beside you in a photo picture 
as I have promised you that I would do. And like medium new, 
will photograph me for you. I was there too. (Where I was 
taking part in a discussion. J. S. K.) I like to see you give it 
to them too. I like to have justice done. Don't omit! to change. 
Ifs me to It's I, a slip made in grammar, when I first spoke to 
you through the trumpet at Mrs. Wriedt's. (See Chapter XIII.) 

J. S. K. — I will attend to that. I also think that as a test, 
that is most remarkable, for that occurred in November, 1911, 
and the chapter is a record of that date, while this is the 29th 
December, 1912. 

From King Solomon of Israel. — Rake the hay into piles 
and stock it to your purpose. I, King Solomon, greet you, 
brother of the Lodge of God. Let me proceed to say, that I 
am with you in this work, and hope to be able to prove a master 
of most high degree. "Dawn of the Awakened Mind" is to be 
a success, in spite of what may have been said, or what the future 
ones may say. A bright star in your crown, is to be its renown. 
Why the picture came will later be to you apparent. When one 
has enough to prove a point he should be satisfied, and I believe 
you have enough and to spare. You are deprived of her you 
love, but you have years and health; and fame will come from 
book to you, and guidance will be given you from time to time 
through psychics new, and this one too. In regard to the rhyme, 
it may be a little tiresome at times, but it is at least quaint and 
peculiar, and I think it would be difficult to fake it. It shows 
a subnormal power, and what that power is, is what you, as well 
as the reader, are endeavoring to find out. It is her own or 
voluntary, that you have carefully observed. It is also practically 
limitless, for you have tested that well. It does not diminish. 
It does not exhaust. It changes materially from one individual 



384 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

message to another. I likei your method of describing it like a 
plow shaping a furrow. When Clegg Wright wrote, the plow 
was straightened. How was that done, you ask? Clegg Wright 
wished it. He accomplished it. What did he do? And why don't 
we all pursue the same course ? Are questions that arise in mind 
of you. Well it is not easy to answer questions in regard to 
an unknown quantity. Mind is what? to begin with. It comes 
from where ? etc. Oneness of purpose we all have in our endeavor 
to help you along this path to fame. To your taste fix it. You 
are the doctor, and this is your dose, that you prepared for the 
patient (the public). The palatable part you have fixed well. 
The good it will do is endless, or will continue through the 
century after you are dead. Broaden a stream and go your way. 
Another one can never place again the stream within the course 
it would have gone, without your aiding hand. Broaden the 
thought of many men, and what a myriad of thinkers gain by 
following the thought of you, that you have placed in public 
view. I dream no more, I hope, I see that good completed it is 
soon to be. And the exalted ones from highest shore will help 
you onward evermore, until your time of life is through, and 
angels lift you into final sleep. Don't worry, brother Mason 
true. A crown of glory is awaiting you. I'll do more for you 
at the next opportunity. I have to do. Otelleo tells me to let 
you know that he is Mason of a high degree also. The medium's 
judgment is not necessary. She does not really care if we in 
message err. Oh we will do all we can to help you aid your fellow 
man. Otelleo and Asia and I are often together. 



CHAPTER XXXV 

I HAVE already dealt with earlier evidence, in my argument 
as presented in Chapter XX, as having reference to my 
wife in spirit life, and the proving of her human personality ; 
and will deal with some evidence which has presented since, 
including that which pertains to Wm. T. Stead, and a few among 
the many others ; and will ask the reader to synthetically gather 
evidence from the varied individual messages ; and exercise your 
faculty of reason, while searching for the truth. 

Be it first remembered that there were many guides and loved 
ones, friends and men of note, some of whom I never knew, 
but who from interest in the work and book volunteered their 
services, and offered evidence to prove the after life. As I have 
said elsewhere, the book is full of cobweb evidence, that is to say, 
the evidence connects in many ways, as different as with time 
and place, medium and phase, through which one spirit person- 
ality can demonstrate, as for example I'll state that my guide 
Hypatia, while near my side at home, would see me write a note 
or letter with my pen and leave it on my table through the night, 
to mail it on the morrow to my friend and co-worker Wm. T. 
Stead, across the sea in London; and though I was alone and 
no human saw or heard or read or knew it, still Hypatia at my 
request could carry its contents, and deliver them through the 
trumpet at Julia's Bureau and to Wm. T. Stead, for whom 
intended, before reading my letter. (See Chapter VIII.) Some- 
what later, at my request, Hypatia met a Quebec friend of mine 
at Jonson's in Toledo, Western Ohio, while in her transient body 
as materialized, and conversed with him; and sent by him a 
message to me. (See Chapter VIII.) Again on one occasion a 
skeptic friend doubting her personality and date and place of 
origin, undertook by quizzing to find out and got all the informa- 
tion asked for, and something more, of personal nature, and 
found himself in an unpleasant plight. 

385 



386 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

I gave a public address in Toronto, during which I stated, 
that I frequently conversed with Hypatia while in her transient 
body. Two Chicago gentlemen were present, and neither would 
believe it to be true. Shortly after these same two men attended 
a Jonson seance in Toledo, on which occasion Hypatia material- 
ized, called them each by name, and asked them if they would 
write to Dr. King and tell him that Hypatia, his guide, had 
materialized and introduced herself to them ; and requested them 
to write, and so inform him, which they did; and the letter was 
attested by all the sitters in the seance, and forwarded to, and 
received by me. 

Again, take the evidential messages in connection with her 
various appearance at Jonson's, and at other dates and places 
when she also talked ; and by use of trumpet at Detroit and other 
places, auditors could hear her voice and conversation; also by 
using vocal organs of trance mediums; likewise by controlling 
the hand of psychics to write. So all the time from first to last, 
her spirit personality shows forth in evidence, as everyone can 
see and appreciate. After reading the book through, the interested 
reader and investigator can take up her case only, and follow 
it all carefully; and so in a similar manner, with each or all or 
any particular one, among the many personalities, in everything 
they do. The words and demonstrations of each are interesting, 
but time and space prevent my dealing with the bulk of them, 
in argument by summing up the evidence to establish both spirit 
and human identity as well as personality of each; but it will 
prove most interesting, and also more or less conclusive, to follow 
up consecutively the message maker or demonstrator, and see the 
termination; and also trace out the intercommunication one with 
the other, and that one with another, by co-operation and cobweb 
connection, with the act or word or sight or sound producing 
evidence. 

So also there were many acts and references by words and 
messages 'By wife, which friends and others can verify at home ; 
and others still, which other persons can verify as evidential in 
seance ; and I need only mention a few of them, which may prove 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 387 

interesting to readers ; and is most conclusive to me ; and of date 
subsequent to the November, 1911, establishment of her human 
personality ; and which also connect with it, as per example : 
In November she requested me to take her single diamond ring 
out of the safety deposit vault, and carry it to a jeweller, and 
have it wrought into a "safety" scarf-pin; and this I complied 
zvith on my return to Toronto. So when again I visited a lonson 
seance in Toledo, in April, 1912, and stood looking at and talking 
with both my spirit daughter and her mother, my spirit wife May, 
the latter reached for, and withdrew my scarf from within my 
vest, and turned it round and hunted for and found, and then 
tested the pin with her own fingers, that I had thus made, to 
prove to her own satisfaction that I had not only complied with 
her wish, but that the pin was positively "safety" ; and then 
replaced it where it belonged, and smiling said, "You used to 
be so proud of me when I was wearing it, and so I am most 
glad to know you wear it now." "It makes it easier for me to 
come to you." This is but one evidence of many, and this is truly 
of the most convincing kind to me. 

For a few moments I ask the reader to note a few facts in 
addition to those already referred to, which compel the conviction 
in me, that none other than May could have so presented them. 
In her communication through the writing psychic on February 
15, 1912, there is the suggestion and approval of the compilation 
of the evidence, and that of its publication. Again she makes 
her selection of the photograph of the book's author, two of 
which were at that very time on my desk ; and clearly expressed 
her preference as to which should appear in the book. "I see 
the picture too at the age of sixty-five years, and I am proud 
of it and you. I like the other one at the age of seventy, the 
best by far, for in it I see you as you are; and even if I write, 

it is to me a sorry sight to see you all alone Your latest 

picture (at 70) pleases me the best." 

And further, the design for the book's cover, and the other 
one symbolical, intended for the book, and brought to me for 
my selection, attracted her attention, and brought this communica- 



388 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

tion of April 8, 1912, through the writing psychic, which is in 
part: "I have watched the works of art as they were made for 
view of you, and we are of those near to you, and have aided 
you to wise selection with regard to what was brought to you 
to see. The beauty of it all is as we wished it, dear. It emphasizes 
carefully what they will see and hear about in written text before 
them spread regarding living, and their living dead." 

[Note: — The message came from New York State through 
the Human-Psychic-Telephone, and via postal route, while the 
developed sketches were made for me, from my suggested, pictures 
by pencil drawn, and these all lay on my office table in my home 
in Toronto.] 

In Chapter XII I've carefully explained the ante-mortem 
agreement between us. I also explained, following the November 
series, how May redeemed her promise; and now in order to 
establish in the minds of thinking men, what our agreement has 
accomplished; and how in thought and soul's desire or prayer, 
that May might confirm what she and I both said and did, as I 
had noted in Chapter XII, she on the 16th day of April, 1912, 
through the hand of the Human-Psychic-Telephone, sent this 
message on to me: "I am glad to be the one so dear to you, 
and so the key that opened up the truth to thee. "I'll write it 
all as you request of me. (See Chapter XXIX.) Hearts are not 
easily divided; and I shall love and love you more though death 
has entered through the door." 

And now I wish to say to the reader, if still you doubt, turn 
back and read just what May wrote, the whole of Chapter XXIX, 
and surely then you'll be convinced, for every statement in it 
relating to the earthly portion of it is to my knowledge true; 
and I now thus confirm it. 

Of May's messages to me, or her conversations, not only those 
which are included in my book, but the many private ones, which 
deal with matters of my daily concern, which could only be known 
by her from her spirit presence with me constantly, are of them- 
selves of such exactness of detail as to be to me entirely con- 
vincing. And then again the voice and conversation by the aid 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 389 

of a trumpet, is so natural to life, and no two voices are exactly 
alike, that it were impossible to doubt them, or to be mistaken; 
and she made herself known, and talked with a Toronto man 
and wife, friends of hers, at Jonson's, and sent a message home 
by them to me. 

I ask any man, be he skeptic or critic, to deny if he can, the 
assertion that no substitute in all creation could duplicate the 
voice and conversation of your wife successfully, with both of 
which you were daily familiar for quarter of a century. But when 
these features are acfded to by the presentation of her transient 
form, together with its operation as a perfect duplication of her- 
self in human life, in all its varied circumstances, which you can 
call to mind; and further that these conditions are presented 
correctly no matter when the time, nor where the place, nor who 
the instrument by whose presence it is made possible to occur, 
will not all this kill the prejudice, the fraud or substitution 
hypothesis, along with all other suggested hypotheses ; and point 
to the necessity for an awakened mind to comprehend as I do, 
a demonstrated truth? In concluding my reference to my wife, 
/ now assert that the accumulated evidence, from first to last, 
is so profoundly convincing to my senses, intelligence, my intui- 
tion and my reason, that I now declare that I am quite as sure 
of her continuity, return, communion, identity and human per- 
sonality as I am of my own existence; and this, so far at least, 
I have been constantly able to demonstrate. 

Again, for an instance of evidence, in proof of my mother's 
human personality I refer the reader to the demonstration 
recorded in Chapter IV in a Moss seance, at MacRoberts' 
residence in London, Ontario, in 1894, and which is there num- 
bered 7. My mother had crippled fingers with rheumatic arthritis, 
which she designated "hickory-nut joints;" and covered them 
with loose silk gloves or mitts, and held them out for sitters in 
the seance, to see and feel and examine them, for the purpose 
of proving to me and to them, her personal identity and human 
personality ; and later, on March 12th, in 1912, in message sent 
through Human-Psychic-Telephone to me, while she was in my 



390 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

home, and while I watched the hand while she (the psychic) wrote, 
and this was what she said, "My son, be sure that I love you 
for yourself alone, and often stay here in the home with thee. 
/ do not need now to hide my. hands for they are well, and 
beautiful to see, but I will be with you, my dear, if you are there, 

if you are here / feel proud to write, to show you what 

you understand, that I may freely use my hands." And then 
again in April of 1912, when she came to me at Jonson's some 
eighteen years after her first demonstration, and there she let me 
see and feel of them to prove she had no bad conditions now. 

What could be more natural and reasonable for my mother 
with restricted opportunities, than to utilize three different 
mediums, at intervals of years, and long distances apart, to satisfy 
me, her own son, by reasoning out, and demonstrating and 
proving her personality to me, in what would, perhaps, be the 
very best way ? I do not hesitate to say, it is all quite true ; and 
as strong as any evidence I can offer, and it convinces me ? What 
meaneth all this, and much more through the passing years, 
produced in this connected way, if it be not my mother seeking 
communication with me? Would it not otherwise be useless 
quite, and no purpose served? 

And now another instance, but not the last. My spirit wife 
May told me in message of February 20, 1912, that when I 
would go to Jonson's, at such time as Hypatia advised me to 
go thither, thai our spirit daughter May Donna would sing for 
me. So when I got there I saw and spoke with her in her material- 
ized form, and asked her if she could now sing for me? She 
replied, "Not tonight, dear papa, but before you leave Toledo;" 
and at my last seance of that series there she walked out from the 
cabinet into the circle, and sang as she had promised me a sweet 
and inspiring selection which all applauded. (See Chapter 
XXVIII.) Before we parted she promised me to write me many 
messages which she has since done, and through "The Human- 
Psychic-Telephone" in New York State ; and also conversed many 
times through trumpets. 

I will ask another question. Is this case not either confirmatory, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 391 

circumstantial, or direct evidence; or all of evidential character? 
Can the reader explain how, and why, it happens thus, if it 
be not the discarnate spirit of my daughter brought back to 
earth, to help to prove my contention, that to all humans there 
is granted 1st, Continuity of life; 2nd, Spirit return; and 3rd, 
Spirit communion? 

I had an old-time friend when I was in my youth, who was 
then my instructor in practical chemistry at old Toronto Uni- 
versity, more than forty years ago, I mean Professor Croft. He 
must have been for many years in the other life, for he was old 
and gray at that time, but he still remembers me; and he too 
writes through psychic to identify for me his human personality. 

Lily, the cabinet spirit of Mrs. Moss, and who materialized 
at my first seance in London in 1894, did so again with self- 
same feature, mannerism and name, fully eighteen years later; 
and had the same appearance and voice and conversed with 
myself and wife, at Lily Dale, in 1907; and again conversed 
with me in 1912; and was present when both Mrs. Moss and 
my wife May materialized in Mrs. Well's seance. She had 
promised at London, that she would join my band after Mrs. 
Moss's passing over, and did so at this seance. 

A form also presented the same time as Lily in London, which 
claimed to be a brother member in a secret society. He took me 
in the cabinet with him and there, in our seclusion, proved him- 
self by signs and words and grip to me ; then with cabinet after 
lighted up; and in the circle later, was further known and 
recognized and spoken with by several who knew him well in life. 

My father showed himself to me in 1894 at the Moss seance, 
London, as record No. 8, in form and feature and voice, and 
spoke loud and clear his name, and relationship to me ; and also 
showed his swollen hands as evidence of his disease ; and in the 
hearing of the circle said, a note of which I made, "I still live 
and am able to bring to you proof of my continued existence," 
and also gave this message to me for his favorite grandson, 
"Tell Robbie that grandpa still lives." He also there told me, 
that some of the views I had held regarding future life, when 



392 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

he was with me, he had since found out were right, and eighteen 
years later for the first time through Jonson came again, and 
showed himself to me, expressing his pleasure and his approba- 
tion of the work which I was engaged in, the compilation of 
evidence for this book. The reader may ask me now, how can 
you be sure it was your father? and I answer just as I could in 
life by seeing, hearing and conversing with him, as I always 
did in life, and by the aid of my senses and my reason, as also 
by the evidence of swollen hands, message to grandson Robbie 
and reference to my views of the after life, which he had found 
nearer the truth then the orthodox views he expounded in the 
pulpit. Had the reader been similarly situated as myself, could 
he or she not say it was, or it was not his or her father, or 
mother, brother, sister or child with whom he or she was con- 
versing; and had lived daily an earth life of many years; and 
further not limited to a single interview, but extending over a 
period of years ; and not only presenting through a single phase, 
but by the aid of different instruments or mediums of each of 
several phases, they become as familiar as the earthly friends 
we similarly meet at intervals of time under changing conditions. 

Facts as Communicated to Me by Members of My Own 

Family, All in Spirit Life. 
My mother passed to spirit life in 1886, my father in 1894, my 
wife in 1911, and my daughter at the time of her birth. I had 
a special sitting with the automatic writer — the rhyming medium 
— >at Lily Dale, N. Y., beginning at 10.20 a.m., October 24, 
1913. My questions each and all were previously prepared at 
my home in Toronto, and retained by me all the time while there. 
The answer to each question was written with my fountain pen 
by the medium in a blank book, which I took with me, for the 
purpose, to her home and which book she returned to me at the 
close of the seance. I also made it plain at the beginning that 
both questions and answers would be made public by their 
inclusion in my book. So soon as each question was read aloud 
by me, the psychic's automatic hand recorded the response thereto. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 393 

J. S. K. 1. I thank you, Hypatia, for all the information you 
have imparted to me, and for your encouragement; and as you 
say you will remain while I am here, I will have further oppor- 
tunity to commune with you. First and foremost I wish to hold 
communion with my spirit wife and daughter for a little time; 
and then other relatives to follow during our first sitting today. 

Response by "May," My Spirit Wife. It is to me a joy to 
be here with you, and "Johnnie Boy" you are still to me, though 
I am where you cannot see me when I come in robe of white. 
I'll also hold the pen and write my signature. May Donna is 
with me present now. 

J. S. K. 2, There are many things I wish to ask about, and 
much, no doubt, you can tell of interest ; but we can only occupy 
a part of the time during my present visit, as I want to gather 
important material for publication in my second book. I com- 
muned with Hypatia, as you heard, and will hear again; and 
I will also probably hear from other guides and teachers who 
may be selected to impart important information. What would 
you like to talk about now ? 

Response by May. I have not changed for the worse, I can tell 
that to you; and I can also say in truth I am trying all I can 
to aid you in your second book; and I will try to come in view 
in spirit pictures as 'twas promised you that I would be able 
to do. 

J. S. K. 3. Referring to a trumpet seance in Mrs. Wriedt's 
seance room in Detroit in December of last year, as reported 
earlier in my book, you told me there you were going home to 
see your mother that night, but would be with me again at my 
morning seance next day. You did not tell me why you were 
going home, but gave me a surprise, by bringing back with you 
your father, it being the first occasion since he passed to spirit 
life, over twenty years ago. Now I want to ask you what guide 
or guides accompanied you and did you find your father at home ? 

Response by -May. It was to me granted, and Otelleo and 
Omar from your spirit band were with me on the journey to 
mother. Father was and is with her, and at her death they will 



394 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

be reunited. I was in wireless-like communion with Hypatia 
during the process, and capable master-like spirits not to me 
known shifted the scenes and made it possible for me to bring 
my father to the reach of you, as he then spoke through the 
trumpet with you. 

J. S. K. 4. What did your father think of that experience, 
or was he surprised to find it both strange and true ? Was John, 
your spirit brother, there? 

Response by May. John was the one who stayed with mother 
during the absence of father, so that father might know he could 
return to her as soon as he had talked to you through the 
trumpet. John and father will write for you if they can. 

J. S. K. 5. In what sphere is your spirit home at present time? 
and who shares that home with you? 

Response by May. My spirit home is like to a bower of 
vegetation in draperies of flowers and vines. I do not seem 
to be shut in by walls, but draperies of white, closed by my wish, 
seclude me from publicity. My father and brother come near, 
but my sister Gertie, and daughter May Donna are with me 
often, so I am never alone. One may be absent, but if both are 
absent, Hypatia or my teachers beautiful and new, now known 
to me, but not to you, lead me with care, and grant to me 
every prayer. 

J. S. K. 6. Does the guide introduced to you in your life by 
Hypatia when we were together at Jonson's as recorded by me, 
have aught relationship to you now? 

Response by May. Yes, Saphrona is my immediate guide 
or personal attendant like to a servant of superior attributes to 
my wish, as a trained nurse is to a babe, so is she to me. 

J. S. K. 7. If Hypatia is agreeable, and also you, I wish to 
make of these communings with Hypatia, you and other relatives 
a special allotment by itself, so it can be readily referred to. 

Response by May. Yes, I will aid you, and will also write 
with care a chapter clear, distinct and new, to occupy a part of 
the book "After the Dawn a Clearer View." 

J. S. K. 8. Have the members of your family, and of mine, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 395 

in spirit life, each separate homes? And are they all assigned 
to one sphere? 

Response by May. We are all in one plane or neighborhood- 
like surrounding, but each is in power to be alone, cast off for 
rest or meditation. I may also call to anyone, and with great 
ease they come to me, not by walking, which at first seemed 
strange to me, nor governed by the law of gravity; but with 
a sweeping ease of entrance, something like to the materializations 
in the private seance (with the private lady medium) but without 
delay or effort. I have things to do, so have they. If busy, 
cause for their delay would be by telepathic-like message told 
i to me. I do not need any loved one with me, because of the 
superior comfort of angel attainments. 

J. S. K. 9. When I pass to spirit realms will I have a separate 
home from you, or will the home be jointly ours? Do all spirits 
enter each and pass through all spheres, from earth plane advanc- 
ing like steps of a stairway? In what sphere did you stop, when 
first you passed over there, and what sphere is your home in 
now? 

Response by May. When you die I shall be with you at the 
time of your death, and from that time on we shall be in a home 
together, but I shall know things you have not attained; and I 
shall wish to go to places, when you will wish to rest, but where'er 
I am you will be able to speak to me, and as one we are to stay, 
no matter what the changes be in your life, or the life of me. 
I am in the necessity to believe objects necessary to my harmony; 
and while I remain in this earth-bound, or earth-like mental state 
in desire to have earth-life appearance, and earth-life objects, 
etc., I will truly be of the first sphere or growing state of soul ; 
and when I am in readiness to cease to need these things, then 
and then only will the change to third state be. It is not a 
necessity to change at all. I love my home too much to leave 
it now, and birds and animals and objects dear and near make 
it my own, and so it will be till I grow, and I wait for you and 
to have it be the home of us eventually. It is possible for us to 
be together as long as we are interested in the same things. My 



396 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

baby (May Donna) is in truth of an advanced sphere, for to 
her earth objects are not a necessity. She was adopted by an 
angel mother and so can readily do and be contented in advanced 
state, not yet to me possible. They are advanced and so I if 
the sphere is subdivided in proportion of seven as has been done 
to indicate development, I would, at this time, be of fourth 
attainment. May Donna may stay with me indefinitely, but she 
may also dematerialize to me and disappear, as I would do in 
seances to you. Gertie (sister) never does this, in fact she cannot 
do it, so she is like to myself in fourth degree, and will not like 
May Donna be for many a year of living here. 

J. S. K. 10. Can you name those who met you when you 
passed through the gate of death, and accompanied you to your 
heavenly abode? 

Response by May. Father and Gertie (sister) and John 
(brother), May Donna (daughter), Hypatia and Saphrona 
(guide) were the principal ones; though others like to David 
(author's brother) and Jesse (author's nephew) were near. I 
did not sense it all. The process of change causes the mentality 
to be blurred in consciousness of detail. I wanted you, and 
wanted to return, and so was left at rest until I could be made 
to know that I was dead and had to go. 

J. S. K. 11. How far, in our miles, do you suppose you are 
from the home in which I live ; or do you know how long it took 
you to go from your body to where you were left to repose ? 

Response by May. We are not limited by distance and I 
cannot tell it. Like to Marconigrams we are conveyed, like 
through tubes of proper magnetic-like attunement I was told 
while you were at Mrs. Wriedt's, I might bring my father and 
surprise you. I did not go, I was conveyed, and it was done for 
me. I do not realize the details of how it was done. To my 
senses the scenes shifted. I was with mother, and my father 
came, I rested and was then with you in the seance room. 

J. S. K. 12. Will you bring your grandmother to talk through 
the trumpet with me ? Does she still stay around the old home 
ignorant of the fact that she has experienced bodily death? 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 397 

Response by May. Yes, and it is often so with spirits, and so 
they stay till angels roll the stones away between them and the 
clearer view which fact is already known to you. A farmer 
farms, a churchman preaches, and followers listen to the words, 
and talk and argue as they did before they came across to the 
unknown shore. 

J. S. K. 13. When, where, and how did you find our spirit 
daughter? Was it soon after you reached spirit realms? 

Response by May. I felt her loving touch before I left my 
body, and in silent loving way she told me I was soon to better 
be, and it would be so I could see you, and return to our home ; 
and so I never felt alone. I floated out for several days and 
so the final step of change, was not to me severe. I simply knew 
that it was through and grieved because cut of! from you. 
i J. S. K. 14. Can you see and read what I write here and 
also in my home? Can you hear my human voice is well when 
I read my questions aloud, as you could hear it when I spoke 
with you at Jonson's, while you were in your materialized body 
and used your sense of hearing and your vocal organs there 
to speak to me? Which of the two methods do you prefer? 

Response by May. Sometimes I seem to be quite near and 
what you say and read I hear. At other times I do not know 
all that you do, I simply sense that it is you. Some things are 
needed to make clear, and when not there you disappear ; and I, 
like to a person blind, must feel in darkness till I find. I hear 
today the words you say, I also see the room and you, and that 
at present there are two, but who the writer is I cannot see. I 
am but conscious that a writing hand is putting down what I 
now say. I cannot always read your writing, but often or some- 
times; but like to clear or stormy weather these changes are 
produced by conditions external to my volition. I like to hear 
your voice, I then realize it is your own self so. 

J. S. K. 15. Is there anything special which you would like 
to say that I can publish as a chapter in my second book? 

Response by May. I'll write an essay-like chapter for you. 
I'd like it if you'd write something for me to respond to. 



398 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

J. S. K. 16. When you want to talk or write about any personal' 
or private matter, either through the trumpet, while in your 
materialized body, or when dictating to the subjective mind of 
this psychic with her automatic hand; or any automatic writer, 
say this is personal, and I will so consider it; though my judg- 
ment has usually guided me in this matter. 

Response by May. I will so do, but as you say your judgment 
is enough for me no matter what I say to thee. I'll be here all 
your visit through to listen or to write. 

J. S. K. 17. Now I'm waiting in the hope that I shall hear 
from my spirit daughter, who gave a surprise to the sitters in 
a Jonson materializing seance in Toledo by singing in the circle 
the grand anthem "Holy! Holy! Holy! Lord God Almighty" in 
a manner to merit the great applause she received, just a few 
minutes before Wm. T. Stead for the first time materialized 
and tried to walk across a large room to me. 

Response by My Daughter. My dear father, I am glad to 
say I sang for you. I will do it again at any time, as I now 
write. It was to us a joy to hear the music sweet which was 
rendered here for you; and it has the advantage that you may 
it all repeat; but with the seances it is not so, but if it were 
we'd be with you as company your life time through ; and when 
'tis so you find or know the very thing to do, then you may 
depend upon us here, at least upon mama and me. 

J. S. K. 18. Will my angel daughter, now a young woman, 
tell me who was foster-mother to you while as an infant only 
in heaven; and who is your present guide? 

Response by My Daughter. My mama here is not to me 
the same as human mama is; but like to a flower transplanted 
to a bed, with beauty I was clothed and fed and loving mortals 
who had babies none at times to us soul flowers may come and 
gather one with love and care and carry it to here and there ; but 
we then are returned to be in sunlight of the smile of God; the 
while we grow, and who we are, we are taught to know at times. 
I saw my father and mother at times, and I felt myself to be 
like growing bird hovered by thee ; but I was not cut from love 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 399 

of you by anything that I did do. In cases where no love is 
there for the soul flower so^ small, the childless woman is allowed 
to own it all. I was taught music in a class and often angel 
sweet conducted me through many a hall, and often would repeat 
the lessons I must learn for ma, and was an aid in each degree, 
but she was not my own alone, and never took me to her home. 
We grow like children in a ward or hospital, till we have reached 
a stage of independent thought, and we are shown our loving 
parents, so that when they die we to them go like children of 
a higher sphere, but always held by loving here. 

J. S. K. If my father is present now I wish to commune 
with him. 

Hypatia. Your father is here. 

J. S. K. 19. I wish to say to you, father, that when I was 
a boy in my early teens you preached the gospel in the old 
Presbyterian stone church out in the country — only a few yards 
from which your earthly remains now lie — and you spoke so 
frequently about the devil and hell and everlasting punishment 
with torment, that I, who otherwise was considered a brave boy, 
was really afraid to be out alone on a dark night lest the devil 
would catch me, and take me away to that dreaded burning lake 
of fire and brimstone, a place of never-ending torture, if I failed 
to go to church every Sunday morning and night, and to Sunday 
school in the afternoon, no matter how much I needed rest on 
Sunday; or if I failed to memorize a certain set lesson in the 
Bible or Testament assigned me by you. 

All such teaching made me fear rather than love God. As 
you may now judge me in a different light, so I now hold a 
different view from that of those early boyhood days, when I 
often sat brooding over my present and possible future lot, and 
many a time I wished most truly that I had never had a beginning 
if there was a possibility that I would never have an ending, 
and meanwhile suffer everlasting punishment with torture, 
because I could not live a perfect life if every little fault of mine 
were counted a sin. 

As you now have altogether different views, and entirely new 



400 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

experiences over there in spirit realms, as you have at different 
times told me when meeting me in seances in and since the first 
one in the Moss series of seances at London, Ontario, in 1894, 
you ought to be well able now to make a statement founded on 
your experience, observation and knowledge, gained in spirit 
during many years, as to the reality of which you presumed to 
speak from the pulpit in human life, without exact knowledge 
(just as will the critics probably, who will criticize what I in 
my book say). I feel that you now owe it to your son, and other 
boys and girls of my time, still in their mortal tenements, as 
a duty as well as a pleasure to tell us what you have learned 
regarding rewards and punishments, since residing in the spirit 
world, and experiencing the after-life these many years. I trust 
you will make your statement as clear at the present time for 
publication, as you formerly made them from the pulpit, when I 
was a very credulous son in the years of long ago. I ask you 
to grant me the privilege of publishing your statement in an 
alloted portion of my book; as you can write it briefly here and 
now, by dictating it to the subjective mind of the psychic whose 
automatic hand will reproduce it with my fountain pen, as you 
speak it to her. 

Response by Father. Stephen King I am. Tell my son John 
that I am here to do as he may wish me to do. I was myself 
so taught, and I to you taught what my father taught to me of 
future punishments. I have not learned if any be like those of 
which I spoke to thee. In certain realms are beings who have 
not yet learned the way to do, and so are held and. not yet free, 
but kindness is the law of spirit life; and in the need of sorrow 
and of pain some souls would seem to be, but earth-like suffering 
is all that any soul is forced to undergo: such as the sorrow 
of a severed mate, or an unjust act, but never punishment of 
hate. No fiery furnace is prepared for erring boys; and I am 
sorry now, I taught you so, but you have grown to be a pride 
to me in spite of it, and all thai you and I your father have 
been through, I found it altogether different from all of my 
ideals or habitual thoughts. I was a child in soul development 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 401 

when I came here, and so began again, not cut off from the 
memory of earth, but like a child in second birth or like a man 
in language new, I began here, and thus I grew to know and 
wish to know like you. 

Beauty surrounds us here, and love in radiant whiteness from 
above illumes our path on every side; and if we cannot walk 
we all may ride, or be 1 assisted to the end by many a listening 
angel friend. 

Mother is with me now, and she is listener here to what to 
you is effort or your task to do. 

J. S. K. 20. To mother most boys look for protection and 
sympathy when father is displeased with their conduct or 
expression, and such was the case with me, for as I grew older 
and did some thinking for myself, I showed at times my inde- 
pendence of mind and speech, which provoked father to severity ; 
but father never did, nor could he make me believe all that he 
taught, and hence there was more fear of, than love for, my 
father, especially on Sunday; and hence I was quite inclined to 
appreciate the sympathy of my mother, when father made rules 
fast and hard regarding my beliefs and practices. 

Now, mother, no one in the world knew better than you that 
father's insistence that I should adopt both theory and practice, 
as he taught his boys, would not prove to be a grand success, 
and naturally, mother, you tried to temper my spirit to father's 
cold breezes, or shall I say the hot breezes of his speech? Now 
I would like to know from my mother in heaven, if I always 
was as a boy, and am as a man, so wicked as to deserve ever- 
lasting punishment; and whether you are convinced that such 
punishment was intended by God for your son, or any other 
mother's son or daughter ; and whether such kind of punishment 
is ever inflicted, or not. Please make your statement clear and 
plain, so I may with your consent publish it in my book as an 
allotment in a suitable place. 

Response by Mother. Like to you, my son, was your father 
in his earnestness of thought, and act, and the severity of his 
rules grieved me, as well as you ; and so I did the best I could ; 



402 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

and I believe I softened some, the natural instinct in you to quite 
rebel, or be set free. / love you now, and always shall, you 
were so very good to me; and hell is not for you, my son, for 
any acts that you have done. 

My fingers are well, and the rheumatic tendency in you is to 
be lifted from now on; and lithe and limber bow you are to 
grow, and in a year or two you will be free from all care and 
necessity. 

I am your mother, Margaret P. King. 

I introduce here what to me appears to be in accord with the 
view that variety of source of evidence in any given case 
strengthens it. It is a quotation from Wm. T. Stead's message 
to me (No. 33) through the hand of the automatic writer: "I 
realize that the proof of continuity of life depends largely upon 
the same personality presenting through different and widely 
separated instruments" (mediums). The reader will have noted 
in an early page of Chapter XXXI, a tabulated record of my 
experiences with the spirit personality of William T. Stead, and 
it will there be evident, that he has been endeavoring to demon- 
strate in the very way suggested in the extract quoted. 

This view, however, harmonizes with my own, and has appealed 
to me in very many cases, among the scores to be found in these 
records. The majority of all the intelligences communicating, 
have done so through more than one instrument, some through 
several, and some have used the same kind of instrument several 
times. This might of course be to make their personality better 
known. Variety of instruments have been utilized by me in test 
cases. And of course spirits communicating, just like humans, 
have preference in the use of instruments. As every musical 
instrument has an intonation characteristic of its make-up, and 
by wriich it can be distinguished from all other kinds of musical 
instruments, without seeing it, so also every medium or psychic 
instrument differs from all others, even those of the same phase, 
in some measure or quality of psychic force, combined with the 
psychic's individual spiritual personality as evinced in results 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 403 

produced, modified perhaps by the psychic's control, consciously 
or unconsciously. 

This seems to be recognized as a rule by communicating spirit 
intelligences. To substantiate this view, which has always 
impressed me strongly, I again quote the following from, a com- 
munication from my chief guide Hypatia, and which appears 
elsewhere several times in the book: "You must consider that 
messages that come from the spirit world, are more or less tinged 
with the medium's personality, through whom they are given. 
The clearness of the message depends on the spiritual status of 
the instrument. A cheap piano will give out musical sounds, but 
cannot give the tone and richness that comes from the more 
finished instrument." 

Another feature usually — and in my own case nearly always — 
met with in the automatic psychic writers is that of the with- 
holding from me a valued feature. I now refer especially to my 
unsuccessful efforts to secure either evidential description of the 
writer's human personality, or the writing, so far, by the spirit 
in a fac-simile of its human handwriting. In the case of Miss 
Gates, the automatic-writing-psychic, my guide Hypatia.. the 
philosophers and other advanced spirit intelligences, could not 
wholly overcome the introduction of rhyming words. Dr. Richard 
Hodgson, Frederick Myers, Wm. T. Stead, and my spirit wife 
and others allude to this peculiarity, some with regret, but with- 
out casting blame on the instrument; and knowing the reason 
for it, attribute the cause to her ancient spirit control. There was 
only one exception of not rhyming in the writing I received, 
through this psychic, and that was when Clegg Wright, the 
once noted medium, wrote for me; and through him we learn 
the reason why he did not rhyme in his writing. His message 
appears at length in the preceding chapter; and from it I quote 
his own evidence on this point, viz. : "I Clegg Wright am here ; 
and I am just as real, and just as much in life, as when I was 
a visitor at Lily Dale before. I see you too, I also see why I was 
shifted. I am nearer and beyond the rhyming necessity. Eberling, 
the instrument's guide, in accordance with the expressed wish of 



404 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

my guides, permitted me to be shifted beyond the rhyming zone." 
That would tend to exonerate the instrument from fault. He 
also adds another exception, which is embraced in the sentence: 
"It is my condition, that the medium gets, but is it not a comfort 
to be able to write like myself, and not rhyme? I am glad she 
is protected so she don't feel the condition I went through." 
Then as to the difficulty that Frederick Myers had in trying to 
give me his personality, Clegg Wright writes: "If I get into 
the knack of entering this central zone, I'll give description of 
him to you, some time when censorship is off its guard." Clegg 
Wright's guide considered it a most peculiar mediumship; and 
I may add that it is the only case of its kind I ever met with, 
or heard of. 

For long it was my strong desire to secure as evidence the 
handwriting, especially the signature, as in human life, as evidence 
of the spirit loved ones and friends who communed with me. 
Having failed in the quarter where I might reasonably expect 
it, I suggested that a few of the many who desired to accomplish 
it might try and write a short message together with their 
signature, while in the materialized form of the earthly expression. 
Soon I had on my waiting list of those who promised to try, 
several, which included Professor James of Harvard, Frederick 
Myers, Wm. T. Stead, my wife and others. 

With the close of the year approaching, and with the conclusion 
of gathering of evidence for this book, there remained time only 
for one or two seances with Jonson, as my final opportunity. To 
this was added the misfortune of an unfavorable condition of 
health and strength, and a weakening of the psychic power in 
Jonson. Still notwithstanding I attended with my office or pocket 
pad with printed heading and my fountain pen, all as promised, 
the writers ready for use. I first had Professor James (see 
Chapter XXXIII) in his transient (materialized) body approach 
me, and while I was hoping for his successful effort, he said, 
"I fear I cannot do it now." He then dissolved from view. 

Myers next presented as described in the same chapter; but 
did make an effort, which raised my expectations, by accepting 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 405 

my pen from me, and placing its point on the pad, but failed to 
write, as he lost his grasp and the pen dropped from his hand. 

My concluding seance with Jonson was not held till the lapse 
of three days, and was a large mixed assembly numbering 
nineteen sitters; and though I had some five callers, James and 
Myers did not again appear. 

From Toledo I went to Lily Dale, where I had another valued 
opportunity of hearing from relatives and friends, through the 
Human-Psychic-Telephone. Among those who wrote, were Pro- 
fessor James and Frederick Myers ; and both of them referred to 
their appearance at Jonson's ; and their statements are of peculiar 
interest. It was made clear by Myers that he still hoped at some 
future date, to write and sign his name for me; and likewise 
expressed the thought of complying with my request for evidence 
of his human identity and personality. In the pages of Chapter 
XXXIV are statements from James, Myers and Stead that the 
reader will do well to remember, for I am quite as satisfied thai 
all their promises will be fulfilled, as I am that other promises 
made were — such as the promise to meet me at Jonson's and 
try to write on my office pad — < which were kept, and partially 
fulfilled by them. Though this chapter is the closing one, as 
my guide Hypatia informs me that the selected time is now 
approaching to publish this book; so if the predictions made 
are fulfilled before that date, they will appear as Addenda. 
/ have full confidence that I shall receive the human signatures 
of Professor James, Frederick Myers, Wm. T. Stead, my near 
relatives and perhaps others; but not even when, or through 
what medium, none of the spirit writers will venture to say 
with certainty, as all will depend upon existing conditions at 
the time. 

D'Asia, so named by me, as that was the place of his nativity, 
is, so far as I know, the most ancient of all my guides that have 
evinced great interest in my research work. So also other exalted 
spirits from advanced spheres have manifested and spoken in 
no uncertain tones of the great mental and spiritual awakening; 
and the ushering in of a New Era. I shall not presume to state 



406 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

anything I'm not authorized to say; but have authority to make 
public the saying9 and writings of the alleged speakers and writ- 
ers, and by them assured that all they state is true. 

Spirits can read our thoughts and sense our desires. This I 
have proven scores of times. The first time my spirit wife spoke 
with and to me through the trumpet, she told me this; and at 
once I put her to the test. 

Another test that I imposed on her, as well as more frequently 
upon Hypatia, my guide, was that of reading my questions or 
my requests, as I had written them, with either pen or lead pencil, 
and then responding to them in reply, through trumpet speaking ; 
through their own vocal organs while materialized at Jonson's; 
and through the writing psychic. 

I am also pleased to state that there are living witnesses in 
Toronto, who can verify the statement I make regarding the 
first and second phases mentioned above. I am free to state on 
spirit authority that, if a man is fortified by right principles, and 
has proper soul desires, he need have no fear of evil spirits. 

I would that all could realize that spirits experience as great 
difficulty in finding avenues open (properly developed mediums) 
for communicating with earth's inhabitants, as the latter find in 
trying to communicate with them ; some mortals even loch their 
mental doors against their spirit friends, with the key of 
prejudice. 

We are assured that life in the spheres is as natural and real 
to them there, as earth life was while here ; that when they pass 
from the mortal habitation they are met and conveyed by spirit 
guides to a place of rest assigned them for a brief repose, and 
then to the sphere of activity for which their human life has 
qualified them; that in spirit realms all is activity and progress, 
as earned by consistent desires and efforts, and is attainable at 
some time even by those who on their arrival as earth-bound 
spirits are "held," some in mental darkness for long years, until 
they have atoned for wrong-doing in earth life, and become 
imbued with proper motives, and wholesome desires to secure 
light and knowledge that qualifies for progression and service. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 407 

Efforts are aided when towards a higher status; spheres are 
numerous for those of like attainment ; nurseries, graded schools, 
colleges, libraries, lecture halls, brotherhood societies and places 
of amusement of an instructive character are ample ; so are foster- 
mothers for babes, nurses for young children, teachers, lecturers ; 
there are avenues for investigators, authors, inventors, etc., for 
such as have special ambitions to enter them; many earthly 
experts in various earthly vocations are aided or inspired by 
spirits. 

The spirit world is a second earth plane many times more 
beautiful and grand, with its duplicate of water and land, streams, 
rivers, lakes, forests, hills, fields and flowers, all vastly more 
beautiful than can be conceived; travel is as rapid as thought 
from the mind; unison and harmony exist instead of creed and 
contention; gardens and parks surpassingly beautiful, and trees, 
and birds and other animals in the primary spheres ; no allotted 
place called Heaven, nor the Hell of torture, both of which are 
described by them as conditions rather than places; not one of 
hundreds who have communicated with me ever expressed a 
desire to again become a resident of the earth plane. One spirit 
thus clearly expressed his view on this subject : "Oh, life is not 
the wonder or good, that men believe it is. To me before I died, 
I felt that I so wished to live and gain my health, so that I 
might work do; but after I was free I felt and realized and 
knew the wonders of the spirit view ; and wondered how I could 
have felt content to live and suffer as I had to do in body frail, 
and thin and pale." (See Chapter XXXIV.) 

Spirits in my experience with them express the desire to aid 
mortals all they can. All are greatly pleased to have the oppor- 
tunity of communicating with mortals through any instrument 
or medium. This I have been repeatedly assured is true. If it 
be true that error and false belief have led to eternal divisions 
on the earth plane, then may not this the greatest of all world 
wars be a means of chastening and improving the conditions of 
nations and peoples, for angel communicants assure us, that 
following in the wake of the war, there will be violent commo- 



408 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

tions of both earth and water, earthquakes, floods, pestilence, 
famine and great calamities among the people of earth, as a 
purging before the New Era will be ushered in of an awakened 
mind; and conditions of peace on earth, and truth and righteous- 
ness prevail with nations, and with individuals. 

There is of course a limit to all human investigation, and 
means of proving to others that which to each investigator is 
convincing. 

In my later years, my soul's desire to learn more regarding the 
spirit realms, has been and is being granted. 

As this my first publication is already voluminous, and intended 
for the minds of neophyte psychical researchers or investigators, 
I will after briefly referring to two or three matters defer until 
a future publication, some of the revelations made to me by 
spirits of men of the long centuries ago. 

As each spirit withdraws from its mundane home — the mortal 
body, which is left behind on the earth plane, and changed,^ 
reduced or disfigured by disease or accident- — at is granted a brief 
repose, and awakens to realize it has an astral body or boundary 
of the then present dimensions of the earthly one, but more 
etherial than its former one; and which is entirely void of the 
markings of its former birth, disease or accident conditions ; and 
while in the sphere to which assigned, it continues so to be ; but 
at the time of its advancement to its next succeeding sphere, 
its body or boundary undergoes change in its density becoming 
still more etherial and spiritual before its new activities begin in 
its new sphere. Each promotion in some degree affects the 
spirit's limitation; though the spirit's mind, consciousness, indi- 
viduality and personality continue from sphere to sphere; and 
added senses new are found functioning. Advancement of pro- 
bationers in the earlier spheres is unequal. Some are "held" 
therefrom for long years, or until such probationer has fully 
served the probation, and secures its reward of merited advance- 
ment. Spirits can return from any sphere to which they have 
attained, to any sphere less advanced, or to the earth sphere, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 409 

though at first only with tHe assistance of guides, and of aides 
assigned to them, and are taught how to make themselves 
apparent or heard, by making use of the conditions existing in 
the sphere they enter. This is also requisite to enable those from 
any more advanced sphere who seek communion and desire to 
demonstrate their presence to spirits less advanced, or to mortals 
of the earth plane. They can, when conditions are favorable, 
manifest in a transient physical body, which is a duplicate of that 
formerly possessed, at any particular stage of existence, and is 
utilized when occupied by such as wish to demonstrate, and can 
speak with the vocal organs of such body ; as well as by entering 
the body of a living mortal instrument entranced and using such 
instrument's vocal organs for operating with. In such case the 
spirit of the medium gives place, or withdraws itself from the 
body and remains adjacent, or in some cases may go to a distance. 
An alternative to this is the spirit wishing to speak through the 
medium's vocal organs suggests the thoughts and words to the 
subjective portion of the mind of the medium to make use of 
through his or her objective mind ; though meanwhile the medium 
is unconscious of what he or she is uttering as in the case of a 
hypnotized person delivering a speech in response to the sugges- 
tion from the hypnotizer to do so; and is under the control or 
influence of the hypnotizer while doing so ; but has no conscious 
memory of a word that was spoken, after restored to normal con- 
dition, neither has a medium so utilized. The spirit of some 
individuals who are quite normal, indulges during the period of 
sleep, in astral flights, or the going out of the spirit without the 
individual really knowing it, except in rare cases, but afterward 
relate their wonderful experiences, that at the time seemed real, 
but were regarded as a remarkable dream. In such cases, they 
cannot always return and succeed in re-entering their body, which 
may not have been protected by advanced guides qualified to 
assist them to re-enter their body ; and that is one of the causes 
of death in the case of "found dead in bed" in the morning — 
cause of death unknown — but supposedly "heart failure." I have 
frequently taken such flights, but more often without my knowl- 



410 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

edge, until afterwards, when told by Hypatia, or by Otelleo, one 
of the ancient Egyptian guides, and aiders. He claims to belong 
to the Brotherhood of Light. My astral flight is explained else- 
where by those who participated in the matter, as to how it was 
accomplished. Otelleo with two others escorted me to a gathering 
or assembly for instruction and preparation for certain work 
when I pass over the boundary permanently and become a 
sojourner in the spirit realms, so he thus explained the object 
sought. 

Whether in the physical body or out of it, as in the astral 
body, everything seen or heard or done, forms a part of the "life 
record," retained in the subjective portion of the mind, and 
hence what is recorded during the astral flights, including the 
instruction given, is retained, and may or may not be reproduced 
in the objective portion of the mind, before reaching the spirit 
realms. 

I will here make a brief digression from the subject now 
engaging the mind of the reader, while I refer to some of my 
findings during my primary investigation of hypnotism; and will 
only revert to some of the knowledge gleaned during several 
years of that investigation which induced me to pursue my 
psychical knowledge, which will always outweigh belief,- and is 
by far more valuable. In my practice as a physician, surgeon 
and accoucher, I found that as a satisfactory therapeutical agent 
in many cases it had no rival. In surgical cases it stopped the 
flow of blood, the pain of the injury, and superseded anaesthetics 
during minor operations. It banished the pangs of child-birth, 
and caused the phantom of fear to depart. It is wonderful how 
the subject can diagnose the abnormal conditions existing within 
the limitations of the human abode. 

The following facts are but a few of the many I have estab- 
lished as such, viz. : The mind of man is a duality in its function- 
ings. The one portion of mind, I designate the "objective por- 
tion," while the other is the "subjective portion," and they are 
each in harmony one with the other. The objective portion 
acquires knowledge through the five senses which it governs, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 411 

when awake and functioning. It is the location of intelligence. 
It discovers, devises, plans and invents and exercises reason ; and 
having will power commands the subjective portion to a limited 
degree or extent. The subjective portion of the mind is the store- 
house of memory, and withall never sleeps as does its copartner ; 
and is ever active and alert, like a faithful sentinel on duty ; and 
at times acts independently when necessity exists. Its constant 
duties are the guarding and regulating of the various physiological 
f unctionings, continuing without any cessation ; even including the 
assumption of the objective mind's responsibilities, made neces- 
sary by that partner's repose, disorder, or incapacity ; and at the 
same time continues its own activities pertaining to the temple 
of the soul or spirit, the human body, its heart's action, circulation, 
digestion, assimilation, secretion, excretion, etc. Further, 
together they serve as supreme authority in the soul or spirit 
which is enthroned within the body and in its every part; and 
of this embodiment the mind is the executive, while the subjec- 
tive portion is the keeper of the soul's human life record, which 
the spirit, when it withdraws from its human habitation carries 
with it, as it passes to spirit realms; and it there becomes its 
passport to be seen and read by spirit personalities, as it enters 
the sphere for which it is qualified. 

Consent and Suggestion are lock and key to\ mind in hypnosis. 

The reader will now be better able I trust to comprehend that 
when my hypnotic subject is ready, I by concentrated mind and 
will power directed to the objective portion of my subject's mind, 
aided by suggestion, capture that mental fort, and his objective 
mind is a prisoner; and thus is out of action, and becomes dor- 
mant ; that is, asleep. I can now commune, or talk with his incar- 
nate spirit by means of its subjective mind ; and the use of its 
copartner's sense of hearing (which while asleep is of no use to 
it) ; and the subjective in like manner, in response to my sug- 
gestion, makes use of my subject's vocal organs (now that his 
objective partner is not using them, because asleep) ; and thus 
the subjective mind of the incarnate spirit of my subject can 



412 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

answer my questions, and has no motive to serve; is truthful in 
what it speaks; can tell me anything it has ever recorded in the 
life record, though the subject in normal state could not remember 
it all. This subjective portion accepts what emanates from my 
objective mind, just as it did from the objective mind of its 
copartner, and records it as part of the continued life record. 
All of which is concluded before I restore the subject to his normal 
condition, otherwise confusion of mind, would result, followed 
by disordered action. 

The foregoing detailed description may aid the reader to under- 
stand how a spirit can entrance or control, and make use of a 
sensitive human, by speaking through his or her vocal organs; 
and yet the sensitive can have no recollection of any word spoken, 
simply because the objective portion of his or her mind was over- 
come with sleep, or rendered inactive. 

Astral Flights. 

I have also learned among other matters of psychical interest 
to myself, and possibly to others, that by strong concentration of 
mind, and exercise of will power, I can withdraw myself from 
my physical body, at a given fixed time, and thereupon present, 
in my astral body, at a place I desire to reach, and be recognized 
there ; though apparently debarred, or at least am unable to exer- 
cise connected and detailed memory of what I saw and heard 
during my presence in my astral body; and this psychic demon- 
stration has been verified verbally, in writing, and in a printed 
book, after its accomplishment. 

Before making an astral flight in recent years, I have received 
assurances from my guides, whom I have frequently tested, and 
in whom I have confidence, that my body would be protected, and 
my flight aided, as well as my] re-entry of my physical body on 
return. 

I so stated on the public platform in St. George's Hall, Toronto, 
on Sunday evening, 28th November, 1915; and there promised I 
would demonstrate it to be a fact sometime in Toronto. Three 
evenings later I did so, before a private circle for trumpet voices 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 413 

'(everyone present knowing me). It was my first effort for that 
particular phase. On the afternoon preceding the evening seance, 
I sent a brief intimation to the place for the circle, simply stating, 
"I hope to be at the seance tonight ; but don't wait for me. You 
will hear from me later." 

Full particulars have been published by Herbert G. Paull, in a 
booklet, "The Voice of the Spirit." Chapter V or the fifth seance 
will verify my statement, and my demonstration through a trum- 
pet, and that I was reported by the spirit control of the medium as 
present in my astral body. However, my astral was escorted to 
and from the place by spirit guides who had me in my home in 
time to reply to the spokesman over the 'phone, who cross-exam- 
ined me, and gave my replies to others present with him. My 
arrival at the seance was a sudden surprise, and my demonstra- 
tion produced the conviction of "proven." 

As promised over the 'phone, I prepared a written explanation 
of my experiences of the evening, a copy of which was called for 
the next day, and appears along with the records of particulars, 
at the seance in question, which is numbered V in the booklet. I 
include here all that I had then to say, viz. : 

"Sitting in the occult circle of seven, comprised of the Toronto 
"Bureau Committee, listening to discarnate spirits' voices, at a 
"recent seance with Hugh Gordon Burroughs, trumpet psychic, 
"I was spoken to and questioned, by his control." 

"Dr. King, why are you so quiet tonight?" " I replied, I am 
"thinking." 

"This was true, for I was cogitating the trial of another new 
"experiment, which if successful, could be confirmed by my col- 
league sitters, and thus prepare further evidence of value to 
"prove what I had previously asserted several times regarding 
"astral flights." 

"Two features I had listed as proven already, viz.: my flight 
"to New York State, where my spirit-picture appeared on a pho- 
tograph along with a mortal one of my brother's wife." 

"Again another psychic phase I had succeeded in, by making 
"an astral flight and appearing along with other personalities at 



414 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

"a materializing seance held by the "Intellectual Circle" in Kansas 
"City, on the night of January 25th, 1910. On that occasion my 
"astral body was visible, and my voice was audible to Judge Dill, 
"and the other sitters. I there told them I was Dr. John S. King 
"of Toronto, and I would make another visit and would then 
"have sufficient strength, I thought, to sign my name for them. 
"What I here affirm has been verified in writing, and can be cor- 
roborated by Judge Dill and others among the then sitters." 

I introduce another similar instance to the above here, as a 
matter of convenience and preservation of a more recent experi- 
ence, viz. : On May 14th, 1916, I appeared at a seance held at 
J. B. Jonson's, Toledo, and noticed present a Toronto gentleman 
friend, James Poole, a well-known business man to whom, owing 
to conditions being unfavorable (a thunder storm had been pre- 
vailing) I could not speak, but as I had promised him before he 
left home that I would meet him there in my astral body, by 
walking from the cabinet during the seance as others do. I did 
so and tapped him on his thumb with a small stick I carried, just 
to remind him that I had kept my promise to him. 

Hypatia and des Asia, two of my guides, and my wife May 
were there also and materialized. I was present in my astral 
body. The sitters signed a written declaration affirming my presence 
and demonstration. This ends the new demonstration added, which 
did not appear in the written record promise over the 'phone, and 
handed out the following day, and occurred nearly four and a half 
months later. I now resume the statement as handed out the day 
after my first experience of speaking through the trumpet : "My 
"thinking, alluded to in the beginning, resulted in my decision to 
"absent myself from a seance, and then surprise my colleague 
"sitters by coming in my astral body and trying to talk with them 
"through the trumpet if conditions permitted." 

"My preparations consisted in turning out all my front lights 
"at 8 p.m., then retired to my bedroom and lay on my bed, when 
"I remembered that the instructions of my spirit guide that our 
"spirit party would reach the seance room somewhere near nine 
"o'clock. I lay awake thinking, but could not then sleep, and 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 415 

"when the time was nearly 9 o'clock, I got up and closed my bed- 
"room door to shut off the light from the adjoining hall, and 
"hurrying back, spoke aloud: "This is just about the time for 
"my spirit friends to call for me." Then with my head on the 
"pillow, I closed my eyes, still having many proofs of my per- 
sonality in mind to use. I quickly became asleep. I soon awak- 
ened suddenly, and felt satisfied I had just returned, turned 
"on the light, and found the time 9.35 p. m., and so went forward 
"to my office, and with my telephone near at hand, felt sure it 
"would ring. Presently it rang. 'Hello!' and I recognized the 
"voice I had expected. 'What are you doing, doctor?' T have 
"been asleep and have only been seated here a few minutes,' I 
"answered." 

"Mr. Paull then told me I had been at the seance room in my 
"astral body, and that the sitters were greatly surprised. He 
"jocularly charged me with having been playing a sharp trick on 
"them. He wanted me to tell him my experience. I mentioned 
"briefly a few incidents, which appeared to be correct from his 
"acknowledgement (and concluded to go into the matter more 
"fully next day). As it was getting late, he! said he would call 
" and see me in the morning; and I promised to write for him 
"a description of my experiences, but told him I was not per- 
"mitted to tell him everything I knew." 

"When he called the next day, it seemed to me as if a curtain 
"had been drawn in front of my memory ; and I could not comply 
"with my promise made to him to give my experience of the 
"experiment. 

"Did you ever have a most wonderful experience in a dream, 
"and fully realized at the time that it was only a dream, but worth 
"telling at the breakfast table next morning ; but when you tried 
"to relate the incidents they had most of them vanished from your 
"memory? This is the situation in which I find myself, with a 
"very few exceptional incidents." 

"The modus operandi of my 'astral flights' as described in my 
"book by my guides will be interesting reading. Whether or 
"not I succeeded in this my first effort to speak as a carnate spirit 



416 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

"through the trumpet, I leave the decision to those of my col- 
leagues present in the seance room on Wednesday night, 1st 
"December, 1915, as they were purposely kept in ignorance of my 
"intention so as not to disturb conditions. 

"Notwithstanding, I am informed that so very anxious were 
"they to verify something said, that the light was turned on (to 
"see the time), conditions were affected, and I was unfortunately 
"prevented from presenting further proofs, and thus not com- 
pleting what I have earnestly, and honestly, contemplated accom- 
plishing ; but I am hoping that I shall next time be more success- 
ful." Thus endeth the statement handed out, and known in the 
booklet as my explanation. 

After the 'phone conversation was concluded all repaired to the 
seats they had vacated, lights were turned off and the seance 
resumed. As to what most immediately followed, I quote from 
the booklet's record: 

"Spirit Murphy (the control of the medium) : There, ladies 
"and gentlemen, I did all I could to help that manifestation.' 

"Spirit Black Hawk (an Indian who can also control the 
"medium) : 'Say, everybody, wasn't that a good idea of the doc- 
tor's — ain't he funny.' 

"Spirit Hypatia: 'I give you greeting, friends, tonight. I 
"am pleased to be here, my dear ones, especially to please my 
"friend the doctor, and help in his interesting experiment. We 
"have done this for a purpose, and I must say I am pleased and 
"gratified at the result. It will have two distinct influences, as 
"it represents before the world the distinction between the physical 
"and the spirit side of life; and proves demonstrably that there 
"is an astral body, which can and does leave at times the physical 
"temple — I leave, and I greet you all, dear ones, with a message 
"of help and love — goodnight." 

Having thus demonstrated an important psychic fact in my 
home city, as well as in four different places in the United States, 
I concluded that even though I had done so and that my guides 
were agreeable to my doing it, they were compelled to prevent me 
from seeing, hearing and remembering too much, in case that 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 417 

I might not wish to return to my body ; and they would encounter 
difficulty in inducing me to do so. 

As the psychic fact had been well established in the presence of 
sufficient credible witnesses, and my object attained, I shall aban- 
don further efforts in the future; but am fully convinced that 
after I have passed to spirit realms, and spent a short season 
there, as a free spirit, I shall be permitted by the Infinite Spirit — 
and aided by his ministering spirits, who act as my guides — to 
return and demonstrate through some of the good mediums of 
earth — as scores of my relatives, friends and strangers have 
done, to convince me. And if so be that I may, the reader can 
rest assured that I shall, beyond every doubt, do so; and still try 
to prove to the skeptic and disbelievers in the spiritualistic creed 
that they are still in error, as I again prove by my presence, when 
they recognize me in a transient body speaking, or hear my voice 
through a trumpet, or hear me as a spirit writing independently 
on a slate; or through some person's hand automatically these 
words : /, Dr. John S. King, have kept my promise as made in 
"Dawn of the Awakened Mind," for I have proven, and do now 
prove, Continuity, Return and Communion, all true. 

Reincarnation. 

I am asked, "Do you believe in reincarnation ?" I answer, I 
have no belief regarding anything of which I have no conception ; 
and for the same reason I have no knowledge concerning reincar- 
nation. As defined by some individuals, I interpret it as meaning 
1 — the re-entry of an individual discarnate spirit into a babe before 
birth, which particular spirit has already undergone birth and 
physical life experiences, of perhaps an adult man or woman; 
and passed through the gateway of physical death, and there- 
after underwent change through evolution in the spirit spheres 
for perhaps centuries. And now, either from its own choice, or 
because so directed, again enters a new infant, before its birth, 
not as it entered on its (the spirit's) first experience as an ema- 
nation from spirit 'Infinite ; while now, if at all, by a process of 
retrocession from such sphere as it occupied by merit of attain- 



418 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

ment, and with much attained knowledge and its attained adult 
spirit proportions, must by its retrocession become reduced to 
the diminutive form of the newly conceived infant, which is to 
become its physical abiding place, and its physical body growth be 
ever subject to the requirements of the spirit which occupies it 
during a second earth-life experience. 

Is the first life record still preserved in the subjective mind as 
that of Wm. Smith, together with what was added in the years 
spent in the spirit spheres, and are these now further to be added 
to, by Wm. Smith's second life record as made by John Brown, 
into whose body Wm. Smith entered in order to gain a second 
human life experience, with a second spirit life experience to fol- 
low, which indeed is somewhat perplexing for the ordinary mind 
to comprehend, to say nothing as to the motive which prompts 
its enactment, and the results to be attained? 

To me it appears that there is reason for the belief that the 
retrocession will be found to prove unsatisfactory, with no evi- 
dence to prove that the second human life is any improvement 
upon that of the first human life. 

/ have not discovered any natural law with provision made for 
such an exception; and were it to be the rule, or a natural law, it 
would be self-evident to all. 

Having no tangible evidence in support of reincarnation, I 
questioned some of the alleged advanced spirits regarding it. 
Among others questioned were the alleged spirits of the philoso- 
phers Socrates, Plato and Aristotle, brought to me by Hypatia. 
By reference to Chapter XXIV, the reader will learn what each 
of them had written in reply to my question, at least Plato and 
Aristotle did so. 

The gist of the several responses to my plea for some knowledge 
regarding reincarnation, is briefly embodied here. It was pro- 
nounced to be "chimerical." All affirmed it was not true. One of 
the philosophers said, "Nor was it intended to be so understood." 
Another said such a conception is inconsistent with natural law, 
and with the evolution of discarnate spirit ; and that literal minds 
so interpreted, in error, the sayings of ancient psychics. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 419 

Moreover, the Infinite Spirit, the Grand Architect of the Uni- 
verse, nowhere alludes to it in any of His plans. 

Conclusion. 

Man is an emanation from spirit Infinite, and after the experi- 
ence of building his earthly physical body, in which he lives, 
moves, and has his mortal existence and experience for a period 
of years, finally withdraws with his astral or spirit body, and is 
immediately met and escorted by ministering spirits to an 
appointed place of rest, where he secures a brief period of repose, 
is enabled to realize that he is no longer a mortal, but one who 
henceforth will be a sojourner in spirit realms — but not in idle- 
ness, though as a probationer he will voluntarily work his way 
from sphere to sphere in a capacity for which he was primarily 
qualified by motives, desires and acts while forming his human 
personality. He soon learns that belief alone does not save, nor 
dependence on any one. 

Spirits known to me in their earth life, after they have passed 
to spirit realms, on their return affirm that each and all must 
work out their own redemption in the spirit spheres. Each and 
everyone who reach there have to undergo a schooling, and work 
their way to secure merited attainment. 

Christ (the Nazarene). He exemplified in his earth life the 
true soul personality, which man by his motives, desires and acts, 
should establish. He, like all other men, emanated from spirit 
Infinite; and to the realm of spirit returned, after an earthly 
physical experience, and is still seen by other spirits from different 
spheres ; and continues his good work while going from one 
sphere to another, exemplifying duty and teaching others. He 
is known to all in the celestial spheres from the humble to the 
most exalted spirit, for his radiance is everywhere apparent in 
its opalescent hue. He will not again, as man, come upon the 
earth plane, where his spiritual teachings were distorted, and 
his body crucified ; but assurance from spirit sources is given that 
the Christ principle will continue for ever, which is so accepted 
by all orders of spirit. 



420 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

God or "Deity" is unknowable, for not one among all the 
spirits who have communed with me, acknowledge the existence 
of a personal God; while the more exalted ones define God as 
Spirit Infinite, Omnific, Omnipresent, Omnipotent and Omniscient 
— All, and in all — -thus constituting the universe as a whole. 

As a humble mortal I cannot but admit that at times in my 
mental application I have felt the inspiration of unseen intelli- 
gences prompting or compelling the thought committed to writ- 
ing; but nevertheless in the work of the magnitude of the subject, 
the years for the accumulation of facts and evidences, it must 
needs be that errors in some degree may have been made, but 
not knowingly or willfully; and as I now draw it to a close, 
and send it forth to the thinkers of the world, with, as I am 
assured, the approbation of a strong spirit band, I do so with 
the hope that my soul's desire — that "it will be a benefit to 
humanity" — will be realized. 

Before attaching my signature to my closing page of this 
great volume of evidence, I desire to express a full measure of 
my gratitude and appreciation of Hypatia's work and inspirations, 
and other valuable aidings, including the securing of capable 
witnesses to testify, or to bring evidence worthy of introduction 
in this book. From first to last Hypatia has been my earnest 
collaborator of the book's compilation. I therefore feel that it 
is but fitting — while remembering also the fact that the book 
was her own suggestion, as was its title — that she give her 
concluding expressions to its readers, as to her view regarding 
its mission. 

In conclusion: 

Here are the things that I have won as I climbed with care, 
till I attained this comfort, in the sunset of my years. I have 
now ceased to feel the doubt, and the attendant fears, that come 
to most of men below. 

I feel, I sense, and think 'tis true, all that I state as facts 
to you. 



^Uv^jL^, 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 421 

Hypatia Contributes the Concluding Sentences. 

"Every mortal here or there has the earnest desire to know; 
and I, too, once living on the earth plane, suffered for the truth 
as revealed to me, even to death ; and since I was set free I have 
searched for an instrument through which to come in better 
touch with humanity, and teach them what I have learned of 
truth. 

Each human soul must, as an atom of the whole, reach forth 
for itself, in accordance with the will of the Heavenly Father, 
who has provided for each one, whether they climb or fall ; 
however, like vines, we eventually climb to the great light of 
Oversoul. We start as parts of the great whole; and we attain 
along our paths through effort the things for which we pray. 
As vines creep up along a wall, so we climb by knowledge, the 
pathway of life, overcoming obstacles and thereby gaining that 
altitude of hope, where we feel the Oversoul or Father giving 
us truths we can understand. 

Our souls like vines reach out tendrils that entwine the truth 
we find along the way, and thus, add to our power to attain a 
higher plane. Our longings for knowledge, our desire to know, 
are steps by and through which we receive support from the 
Guides. 

This book is to be a guide to the inquiring mind. "Dawn of 
the Awakened Mind" is a wall of facts; and as such is sent 
forth to the thinkers of this age. As you peruse each page, it 
will tell you how to find the path to knowledge that God or 
the Infinite Spirit hath given to all mankind, to learn how your 
own soul may reach out for the truth that teaches you this 
great fact, that man is not within his brain. The soul, the 
blossom, the fruit of life, grows within the human body until 
its journey on earth is completed, and it is ready to cross through 
what is termed death, into that larger life where it has more 
power to do good to all. 

I have written this truth through you, my dear instrument; 
and have manifested my presence, through many mediums of 



422 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

different phases, and in many different places, in order to demon- 
strate this truth. 

I pray the great and exalted ones of spirit life, to help me 
to be with the great thinkers that I may, with the great thinkers 
— whose writings appear on these pages — be of use to men of 
earth, by proving that spirits come back to earth. 

I pray that the darkness of doubt may float away as "Dawn 
of the Awakened Mind" brings truth and light to those who 
were born blind in their minds, to this great truth. 

Continuity of life makes all life complete, and proves that 
spirits can and do come back and write to all mankind. 

I, the leader of the band around this physician, who has written 
this book, send you, through him, my earnest prayer that all 
the darkness of ignorance shall fade eternally away. 

HYPATIA. 



INDEPENDENT SLATE WRITING. 
ADDENDA. 

THESE addenda become a connecting link between this 
book, and further revelations by some of the exalted 
spirit intelligences named herein. They comprise brief 
greetings and intimations, from relatives, friends and intelligences 
in the higher spheres, These slate writings of the "Independent" 
phase were secured through the kind co-operation and influence 
of Hypatia, my chief guide and teacher, as per my written 
request left on my desk for her to read; and which — as will 
be seen later — she complied with in its entirety. It will prove 
of deep interest all through. 

I concluded that these independent slate writings, for the first 
time for me, as an unparalleled test, so far as I know, would 
corroborate or strengthen former evidence already recorded, 
especially so much as could be produced here by the aid of 
the photo-engraving of the slates containing the written evidence 
thereon, over each writer's own signature. My own comments 
follow at the close of each sitting. 

As the work of compiling my book was ended, I determined 
to give its readers in the addenda the details of three sittings, 
or individual experiences with independent slate writing. I selected 
for that purpose medium Pierre L. O. A. Keeler, with whom 
I had never hitherto had a sitting ; but as he is generally acknowl- 
edged to be America's best in that phase or class, I made choice 
of him for a good test; and it proved afterwards to be an 
unusually good and satisfactory one; and at the same time a 
surprise, even for this experienced medium, as he expressed 
himself to me at the close of my third half-hour sitting; when 
he realized what the final total results were. 

The Details of Preparation While Still at My Home. 
I first wrote out a list of those I chiefly desired to hear from, 
and who would probably require the time of three sittings, of 

423 



424 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

half an hour each, and numbered them in order from 1 to 20. 

I selected those twenty from among hundreds of spirit intel- 
ligences of different spheres, with whom I have held communion 
in the years that are past, and at different times, at different 
places, and through different phases of mediumship, covering 
a period of about twenty-five years in all. 

Everyone in the list — save and except my son — had utilized 
more than one medium, some as many as five or six different 
ones, with as many different phases; while all my loved ones, 
my psychical research friends, and my guides — constituting 
fifteen of the twenty selected — have each met me face to face 
in their earthly expression, some of them several times, in the 
materialized yet transient body, and spoken with the vocal organs 
of such body. 

But of them all my Chief Guide and Teacher Hypatia has 
made herself known in England. Canada and United States of 
America. On the Western side of the Atlantic she has been both 
seen and heard by scores of people, including a number of 
relatives and friends of my own city and province, and else- 
where, including also, Col. N of the Province of Quebec; 

and has dictated messages to a few of them — including my 
Quebec friend — with the request to them, in each case, to take 
such message back with them to me. 

Having completed my list of twenty, I next wrote my request 
to my Chief Guide, Teacher and Co-worker, as any student in 
earth life would naturally do, when requiring that teacher's 
co-operation. 

Written Request to Hypatia. 

"Toronto, Tuesday, p. m., 21st August, 1917. 
To Hypatia, 

My Spirit Guide, Teacher and Aider. 

Following on the accompanying list, are my loved ones, friends, 

spirits guides, co-workers and exalted ones from the higher 

spheres, that I hope to have greetings from by writing on slates 

to me, independently of a medium's direct hand, when I am 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 425 

at Pierre L. O. A. Keeler's house in Lily Dale, while I am at 

that Spiritualistic Summer Resort. 

Will you kindly invite them to meet me there and comply with 
my request? Will you please likewise request George Christie 
(Keeler's Control) to grant me the sittings with Keeler sufficient 
for them to do so? 

I fully realize how indebted I always am to you, in my psychical 
investigations, and my experiences, for your most valuable co- 
operation. I will be thankful to you, and to George Christie, if 
this privilege is granted to me. 

A personal friend of my own in this city (Prof. S.) once 
expressed himself as doubting the fact of your being the identical 
Hypatia, the Neoplatonic philosopher of Grecian and Egyptian 
historical reference; and as having suffered martyrdom at 
Alexandria ; and before he would be convinced, he said he would 
like to be satisfied that you could read, write or speak, in the 
Greek language of that time. So as the coming occasion is 
one for independent slate writing, I shall be very glad to have 
you write something that I may show him and others, written 
in the Greek writing of the time you were in earth life, and 
active as a teacher. That may possibly convince him and them. 

I have endeavored — while compiling my book — to prove that 
all I have stated therein regarding psychical matters is correct 
and true. 

Independent slate writing greetings or communications are 
therefore requested by me from each of the twenty I am naming; 
and all of whom as you are aware have written (save and except 
my son) through the hand of Miss Gates, whom I have — with 
her concurrence — named or designated "The Human-Psychic- 
Telephone;" and in addition, as readers of my book will have 
observed, communicated through several phases of mediumship, 
chiefly materializing, trumpet speaking, automatic writing and 
trance condition, in brief, coming to me when any psychic door 
was open for them. 

I anticipate that the result of all these invited ones writing 
their greetings on the slates and signing their names to what 



426 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

they write, will be generally accepted by readers as a most unusual 
test; and at the same time most convincing' evidence that spirits 
can and do commune with those on the earth plane ; while doubt- 
less it will prove to be an exceptional surprise to even the 
experienced Mr. Keeler, the psychic, himself. 
Sincerely and with confidence, 

Your Charge, 

John S. King" 



The Invitation List. 

Here follows the entire list of invitations, though I here and 
now personally extend the first one immediately to you, my Chief 
Guide, Teacher and Co-worker, throughout the many past years 
of my psychical investigations. 

No. 1. Hypatia, Chief Guide and member of Spirit Band. 
No. 2. Egyptia, Guide, Guardian and member of Spirit Band. 
No. 3 . Asia, Guide, most ancient, and member of Spirit Band. 
No. 4. "May," Wife, passed to Spirit Realms 29th Sept., 1911. 
No. 5. G. H. S. King, Son, passed to Spirit Realms, 14th 

November, 1916. 
No. 6. "May Donna," passed over to Spirit Realms as infant, 

and so named by Angels. 
No. 7. Stephen King, my father, (passed to Spirit Realms in 1894. 
No. 8. Margaret P. King, my mother, passed to Spirit Realms 

in 1886. 
No. 9. Frederick 1 Myers, England's Psychical Researcher. 
No. 10. Prof. James of Harvard University. 
No. 11-. Wm. T. Stead, pen-friend in life, Aider now. 
No. 12. Otelleo, Guide and Aider of Spirit Band. 
Noo 13 . Omar, Guide, and member of Spirit Band. 
No. 14. Electra, Guide, Guardian and member of Spirit Band. 
No. 15. Cleopatra, Guide, Aider and member of Spirit Band. 
No. 16. Eldemar, Advanced Spirit. 
No. 18. Edward, a King of Great Britain and Ireland. 
No. 19. Victoria, a Queen of Great Britain and Ireland. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 427 

No. 20. Hon. George Brown, Editor, and Publisher of The Globe. 

He called me son, while on his staff, 1869-70. 

Sincerely and with confidence 

I await the response, 

John S. King. 



I next placed my written request and the invitation list side 
by side on my office desk before me, for Hypatia to read, and 
be cognizant of what I wished to further establish; and that 
was really all that was necessary to do. 



Some Further Preparations which I Made. 

I had learned from some of the patrons of this medium 
incidentally from time to time, each their own experience at a 
sitting, the directions they received, and what they were required 
to do ; and found that the routine was very simple. Having this 
information I utilized an office pad of blank leaves of equal size. 
On each of twenty leaves I wrote one of the twenty names on 
the invitation list, so that each leaf differed from all the others. 
In addition, in a few instances, I added below the name a ques- 
tion; on some of the remainder, I simply wrote, "Write what 
you wish me to know ;" while others were left to write anything 
they chose without suggestion of any kind from me. So when 
I had finished my writing I folded each of the twenty leaves 
separately with a single fold each ; and placed them in the order 
of their number on the list, one upon another, and tied the twenty 
with a small cord; and put the package in an envelope, which 
I placed in a deep inside pocket of my vest, on the right hand 
side of my body. In another envelope I placed the written 
request, and the invitation list, for Hypatia; and it in turn was 
deposited in a similar pocket of the vest on my left side, both 
envelopes in a safe place, there to remain until required, and 
become meanwhile magnetized from my body, and thus be ready 
for the magnetized slates of the medium. 



428 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Off for Lily Dale. 
On Thursday, 23rd August, at 9.30 a. m., my valued and con- 
fidential friend — himself a neophyte — called for me with his 
automobile for two ; and we left at a leisurely gait on our health 
and pleasure-giving trip of about 170 miles, reaching our destina- 
tion — Lily Dale, the spiritualistic summer resort — among the 
water-shed hills of Western New York State, at a height of 
about 1,200 feet above Lake Erie, at 10.30 a.m., 24th August, 
1917. 

Interviewing Pierre L. O. A. Keeler. 

In a few minutes after our arrival, we were both in the presence 
of this independent slate-writing medium, through whose psychical 
make-up most wonderful experiences are to be secured. Our 
primary object, at the moment, being the securing of our assign- 
ment of desired sittings for these phenomena, before acquiring 
acceptable lodgings, and a food supply depot. Conversation was 
inaugurated when I proffered Mr. Keeler a small parcel, addressed 
to him by one of his patrons in Toronto, which had been entrusted 
to me to deliver to him. Having completed that act, I at once 
suggested that my friend and myself each desired assignment of 
sittings. I said, "Speaking for myself, I desire three separate 
sittings to be assigned to me, and at as early a time as possible, 
while my friend is here and can speak for himself ." 

Mr. Keeler's response was, "I cannot give either of you a 
sitting before next Sunday afternoon, 26th August, at 2 p.m. 
One of you can follow the other immediately after the first 
one is through." 

I then said, "This is Friday, a. m., and I personally want three 
sittings in all, and I desire all three, as soon as you can assign 
them to me." 

To my remark Mr. Keeler replied, "Most people do not get 
more than three or four writings at a sitting, though some get 
five, six or seven; but I do not remember any one getting all 
they asked for or expected" This to me was his gentlemanly 
score for my presumption. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 429 

Mr. Keeler focussed on me a look of surprise at my persistence 
in asking that three sittings be arranged for; while I from my 
standpoint was studying his facial expression, with a view of 
determining whether his control was clairaudiently telling him, 
or impressing his mind, what the arrangement would have to 
be; or had already been arrived at by his own control (George 
Christie) and my guide and teacher Hypatia. Having recovered 
himself from his surprised look my request had apparently cre- 
ated, he said, "You are expecting more than you are likely to 
get," and ventured to ask me, "Have you ever had a sitting with 
me for slate-writing before?" 

"Never!" was my prompt reply. 

This reply was as promptly followed by his intimation, "You 
may not receive any message at all, and I cannot guarantee any- 
thing." This was further supplemented by the suggestion that 
"It is quite probable that those you are expecting will not write ; 
while others unexpected may come and write instead. In any 
event, it is equally probable that one sitting only will prove suf- 
ficient for all who" will write for you." 

I then made a somewhat bolder statement in our friendly parley, 
by telling him that "I confidently expect the ones I have in mind ; 
and further, I feel sure that they will consume the time of three 
sittings." 

Mr. Keeler, the good-natured man, that he really appears to be, 
then straightened himself up, and enquired of me, while present- 
ing a "doubting Thomas" attitude, "How many writers do you 
expect will write on the slates for you?" 

I modulated my answer to this question as follows : "I have a 
list of twenty names in my pocket, that I wish to hear from; 
and I confidently expect that every one of the twenty will write 
for me on the slates/' 

On his countenance I interpreted his thought that I was a 
very presumptious man, and he vocalized what indicated his 
unbelief in my prediction. But he little knew — with all his 
experience — what influence was at work in my behalf ; whereas 
my confidence in Hypatia and her spirit band is as steadfast as 



430 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

a rock, for I was aware that she and her band could and would 
bring about the full accomplishment of the purposes as expressed 
in my written request made three days before, for I had long 
since proved, beyond peradventure, Hypatia's capacity, power, 
reliability and influence ; and therefore no longer entertain doubt, 
when she co-operates with me in my efforts to prove to humanity 
the truths of life, and intercommunion of those of the earth 
and spirit spheres. 

]] noticed Mr. Keeler's mien changed after my emphatic reply 
to his last question, and with few words he remarked, while 
turning the pages of his engagement book, "Suppose you wait 
and see what you get at your first sitting, for I cannot now 
assign you but one sitting each, for yourself and your friend. 
I will enter your name for 2 p. m., Sunday, 26th August, and 
your friend immediately after the conclusion of your own sitting." 

After thanking him for the assignment, my friend and I left, 
and did not again see him until the time allotted for my sitting 
had arrived. 



Independent Slate Writing. 
My First Sitting. 

Before the hour had arrived for my first sitting, it occurred 
to me there were others who had frequently communicated 
through the automatic writer, "The Human-Psychic-Telephone," 
and through trumpets also, whose names were, in earth life, 
familiar on either side of the Atlantic ; and who might by chance 
be present at this great concentration meeting place, although 
not on my list of invited ones, — and not purposely ignored — 
I did not ask Hypatia to include them in the invitation, never- 
theless if time and opportunity presented, they, with the others, 
would be equally welcome. 

When the names evolved from my subjective to my objective 
mind, I did not hesitate, but prepared three more leaves containing 
each one a name, and they were the following three, viz.: 
Prof. Thompson J. Hudson, William Stainton Moses and Dr. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 431 

Richard Hodgson. These were then added to the packet, making 
twenty-three names in all. 

With the Psychic Alone. First Sittiing. 

I was promptly on hand at the time assigned me. The room 
was, as judged by the eye, 12x14 feet, or thereabouts. There 
were two doors and both open; as also> two windows, that on 
the west open, and through ,it good, pure air was entering, as 
well as the rays of the sun, when not interrupted by passing 
clouds. The other window on the south being of stained glass, 
presented all of color I discovered within the four walls ; and 
may possibly have supplied the coloring matter incorporated 
in the signatures of some of the Advanced spirits who wrote 
for me. (This is only a conjecture, for there are other sources 
from which Levitation-Kingdom Spirits bring coloring matter 
of the clay kinds.) 

On the south side of the table sat the medium while I was 
accorded the empty chair on the north side; and thus we faced 
each other, with an ordinary table between us, on one end of 
which was a stack of slates, which he claimed had been mag- 
netized. The time occupied for a sitting is usually half an hour, 
more or less, for which a fee of $2.00 is exacted ; and all slates 
written on are paid for at the rate of ten. cents each and are 
carried away by the sitters. 

The slates on the table were all of the same size, and appar- 
ently new, and unwritten upon. Mr. Keeler volunteered the 
statement that "all slates are similar in size in each lot ordered." 
The surface for writing on measured 5x7 inches. In a small 
dish adjacent to the slates were the nibs or points of soft and 
light colored slate pencils, each about one-quarter inch long, and 
softer in grade than the slates; and are for use by the spirit 
writers. 

A soft, wet sponge was also adjacent to the slates for use in 
cleaning their surface. 

Mr. Keeler directed me to "clean a couple of the slates, and 
then examine them" ; and I complied with his direction, for I 



432 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

rubbed their surface with the wet sponge, to remove any dust or 
marks, but found none; but incidentally while conversing con- 
tinued my operating until six slates were so treated; and I was 
satisfied they were new and devoid of all marks or other device 
or contrivance, even for conjuring, to develop evidence of the 
particular kind that I anticipated receiving. On that score I 
may here add, I am absolutely convinced, for conjurors can never 
successfully compete with spirit-power. 

Mr. Keeler further directed me to write each name of those 
I expected on a separate slip of paper, and then fold once each 
of the papers written on. I was a receptive student, but for the 
moment, when I suggested that I had learned this part of the 
routine from one of his patrons >in the city of Toronto ; and had 
so prepared them accordingly before I had secured the present 
sitting; and enquired, "Will they do?" 

His reply — as I withdrew the packet, now containing the 
original twenty and the added three papers — was, "Yes, they 
will do; but take the string off the packet, and scatter the papers 
loosely in a group on the table between us (which I did), and 
some among them may come and write." I looked at my watch 
and by this time the half hour was being rapidly exhausted; 
and yet not a single sound had been heard, or any vibration felt 
in the slates that would indicate the presence of a writer. 

Mr. Keeler ventured to say, while looking straight into my 
eyes: "There don't seem to be anyone here, ready to write for 
you on the slates" : but while placing the strong rubber band 
around the two slates between us on the table, the writing at 
that very moment started, and he said hurriedly, "Take hold of 
the slates as I do with both hands, and press the frames together 
to exclude the light," which I did. The writing was evidently 
being done very rapidly on the under slate, and the vibrations 
were felt by the fingers beneath the under slate, then came a 
distinct tap, as if by a pencil, which signified "slate full." The 
two slates were immediately reversed, the writing continuing on 
the now under slate, until another tap, signifying "slate full," 
and both of the slates were laid down. Quickly inserting another 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 433 

pencil point between a second pair of the six slates I had 
cleaned, without adding the rubber band, still around the first pair 
and there to remain; we held this second pair as in the first 
instance, the writing beginning the moment we grabbed the 
slates, and ,in a few seconds tap, reversal, more writing on the 
under slate, tap, slates down. A third pair in a moment or two 
and writing more rapid as time progressed, a tap, followed by 
reversal, and that by silence — five slates written on. Time of 
writing, less than five minutes. 

The writing concluded, the five slates were in proper order 
arranged by myself, as they had been written on and signed by 
each writer, of whom there were ten, as that many signatures 
were counted. When I read those names over and with sub- 
dued expression simply remarked, "Well, Mr. Keeler, these are 
already ten messages, each signed by the ones expected so far, 
and that satisfies me." 

"It is wonderful/' he exclaimed as he gave them a passing 
glance, though he did not examine them. 

Although the slate writing for the present was concluded, I 
made no reference to what Hypatia said or did in the matter. 
I d ( id not even hint that she had had her interview with Mr. 
Keeler's control, nor intimate that the latter had instructed 
Mr. Keeler as to the two remaining sittings, though it was evi- 
dent in her own writing in the English language, as made on 
the slate during the sitting, that she, Hypatia, was summoning 
the guests for 3 and 5 o'clock p. m. tomorrow, Monday. 

I proceeded to wrap up the slates, and when ready to leave 
again asked Mr. Keeler if he would be able to assign me the 
other two sittings I so much desired. 

Without hesitation he opened his little book and at once 
entered me for sittings at 3 and 5 o'clock the next day — Monday. 

I then passed out and took with me my five slates in a pack- 
age wrapped up in paper. I also returned the 23 folded papers — 
each with a guest's name written on — to the envelope and to 
the pocket. 



434 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

My friend went in, and after half an hour's sitting came out 
satisfied with the results he obtained. 

Now examine the evidence provided by the slate writing on 
four of the five slates, reproduced here by photo-engraving, and 
see if it proves anything. 

My Comments on the Writings. 

The first guest to respond was No. 8 on the list for Hypatia 
to read — that of my mother, who first returned to me as a spirit 
in her materialized body at London, Ontario, in 1894, some eight 
years after "passing over" ; and conversed with me then, and 
many times since, in a similar manner; and has also spoken 
through trumpets ; and likewise wrote through "The Human- 
Psychic-Telephone," as will have been noted in the book. The 
same holds true regarding my daughter, who is No. 6 on the 
invitation list. They each were writing at the same time, both 
beginning at the center of the slate and writing lengthwise on 
it, and parallel with its sides, but both finishing as they 
approached the ( ir own side of the slate. What each of them 
wrote was of an affectionate character. The daughter also drew 
a flower in bloom, which bore relation to what she told me a few 
months previously through a trumpet, viz. : That I would take 
a trip while the flowers were in bloom; and would have a sur- 
prise, and which came true on the occasion of my meeting, on 
the floor of the large auditorium, a medium with whom I had 
sat many years ago, but for long time I had the belief that she 
had "passed over." The surprise was of a pleasurable character, 
and led to a renewing of former experiences. 

The third guest to respond on the slate was No. 20 on the invi- 
tation list; and by photo-engraving the writing is reproduced 
here. Hon. George Brown, leader of the Reform Party of Upper 
Canada before confederation, and editor and publisher of the 
Daily Globe, who was chief editor and employed me on the staff 
in 1869 and 1870;;and designated me "son"; and from whom I 
received fatherly consideration. Those who are yet living and 
familiar with his writing can compare his former signature with 




FIRST SITTING— FOURTH SLATE. 

No. 7 — William Stainton Moses. 

No. 8 — Eldemar, Advanced Guide. 

No. 9 — Yerma, Advanced Spirit. 




FIRST SITTING— FIFTH SLATE. 
Ko. 10 — Frederick Myers, President, Psychical Research Society. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 435 

that on the slate and will find satisfaction in so doing. This I 
have done and am satisfied. He has written me before through 
the hand of a psychic writer, while on the slate it is independent 
writing, audible to the ear while I had hold of the slate. 

My fourth guest was my father, who listed as No. 7, wrote 
on the third slate, or on the second one reproduced here; and 
as in the case of my mother, first made himself known to me on 
the same occasion, and in a similar manner to her — see early 
chapters of the book. He refers to his former efforts in life, 
to instil in my mind the orthodox views, which I well remember, 
for he was a recognized minister of the Presbyterian denomina- 
tion and often held parley with me regarding creeds and dogmas. 

My fifth communication was No. 1 on the original list, and is 
my Guide Hypatia's intimation in English language, that she 
had arranged for my second and third sittings, with Keeler's 
control, though Mr. Keeler had not up to the) close of the sitting, 
told me when, if at all, I would be assigned my second and third 
sittings. This note was written to acquaint me that she was 
carrying out what I had requested of her; and to satisfy me, 
that I would not be disappointed. 

My sixth guest was my former pen-friend and present aider, 
Wm. T. Stead, who was No. 11 on the list. His call was a brief 
one, but he promised he would call again tomorrow, so that 
Stead must also have known of the arrangement between Hypatia 
and George Christie, Keeler's guide. 

The one who came next as my seventh guest was not one of 
the original twenty, but of the added three names that I put in 
the packet I spread out on the table as the sitting began, and was 
evidently pleased to know that his friends in old England would 
be interested in scanning a letter from him, written as an inde- 
pendent writer, without using a psychic's hand. This should 
prove of interest to the society which made him one of its hon- 
orded officers, although belonging to the spirit spheres. He intro- 
duced himself to me on the first occasion through a trumpet in 
1911, and afterward used as an instrument "The Human-Psychic- 
Telephone" for further communication with me. 



436 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

The eighth caller on me was the sixteenth on the invitation 
list. He is a guide, teacher and helper from advanced spirit 
spheres and a member of the "Brotherhood of Light." His inter- 
est in my work is to be continued. What he wrote was in red 
color. I have the English translation of his message. 

The ninth on the slate is No. 17 on the original list; and its 
briefness is an intimation to me of what he intends to do, for 
I have a previous promise he made to me, regarding important 
communications, which are yet to be made. He has communi- 
cated through trumpet and through automatic writer several 
times. 

The one who wrote next was No. 10 at the first sitting, though 
No. 9 on the original l,ist; an honored name in England as a 
psychical researcher; and has been much with me during the 
compilation of my book, in which he has several times expressed 
his deep interest. Someone in England should be able to compare 
his writing on the slate with his production while in the mundane 
sphere. 

The reader is invited to take note of the fact that of the orig- 
inal twenty invited, nine of them came in response to my invita- 
tion, at the first sitting, while the tenth one was one of the three 
subsequently afforded an opportunity; for which I am exceed- 
ingly gratified, and heartily thank them. 

Independent Slate Writing. 
My Second Sitting. 

Before dealing with the seance, the reader will excuse me if 
I narrate a personal experience I underwent — before going to 
keep my 3 o'clock engagement with Mr. Keeler — as evidence 
from a distinguished man, over his own signature, refers to it 
in the sitting I had in the course of two hours after its occur- 
rence. 

The trip to Lily Dale, combined with the pure atmosphere and 
other salutary conditions were together responsible for inducing 
a vigorous appetite, which was developing rapidly at the end of 
three days. So when I had partaken of my lunch, which included 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 437 

a tempting bit of cold roast pork, which was not very well taken 
care of by my unreasoning stomach, because not accustomed to 
it, I soon began to feel that abnormal conditions were present 
and suggested to my friend that we take a walk out in the woods 
to what was known as "the old camp-meeting ground of the old- 
time spiritualists," and see and hear what was going on there ; and 
I would show him the stump of a great forest tree, which formed 
the platform 1 for speakers from all points of the compass, includ- 
ing the Canadian then speaking to him. To this proposal he at 
once agreed, and we started without delay. As we were 
approaching the place, I suffered more and more severely from 
what is generally termed "acute indigestion," and with some 
difficulty soon reached a seat in the circle of people who were 
interested in a Pennsylvania farmer, who, under the control of 
an Indian, was healing the sick. This farmer, and non-pro- 
fessional psychic, approached the group where my friend and I 
were seated; and while in 'his normal condition, I asked him, 
"Can a Canadian Indian control you?" He replied, "Yes." I at 
once called to my aid Chief Tecumseh, who led the Indian forces 
as an ally of the British army in the war with the Americans, 
and who fell in an action near Chatham, Ontario, where, to 
honor his services, a monument stands today in that city. His 
spirit I have talked with, he using a trumpet more than once, 
during which time he informed me that he was one of several 
who composed my Indian band of aiders. I also summoned 
Gray Feather, control of J. B. Jonson of Toledo, who in the past 
had frequently conversed with me, and had controlled a trumpet 
medium on two occasions for me. The first to arrive and control 
the farmer psychic was Tecumseh, who shook hands with me 
first, and then placed them over my epigastric region, and soon 
I felt improvement. I introduced him to my friend. Immedi- 
ately after Gray Feather arrived and controlled the farmer 
psychic. He went at once to my friend, whose hands he shook 
heartily, for he was already acquainted with him. He then said 
in his own way of speaking English, "Me so glad to see you 
here with my friend the doctor," and then came direct to me, 



438 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

and did as Tecumseh had done. They both deserved and 
received my thanks, for distress had left me and I was able to 
keep my appointment with Mr. Keeler at 3 p. m. 

The slate writer, Prof. James of Harvard, referred to the 
cause of my suffering, when he wrote on the slate. All of 
which goes to establish the fact that spirits of those who once 
were as we are, now are around and about us as ministering 
spirits, and know all about everything we are engaged in. 

This narrative may prove to be a good condiment in the rich 
psychical food which is for the minds of those seeking the truth, 
supplied from the vast realm of spiritual knowledge. 

I was promptly seated for my second sitting at 3 p. m., 27th 
August, according to my assignment, which was made after the 
intimation I got from Hypatia's note on the slate of the first 
sitting. 

I first placed once more my prepared papers on the table a 
trifle to the left of front of me, but minus those which had 
brought the responses at the first sitting. The same routine 
was followed, save and except the strong rubber-band was dis- 
carded as an impediment, for with the slates more conveniently 
placed in pairs, and pencil tips in their place, I was ready when 
the signal of writing began, to be quite responsible that my grip 
of one-half of the slate frames was much stronger than that of 
a rubber-band ; and better able to keep the frames in a firm and 
unshifting state of apposition and to continue it until, and even 
during, the reversal of each pair of them ; and prevent all light 
from entering between them. The half hour was nearly 
exhausted before tfys feature was undertaken. 

There was no exchange of views or opinions between the 
medium and myself, for I quite realized that as an instrument 
he was not the primary source of the knowledge I was seeking, 
and likewise was quite aware that my own thought questions 
could be read by such spirits as were expected when the con- 
ditions at the moment were favorable. I passively waited with 
confidence what I expected would soon be made manifest; and 
at the same time realized that the psychic forces and magnetism 




SECOND SITTING— FIRST SLATE 
No. 11— Electra, Guide, Advanced. 
No. 12 — Otelleo, Guide, Advanced. 









k^M ,. x 1 


' *sVf- i-Hs. 


*Tkj ■ ■■ 1 




' V 




4: 5 




k a r 




; k 




; ft ^ 














SECOND SITTING— SECOND SLATE. 

No. 13— Wm. T. Stead, Aider. 

No. 14 — Omar, Guide, Advanced. 




SECOND SITTING— THIRD SL4TE 

No. 15— Prof. James, of Harvard. 
No. 16— Egyptia, Guardian and Guide. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 439 

were being utilized, my own with those of the medium ; and that 
meanwhile the routine of arrangement for the exact order of 
writing was being carried out. Any special interest at the 
moment centered on the intimations I received from Hypatia in 
her first note yesterday, which justified my expectation that a 
portion of my guides would greet me today. Then my pen- 
friend in life and present aider, Wm. T. Stead, wrote yesterday, 
"We shall have more to say tomorrow." So I expected that he 
would prove true to his promise at th ( is sitting. Of other friends 
invited, some of them surely would respond also. And, per- 
adventure, opportunity presenting, other one or two unexpected 
might also write. And very naturally as the minutes sped away 
my expectant interest increased. 

Of a sudden the writing began, and the medium and myself 
grabbed each our own end of the slates and held them tightly 
and securely till tap, signifying slate full ; and being more famil- 
iar with the rapid turn, I occasioned no delay. The rapidity 
seemed to accelerate ; tap again and both slates down ; and the 
second pair were in hand in an automatic action, with another 
tap and reversal, followed in a few seconds by a tap, and both 
slates down. Silence followed, as no signal was given. Time, 
three minutes, and four slates written on. 

I spread the four slates out in their proper order and found 
but eight signatures ; and glancing rapidly I saw that these were 
names on the invitation list, and so informed Mr. Keeler, who 
made no response. 

I wrapped up the slates and said my next assignment is five 
o'clock, which will soon find me here again. 

When I reached my lodgings and placed my slates again in 
proper order, I found that my first guest to respond was No. 14 
on the invitation list of those Hypatia so kindly notified at my 
request and this was Electra, a guide who first materialized for 
and conversed with me in the year 1894, and several times since ; 
and has privately sang for me through trumpets; and has 
appeared publicly at seances of three different materializing 
mediums. She is now and will continue to be closely associated 
with me in my work. 



440 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

The next in this list, and No. 12 in the original one, is Otelleo, 
who first materialized and made himself known to me on the 
occasion referred to in the book, when Hypatia, at a seance in 
Lily Dale, convinced and converted "May" to a knowledge of 
the truth that spirits can and do commune with mortals. He is 
a member of a powerful band of spirits, and will be heard from 
in the future. He wrote hjs greetings in his native language, 
and in red color, but gave, subsequently, the English translation. 
He wrote in English through the "Human-Psychio-Telephone," 
as will be seen in Chapter XXXI. 

The next to write at this sitting was Wm. T. Stead, who wrote 
yesterday promising that he would have more to say, and he by 
writing now fulfils that promise. 

Omar, who next follows, writes his message in green on the 
slate. He is also one of the guides associated with Otelleo in 
the spirit band. 

The next in order of writing is Prof. James of Harvard Uni- 
versity, who refers to the trouble I described in the narrative, 
which reference in the slate writing becomes interesting in view 
of existing circumstances. This note was written as will be 
noted on my return from the woods where I had suffered. 

No. 16, the next after the professor, was Egyptia, the second 
on the invitation list. She is one of my guides, and claims to 
have been my guardian spirit from the moment of my birth. 
She has promised to write me her own earthly history as an 
Egyptian princess. Her materialization at London, Ontario, in 
the MacRoberts home in 1894 was her first for me, and the 
first one of all my guides. She has presented at all such seances 
as I have attended since that date and hence oftener than any 
other guide except Hypatia, who was present at a seance with 
a private lady psychic when none of the other guides appeared. 
She has written through an automatic writer's hand. She has 
talked with me through trumpets and has also sang through 
trumpets many times when I was alone. I have had many con- 
versations with her, and tested her as to dates and events in my 
personal history from boyhood up ; and she convinced me of the 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 441 

correctness of her claim from the accuracy of the information 
in her replies to each and every question of fact regarding sundry 
events of my life. Refer back to early chapters for her first 
appearance and statements. Her writing on the slate was a slight 
shade of green color. Her message "Co-operation," and that 
applies all the time, and all along my life's journey, as well as 
the present time; but some day my readers are likely to hear 
more about my guides, and probably many will both see and 
hear them, for there is a new and better time coming for all 
seekers after this truth. 

The next two numbers on the slate are from my wife and 
daughter, whose communications have appeared throughout the 
book, and are chiefly of the home kind, full of affection, which 
proffers no feature of special interest to readers. For sixteen 
long years my wife was in opposition to me on orthodox views ; 
but the last four years of her earth life she became an associate 
with me in psychical research, and was converted to spiritual 
knowledge by Hypatia. Her history since passing over is to be 
found on the pages all through. Read Chapter XII regarding 
my wife and myseif having a mutual agreement; also Chapter 
XXIX, written for the book by her, through the "Human- 
Psychic-Telephone," since passing to spirit realm. 

My daughter, who also wrote on the slate independently, has 
come to me through every open door. She will long be remem- 
bered by a large circle of sitters in a materializing seance at 
J. B. Jonson's, Toledo, on the occasion of her appearance, and 
singing all through of the anthem, "Holy, Holy, Holy, Lord God, 
etc., etc.," while in her transient body. 

Both my wife and daughter, when writing me, but not for 
publicity, do so as any wife or daughter in earth life would write 
to husband or father when not for publicity; that is, they do 
not when writing private messages maintain the same degree 
of reserve, but display a natural affection. 

I am not photo-engraving nor making public what appears on 
their slates, because their slates are not for publication ; but what 
is on them is written by them, and that I am sure of. 



442 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

Independent Slate Writing. 
My Third Sitting. 

My third and final sitting began promptly at 5 p.m., 27th 
August, 1917, with conditions, the period of waiting, and the 
routine similar to those of the two preceding sittings. Time of 
the writing two minutes. 

When the writing was finished, the medium with a pencil wrote 
on a slate, "The friends you expected have all written for you." 
This was then read from the slate by Mr. Keeler to me. 

When I enquired how he knew that, his reply was, "It was 
spoken in my ear." (Clairaudience.) 

He then added voluntarily, "It is wonderful that everyone of 
the twenty you asked for came and* wrote. I do not remember 
ever having such an experience before." 

The foregoing admission made by the medium counter- 
balanced all the effects of his discouraging remarks, when I was 
seeking on the first occasion to secure the three assignments of 
sittings. He will, however, probably understand, if he reads 
this, that with me, at the very time of our parley, it was a fore- 
gone conclusion, that I would have the three sittings I asked for, 
and will by now understand why. 

However I wrapped up my slates in paper, bid him respectful 
"good bye" and returned to my lodgings with a realization, that 
my desires were entirely satisfied. 

My Final Notes and Comments. 

Readers will remember the fact already recorded that I added 
three names to those in my original packet. One of the three 
wrote at my first sitting, the remaining two did not write at all 
at any sitting, for which there may have been a good reason ; 
but in their stead other two wrote, from whom I had never 
heard before through any medium. They wrote and it appears 
on the first slate of the four made use of at my third sitting; 
and these are numbered in their order of writing, as 19 and 20. 
The former bore the brief greeting, "Votre Sincere et Fidele — 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 443 

Josephine Le Reine." The latter note read: "I very much Sir, 
admire your book. I should like a copy of it. Francisco I. 
Madero, President of Mexico." [Madero must have read my 
manuscript for the book as it lay on the office table, at the very 
time, awaiting a future transfer to the printer, for I did not 
carry it with me to Lily Dale. My guide, my wife, Frederick 
Myers, Wm. T. Stead and others I know have done so, and I 
have often proved their ability in this respect. As examples, 
Hypatia must either have read my request to her, while I was 
writing and folding the papers containing the names of my 
invited guests, or afterwards in the envelope containing it in 
my pocket for nearly a week ; or thirdly by mind reading. In 
the case of my wife she has told me through a trumpet exactly 
what I wrote, and what she read, while it lay on my table. Again 
in the case of Wm. T. Stead this also occurred, when sitting with 
a trumpet medium in New York State (Mrs. B., now in spirit 
sphere) I 'had some written questions in my pocket, to ask him, 
and was taking them out to spread them open where he could 
see and answer them, without my asking them vocally. While 
doing so he said, "Friend King, keep them in your pocket ; I can 
read them there" — and proceeded to answer them. Frederick 
Myers once informed me through a writing psychic that while 
I was revising my manuscript for the book he was with me much 
of the time and was therefore familiar with its contents.] 

The third message on my slate read, "You shall have the help 
from Edward and me, you desire. — Queen Victoria." 

This particular slate cannot be reproduced here. The lettering 
in the lines has been accidentally blurred, and hence would not 
come out in the photographing process, and is withheld. 

Both King Edward and Queen Victoria, however, have written 
to me through "The Human-Psychic-Telephone," the latter several 
times. See Chapter XXXI and XXXIV. While she has also 
spoken through a trumpet in an occult seance in Toronto when 
six Toronto people were present, including myself ; and there gave 
as one of three reasons for her attendance that evening, as printed 
on page 103 of a report written by the publisher thereof and 



444 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

reads : "and also to say that I have given confirmatory evidence 
more than once, to Dr. King for his book.' , Etc. 

No. 22 on the slate, which is No. 3 on the invitation list comes 
on the second slate at this the third sitting, being a greeting from 
the most ancient of all my guides Asia (so named by me) of 
prehistoric times; whose previous writings in English language 
through "The Human-Psychic-Telephone," can be found in 
Chapter XXXI ; and on a flyleaf at the front of the book. The 
slate writing is a greeting in his native writing but now extinct. 
He will himself give an English translation of it, for he can 
speak and write in that language, but wished to gratify my 
desire for a specimen of his native language and writing. He 
was a priest of high order of a church and religion that nowhere 
has longer existence. From what he has told me, he must have 
been a great seer in nis time. When he is fully materialized 
he stands about 9 feet 6 inches tall. New revelations are promised 
from him in the near future. 

No. 23 on the slate ( is the third one written by my pen friend 
in life, and present aider Wm. T. Stead. He wrote for me at 
each sitting, making the record effort. I will a little further on, 
again refer to the writing and to him. 

On the third slate of the third ser ( ies is the second writing by 
Hypatia, this time in Greek. Here Prof. S. of Toronto will find 
Hypatia's response to my request, where I, on the first page of 
the request, referred to a desire expressed by the Professor on 
one occasion. I also secured from her a day later, her own 
English translation of it. Greek professors will here find a good 
test. The original over her own signature in photograving is 
reproduced here along with others. (Her translation is retained 
by me. Prof. S. or any professor of Greek as of Hypatia's time 
can readily translate it, and thus establish the fact of her being the 
personality of that period). 

The next writer is Cleopatra, another guide. She makes a clear 
and definite statement on 27th August, 1917. Keep the statement 
in mind. 

My son by my first wife follows Cleopatra, 



■y **$&**■>■ 




THIRD SITTING— SECOND SLATE. 

No. 22 — Asia, Ancient Guide (Prehistoric) 

No. 23— Wm. T. Stead. 




THIRD SITTING— THIRD SLATE. 

No. 24— Hypatia, Chief Guide (Second Time). 
No. 25 — Cleopatra, a Guide and Aider. 




THIRD SITTING— FOURTH SLATE. 
No. 26— G. H. S. King, Author's Son. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 445 

No. 26. This is the last of the independent slate writings and 
it is that of my son. He was the most recent of all the writers 
to pass into the realm of spirit. He lived in the mundane sphere 
until he passed his fiftieth year. He had a good education, and 
possessed natural gifts for drawing, painting and music ; and for 
many years was a deep student of the Bible, and well versed in 
every part of the Scripture. He was a man of bright intellect, 
but was greatly held in check, in all his undertakings by an 
infirmity (epilepsy). He loved controversy, but more for his 
love of reaching the truth. His belief was that at the death and 
burial of the body, the soul or spirit begins a deep sleep, and so 
continues until the general resurrection day ; when he would 
arise and with a vast multitude be present on the great Judgment 
Day, when the few, of all who had ever lived on the earth, would 
ascend to a new and everlasting life, while the many (all the 
remainder) would be earth-bound and sleep eternally. He did 
not believe in a Hell according to the orthodox view of it. 

He also believed that I his own father was losing my reason, 
which he considered was good evidence of insanity, without any 
doubt in his mind, and which he sincerely deplored; and as 
evidence of that condition, often referred to my attitude regarding 
spiritual philosophy, together with the accounts that I gave of 
seeing, hearing and conversing with the spirits of those who had 
once been men on earth as we are today. 

Finally all controversy between us ceased, as he passed out 
of his carnate body, on 14th November, 1916, and his mortal 
remains were deposited in a grave in one of the city cemeteries, 
there to lie until nature disintegrates it into earth elements. 

My son did not realize his candid, honest belief and his faith 
was not justified in regard to it, for he entered not upon his long 
sleep 'till Gabriel's trumpet should sound to awaken him; but 
meeting his mother and other loved ones, who were awaiting him 
in spirit, was welcomed by them, as he has since told me and 
others through a trumpet ; and so was made to realize that there 
is no death for the spirit; and that life in the spirit realm ,is as 
natural to those there, as earth life is to mortals here. He also 



446 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

learned that he like them could pass through any door that was 
opened to him by those he left behind in the earth sphere, and 
commune with them ( in a voice audible to their ear; so he was 
permitted to speak through one of the identical trumpets that 
these relatives had themselves spoken through (Mrs. Etta 
Wriedt's) ; and which while on earth — as many others still do — 
he considered impossible ; but when assured that it was true, 
he also would try. On January 7th, 1917, his spirit, or rather 
himself as a spirit Ego came to me while I was sitting with the 
trumpet alone, though I had expected his wife to join me at 
that time. 

One of the very first voices to greet me said : "Well, father, 
this is Herbie speaking. Mollie was early called away to her 
brother's home in the country, as there is sickness there. The 
sickness is not serious, and she will return and meet you here 
at a future sitting. I want to tell you that I am quite right now, 
and have no trouble like I had so many years. The funeral was 
appropriate, the flowers beautiful, and my body in a good new 
wooden overcoat/' (He was in earth life humorous.) His 
wife had gone unexpectedly. She returned and joined me, at 
a future sitting twenty days later. She met and conversed with 
her spirit husband, and he with each of us. All three conversed 
with each other as naturally as jin the home. This time he also 
alluded to the funeral and service in his former home ; as well 
as to his former opposition to my views, and to what I claimed 
I had proven true. He would try and make amend for the past ; 
and would come through any open door, when opportunity 
offered. But in doing so he would not frighten "Mollie" in the 
home by his coming, as he had done so many times during his 
infirmity (epileptic convulsions). His reference was in a 
humorous tone, meaning, "as a ghost visiting." He thanked her 
for all her kindness and patience with him. 

During the same month I attended a private circle of a few 
friends, with Mrs. Wridt, trumpet medium present, when my 
son through the trumpet announced his presence, and was wel- 
comed ; and while present aided a gentleman sitter to solve a 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 447 

difficulty he had experienced recently with regard to the absence 
of a chemical he needed, but had been unable to secure on account 
of the war. His problem was solved by the a ( id of my son, on 
that occasion. All the members of the circle heard every word 
that was spoken. 

Having a knowledge of the truth of spirit return and com- 
munion ; and wishing to convey it to others, I included the name 
of my son in the invitation list of twenty, that more evidence, 
through another phase of mediums'hip, would corroborate or 
discredit the evidence I give above, as writing independently of 
a psychic's hand on a slate in a room w ( ith doors and windows 
open, and the sun shining in. He came as I expected, and so did 
the whole twenty ; and what my son wrote is reproduced here 
by photoengraving and with others on other pages of this book 
will stand inspection everywhere. 

Do I hear some skeptic father question me, "How do you really 
know that writer to be your son?" I answer, at the trumpet 
seance, held in the dark, I knew his voice, his manner of express- 
ing himself when talking about something that had transpired ; 
when his wife had gone, of whom he spoke as he always addressed 
her in the home ; not only where, but why she had gone to her 
relatives in the country; when she would return and meet me, 
and we three would converse together; the whole of which was 
corroborated at another sitting with his wife present. Then 
again in the case of the independent slate writing in the light, 
he corroborated some of the identical things he conversed about 
at the trumpet seance ; and again wrote of his wife "Mollie," 
as he had spoken of her on the former occasion. Again his writ- 
ing I consider is a fac-simile of that in life, and quite as natural 
to me- as his face was. The style of it and the manner of 
expressing himself, interlarded with humor, as familiar as can 
be. Dependent on more than one phase, by corroboration through 
several, one cannot but reach a conclusion with pro and con effort 
or reasoning where all doubt is excluded. 

Let me ask any father or any intelligent man, How do you 
know any friend or relative at any time or place? Is it not by 



448 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

seeing, hearing and conversing with him or her? Yes and a 
son's letter from the front in wartime is by the writing recog- 
nized as his and his only, for no two people write exactly alike, 
each is by a different personality. But suppose you entertained 
doubt, how long would you be in clearing up that doubt? Con- 
firmative and corroborative evidence through trumpet, by mani- 
festation of the earthly expression, as ( in a materializing seance ; 
or on slate at different times and in different places, one or 
another establishes a fact. If you shut your eyes, or are standing 
in the dark, and listen, while your relative or friend speaks, 
at that moment you know who it is ; just as a dog knows his 
master's voice, and face, no matter how many other men are 
about. Evidence confirming or corroborating is readily secured 
through many different phases. 

I have known my son more than fifty years. His voice alone, 
or .. his writing alone are equally conclusively convincing 
to me. 

Throughout this book there exists a veritable cobweb of 
corroborative evidence in support of nearly every personality 
named ; for instance in the case of Wm. T. Stead alone, for 
hitherto he had come to me through s,ix or seven different phases 
of mediumship ; and more than a dozen mediums ; and now he 
comes through another door I have opened for him, the phase of 
independent slate writing, and writes at three different sittings. 
Ye, who knew Wm. T. Stead in earthly life give answer. Is not 
that fact of forging ahead at every opportunity ; and his effort to 
make doubly sure of something he wishes to attain, characteristics 
of the man? He was ,in earth life a pen-friend of mine, and 
well I knew his signature, and he wants the readers to know he 
is yet. But in spirit life his first efforts through automatic writer's 
hand, were not generally accepted as his own — though later 
ones were convincing. This was doubtless ow ( ing to the rhyming 
tendency, or the psychic influence, which every medium pos- 
sesses, of modifying in some degree, more or less the tone, as does 
every musical instrument, betray by its tone what instrument 
it is recognized to be, even in the simplest melody rendered. 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 449 

Though in the first instance with Wm. T. Stead the thoughts 
as conveyed were evidential to me of his own personality. 

However Stead wanted to offer still more proof and so 
accepted my invitation to come again and meet me, where he 
could write without the aid of a psychic's hand independently 
on a slate. He likewise wants me to know, and the readers also, 
that he knows something about my psychic pen, which to me is 
confirmatory evidence. If you are familiar with his writing as a 
mortal, what are your thoughts about his letter forming, his 
strokes and his dots, are they not readily recognizable? He is in 
a pleasant mood, and writing rapidly. 

To me the first effort of my son, Wm. T. Stead and others to 
commune with me by independent slate writing Js a success. 

But have you another question in your mind to ask, and is it 
this ? "Can you, the recipient of these messages, be sure that the 
writers were really your son, your friend Stead, and the other 
friends?" 

Again I answer you, quite as sure as you are of the senders 
of the messages you receive and are signed by any relative, friend 
or business man, by aid of your mediums of the phase of cable- 
grams, phase of telegrams, phase of Marconigrams, phase of 
phonograms, or the more universal phase of government postal 
delivery of letters. 

I cannot hope to convince all others. Each and all who follow 
my example will have to gain results for themselves. 

That we can communicate with those in the spheres, or next 
state of continued existence, I have convinced myself by facts 
and by proofs, that it is so, for I have opened doors of com- 
munication, and angels have come, and continue to come through 
them to me. You may follow my example and prove it to your 
own satisfaction. The friends will come to all who open the door 
and welcome them — not otherwise. 

The last door I opened for twenty of them I most immediately 
desired to receive greetings from or messages ; and I publish to 
the world the results I obtained. The last door I opened during 
the 26th and 27th days of August, 1917, was the independent 



450 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 

slate writing door; and these added pages of the book contain 
the evidence of what I got, together w ; ith full particulars in every 
detail from first to last of how I succeeded. 

John S. King. 

Summary of the Independent Slate Writing. 

On August 21st, p. m., 1917, I made a written request to my 
Chief Guide Hypatia to invite each spirit on a submitted written 
list of twenty names of relatives, friends, guides and exalted 
spirits, whom I had selected from hundreds from whom I had 
already heard, to write greetings or messages to me while at 
Lily Dale, and to do so on slates independently of a psychic's 
hand. These papers I la,id on my office desk for her to read. 

Five days later, at 2.30 p. m., 26th August, 1917, in my pres- 
ence and on new slates, cleaned and examined by me, the writing 
at my first seance was completed. My sitting began at 2 p. m. 

The second and third sittings began, the one at 3 p. m. and the 
other at 5 p. m. on 27th August, 1917. 

At 5.30 p. m., the close of my third sitting, all of the original 
20 invited had complied with my request, as well as three addi- 
tional spirit friends. 

Each of the three settings lasted 30 minutes. 

The actual time occupied in writing by the 23 writers, who 
wrote 26 messages or greetings, was ten minutes in all the three 
sittings; at the first 5 minutes, at the second 3 minutes, and at 
the third 2 minutes. 

All the writings were on one side only of the slates; and thir- 
teen slates were required. 

Everyone of the twenty invited responded. 

Of those who wrote separately there were 18 

Two wrote a note jointly, making 1 

One of the added three names while there wrote 1 

Two who never before communed, each wrote 2 

Wm. T. Stead wrote at each sitting, extra two 2 

My Guide wrote one message in English and one in Greek. . 1 



DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 451 

My Daughter wrote twice, one extra 1 

Total writings 26 

Total time of writing in minutes 10 

Total different writers 23 

Average time of each of the twenty-six writings, in seconds 23^ 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Nov. 2004 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



